# Quality Assurance
Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems

Volume II

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program

### Page Intentionally Left Blank

### EPA-454/B-13-003 May, 2013



# QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems

Volume II

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards Air Quality Assessment Division RTP, NC 27711QA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### iv 

## Contents

Section Page Revision Date

Contents iv 

### 0 05/13
Figures vi 

### 0 05/13

Tables vii 

### 0
Acknowledgments viii 

### 0 05/13
Acronyms and Abbreviations ix 

### 0 05/13

0. Introduction

0.1 Intent of the Handbook 0.2 Use of Terms Shall, Must, Should, May

0.3 Use of Footnotes

0.4 Handbook Review and Distribution 1/3

2/3

2/3

2/3 

### 0 05/13

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

1. Program Background 1.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network 1.2 The EPA Quality System Requirements 1.3 The Ambient Air Monitoring Program Quality System 1/11

6/11

8/11 

### 0 05/13

2. Program Organization 2.1 Organization Responsibilities

2.2 Lines of Communication 2.3 Quality Assurance Workgroups 1/8

6/8

7/8 

### 0 05/13

3. Data Qua lity Objectives 3.1 The DQO Process 3.2 Ambient Air Quality DQOs 3.2 Measurement Quality Objectives 3/6

4/6

5/6 

### 0 05/13

4. Personnel Qualification and Training 4.1 Personnel Qualifications 4.2 Training 1/3

2/3 

### 0 05/13

5. Documentation and Records 5.1 Management and Organization

5.2 Site Information 5.3 Environmental Data Operations

5.4 Raw Data 5.5 Data Reporting 5.6 Data Management 5.7 Quality Assurance 2/8

2/8

3/8

7/8

7/8

8/8

8/8 

### 0 05/13

MEASUREMENT ACQUISITION 6. Monitoring Network Design 6.1 Monitoring Objectives and Spatial Scales 6.2 Monitoring Site Location 6.3 Minimum Network Requirements 6.5 Operating Schedules 5/16

7/16

13/16

16/16 

### 0 05/13

7. Sampling Methods

7.1 Monitor Placement

7.2 Environmental Control 7.3 Sampling Probes and Manifolds 1/16

2/16

5/16 

### 0 05/13

7.4 Reference/Equivalent and Approved Regional Methods 12/16
8. Sample Handling and Custody 8.1 Sample Handling 8.2 Chain of Custody 2/7

5/7 

### 0 05/13

9. Analytical Methods 9.1 Good Laboratory Practices 9.2 Laboratory Activities 2/3

3/3 05/13QA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### v Section Page Revision Date

10. Quality Control 10.1 The Quality Control Process 10.2 QC Activity Areas 10.3 Internal vs. External Quality Control 10.4 CFR Related Quality Control Samples 10.5 Use of Computers for Quality Control 1/12

3/12

4/12

7/12

11/12 

### 0 05/13

11. Instrument/Equipment Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance

11.1 Instrumentation

11.2 Preventative Maintenance 1/7

4/7 

### 0 05/13

12. Calibration 12.1 Calibration Standards and Reagents 12.2 Multi-point Verifications/Calibrations 12.3 Frequency of Calibration and Analyzer Adjustment 12.4 Adjustment to Analyzers 12.5 Data Reduction using Calibration Information

12.6 Validation of Ambient Data 3/10

6/10

8/10

8/10

10/10

10/10 

### 0 05/13

13 Inspection/Acceptance for Supplies and Consumables 13.1 Supplies Management 13.2 Standards and Reagents

13.3 Volumetric Glassware 13.4 Sample Containers 13.5 Particulate Sampling Filters 13.6 Field Supplies 1/4

2/4

2/4

3/4

3/4

4/4 

### 0 05/13

14. Data Acquisition and Management 14.1 Data Acquisition 14.2 Data Transfer-Public Reporting 14.3 Data Transfer-Reporting to External Data Bases 14.4 Data Management 3/15

8/15

10/15

15/15 

### 0 05/13

ASSESSMENT/OVERSIGHT

15. Assessment and Corrective Action

15.1 Network Reviews

15.2 Performance Evaluations 15.3 Technical Systems Audits 15.4 Data Quality Assessments 1/14

4/14

9/14

14/14 

### 0 05/13

16. Reports to Management 16.1 Guidelines for Preparation of Reports to Management 2/4 

### 0 05/13

DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY

17

. Data Review, Verification, Validation

17.1 Data Review Methods

17.2 Data Verification Methods

17.3 Data Validation Methods 3/10

5/10

5/10 

### 0 05/13

18. Reconciliation with Data Quality Objectives 18.1 Five Steps of the DQA Process 2/11 

### 0 05/13

APPENDICES A. National Monitoring Program Fact Sheets B: Ambient Air Monitoring QA Information and Web Addresses C: Using the Graded Approach for the Development of QMPs and QAPPs D: Measurement Quality Objectives and Validation Templates E: Characteristics of Spatial Scales Related to Each Pollutant F: Sample Manifold Design for Precursor Gas Monitoring G: Example Procedure for Calibrating Data Acquisition System

H: Audit Information I: Example of Reports to Management 11

4

7

48

9

13

3

48

25 

### 0 05/13QA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### vi 

## Figures

Number Title Section/Page 1.1 Ambient air quality monitoring process 1/1 1.2 Hierarchy of quality system development 1/6 1.3 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring QA Program 1/8 2.1 Program organization and lines of communication 2/1 2.2 Relationship of monitored pollutants to site, monitoring organizations and primary quality assurance organizations 2/4

3.1 Effect of positive bias on the annual average estimate resulting in a false rejection error 3/1

3.2 Effect of negative bias on the annu al average estimate resulting in a false

acceptance error 3/1

6.1 Wind rose pattern 6/9 6.2 Sampling schedule based on ratio to the 24-hour PM 10 NAAQS 6/14 7.1 Example design for shelter 7/3 7.2 Individual ample line design for air monitoring 7/5 7.3 Views of sampling inlets 7/6 7.4 Position of calibration line in sampling manifold 7/7 7.5 Acceptable areas for PM 10 and PM 2.5 micro, middle, neighborhood, and urban samplers except for microscale canyon sites 7/9

7.6 Optical mounting platform 7/10 7.7 Examples of contaminated tubing and manifolds needing more frequent

maintenance 7/11

8.1 Example sample label 8/3 8.2 Example field COC form 8/6 8.3 Example laboratory COC form 8/7 10.1 QC samples for PM 2.5 placed at various stages of measurement process 10/2 10.2 Historical example of calibration, span and 1 point QC 10/9 10.3 An example approach for selecting QC check ranges 10/10 10.4 Control chart example 10/11

12.1 DASC Calibration Tool 12/7

14.1 DAS data flow 14/3 14.2 Flow of data from gas analyzers to final reporting 14/4 15.1 Definition of independent assessment 15/7

15.2 Pre-Audit activities 15/9

15.3 On-Site audit activities 15/11 15.4 Audit finding form 15/12

15.5 Post-audit activities 15/12 15.6 Audit response form 15/13 18.1 DQA in the context of data life cycle 18/2 18.2 Example DASC Tool 18/10 18.3 Example Box and Whisker Plot 18/11QA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### vii 

## Tables

Number Title Section/Page 4-1 Monitoring Functions the Need Some Level of Staffing or Expertise 4/1 4-2 Suggested Sequence of Core QA Related Ambient Air Training Courses ... 4/3 5-1 Types of Information the Should be Retained Through Document Control 5/1 6-1 Relationship Among Monitoring Objectives and Scale of Representativeness 6/6 6-2 Summary of Spatial Scales for SLAMS, NCore, PAMS, and Open Path Sites 6/6 6-3 Relationships of Topography, Air Flow, and Monitoring Site Selection 6/10 6-4 Site Descriptions of PAMS Monitoring Sites 6/11 6-5 Completeness Goals for Ambient Monitoring Data 6/15 7-1 Monitoring Station Categories Relating to Sample Site Placement 7/2

7-2 Environment Control Parameters 7/4 7-3 Summary of Probe and Monitoring Path Siting Criteria 7/8 7-4 Minimum Separation Distance between Road and Sampling Probes... 7/9 7-5 Performance Specifications for Automated Methods 7/14 9-1 Acceptable Analytical Methods 9/1 10-1 QC Samples Used in Various Ambient Air Monitoring Programs 10/5

10-2 PM 2.5 Field and Lab QC Checks 10/6 10-3 Ambient Air Monitoring Measurement Quality Samples 10/7 11-1 Routine Operation Checks 11/6 12-1 Instrumentation and Devices Requiring Calibration and Certifications 12/6 14-1 AQS Data Reporting Requirements 14/11 14-2 AQS Agency Roles 14/12 14-3 NCore Information Technology Performance Needs 14/14 15-1 National Performance Evaluation Activities Performed by EPA 15/5 15-2 Suggested Elements of an Audit Plan 15/10 16-1 Types of QA Reports to Management 16/2 16-2 Sources of Information for Preparing Reports to Management 16/2 16-3 Presentation Methods for Use in Reports to Management 16/3 18-1 Summary of Violations of DQO Assumptions 18/6 18-2 Weights for Estimating Three-Year Bias and Precision 18/6 18-3 Summary of Bias and Precision 18/9QA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### viii 

## Acknowledgments

This QA Hand Book is the product of the combined e fforts of the EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, the EPA Regional Offices, and the State, Tribal and Local monitoring organizations. The development and review of the material found in this document was accomplished through the activities of the QA Strategy Workgroup. The following in dividuals are acknowledged for their contributions.

State, Tribal and Local Organizations

Amanda Hughes, Andy Clifton, Andy Johnson, An na Kelley, Arun Roychowdhury, Barb Regynski, Ben Davis, Bradley Webber, Brian Lee, Bryan Paris, Ch arles Pearson, Ceresa Stewart, Cindy Wike, Clyde Sharp, David Johnson, Dennis Fenlon, Don Gourley, Donovan Rafferty, Edwin Gluth, Erik Saganic, Glenn Gehring, Hien Tran, Hugh Tom, Jim Conner, Joseph Ugorowski , James Jordan, Jeff Wasson ,Jeremy Hardin, Jason Low, John Haus, Joette Steg er, Kirit Dalal, Ken Cowen, Kent Curtis, Kevin Watts, Leonard Marine, Larry Taylor, Leroy Williams , Merrin Wright, Mary Kay M. Clark, Melinda Ronca-Battista, Melvin Schuchardt, Mickey Palmer, Mi ke Draper, Mike Hamdan, Nathan Stroup, Nydia Burdick, Patti DeLaCruz, Paul Lang, Paul Sanborn, Rayna Broadway, Richard Heffern, Ritchie Scott , Robert Franicevich, Robert Olson, Ryan Callison, Scott Reynolds, Stephanie McCarthy, Stephen Hall, Steve Miller, Susan Kilmer, Susan Selby, Tammy Eagan, Tom Koehler, Thomas McGrath, Tyler Muxworthy, Sandra Wardwell, Will Wetherell, Yousaf Hameed

EPA Regions

Region 1 Chris St.Germain, Mary Jane Cuzzupe, Peter Kahn, Robert Judge 2 Avraham Teitz, Mark Winter, Mustafa Mustafa, 3 Kia Hence, Loretta Hyden 4 Danny France, Doug Jager, Richard Guillot 5 Anthony Ross, Bilal Qazzaz, Basim Dihu, Scott Hamilton, 6 Trisha Curran, Kara Allen, John Lay 7 James Regehr, Leland Grooms, Michael Davis, Thien Bui 8 Joe Delwiche, Michael Copeland, Richard Payton 9 Elfego Felix, Katherine Hoag, Gwen Yoshimura, Mathew Plate, Michael Flagg, Meredith Kurpius, Roseanne Sakamoto,

10 Chris Hall

Office of Radiation and Indoor Air

Montgomery, AL - Eric Boswell, Jewell Smiley, Steve Taylor Las Vegas, NV - Emilio Braganza, Jeff Lantz

Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards

Dennis Mikel, Dennis Crumpler, Greg Noah, Joann Ri ce, Jonathan Miller, Lewis Weinstock, Mark Shanis, Solomon Ricks, Tim Hanley, Joseph ElkinsQA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### ix 

## Acronyms and Abbreviations

AAMG Ambient Air Monitoring Group APTI Air Pollution Training Institute ADQ audit of data quality AMTIC Ambient Monitoring Technical Information Center

ANSI American National Standards Institute AQAD Air Quality Assessment Division AQI Air Quality Index AQS Air Quality System ARM approved regional method ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ASQ American Society for Quality AWMA Air and Waste Management Association

CAA Clean Air Act

CFR Code of Federal Regulations

CL confidence limit

CBSA core-based statistical area CMSA combined metropolitan statistical area CMZ community monitoring zone COC chain of custody CPU central processing unit

CSA combined statistical area CSN PM2.5 Chemical Speciation Network

CRM certified reference material

CV coefficient of variation DAS data acquisition system

DASC Data Assessment Statistical Calculator

DC direct current DQA data quality assessment DOP digital aerosol photometer DQI data quality indicators DQOs data quality objectives EDO environmental data operation EDERF energy dispersive x-ray flouresence EPA Environmental Protection Agency FEM federal equivalent method

FR flow rate

FRM federal reference method FTIR fourier transform infrared (spectroscopy) GC/MS gas chromatography mass spectrometry GIS geographical information systems GLP good laboratory practice GMIS gas manufactures internal standards HAP hazardous air pollutants HC hydrocarbon HPLC high performance liquid chromatography HVAC heating, ventilating and air conditioning ICP inductively coupled plasma IMPROVE Interagency Monitoring of Protected Visual Environments IT information technology

LDL lower detectable limit LIMS` laboratory information management systems

MDL method detection limit

MFC mass flow controlQA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### x Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)

MPA monitoring planning area MQAG Monitoring and Quality Assurance Group MQOs measurement quality objectives MSA Metropolitan Statistical Area NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standards NACAA National Association of Clean Air Agencies

NATTS National Air Toxics Trends Sites NECTA New England city and town area NEIC National Enforcement Investigations Center

NTAA National Tribal Air Association

NTEC National Tribal Environmental Council

NCore National Core Network NERL National Environmental Research Laboratory NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NF National Formulary

NPS National Park Service NPAP National Performance Audit Program NPEP National Performance Evaluation Program NOAA National Oceanic Atmospheric Administration

NTRM NIST traceable reference material OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards OMB Office of Management and Budget ORD Office of Research and Development

ORIA Office of Radiation and Indoor Air P&A precision and accuracy PAMS Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations PDFID Cryogenic Preconcentration and Direct Flame Ionization Detection PC personal computer PE performance evaluation

PEP PM 2.5 Performance Evaluation Program PBMS performance based measurement system ppb part per billion ppm part per million PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration PQAO primary quality assurance organization PT proficiency test PWD primary wind direction QA quality assurance QA/QC quality assurance/quality control QAARWP quality assurance annua l report and work plan QAD EPA Quality Assurance Division QAM quality assurance manager QAO quality assurance officer QAPP quality assurance project plan QMP quality management plan RPO regional planning organization

RSD relative standard deviation

SD standard deviation SIPS State Implementation Plans SLAMS state and local monitoring stations SOP standard operating procedure SPMS special purpose monitoring stations

SRM standard reference material SRP standard reference photometerQA Handbook Volume II May, 2013



### xi Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)

TAD technical assistance document TEOM tapered element oscillating microbalance TIP tribal implementation plan TSA technical system audit TSP total suspended particulate TTL transistor-transistor logic

USB universal serial bus USGS U.S. Geological Survey

UTM universal transverse Mercator USP US Pharmacopeial VAC volts of alternating current VOC volatile organic carbonQA Handbook Vol II, Introduction

Revision 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 3 

# 0. Introduction

0.1 Intent of the Handbook

This document is Volume II of a five-volume qua lity assurance (QA) handbook series dedicated to air pollution measurement systems. Volume II is de dicated to the Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program and the data collection activities inherent to that program. This guidance is part of a quality management system designed to en sure that the Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program: (1) provides data of sufficient quality to meet the program’s obj ectives, and (2) is implemented consistently across

the Nation.

The purpose of the Handbook is twofold. First, it provides additional information and guidance on the material covered in the Code of Federal Regula tions (CFR) pertaining to the Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program. Second, the document is intended to assist technical personnel at tribal, state and local monitoring organizations 1 

### develop and implement a quality system for the Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program. A quality system, as defined by The American National Standard-Specifications and Guidelines for Quality Systems for Environmenta l Data Collection and Environmental Technology Programs(ANSI/ASQ E4), 2 

### is:

“a structured and documented management system describing the policies, objectives, principles, organizational authority, respons ibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of an organization for ensuring the quality in its work processes, products, and services. The quality system provides the framework for planning, implementing, and assessing the work performed by the organization and fo r carrying out required quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) activities”.

A monitoring organization’s quality system for th e Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program is described in its quality assurance project plan (QA PP). Therefore, the Handbook has been written in a style similar to a QA project plan as specified in the document EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance Project Plans for Environmental Data Operations (EPA QA/R5) 3 

### . Environmental data operations (EDO) refer to the work performed to obtain, u se, or report information pertaining to natural surroundings and conditions. The information in this Handbook can be used as guidance in the development of detailed mon itoring organization QAPPs.

NOTE: In 2013, while this document was being published, EPA was promulgating a new Data Quality Standard. 

### The new Quality Standard replaces QA/R-5 in its entirety with newer guidance. OAQPS will develop any additional guidance necessary to ensure ambient air monitoring quality systems conform to the new guidance when it is published.

Earlier versions of the Handbook focused on the six cr iteria pollutants monitored at the State and Local Ambient Monitoring Stations (SLAMS) and National Ambient Monitoring Stations (NAMS). In 2006,

the term “NAMS” was discontinued and a new nati onal monitoring concept-the National Ambient Air

1 Monitoring organization will be used throughout the hand book to identify any tribal, state or local organization that is implementing an ambient air monitoring program, esp ecially if they are using the data for comparison to the National Ambient Air Qua lity Standards (NAAQS).

2 http://webstore.ansi.org/RecordDet ail.aspx?sku=ANSI %2fASQ+E4-2004

3 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Introduction

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 3



### Monitoring Strategy- was adopted. Although the focu s will remain on the criteria pollutants, this edition is expanded to cover quality assurance guidance for:

 

### Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS); http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsmain.html ;

 

### Open path monitoring ( http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/longpath.html );

 

### PM 2.5 

### Chemical Speciation Network ( http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/speciepg.html );

 

### National Air Toxics Trends Network (NATTS) http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtoxpg.html ; and

 

### NCore Network ( http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/ncore/index.html )

Due to the dynamic nature of the monitoring ne tworks this Handbook does not supplant the detailed guidance provided by the programs listed above but provides general information and pointers, in the form of hyperlinks, where one can go for more detailed information.



## 0.2 Use of the Terms Shall, Must, Should and May

The intent of this handbook is to provide additi onal guidance on the ambient air monitoring requirements found in the Clean Air Act and 40 CFR Parts 50, 53 and 58. In order to distinguish requirements from guidance, the following terms will be used with consistency.

 shall, must- when the element is a requirement in 

### 40 CFR and the Clean Air Act

 should- when the element is recommended. This term is used when extensive experience in monitoring provides a recommended procedure that would help establish or improve the quality of data or a procedure. The pr ocess that includes the term is not required.

 may- when the element is optional or discretionary . The term also indicates that what is suggested may improve data quality, that it is important to consider, but it is not as important as those that have been suggested using the term “should”.



## NOTE: The material in the Handbook can only reflect the regulation and guidance up to the date the Handbook was published. Regulati ons that change after Handbook publication

cannot be reflected in this document. Theref ore the reader is cautioned to review current regulations when using any gui dance in this document.



## 0.3 Use of Footnotes

This document will make extensive use of internet li nks that will provide the user with access to more detailed information on a particular subject. Due to th e limitations of Adobe, full URL addresses must be provided in order for the links to work. Rather th an clutter the body of the document with long URL addresses, footnotes will be used to direct the interested reader to the correct link.



## 0.4 Handbook Review and Distribution

The information in this Handbook was revised and/ or developed by many of the organizations responsible for implementing the Ambient Air Quality Surveillance Program (see Acknowledgments). It has been peer-reviewed and accepted by these organi zations and serves to promote consistency amongPart I, Introduction

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 3



### the organizations collecting and reporting ambient air data. This Handbook is accessible as a PDF file on the Internet under the AMTIC Homepage: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.html

Recommendations for modifications or revisions are always welcome. Comments should be sent to the appropriate Regional Office Ambient Air Mon itoring QA Contact. The QA Handbook Revision Workgroup will meet twice a year to discu ss any pertinent issues and proposed changes.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 11



# 1.0 Program Background

1.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network

The purpose of this section is to describe the general concepts for establishing the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network. The majority of this material, as well as additional details, can be found in the Clean Air Act (CAA) 1 

### , 40 CFR Parts 50, 53 and 58 2 

### , and their

references.

Between the years 1900 and 1970, the emission of six principal pollutants increased significantly. The principal pollutants, also called criteria pollutants are: particulate matter (PM 10 

### and PM 2.5 

### ), sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide, nitrogen dioxide, ozone, and lead. In 1970 the CAA was signed into law. The CAA and its amendments provide the framework for all pertinent organizations to protect air quality.

40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D requires that monitoring networks be designed for three basic monitoring objectives:

 

### to provide air pollution data to the general public in a timely manner

 

### to support compliance with ambient air quality standards (primary and secondary) and emission strategy development

 

### to support air pollution research studies

In addition, these monitoring networks can also be developed:

 

### to activate emergency control procedures that prevent or alleviate air pollution episodes

 

### to observe pollution trends throughout the region, including non-urban areas

To meet these basic needs, the monitoring networ k may require monitoring sites be located to:

 

### Determine the highest concentration expected to occur in the area covered by the network.

 

### Measure typical concentrations in areas of high population density.

1 http://epa.gov/air/caa/

2 http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/ cfr/cfr-table-search.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 11

 

### Determine the impact of significant sources or source categories on air quality.

 

### Determine background concentration levels.

 

### Determine the extent of regional pollutant tr ansport among populated areas; and in support of secondary standards.

 

### Measure air pollution impacts on visibility, ve getation damage, or welfare-based impacts.

These “site types” will be used during the developmen t of data quality objectives (Section 3). As one reviews the site types, it becomes apparent that it will be rare that individual sites can be located to meet more than two or three types of measurements. Th erefore, monitoring organizations need to choose the sites that are most representative of its priority objective(s).

Through the process of implementing the CAA, seven major categories of monitoring stations or networks that measure the air pollutants have been developed. These networks are described below. In addition, a fact sheet on each network (with the exception of SPMs) can be found in Appendix A

.



### State and Local Air Monitoring Stations (S LAMS) including Tribal Monitoring Stations

The SLAMS consist of a network of monitoring stati ons whose size and distribution is largely determined by the monitoring requirements for NAAQS comparis on and the needs of monitoring organizations to meet their respective tribal/state implementation plan (TIP/SIP) requirements. The TIP/SIPs provide for the implementation, maintenance, and enforcemen t of the national ambient air quality standards (NAAQS) in each air quality control region within a tribe/state. The Handbook is largely devoted to guidance related to the SLAMS network. SLAMS ex clude special purpose monitor (SPM) stations and include NCore, PAMS, and all other State or locally op erated stations that have not been designated as

SPM stations.



### Special Purpose Monitoring Stations (SPMs) 3



### An SPM station means a monitor included in a mon itoring organization’s network has been designated as a special purpose monitor station in its monitoring network plan and in the Air Quality System (AQS) which the agency does not count when showing compliance with the minimum SLAMS monitoring requirements. SPMs:

 provide for special studies needed by the monito ring organizations to support TIPs/SIPs and other air program activities

 are not permanently established and can be adjusted to accommodate changing needs and priorities

 are used to supplement the fixed monitoring ne twork as circumstances require and resources permit

 data must meet all QA, siting and methodology re quirements for SLAMS monitoring, if the data from SPMs is to be used for SIP purposes.

Any SPM data collected by an air monitoring agency using a Federal reference method (FRM), Federal equivalent method (FEM), or approved regional me thod (ARM) must meet these requirements:

 40 CFR Part 58.11, 58.12, and

3 40 CFR Part 58.20QA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 11



###  the QA requirements in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A or an approved alternative to Appendix A to this part

,

 requirements of 40 CFR Part 58.16; for submitting the data collected to AQS, and

 

### submission of an indication to AQS by the mon itoring agency that the SPM reporting data to AQS meets the requirements of Appendices A and E

.



### 40 CFR Part 58.20 provides additional details on the requirements of the SPM and it’s the use of SPM

data.

All data from an SPM using an FRM, FEM, or ARM which has operated for more than 24 months is eligible for comparison to the relevant NAAQS, s ubject to the conditions of § 58.30, unless the air monitoring agency demonstrates that the data ca me from a particular period during which the requirements of appendix A, appendi x C, or appendix E to this part were not met in practice.

If an SPM using an FRM, FEM, or ARM is discontinued within 24 months of start-up, the Administrator will not base a NAAQS violation determination for the PM 2.5 

### or ozone NAAQS solely on data from the

SPM.

If an SPM using an FRM, FEM, or ARM is discontinued within 24 months of start-up, the Administrator will not designate an area as nonattainment for the CO, SO 2 

### , NO 2 

### , or 24-hour PM 10 

### NAAQS solely on

the basis of data from the SPM. Such data are e ligible for use in determinations of whether a nonattainment area has attained one of these NAAQS.

Prior approval from EPA is not required for discontinuance of an SPM.



### Prevention of Significant Dete rioration (PSD) Monitoring 4



### Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) appli es to new major sources or major modifications at existing sources for pollutants where the area the source is located is in attainment or unclassifiable with the National Ambient Air Quality Standard s (NAAQS). It requires the following:

1. installation of the "Best Available Control Technology (BACT)";

2. an air quality analysis;

3. an additional impacts analysis; and

4. public involvement.

Class I areas are areas of special national or regional natural, scenic, recreational, or historic value for which the PSD regulations provide special protection.

The main purpose of the air quality analysis is to demonstrate that new emissions emitted from a proposed major stationary source or major modificati on, in conjunction with other applicable emissions increases and decreases from existing sources, will not cause or contribute to a violation of any applicable NAAQS or PSD increment.

Generally, the analysis will involve (1) an assessment of existing air quality, which may include ambient monitoring data and air quality dispersion modeli ng results, and (2) predictions, using dispersion modeling, of ambient concentrations that will resu lt from the applicant's proposed project and future growth associated with the project. In some c ases it may also require ambient air monitoring.

4 http://www.epa.gov/NSR/psd.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 11



### The QA requirements for monitoring criteria polluta nts at PSD sites are very similar to the QA requirements for monitoring sites used for NAAQS co mpliance. In 2006 EPA combined the Ambient Air QA Requirements in Appendix A with the PSD QA re quirements in Appendix B into Appendix A.

This Handbook is not intended to provide any overall guidance on the PSD program. However, as information is relayed on the ambient air CFR QA requirements, the Handbook will distinguish any differences in the QA requirements between the PSD and ambient air programs. In addition, in 2013 EPA develop some additional guidance re lated to the PSD quality system 5



### PM 2.5 

### Chemical Speciation Network (CSN) 6



### As part of the effort to monitor particulate matte r, EPA monitors and gathers data on the chemical makeup of these particles. EPA established a chemic al speciation network cons isting of approximately 300 monitoring sites. These sites are placed at vari ous SLAMS across the Nation. A portion of these CSN sites will be used to determine, over a period of several years, trends in concentration levels of selected ions, metals, carbon speci es, and organic compounds in PM 2.5



### . Further breakdown on the location or placement of the trends sites requires that approximately 20 of the monitoring sites be placed at existing Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS). The placement of the remaining trends sites will be coordinated by EPA, the regional offices, and the monitoring organizations. Locations will be primarily in or near larger Metropolitan Statistical Areas (MSAs)

. The remaining chemical speciation sites will be used to enhance the require d trends network and to provide information for developing effective TIPs/SIPs.

Although the CSN is intended to complement the SLAM S activities, CSN data will not be used to make

decisions about the attainment or no nattainment of the NAAQS and so PM 2.5 

### mass derived from CSN monitors do not count towards meeting minimum PM 2.5 

### monitoring network requirements. The programmatic objectives of the CSN network are:

 

### annual and seasonal spatial characterization of aerosols;

 

### air quality trends analysis and track ing the progress of control programs;

 

### comparing, aggregating and evaluating the chemical speciation data set to the data collected from the IMPROVE network; and

 

### development of emission control strategies.



### Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS) 7



### Section 182(c)(1) of the 1990 CAA required the Admini strator to promulgate rules for the enhanced monitoring of ozone, oxides of nitrogen (NOx), a nd volatile organic compounds (VOC) to obtain more comprehensive and representative data on ozone air po llution. Immediately follow ing the promulgation of such rules, the affected states/tribes were to co mmence such actions as were necessary to adopt and implement a program to improve ambient monitoring activities and the monitoring of emissions of NOx and VOC. Each TIP/SIP for the affected areas must contain measures to implement the ambient monitoring of such air pollutants. The subsequent revisions to 40 CFR 58 required states to establish Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS) as part of their SIP monitoring networks in ozone nonattainment areas classified as serious, severe, or extreme.

5 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/file s/PSDAppAQATechNote14dec12.pdf

6 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/speciepg.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsmain.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 11



### PAMS will provide an air quality database that will assist air pollution control agencies in evaluating, tracking the progress of, and, if necessary, refining control strategies for attaining the ozone NAAQS.

Ambient concentrations of ozone and ozone precursors will be used to:



###  make attainment/nonattainment decisions



###  aid in tracking VOC and NOx emission inventory reductions



###  better characterize the nature and extent of the ozone problem

 evaluate air quality trends

 provide an improved database for evaluating p hotochemical model performance, especially for future control strategy mid-course corrections as part of the continuing air quality management

process.

 to ensure the implementation of the most cost-effective regulatory controls.

NOTE: As of the publication date of this Handbook, the PAMS Program was undergoing a review with possible revisions to the implemen tation of the program. Those interested in more current guidance on the PAMS program should visit the AMTIC website for more upto-date information.



### National Air Toxic Trends Stations (NATTS) 8



### There are currently 188 hazardous air pollutants (HAPs) or Air Toxics (AT) regulated under the CAA. These pollutants have been associated with a wide variety of adverse health and ecosystem effects. In 1999, EPA finalized the Urban Air Toxics Strategy (UATS) 9 

### . The UATS states that emissions data are needed to quantify the sources of air toxics and thei r impacts and aid in the development of control strategies, while ambient monitoring data are need ed to understand the behavior of air toxics in the atmosphere after they are emitted. Part of this st rategy included the need for toxics monitoring. This monitoring includes:



### The Urban Air Toxics Monitoring Program 10 

### (UATMP) - a program designed to characterize the magnitude and composition of potentially toxic air pollution in, or near, urban locations. The UATMP was initiated by EPA in 1988 as an ex tension of the existing Nonmethane Organic Compounds Program (NMOC) to meet the increasing need for information on air toxics. Over the years, the program has grown in both participation levels and pollutants targeted (EPA, 2009a). The program has allowed for the identification of compounds that are prevalent in ambient air and for participating agencies to screen air samples for concentrations of air toxics that could potentially

result in adverse human health effects.

The National Air Toxics Trends Stations (NATTS) - a program designed to generate long-term

ambient air toxics concentration data in order to evaluate trends. The NATTS network was created to generate long-term ambient air toxics concentra tion data at specific fixed sites across the country. The NATTS Pilot program was developed and implemented during 2001 and 2002, leading to the development and initial implementation of the NATTS network during 2003 and 2004. The goal of the program is to estimate the concentrations of air toxics on a national level at fixed sites that remain

8 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtoxpg.html

9 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw /area/arearules.html

10 http://www.epa.gov/ttnamti1/uatm.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 11



### active over an extended period of time. Specifically, it is anticipated th at the NATTS data will be used

for:

 

### tracking trends in ambient levels to evaluate progress toward emission and risk reduction goals;

 

### directly evaluating public exposure & environm ental impacts in the vicinity of monitors;

 

### providing quality assured data for risk characterization;

 

### assessing the effectiveness of specifi c emission reduction activities; and

 

### evaluating and subsequently improving air toxi cs emission inventories and model performance.



### National Core Monitoring Network (NCore) 11



### The NCore multi-pollutant stations are part of an overall strategy to integrate multiple monitoring networks and measurements. Each state (i.e., the fifty states, District of Columbia, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands) is required to opera te at least one NCore site. Monitors at NCore multi-pollutant sites will measure a number of pollutants. Due to the continue d development of NCore, consult the NCore website for a complete listing of the pollutants to be measured at the NCore sites.

The objective is to locate sites in broadly representative urban and rural locations throughout the country to help characterize regional and urban patterns of air pollution. In many cases, monitoring organizations will

collocate these new stations with existing CSN sites measuring speciated

PM 2.5 

### components, PAMS sites already measuring O 3 

### precursors, and/or NATTS sites measuring air toxics. By combining these monitoring programs at a single location, EPA and itspartners will maximize the multipollutant information available. This greatly enhances the foundation for future health studies, NAAQS revisions, validation of air quality models, assessment of emission reduction programs, and studies of ecosystem impacts of air pollution.



## 1.2 The EPA Quality System Requirements

A quality system is the “blueprint” or framework by which an organization applies sufficient quality control (QC) and quality assurance (QA) practices

11 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/ncore/index.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 11



### to ensure that the results of its environmental program s meet or exceed expectations. It is based upon the model of planning the work, implementing what is planned, assessing the results against the performance criteria, reporting on data quality and making impr ovements if necessary. Figure 1.2 provides an illustration of the pertinent regulations and policy th at drive the development of a quality system. Some important aspects of this figure are explained below



### .

1.2.1 Policy and Regulations

At the highest level, standards and regulations dete rmine what QA is required for the monitoring program and, therefore, set the stage for program and project specific guidance. The standards and regulations pertinent to the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program include:

 

### Consensus Standards ANSI/ASQ E4 – EPA’s quality system is based on the document: American National Standard- Quality System s for Environmental Data and Technology Programs-Requirements with Guid ance for Use (ANSI/ASQ E4-2004) 12



### . This document describes a basic set of mandatory specifications and non-mandatory guidelines by which a quality system for programs involving envir onmental data collection can be planned, implemented, and assessed. EPA has adopted th e ANSI/ASQ E4 as its quality system consensus

standard.

 

### Internal Policies - are those policies developed specifically by EPA. The EPA QA Policy CIO

2106.0 13 

### expresses the EPA policy in regards to the quality system development for all EPA organizations and non-EPA organi zations performing work on behalf of EPA through extramural agreements. The EPA QA Policy adheres to E4 un der the authority of the Office of Management and Budget. Section 1.2.5 below provides more spec ifics on this Order. In addition, QA policies fall under Volume 40 of the Code of Federal Regula tions (40 CFR). Those most important to the monitoring community are 40 CFR Parts 30, 31 and 35 but are not specific to ambient air monitoring.

 

### External Policies - Refers to the Code of Federal Regula tion that may have QA requirements that are related to policies other than EPA. For ex ample, 48 CFR refers to federal acquisition requirements (contracting etc.) which have some sp ecific QA requirements. The references to the external regulations are those that apply to the quality system requirements for external funding.

 

### Ambient Air - The consensus standards (E4) and internal and external requirements then funnel to the Headquarters and Regional programs (ye llow circle) where additional QA requirements, specific to a particular monitoring program, are included. Ambient air requirements include documents like the Clean Air Act (CAA) and 40 CF R Parts 50, 53 and 58 which are specific to ambient air monitoring.



### 1.2.2 Organization/Program

This area in Figure 1.2 refers to the monitoring or ganization and is used to describe its overall quality system, usually in the form of a quality management plan (QMP) 14 

### . Many monitoring organizations

12 http://webstore.ansi.org/default.aspx

13 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/

. 14 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/r2-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 11



### perform a multitude of data collection activities for diff erent media (e.g., air, water, solid waste) where ambient air monitoring might be only one branch in a large organization. The QMP explains the organizations approach to a quality system across all me dia. It is the responsibility of each organization to have a QMP that demonstrates an acceptable quality system. QMPs are approved by the EPA Regions and reported and tracked in AQS.



### 1.2.3 Project

The term “project” in Figure 1.2 refers to the speci fic environmental data operation (EDO) that occurs at the monitoring organization. An EDO refers to the wo rk performed to obtain, use, or report information pertaining to environmental processes and conditions. The ambient air program would be considered a specific project; in fact monitoring for a specific po llutant could also be considered a project. This Handbook provides the majority of the guidance necessar y for the monitoring organizations to develop QA project plans (QAPPs) specific to its data coll ection needs. Other guidance has been developed specific to a part of the measurement system (i.e., calibration techniques) or to specific methods. A listing of this guidance is included in Appendix B. It is anticipated that the majority of these documents

will be available on the AMTIC bulletin board.



### 1.2.4 Quality System Requirements for EPA Funded Programs

EPA’s national quality system requirements can be found in EPA QA Policy CIO 2106.0 15 

### . Any organization using EPA funds for the collection of en vironmental data are covered under CIO 2106.0 and must develop, implement, and maintain a quality sy stem that demonstrates conformance to the minimum specifications of ANSI/ASQC E4



## 1.3 The Ambient Air Monitori ng Program Quality System

Figure 1.3 represents the stages of the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring QA Program. OAQPS modified EPA CIO 2106.0 as appropriate in order to provide data of the quality needed to meet the Ambient Air Monitoring Program objectives. The planning, impl ementation, assessment a nd reporting tools will be briefly discussed below



### .

1.3.1 Planning

Planning activities include:

Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) - DQOs are qualitative and quantitative statements derived from the outputs of the DQO Process that: (1) clarify the study objective; (2) define the most appropriate type of data to collect; (3) determine the most appropriate conditions from which to collect the data; and (4) specify tolerable limits

on decision errors which will be used as the basis for establishing the quantity and quality of data

15 http://www.epa.gov/irmpoli8/policies/21060.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 11



### needed to support the decision. Section 3 w ill provide more information on the DQO Process.

Methods - Reference methods and measurement principles ha ve been written for each criteria pollutant. A method can refer to an instrument, a laboratory analytical method or a combination of both. For monitoring for comparison to the NAAQS, monitori ng organizations must use methods that are designated as Federal Reference (FRM) Federal Equivalent (FEM) 16 

### or approved regional monitor (ARM) 17 

### for PM 2.5 

### . ORD NERL implements the FRM/FEM designation program and provides technical

assistance in the PM 2.5 

### ARM process. Approved FRM/FEM methods refer to individual monitoring instruments that either provide a pollutant concen tration or provide a sample for further laboratory analysis and must be operated as required in 40 CF R Part 50. Since these methods do not address all the specifications of a monitoring, sampling or analytical operation, they are used to provide the necessary requirements for the development of detailed standa rd operating procedures that would be developed by monitoring organizations as part of an acceptable QAPP.

Training - Training is an essential part of any good monitoring program. Training activities are

discussed in Section 4.

Guidance - This QA Handbook as well as many other guidance documents have been developed for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. Many of the monitoring networks listed above have developed technical assistance documents and generic QAPPs to help guide pe rsonnel in the important aspects of these programs. A list of these documents is included in Appendix B.

QMP/QAPP Development - Each state, local, and tribal organization must develop a QMP and QAPP.

 

### QMP - describes the quality system in terms of the organizational structure, functional responsibilities of management and staff, lines of authority, and required interfaces for those planning, implementing, and assessing activities i nvolving environmental data collection. The QMP is not specific to any particular project, but related to how the monitoring organization implements its quality system.

 

### QAPP - is a formal document describing, in co mprehensive detail, the necessary QA/QC and other technical activities that must be implemented to ensure that the resu lts of work performed will satisfy the stated performance criteria, which may be in the form of a data quality objective (DQO). The QAPP is specific to a particular monitoring project. Standard operating procedures (SOPs) are part of the QAPP development process and are vital to the qua lity of any monitoring program. The QAPP must be detailed enough to pr ovide a clear description of every aspect of the project and include information for every member of the project staff, including samplers, lab staff, and data reviewers. The QAPP facilitates communication among clients, data users, project staff, management, and external reviewers.

Guidance for the development of both QMPs and QAPPs can be found on the EPA Quality Staff’s

website 18 

### . In addition, EPA has provided flexibility on how EPA organizations implement this policy, allowing for use of a graded approach. Since EPA funds the collection and use of data for a number of monitoring objectives and for organizations with a br oad range of capabilities, flexibility in the QMP and QAPP requirements is necessary. For example, data collection for the purpose of comparison to the

16 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html

17 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix C Section 2.4

18 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 11



### National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) w ill require more stringent requirements, while monitoring programs for special purposes may not requir e the same level of quality assurance. The level of detail of QMPs and QAPPs, as explained by th e EPA Quality Staff in the EPA Quality Manual, “should be based on a common sense, graded appro ach that establishes the QA and QC requirements commensurate with the importance of the work, av ailable resources, and the unique needs of the organization.” The ambient air program has devel oped a graded approach that will help tribes and smaller monitoring organizations develop both a QM P and QAPPs. Appendix C provides information on this approach.



### 1.3.2 Implementation

Implementation activities include:

QAPP Implementation

- Once the QAPP is written and approved, it is expected to be implemented. This is the major implementation activity in the quality system.

Internal QC Activities - The quality control (QC) system is used to fulfill requirements for quality. It is the overall system of technical activities that measure the attributes and performance of a process, item, or service against defined standards to verify that th ey meet the stated requirements established by the customer. In the case of the Ambient Air Quality Mon itoring Network, QC activities are used to ensure that measurement uncertainty is maintained within established acceptance criteria for the attainment of the DQOs. Section 10 provides discussions of the ambient air monitoring quality control activities.

QC Reporting -40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A identifies the quality control samples that must be reported to AQS. This data can be used to judge achiev ement of data quality objectives and measurement quality objectives described in Section 3.



### 1.3.3 Assessments

Assessments, as defined in ANSI/ASQC-E4 and EPA’s document, Guidance on Technical Audits and Related Assessments for Environm ental Data Operations (QA/G-7) 19 

### , are evaluation processes used to measure the performance or effectiveness of a system and its elements. Assessment is an all inclusive term used to denote any of the following: audit, performance evaluation, management systems review, peer review, inspection, or surve illance. Assessments for the Ambien t Air Quality Monitoring Program, as discussed in Section 15, include:

Technical Systems Audits (TSA) -A TSA is an on-site review and inspection of a State or local agency's ambient air monitoring program to assess its comp liance with established regulations governing the collection, analysis, validation, and reporting of ambient air quality data. Both EPA and State organizations perform TSAs. Procedures for this a udit are discussed in general terms in Section 15.

Network Reviews - The network review is used to determine how well a particular air monitoring network is achieving its required air monitoring objectiv e(s) and how it should be modified to continue to meet its objective(s). Network reviews are discussed in Section 15.

Performance Evaluations - Performance evaluations are a type of audit in which the quantitative data generated in a measurement system are obtained in dependently and compared with routinely obtained

19 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g7-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 1.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 11



### data to evaluate the proficiency of an analyst, laboratory, or measurement system. The following performance evaluations, discussed in further detail in Section 15, are included in the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program:

 

### Monitoring Organization Performance Evaluations (Audits) - These performance evaluation audits are used to provide an independent asse ssment of the measurement operations of each instrument being audited. This is accomplis hed by comparing performance samples or devices

of “known” concentrations or values to the valu es measured by the instruments being audited.

 

### National Performance Evaluation Program (NPEP) – These performance evaluation audits are implemented at the federal level although some programs may be implemented by the monitoring organizations if certain requirements are met.



### 1.3.4 Reports

All concentration data should be assessed in order to evaluate the attainment of the DQOs or the monitoring objectives. These assessments can be do cumented using the following types of reports:

 

### Data quality assessment (DQA) is the scientific and statistical evaluation to determine if data are of the right type, quality, and quantity to support their intended use (DQOs). QA/QC data can be statistically assessed at various levels of aggregation to determine whether the DQOs have been attained. Data quality assessments of precisi on, bias, and accuracy can be aggregated at the following three levels.

o Monitor - monitor/method designation

o PQAO - monitors in a method designation, all monitors

o National - monitors in a method designation, all monitors

 

### Data Quality Indicator Reports A number of reports that have been programmed in AQS can be used to assess data quality. In particular, th e AMP255 report can be used to assess the criteria pollutants for conformance to 40 CFR part 58 A ppendix A criteria for completeness, precision and bias. EPA also developed a annual box and wh isker report of the gaseous criteria pollutants that is posted on AMTIC 20 

### . It provide assessment similar to the AMP255 but it also provides a visual display of data quality that can help iden tify sites that may be in need of corrective active

 

### QA Reports provide an evaluation of QA/QC data fo r a given time period to determine whether the data quality objectives were met. Discussions of QA reports can be foun d in Sections 16 and

18.

 

### Audit Report s provide the formal documentation of internal and external audits including any findings that requ ire corrective action. Details of the reports are described

in Section 15.

20 Criteria Pollutant Quality Indicator Summary Report at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qareport.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 8



# 2.0 Program Organization

Federal, state, tribal, and local agencies all have important roles in developing and implementing air monitoring programs. Figure 2.1 identifies the major entities involved in the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, the organizational structure,

and the lines of communication. The responsibilities of each organization follow. In general, most formal QA communication occurs in the pathway illustrated in the Figure 2.1. Primary quality assurance organizations (PQAOs) are identified because each EPA Region consists of many PQAO’s and each PQAO may consist of one state, tribal or local monitoring organization or be a consolidation of a number of monitoring organizations. See Section 2.1.4 for additional information on PQAOs. In addition, the QA Handbook Revision Workgroup is highlighted because this entity is informal but provides a venue to communicate at all levels in order to discuss technical issues and improve the Handbook at appropriate time frames.



## 2.1 Organization Responsibilities

2.1.1 EPA Office of Air Quality Pl anning and Standards (OAQPS)

EPA’s responsibility, under the Clean Air Act (C AA) as amended in 1990, includes: setting National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) for pollutant s considered harmful to the public health and environment; ensuring that these air quality standards ar e met or attained through national standards and strategies to control air emissions from sources; and ensuring that sources of toxic air pollutants are well

controlled.

OAQPS 1 

### is the organization charged under the authority of the CAA to protect and enhance the quality of the nation’s air resources. OAQPS evaluates the need to regulate potential air pollutants and develops national standards; works with monitoring organizati ons to develop plans for meeting these standards; monitors national air quality trends and maintains a database of inform ation on air pollution and controls; provides technical guidance and training on air polluti on control strategies; and monitors compliance with air pollution standards.

Within the OAQPS Air Quality Assessment Divi sion, the Ambient Air Monitoring Group (AAMG) 2 

### is responsible for the oversight of the Ambient Air Qu ality Monitoring Network and its quality assurance program. AAMG, relative to quality assu rance, has the responsibility to:

1 http://www.epa.gov/air/oarofcs.html

2 http://www.epa.gov/air/oaqps/organization/aqad/aamg.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 8

 

### develop a satisfactory quality system for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network;

 

### ensure that the methods and procedures used in making air pollution measurements are adequate to meet the programs objectives and that the resulting data are of appropriate quality;

 

### manage the National Performance Evaluation Program (NPEP);

 

### perform data quality assessments of organizati ons making air pollution measurements of importance to the regulatory process;

 

### ensure that guidance pertaining to the quality assurance aspects of the Ambient Air Program are written and revised as necessary; and

 

### render technical assistance to the EPA Regi onal Offices and the air pollution monitoring community.

In particular, referring to this Ha ndbook, OAQPS will be responsible for:

 

### coordinating the Handbook Revision Workgroup responsible for continued improvement of the Handbook;

 

### seeking resolution on Handbook issues;

 

### incorporating agreed upon revisions into the Handbook; and

 

### reviewing and revising the Handbook (Vol II) as necessary.



### 2.1.2 EPA Regional Offices

EPA Regional Offices 3 

### play a critical role in addressing environmental issues related to the monitoring organizations within their jurisdiction and admini stering and overseeing regulatory and congressionally mandated programs. In addition, one Region serves a rotating two-year term as Lead Region for monitoring and serves to coordinate and communicat e monitoring issues to and from Headquarters and the other Regions.

The major quality assurance responsibilities of EPA’s Regional Offices in regards to the Ambient Air Quality Program are the coordina tion of quality assurance matters between the various EPA offices and the monitoring organizations. This role requires that the Regional Offices:

 

### distribute and explain technical and quality assurance information to the monitoring organizations;

 

### identify quality assurance needs of the monitoring organization to EPA Headquarters that are “national” in scope;

 

### provide personnel and the infrastruct ure to implement NPEP programs;

 

### provide the personnel with knowledge of QA regulati ons and with adequate technical expertise to address ambient air monitoring and QA issues;

 

### ensure monitoring organization have approved quality management plans (QMPs) and quality assurance project plans (QAPPs) prior to routine monitoring;

 

### evaluate the capabilities of monitoring organizati ons to measure the criteria air pollutants by implementing network reviews and technical sy stems audits of primary quality assurance organizations (PQAOs);

 

### assess data quality of monitoring orga nizations within its Regions; and

 

### assist monitoring organizations in defining primar y quality assurance organizations within their jurisdiction and in assigning sites to a primary quality assurance organization.

3 http://www.epa.gov/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 8



### Specific responsibilities as they relate to the Handbook include:

 

### serving as a liaison to the monitoring organi zations for their particular Region;

 

### serving on the Handbook Revision Workgroup;

 

### fielding questions related to the Handbook and ambient air monitoring programs;

 

### reporting issues that would require Handbook Revision Workgroup attention; and

 

### serving as a reviewer of the Handbook and participating in its revision.



### 2.1.3 Monitoring Organizations

40 CFR Part 58 4 

### defines a monitoring organization as a “state, local or other monitoring organization (such as tribes) responsible for operating a monitoring s ite for which quality assurance regulations apply.”

Federally recognized Indian Tribes are Sovereign Nati ons. However, Section 301(d) of the CAA gives the Administrator the authority to treat an Indian Trib e in the same manner as a State Agency with some additional flexibility. Additionally, Section 302 of th e CAA states an air pollution control agency can be an agency of an Indian Tribe.

The major responsibility of the monitoring organization 5 

### is the implementation of a satisfactory monitoring program, which would naturally include the implementation of an appropriate quality assurance program. Implementation of an appropriate quality assurance program includes the development and implementation of a QMP and QAPPs for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program. It is the responsibility of monitoring orga nizations to implement quality assurance programs in all phases of the data collection process, including the field, its own laboratories, and in any consulting and contractor laboratories which it may use to obtain data.

Monitoring organizations may be identified for reasons such as:

 

### distinguishing geographic regions (e.g. CA Districts)

 

### distinguishing different entities or sources of funds (e.g., tribal funds versus state/local funds)

 

### identifying organizations receivi ng funds directly from EPA

 

### identifying organizations that have diffe rent methods or objectives for monitoring

Therefore, if the monitoring organization accepts federa l funds for monitoring, it will be identified as a monitoring organization that will be required to submit a requisite QMP and QAPPs to cover its monitoring activities. This does not eliminate it from consolidating to a PQAO with other organizations that it shares common factors, as described in the next section.

Specific responsibilities of monitoring organizations as they relate to the Handbook include:

 

### serving as a representative for the monitoring organization on the Handbook Revision Workgroup;

 

### assisting in the development of QA guidance for various sections; and

 

### reporting issues and comments to Regional Contacts.

4 http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/ cfr/cfr-table-search.html

5 http://www.4cleanair.org/contactUsaLevel.aspQA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 8



### 2.1.4 Primary Quality Assurance Organizations (PQAOs)

A PQAO is a monitoring organization or a group of monitoring organizations that share a number of common “QA Factors”. Below is an excerpt on PQAOs from 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A:

3.1.1 Each primary quality assurance organization shall be defined such that measurement uncertainty among all stations in the organization can be expected to be reasonably homogeneous, as a result of common factors. Common factors that should be considered by monitoring organizations in defining primary quality assurance organizations include:

(a) Operation by a common team of field operators according to a common set of procedures; (b) Use of a common QAPP or standard operating procedures; (c) Common calibration facilities and standards; (d) Oversight by a common quality assurance organization; and (e) Support by a common management, laboratory or headquarters.



### The number and type monitors and sites in a PQAO ha s very important implications to quality assurance activities. For some pollutants, the number of monito ring sites in a PQAO may be used to determine the number and frequency of quality control checks, in cluding the number of collocated monitors and the audit frequencies for the National Perform ance Audit Program (NPAP) and the PM 2.5 

### and Pb Performance Evaluation Program (PEP). Data assessments for comp leteness, precision and bias are aggregated at the PQAO level. The 5 common factors previously listed (a through e) are the key criteria to be used when an agency decides the sites to be considered for aggregation to a PQAO. There are cases where state, local and tribal monitoring organizations have c onsolidated to one PQAO. The requirement does not

intend that all 5 factors have to be fulfilled but that these factors are considered. However, common procedures and a common QAPP should be considered key to making decisions to consolidate sites into a PQAO. However, the QAPP(s) of the monitoring organizations must refer to the PQAO that the monitoring organization is affiliated with. EPA Regions will need to be aware of monitoring organizations consolidating to a P QAO and have documentation on file to this effect. It is strongly suggested that when an opportunity for QAPP revisi ons arise that monitoring organizations that have consolidated develop one overarching QAPP that cover both organizations. Figure 2.2 shows the relationship of pollutants monitored at unique sit es and how these unique sites are then related toQA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 8



### monitoring organizations and primar y quality assurance organizations. In the case of PQAO #1, a tribal monitoring organization and local monitoring orga nization have common factors that allow for

consolidation.

Since a PQAO is identified at the pollutant (monitor) level, two monitoring organizations may consolidate to a single PQAO for one pollutant due to similar methods and QA procedures, but not consolidate for another pollutant where they may have different quality requirements 

### . Each PQAO should have some coordination entity to schedule/coor dinate audits, TSAs, etc. In many cases this will be the state agency with local districts within the PQAO. In other cases, it could be a board that coordinates activities within a PQAO comprised of small agen cies (e.g., tribes). Th is coordination entity needs to be documented in a manner (i.e., QAPP) that informs all monitoring organizations under the PQAO and the appropriate EPA Region.

2.1.5 EPA Office of Research and Developm ent (ORD) National Exposure Research Laboratory (NERL) 6



### NERL conducts research and development that leads to improved methods, measur ements and models to assess and predict exposures of humans and ecosystems to harmful pollutants and other conditions in air, water, soil, and food. The NERL provides the follo wing activities relative to the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring networks:

 

### develops, improves, and validates methods and in struments for measuring gaseous, semi-volatile, and non-volatile pollutants in source emissions and in ambient air;

 

### supports multi-media approaches to assessing hum an exposure to toxic contaminated media through development and evaluation of analytical methods and reference materials, and provides analytical and method support for special m onitoring projects for trace elements and other inorganic and organic constituents and pollutants;

 

### develops standards and systems needed for assuring and controlling data quality;

 

### assesses whether candidate sampling methods conform to accepted reference method specifications and are capable of providing data of acceptable quality and completeness for determining compliance with applicable National Ambient Air Quality Standards;

 

### assesses whether emerging methods for monitori ng criteria pollutants are “equivalent” to accepted Federal Reference Methods and are capab le of addressing the Agency’s research and regulatory objectives; and

 

### provides an independent audit and review function on data collected by other appropriate clients.

NERL will continue to assist in the Handbook by:

 

### providing overall guidance;

 

### participating in the Handbook review process;

 

### developing new methods includi ng the appropriate QA/QC; and

 

### conducting laboratory and field evaluations of sampl ing and analysis methods to resolve ad hoc

technical issues.

6 http://www.epa.gov/nerl/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 8



## 2.2 Lines of Communication

In order to maintain a successful Ambient Air Qua lity Monitoring Program, effective communication is

essential. Lines of communication will ensure that deci sions can be made at the most appropriate levels

in a more time-efficient manner. It also means that each organization in this structure must be aware of the regulations governing the Ambient Air Quality M onitoring Program. In most circumstances, the monitoring organizations first line of contact is the EPA Region. Any issues that require a decision, especially in relation to the quality of data, or the qua lity system, should be addressed to the EPA Region. A monitoring organization should, in only rare circ umstances, contact OAQPS with an issue if it has not initially contacted the EPA Region. If this does o ccur, OAQPS normally tries to include the pertinent EPA Region in the conversation, or at a minimum, briefs the EPA Region about the issue(s) discussed. This is appropriate as long as decisions are not ma de during these information-seeking communications. If important decisions are made at various locations al ong the line, it is important that the information is disseminated in all directions in order that improveme nts to the quality system can reach all organizations in the Program. Nationwide communication will be accomplished through AMTIC and the subsequent

revisions to this Handbook.

There are many other routes of communication availabl e in the monitoring comm unity. Three that occur with some frequency and should be used to iden tify important monitoring and QA issues are:

National Association of Clean Air Agencies (NACAA) 7



### - represents air pollution control agencies in 53 states and territories and over 165 major metropolitan areas across the United States. It formed in the 1970’s to improve their effectiveness as managers of air quality programs. The association serves to encourage the exchange of information among air po llution control officials, to enhance communication and cooperation among federal, state, and local regul atory agencies, and to promote good management of our air resources. Specifically for the Ambient Ai r Monitoring Program, it facilitates a monthly conference call and has organized a Steering Co mmittee, made up of monitoring organization representatives and EPA, that meet twice a year to di scuss issues related to ambient air monitoring.

Association of Air Pollution Control Agencies (AAPCA) has recently been created as a new association of state and local clean air agencies. The goal of AAPCA is to provide a technical forum and "promote efficient and effective programs to implemen t the Clean Air Act. At the time of this printing

EPA did not locate a website for AAPCA.

National Tribal Air Association (NTAA) 8



### - is an autonomous organizati on affiliated with the National Tribal Environmental Council (NTEC). The NTAA’s mission is to advance air quality management policies and programs, consistent with the needs, inte rests, and unique legal status of American Indian Tribes, Alaska Natives, and Native Hawaiians. This organization has many similarities to NACCA. It also facilitates a monthly conference call with EPA and holds a national annual meeting.

EPA Headquarters and Regional Monitoring and QA Calls - These calls occur monthly and are devoted to relevant monitoring and QA topics where EPA tries to develop consistent approaches to relevant monitoring issues.

7 http://www.4cleanair.org/about.asp

8 http://www.ntaatribalair.org/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 8



### Besides the three communication m echanisms described above, there are many others, such as the Regional Planning Organization (RPOs) 9 

### conference calls/meetings, EPA Regional conference calls/meetings that also serve to communicate th e needs and issues of the ambient air monitoring community.



## 2.3 Quality Assurance (QA) Workgroups

Two workgroups have been formed to provide info rmation for improving the Ambient Air Monitoring Program Quality System

 

### QA Strategy Workgroup

 

### Handbook Revision Workgroup

2.3.1 QA Strategy Workgroup

Organized and chaired by the QA Team Lead of OAQPS/AQAD, the Workgroup consists of Ambient Air Quality Assurance personnel from O AQPS, EPA Regions, and monitoring organizations. The Workgroup members were solicited through NACAA in 200 1 in conjunction with OAQPS vision of a new monitoring strategy for the ambient air monitoring community. The goal, established by the Workgroup, was to define the elements of a Quality System . To achieve this goal, the Workgroup scheduled conference calls and meetings. Additionally, the work group met for a number of years on an annual basis at the National QA Meeting to discuss issues releva nt to quality assurance work in the ambient air monitoring field. For information on the workgroup’s activities please refer to: www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qaqcrein.html . This Workgroup continues to communicate on conference calls for

the revision of this Handbook and issues related to the regulatory QA requirements in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A.

2.3.2 The Handbook Revision Workgroup

The Handbook Revision Workgroup is made up of re presentatives from the following four entities in order to provide representation at th e Federal, State and local level:

 

### OAQPS - OAQPS is represented by the coordinator for the Handbook and other representatives of the Ambient Ai r Quality Monitoring QA Team.

 

### Regions - A minimum of 1 representative from each EPA Regional Office.

 

### NERL -A minimum of one representative. NERL represents historical knowledge of the Handbook series as well as the expertise in the re ference and equivalent methods program and QA activities.

 

### Monitoring Organizations - A minimum of 10 representatives of the monitoring organizations.

The mission of the workgroup is the continued clarif ication and addition of quality assurance procedures as related to ambient air monitoring and the netw orks. The workgroup provides experiences and insights in the ambient air monitoring field that will assist OAQ PS with the task of the continuous improvement of the quality system. This ensures data integrity and provides valid quality indicators for decision makers

faced with attainment/nonattainment issues as well as providing quality data to health professionals, academia and environmental professionals using the data.

9 http://epa.gov/visibility/regional.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 2.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 8



### The Handbook Revision Workgroup will meet twice a y ear to discuss, generally the “condition” of the Handbook and what changes may be necessary. A running list of these changes will be recorded and if important, technical guidance developed. A thorou gh review of the Handbook will occur every five years for the purpose of reviewing and revising the Ha ndbook or sections as needed. Issues may surface from comments made by monitoring organizations’ lia isons, AMTIC bulletin board comments, or the development/revision of regulations.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 6 

# 3.0 Data Quality Objectives

Data collected for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program are used to make very specific decisions that can have an economic impact on the area repr esented by the data. Data quality objectives (DQOs)



### are qualitative and quantitative statem ents derived from the DQO Pl anning Process that clarify the purpose of the study, define the most appropriate type of information to collect, determine the most appropriate conditions from which to collect that info rmation, and specify tolerable levels of potential decision errors. Throughout this document, the

term decision maker is used. This term represents

individuals that are the ultimate users of ambient air data and therefore may be responsible for setting the NAAQS (or other objective), developing a quality system, or evaluating the data (e.g., NAAQS comparison). The DQO will be based on the data requirements of the decision

maker who needs to feel confident that the data

used to make environmental decisions are of adequate quality. The data used in these decisions are never error free and always contain some level of uncertainty. Because of these uncertainties or errors, there is a possibility that decision makers may declare an area “nonattainment” when the area is actually in “attainment” (Fig. 3.1 a false rejection of the baseline condition) or “attainment” when actually the area is in “nonattainment” (Fig. 3.2 false acceptance of the baseline condition) 1



### . Figures 3.1 and 3.2 illustrate how false rejection and acceptance errors can affect a NAAQS

decision based on an annual mean concentration value of 15 and the baseline condition (null hypothesis) that the area is in attainment. In the figures the probability density is a statistical measure that defines a probability distribution for a

random variable. There are serious economic and health consequences of making such decision errors. Therefore, decision makers need to understand and set limits on the probabilities of making incorrect decisions with these data. In order to set limits on decision errors, one needs to understand and control uncertainty. Uncertainty is used as a generic term to describe the sum of all

sources of error associated with an E DO and can be illustrated as follows:

2 2 2

m p o 

### S S S   Equation 3-1

where:

S

o 

### = overall uncertainty

S

p 

### = population uncertainty (spatial and temporal)

S

m 

### = measurement uncertainty (data collection).

1 “Guidance on Systematic Planning Using the Data Qua lity Objectives Process,” EPA QA/G-4 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, QAD, February 2006. http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g4-final.pdf Figure 3.2 Effect of negative bias on the annual average resulting in a false acceptance error. Figure 3.1 Effect of positive bias on the annual average estimate, resulting in a false rejection error.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 6



### The estimate of overall uncertainty is an important component in the DQO process. Both population and

measurement uncertainties must be understood.

Population uncertainties are related to the uncertainty in ai r concentrations related to spatial and temporal variability. The most important data quality indicator of any ambient air monitoring network is representativeness. This term refers to the degree to which data accurately and precisely represent the frequency distribution of a specific variable in the po pulation (e.g., concentration of air for the spatial scale of interest). Population uncertainty, the spa tial and temporal components of error, can affect representativeness. These uncertainties can be contro lled through the selection of appropriate boundary conditions (the monitoring area and the sampling time period/frequency of sampling) to which the decision will apply, and the development of a pr oper statistical sampling design (see Section 6). Appendix B of the Quality Staff’s document titled Guidance for Quality Assurance Project Plans (EPA/G5) 2 

### provides a very good dissertation on representativeness. It does not matter how precise or

unbiased the measurement values are if a site is unr epresentative of the population it is presumed to represent. Assuring the collection of a representative air quality sample depends on the following factors:

 

### selecting a network size that is consistent with the monitoring objectives and locating representative sampling sites;

 

### identifying and documenting the constraints on the sampling sites that are imposed by meteorology, local topography, emission sources, la nd access and the physical constraints; and

 

### selecting sampling schedules and frequencies that ar e consistent with the monitoring objectives.

Measurement uncertainties are the errors associated with the environmental data operation (EDO), including errors associated with the field, prep aration and laboratory measurement phases. At each measurement phase, errors can occur, that in most ca ses, are additive. The goal of a QA program is to control measurement uncertainty to an acceptable le vel through the use of va rious quality control and evaluation techniques. In a resource constrained environm ent, it is most important to be able to calculate and evaluate the total measurement system uncertainty ( S

m 

### ) and compare this to the DQO. If resources are available, it may be possible to evaluate various phases (e.g., field, laboratory) of the measurement system. For example, the collocated PM10 monitors provide the best estimate of overall measurement precision since it captures both measurement uncer tainty in the field and the laboratory.

Three data quality indicators are most important in determining total measurement uncertainty:

 

### Precision - a measure of agreement among repeated me asurements of the same property under identical, or substantially similar, conditions. Th is is the random component of error. Precision is estimated by various statistical techniques t ypically using some derivation of the standard

deviation.

 

### Bias - the systematic or persistent distortion of a measurement process which causes error in one direction. Bias will be determined by estimati ng the positive and negative deviation from the true value as a percentage of the true value.

 

### Detection Limit - The lowest concentration or amount of the target analyte that can be determined to be different from zero by a single m easurement at a stated level of probability. Due to the fact the NCore sites will require instrument s to quantify at lower concentrations, detection limits are becoming more important. Some of th e more recent guidance documents suggest that monitoring organizations develop method detec tion limits (MDLs) for continuous instruments

2 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 6



### and or analytical methods. Many monitoring orga nizations use the default MDL listed in AQS for a particular method. These default MDLs come from instrument vendor advertisements and/or method manuals. Monitoring organi zations should not rely on inst rument vendor’s documentation

on detection limits but determine the detection lim its that are being achieved in the field during routine operations. Use of MDLs are described in the NCore Precursor Gas Technical Assistance Document (TAD) 3



### .

Accuracy is a measure of the overall agreement of a measurement to a known value and includes a combination of random error (precision) and system atic error (bias) components of both sampling and analytical operations. This term has been used th roughout the CFR and in some sections of this document. Whenever possible, it is recommended that an attempt be made to distinguish measurement uncertainties into precision and bias components. In cases where such a distinction is not possible, the term accuracy can be used.

Other indicators that are considered during the DQO process include completeness and comparability

. Completeness describes the amount of valid data obt ained from a measurement system compared to the amount that was expected to be obtained unde r correct, normal conditions. For example, a PM 2.5 

### monitor that is designated to sample every sixth day would be expected to have an overall sampling frequency of one out of every six days. If, in a thirty day period, the sampler misses one sample, the completeness

would be recorded as four out of fi ve, or 80 percent. Data completeness requirements are included in the reference methods (40 CFR Part 50). Comparability is a measure of the confidence with which one data set or method can be compared to another, consider ing the units of measurement and applicability to standard statistical techniques. Comparability of datasets is critical to evaluating their measurement uncertainty and usefulness. The various National Performance Evaluation Programs implemented in the Ambient Air Monitoring Program help EPA evalua te data comparability among PQAOs. Section 15 provides more details of the performance evaluation programs.



## 3.1 The DQO Process

The DQO process is used to facilitate the planning of EDOs. It asks the data user to focus their EDO efforts by specifying the use of the data (the decisi on), the decision criteria, and the probability they can accept making an incorrect decision b ased on the data. The DQO process:

 

### establishes a common language to be shared by decision makers, technical personnel, and

statisticians in their discussion of program objectives and data quality;

 

### provides a mechanism to pare down a multitude of objectives into major critical questions;

 

### facilitates the development of clear statements of program objectives and constraints that will optimize data collection plans; and

 

### provides a logical structure within which an ite rative process of guidance, design, and feedback may be accomplished efficiently.

The DQO process contains the following steps:

 

### State the problem: Define the problem that necessitates the study; identify the planning team, examine budget, schedule.

 

### Identify the goal: State how environmental data will be used in meeting objectives and solving the problem, identify study questions, define alternative outcomes.

 

### Identify information inputs: Identify data and information n eeded to answer study questions.

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/ncore/guidance.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 6

 

### Define boundaries: Specify the target population and characteristics of interest, define spatial and temporal limits, scale of inference.

 

### Develop the analytical approach: Define the parameter of interest, specify the type of inference, and develop the logic for drawing conclusions from findings.

 

### Specify performance or acceptance criteria:

o Decision making (hypothesis testing): Specify probability limits for false rejection and false acceptance decision errors.

o Estimation approaches: Develop performance criteria fo r new data being collected or acceptable criteria for existing data being considered for use.

 

### Develop the plan for obtaining data: Select the resource-effective sampling and analysis plan that meets the performance criteria.

The DQO Process is fully discussed in the document titled Guidance on Systematic Planning using the Data Quality Objectives Process (EPA QA/G-4) , and is available on the EPA’s Quality System for Environmental Data and Technology website 4 

### . For an illustration of how the DQO process was applied to a particular ambient air monitoring problem, refer to the EPA document titled Systematic Planning: A Case Study of Particulate Matter Ambient Air Monitoring 5



### .



## 3.2 Ambient Air Quality DQOs

As indicated above, the first steps in the DQO proces s are to identify the problems that need to be resolved and the objectives to be met. As described in Section 2, the ambient air monitoring networks are designed to collect data to meet three basic objectives:

1. provide air pollution data to the ge neral public in a timely manner;

2. support compliance with air quality standard s and emission strategy development; and

3. support air pollution research.

These different objectives could potentially require different DQOs, making the development of DQOs complex and unique for each objective. For the criteria po llutants, the priority obj ective is to ensure that decision makers can make comparisons to the NAAQS with in a specified degree of certainty. With the data quality needed for NAAQS evaluation, one can support both timely data reporting and research goals to a certain extent.

OAQPS has established formal DQOs for PM 2.5, 

### Ozone, Pb, CO, SO2, NCore, PM 2.5 

### , CSN 6 

### , and NATTS 7



### . As the NAAQS for the other criteria pollutants co me up for review, EPA will develop DQOs for these pollutants.

4 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.html

5 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/casestudy2-final.pdf

6 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specguid.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtoxqa.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 6



## 3.3 Measurement Quality Objectives

The DQO process functions to identify the allowable population and measurement uncertainty for a given objective. The monitoring program is then developed and quality control samples are identified and implemented to evaluate data quality [through da ta quality assessments (DQA)] to ensure that it is maintained within the established acceptance criteria. Measurement Qual ity Objectives (MQOs) are designed to evaluate and control various phases (e.g., sampling, transportati on, preparation, and analysis) of the measurement process to ensure that total measur ement uncertainty is within the ra nge prescribed by the DQOs. MQOs can be defined in terms of the following data quality indicators: precision, bias, representativeness, detection limit, completeness and compar ability as described in Section 3.0.

MQOs can be established to evaluate overall measu rement uncertainty, as well as for an individual phase of a measurement process. As an example, the precision DQO for PM 2.5 

### is 10% and it is based on 3 years of collocated precision data collected at a PQAO leve l. Since only 15% of the sites are collocated, the data cannot be used to control the quality from each site or each sampler (although it could be used for the specific site where the collocated samp le was collected). Since the collo cated results can be affected by both field and laboratory processes, one cannot pinpoint a specific phase of the measurement system when a precision result is higher than the 10% precision goal. Therefore, individual precision values greater than 10% may be tolerated as long as the overa ll 3-year DQO is achieved. In contrast, the flow rate audit, which is specific to the appropriate functioning of the PM 2.5 

### sampler, has an MQO of + 4% of

the audit standard and + 5% of the design value. This MQO must be met each time or the instrument is recalibrated. In summary, since uncertainty is us ually additive, there is much less tolerance for uncertainty for individual phases of a measurement sy stem (e.g., flow rate) since each phase contributes to overall measurement. As monitoring organizations develop measurement specific MQOs they should think about being more stringent fo r individual phases of the measurement process since it will help to keep overall measurement uncertainty within acceptable levels.

For each of these indicators, acceptance criteria can be developed for various phases of the EDO. Various parts of 40 CFR Parts 50 and 58 have identified acceptance criteria for some of these indicators. In theory, if these MQOs are met, measure ment uncertainty should be controlled to the levels required by the DQO. MQO tables for the criteria pollutants can be f ound in Appendix D and have been revised into what is known as a validation template. In June 1998, a workgroup of QA personnel from the monitoring organizations, EPA Regional Offices, and OAQPS was fo rmed to develop a procedure that could be used by monitoring organizations for consistent use of MQOs and the validation of the criteria pollutants across the US. The workgroup developed three tables of criteria:

Critical Criteria- deemed critical to maintaining the integrity of a sample (or ambient air concentration value) or group of samples were placed in the first table. Observations that do not meet each and every

criterion on the critical table should be invalidated un less there are compelling reason and justification for not doing so. Basically, the sample or group of samp les for which one or more of these criteria are not met is invalid until proven otherwise.

Operational Criteria Table- important for maintaining and evalua ting the quality of the data collection system. Violation of a criterion or a number of criteria may be cause for invalidation. The decision maker should consider other quality control informat ion that may or may not indicate the data are acceptable for the parameter being controlled. Therefor e, the sample or group of samples for which oneQA Handbook Vol II, Section 3.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 6



### or more of these criteria are not met is suspect unless other quality control information demonstrates otherwise. The reason for not meeting the criteria should be investigated, mitigated or justified.

Systematic Criteria Table- include those criteria which are important for the correct interpretation of the data but do not usually impact the validity of a sampl e or group of samples. For example, the data quality objectives are included in this table. If the data qua lity objectives are not met, this does not invalidate any of the samples but it may impact the error rate associ ated with the attainment/non-attainment decision.

More information about data validation and the use of the validation templates can be found in Section

17.

Performance Based Measurement System Concept: Consistency vs. Comparability

The NATTS Program uses the perform ance-based measurement system (PBMS) concept. In simple terms, this means that as long as the quality of data that the program requires (DQOs) are defined, the data quality indicators are identified, and the a ppropriate measurement quality objectives (MQOs) that quantify that the data quality objectives are met, an y sampling/analytical method that meets these data quality requirements should be appropriate to use in the program. The idea behind PBMS is that if the methods meet the data quality acceptance criteria th e data are “comparable” and can be used in the program. Previous discussions in this document all ude to the need for “nationally consistent data”, “utilization of standard monitoring methods” and “cons istency in laboratory methods”. Comparability is a data quality indicator because one can quantify a num ber of data quality indicators (precision, bias, detectability) and determine whether two methods are comparable. Consistency is not a data quality indicator and requiring that a particular method be u sed for the sake of consistency does not assure that the data collected from different monitoring organi zations and analyzed by different laboratories will yield data of similar (comparable) quality. Therefore, the quality system will continue to strive for the development of data quality indicat ors and measurement quality objectiv es that will allow one to judge data quality and comparability and allow program mana gers to determine whether or not to require the use of a particular method (assuming this method meet s the data quality needs). However, PBMS puts a premium on up-front planning and a commitment fro m monitoring organizations to adhere to implementing quality control requirements.

The data quality indicator comparability must be evaluated in light of a pollutant that is considered a method-defined parameter . The analytical result of a pollutant measurement, of a method-defined parameter, has a high dependence on the process used to make the measurement (e.g., PM 2.5 

### ). Most analytical measurements are determin ations of a definitive amount of a specific molecule or mixture of molecules. An example of this would be the concen tration of carbon monoxide in ambient air. However, other measurements are dependent on the process us ed to make the measur ement. Method-defined parameters include measurements of physical parameters such as temperature and solar radiation which are dependent on the collection height and the desi gn of the instrumentation used. Measurements of particulate mass, especially fine particulate, are also method-defined parameters because they are not "true" measures of particulate mass, being dependent on criteria such as: size cut-points which are geometrically defined; level of vol atilization of particulates during sampling; and analytical methods that control the level of moisture associated with particul ates at a concentration that may not represent actual

conditions. This should not be in terpreted to mean that using a method-defined measurement of particulate is inferior, rather when selecting me thods or comparing data sets for method-defined parameters it is important to consider that there is no “correct” measurement, only a “defined” method. However as mentioned above in the PBMS discussion, there are certain data quality acceptance limits for

“defined” methods that can be u sed to accept alternative methods.QA Handbook Vol II Section 4.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page: 1 of 3



# 4.0 Personnel Qualific ations and Training

4.1 Personnel Qualifications

Ambient air monitoring personnel may be required to perfo rm a number of functions that are important to the quality of data. Table 4-1 identifies these functions and provides some of the key activities within the functional category. Once the list is completed for a monitoring organization, it can be used in the development of position descriptions for recruitment and training programs.

Not all functions are needed for the entire duration of a project. Monitoring organizations may feel that it

can contract some of the functions that are needed. For example, an organization may wish to contract the information technology (IT) function to have the monitoring instruments connected to a data logging system that would transfer data to a local data b ase and eventually to an ex ternal data base like AQS. This part of the process might be considered a “ one-time” event needing a particular expertise whose function might not require a full time person. Howeve r, it is critical that someone within the program

understands this IT function to ensure data collection is operating properly on a day-to-day basis.

Table 4-1 Monitoring Functions that Need Some Level of Staffing or Expertise

Function Activities

Procurement - Purchasing capital equipment and consumables

- Developing contracts and maintenance agreements

- Applying for EPA grants

Technical - Setting up a monitoring site, electricity, communications

- Developing standard operating procedures

- Selecting and installing monitoring equipment

- Calibrating equipment, performing quality control

- Shelter and equipment maintenance

Data Analysis (Statistical) - Understanding population and measurement uncertainty

- Developing sampling designs

- Developing networks to achieve objectives

- Assessing/interpreting data (data quality assessments)

Quality Assurance - Developing quality systems, QMPs/QAPPs

- Developing data quality objectives

- Implementing technical systems audits, performance evaluations

- Validating data

- QA reporting

Information Technology - Selecting information technology (data loggers and local data base)

- Developing analyzer outputs to data loggers and data transfer to local data base

- Transfering data from local data base to external data repositories (AQS, etc.)



### Personnel assigned to ambient air monitoring activities are expected to have the educational, work experience, responsibility, personal attributes and trai ning requirements for their positions. In some cases, certain positions may require certification and/or recertification. An example would be certifying

auditors on instruments to be audited. These requirements should be outlined in the position advertisement and in personal pos ition descriptions. Records on pers onnel qualifications and training should be maintained and accessible for review during audit activities (unless the records are maintained as part of confidential personnel records). These reco rds should be retained as described in Section 5.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 4.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page:2 of 3



## 4.2 Training

Adequate education and training are integral to an y monitoring program that strives for reliable and comparable data. It is recommended that monitori ng organizations maintain some requirements for air personnel qualifications (com bination of education and experience). Training is aimed at increasing theeffectiveness of employees and their organization. As part of a quality assurance program, EPA QA/G10, Guidance for Developing a Training Program for Quality System 1 

### suggests the development of operational procedures for training. These procedures should include information on:

 personnel qualifications- general and position specific

 training requirements - by position

 frequency of training

Appropriate training should be available to empl oyees supporting the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, commensurate with their duties. Such tr aining may consist of classroom lectures, workshops, web-based courses, teleconferences, ve ndor provided, and on-the-job training.

Along with suggested training, there are some EPA programs that require mandatory training and/or certifications. These programs include, but are not li mited to, the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP), Performance Evaluation Program (PEP), Interagency Monitoring of Protected Visual Environments (IMPROVE), and PM 2.5 

### Speciation Trends Network Audit Program. All personnel performing audits in these projects or programs are required to possess mandatory training or a current certification issued by the EPA Office responsible for the monitoring program.

EPA encourages regional planning organizations a nd monitoring organizations to develop training programs that require some level of certification.



### 4.2.1 Suggested Training

Over the years, a number of courses have been de veloped for personnel involved with ambient air monitoring and quality assurance aspects. Formal QA/QC training is offered through the following organizations:

 Air Pollution Training Institute (APTI) http://www.epa.gov/apti/

 Air & Waste Management Association (AWMA) http://www.awma.org/

 American Society for Quality (ASQ) http://www.asq.org/

 EPA Quality Staff (QS) http://www.epa.gov/quality1/

 EPA Regional Offices http://www.epa.gov/epahome/locate2.htm

 EPA Ambient Monitoring Technology Informa tion Center (AMTIC) Technology Transfer Network ( http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/training.html )

In addition, OAQPS uses contractors and academic ins titutions to develop and provide training for data collection activities that support regulatory effort s throughout EPA and monitoring organizations. In addition, instrument and data mana gement manufacturers provide training on the equipment they sell. Sometimes this training can be added to the equipment purchase cost.

1 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g10-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 4.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page:3 of 3



### Table 4-2 provides a suggested sequence of core QA- related ambient air monitoring courses for ambient air monitoring staff by job position. The suggest ed course sequences assume little or no experience in QA/QC or air monitoring but some courses may have pre-requisites. Persons having experience in the subject matter described in the courses would select courses according to their appropriate experience

level. Courses not included in the core se quence would be selected according to individual responsibilities, preferences, and available resources.

Table 4-2 Suggested Sequence of Core QA-related Ambient Air Training Courses for Ambi ent Air Monitoring and QA

Personnel

SourceSequence Course Title (SI = self instructional) Field Lab QCSupv. Data Mgt. Mon Supv. QA* QA Mgt.

APTI- SI:422 Air Pollution Control Orientation Course X X X X X X APTI 452 Principles and Practices of Air Pollution Control X X X X X

APTI -SI:100 Mathematics Review for Air Pollution Control X X QS- QA1 Orientation to Quality Assurance Management X X X APTI-SI:434 Introduction to Ambient Air Monitoring X X X X X X X APTI -SI:471 General Quality Assur ance Considerations for Ambient Air Monitoring X X X X X X X

APTI- SI:409 Basic Air Pollution Meteorology X X X X X APTI SI:473A Beginning Environm ental Statistical Techniques (Revised) X X X X X X X

APTI-470 Quality Assurance for Air Pollution Measurement Systems X X X X

QS-QA2 Data Quality Objectives Workshop X X X QS-QA3 Quality Assurance Project Plan X X X X APTI-435 Atmospheric Sampling X X X X X

No Source Basic Electronics X X X

APTI-SI:476B Continuous Emission M onitoring Systems - Operation &
Maintenance of Gas Monitors X X X X

APTI-474 Continuous Emission Monitoring X X X X APTI-SI:433 Network Design and Site Selection for Monitoring PM 2.5 and PM 10 in Ambient Air X X X

APTI-464 Analytical Methods for Air Quality Standards X X X X APTI Chain Of Custody X X X X X X X APTI- SI:436 Site Selection for Monitoring SO 2 X X X X OAQPS AQS Training (annual AQS conference) X X X QS- QA4 Data Quality Assessment X X X QS- QA5 Assessing Quality Systems X X X

APTI- Introduction to Environmental Statistics X X X X AWMA QA6 Quality Audits for Improved Performance X X ASQC-STAT1 Statistics for Effective Decision Making X X X X X *- Personnel performing technical system audits (TSAs) would fit into this category QS- Refers to Quality Staff http://www.epa.gov/quality1/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 8



# 5.0 Documentation and Records

Organizations that perform environmental data operations (EDO) and management activities must establish and maintain procedures for the timely prepar ation, review, approval, issuance, use, control,

revision and maintenance of documents and record s. Each organization should have a documented records management policy with the following elements addressed:

1. A list of files considered the official records and their media type (e.g., paper, electronic) 2. Schedule for retention and disposition of records 3. Storage and retrieval system of records 4. Person(s) responsible at each level of storage and retrieval for records 5. Assignment of appropriate levels of security

This information should be included in a monito ring organization’s quality assurance project plan. Please

refer to Section 14 for further in formation and the EPA records website 1



### A document, from a records management perspective, is a

volume that contains information that describes, defines, specifies, reports, certifies, or provides data or results pertaining to environmental programs. As

defined in the Federal Records Act of 1950 and the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995 (now 44 U.S.C. 3101-3107), records are: “...books, papers, maps, photographs, machine readable materials, or other documentary materials, regardless of physical form or characteristics, made or received by an agency of the

United States Government

under Federal Law or in

connection with the transaction of public business and preserved or appropriate for preservation by that agency or its legitimate successor as evidence of the organization, functions, policies, decisions, procedures, operations, or other

1 http://www.epa.gov/records/

Table 5-1 Types of Information that Should be Retained Through Document

Control.

Categories Record/Document Types

Management and Organization State Implementation Plan Reporting agency information Organizational structure of monitoring program Personnel qualifications and training Quality management plan Document control plan Support contracts

Site Information Network description Network plans

Site characterization file Site maps/pictures

Environmental Data Operations QA Project Plans (QAPPs) Standard operating procedures (SOPs) Field and laboratory notebooks Sample handling/custody records Inspection/maintenance records

Raw Data Any original data (routine and QC)

Data Reporting Air quality index report Annual SLAMS air quality information Data/summary reports Journal articles/pape rs/presentations

Data Management Data algorithms Data management plans/flowcharts

Quality Assurance Control charts and strip charts Data quality assessments QA reports System audits

Network reviewsQA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 8



### activities of the Government or becau se of the informational value of data in them....”. This section will provide guidance of documentation and records fo r the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program.

Table 5-1 represents the categories and types of reco rds and documents that are applicable for document control. Information on key documents in each category fo llows. It should be noted that the list contains documents that may not be applicable to particular orga nizations and, therefore, is not meant to be a list of required documentation. This list should also not be construed as the definitive list of record and document types.



### Electronic Records

As monitoring technologies advance it is becoming more likely that data will be generated and retained electronically. The majority of the documentation referre d to in this section can be saved as an electronic

record. Retention of electronic records 2 

### is included in the above definition. It is recommended that electronic as well as paper records be stored in a logi cal order for ease of access. This is discussed more in-depth in Section 14.



### Statute of Limitations

As stated in 40 CFR Part 31.42, in general, a ll information considered as documentation and records should be retained for 3 years from the date the grantee submits its final expenditure report unless otherwise noted in the funding agreement. However, if any litigation, claim, negotiation, audit or other action involving the records has been started before th e expiration of the 3-year period, the records must be retained until completion of the action and resolution of all issues that arise from it, or until the end of the regular 3-year period, whichever is later. For clarification purposes, the retention of samples produced as a result of required monitoring may differ depending on the program and/or purpose collected. For retention of samples for a specific program please re fer to the appropriate reference in CFR for the individual program.



## 5.1 Management and Organization

Most of the record types in this category in Table 5-1 can be found in a single document, the quality management plan. The quality management plan is a blueprint for how an organization’s quality management objectives will be attained. It includes the QA and QC activities used to ensure that the results of technical work are of the type and quality needed for their intended use. The EPA Quality Staff provide requirements for quality management plans 3 

### that monitoring organizations may find helpful.



## 5.2 Site Information

Site information provides vital data about each monito ring site. Historical site information can help determine and evaluate changes in measurement values at the site. This information should be kept to characterize the site through time. Because monito ring organizations are required to file an annual network plan and perform network assessments at a minimum of every five years, (40 CFR Part 58.10), this information should be retained and updated period ically by both the agency responsible for the site and the office responsible for reviewing the site information for the network assessment process

. The Annual Network Monitoring Plans, the 5-Year Netw ork Assessments and the Air Quality System (AQS)

2 http://www.epa.gov/records/tools/erks.htm

3 EPA Requirements for Quality Management Plans (QA/R-2) http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 8



### Site File are good areas to record, capture and retain site information. Another source where site information is provided is the quality assurance project plan. At a minimum the QAPP should identify the sites for which the QAPP applies.

Most ambient air agencies retain site records in pape r and/or electronic file format. Included in a site information file are maps and pictures of an individual site. Typically, the kinds of information found in a

site identification record should include:

1. The AQS site identification number

2. Station type (SLAMS, NCore, CSN, etc.)

3. Instrumentation, sampling and analysis methods for each parameter (manufacturer’s model number, pollutant measurement technique, AQS Method Code and Pollutant Code etc.)

4. The location, including street address and geographical coordinates

5. Purpose of measurements (monitoring to determ ine compliance with air quality standards)

6. The operating schedule for each monitor

7. The monitoring objective and spatial scale of re presentativeness for each monitor as defined in 40 CFR Part 58 appendix D

8. The MSA, CBSA, CSA or other area represented by the monitor

9. The designation of any Pb monitors as either sour ce-oriented or non-source-oriented according to 40 CFR Part 58 appendix D

10. Any monitors for which a waiver has been requested or granted by the EPA Regional

Administrator

11. Influential pollutant sources (point and area sources, proximity, pollutant density, etc.)

12. Topography (hills, valleys, bodies of water, trees; type and size, proximity, orientation, etc., picture of a 360 degree view from the probe of the monitoring site)

13. Atmospheric exposure (unrestricted, interferences, etc.)

14. Site diagram (measurement flow diagram, service lines, equipment configuration, etc.)

15. Site audits



## 5.3 Environmental Data Operations

A quality assurance program associated with the collec tion of ambient air monitoring data must include an effective procedure for preserving the integrity 4 

### of the data. Ambient air monitoring results, and in certain types of measurements - the sample itself, may be essential elements in proving the validity of the data or the decisions made using the data. Data can not be admitted as evidence unless it can be shown that they are representative of the conditions that existed at the time that the data (or sample) was collected. Therefore, each step in the sampling and analysis procedure must be carefully monitored and documented. There are basically four elements in the evidentiary phase of an overall quality assurance

program:

1. Data collection - includes measurement prepara tion and identification of the sample, sample location and sample time. It also includes the c onditions during the measurem ents in the form of data sheets, logbooks, strip charts, and raw data.

2. Sample and/or measurement result handling - incl udes evidence that the sample and data were

4 “the representational faithfulness of information to the tr ue state of the object that the information represents, where representational faithfulness is composed of four essential qualities or core attributes: completeness, currency/timeliness, accuracy/cor rectness and validity/authoriza tion." From Boritz, J. Efri m. IS Practioaners’ Views on Core Concepts of Information Intergrity. International Journal of Accounting Information Systems . Elsevier.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 8



### protected from contamination and tampering during transfer between people and from the sampling site to the laboratory and during analysis, transmittal, and storage. This process is documented in chain of custody forms.

3. Analysis - includes evidence that samples and data were properly stored prior to and after analysis, interpretation and reporting.



### 4. Preparation and filing of measurement report(s) - includes evidentiary requirements and retention

of records.

Failure to include any one of these elements in the co llection and analysis of ambient air monitoring data may render the results of the program inadmissi ble as evidence, or may seriously undermine the credibility of any report based on these data.

Environmental data operations include all the opera tions required to successfully measure and report a

value. Documentation for environm ental data operations would include:

 

### QA Project Plans - Documents how environmental data operations are planned, implemented, and assessed during the life cycle of a program, project, or task (see below).

 

### Standard operating procedures (SOPs)- Written documents that give detailed instruction on how a monitoring organization will perform daily tasks: field, laboratory and administrative. SOPs are a required element of a QAPP and therefore any EDO must include these (see below).

 

### Field and laboratory notebooks- Any documentation that may provide additional information about the environmental data operation (e.g., ca libration notebooks, strip charts, temperature records, site notes, maintenance records etc.) (see below).

 

### Sample handling and/or custody records- Records tracing sample and data handling from the site through analysis, including transportation to facilities, sample storage, and handling between individuals within facilities. (Section 12 provides more information on this activity.)



### Quality Assurance Project Plan

As mentioned in the assistance agreement sections of 40 CFR Parts 30.54 (Non-State and Local Gov.) and 31.45 (State and Local Gov.) qualit y assurance programs must be establis hed. In addition to the grant requirements, 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A 5 

### states that each quality assurance program must be described

in detail in accordance with the EPA Requirements for Quality Assurance Project Plans 6



### .



### Standard Operating Procedures

In order to perform sampling and analysis operations consistently, standard operating procedures (SOPs) must be written as part of the QAPP. SOPs are writte n documents that detail the method for an operation, analysis, or action with thoroughly prescribed techniques and steps, and are officially approved as the method for performing certain routine or repetitiv e tasks. Although not every activity in the field/laboratory needs to be documented, the ac tivities that could potentially cause measurement uncertainties, or significant variance or bias, should be described in an SOP.

SOPs should ensure consistent conf ormance with organizational practices, serve as training aids, provide ready reference and documentation of proper procedures, reduce work e ffort, reduce error occurrences in data, and improve data comparability, credibility, and de fensibility. They should be sufficiently clear and

5 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

6 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 8



### written in a step-by-step format to be readily u nderstood by a person knowle dgeable in the general concept of the procedure.

Elements that may be included in SOPs which are explained in the guidance document Guidance for the Preparation of Standard Operating Procedures EPA QA/G-6 7 

### are:

1. Scope and Applicability

2. Summary of Method

3. Definitions

4. Health and Safety Warnings

5. Cautions

6. Interferences

7. Personnel Qualifications

8. Equipment and Supplies

9. Procedure (section may include all or part of these sections):

a. Instrument or Method Calibration

b. Sample Collection

c. Sample Handling and Preservation

d. Sample Preparation and Analysis

e. Troubleshooting

f. Data Acquisition, Calcul ations & Data Reduction

g. Computer Hardware & Software (used to ma nipulate analytical results and report data)

10. Data Management and Record s Management Parameters

11. Quality Control/Quality Assurance

Elements that are not needed may be excl uded or listed as “NA” (not applicable).

Personnel implementing SOPs may not be involved in the “larger picture” which includes the use of the data and whether or not DQOs are being achieved. Th erefore, it’s very important that the SOP covers the objectives of the monitoring program and the importan ce of following each step in an SOP in order to achieve quality results.

NOTE: There may be some incentive to rely on vendor developed methods manuals or to reference analytical methods on internet sites (e.g., TO-15 for NATTS VOCs) as a monitoring organization’s SOP without revision. Although the majority of information in these documents may be appropriate, many times the methods provide more than one option for method implementation and are not specific to the organization implementing the method. Therefore, organizations are encouraged to utilize these methods but edit them to make them specific to the organization.

Many of these operational procedures listed above ar e included in the EPA reference and equivalent methods and EPA guidance documents. However, it is the organization’ s responsibility to develop its own unique written operational procedures applicable to air quality measurements made by the organization.

SOPs should be written by individuals performing the procedures that are being standardized. SOPs for the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program environm ental data operations must be included in QAPPs,

7 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g6-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 8



### either by reference or by inclusion of the actual method. If a method is referenced, it should be stated that the method is followed exactly or an addendum that e xplains changes to the method should be included in the QAPP (see NOTE above). If a modified method w ill be used for an extended period of time, the method should be revised to include the changes to a ppropriate sections. In ge neral, approval of SOPs occurs during the approval of the QAPP. Individuals with appropriate training and experience with the particular SOPs in the QAPP need to review the SOPs.

SOPs should have some level of documented approval by the monitoring organization and be reviewed/approved at some frequency. There should be some level of doc ument control on SOPs so that personnel can quickly determine whether or not they are using the most current method. The document control information on the pages of this Handbook provi de a good example. It is suggested that the monitoring organization create a “master” list of th e current SOPs it uses and include some document

control information to allow users to identify the appropriate SOPs.



### Field and Laboratory Notebooks--

Recording of some field and laboratory data is necessary for ambient air monitoring. Section 11 provides information on the types of notebooks as well as the activities that can be recorded in these notebooks. A

standardized format should be utilized to ensure that all necessary information is obtained. The format should be designed to clearly identify the parameters during the measurements, the date and time, location of the measurement station, and ope rating personnel. This informati on may determine the credibility of

the data and should not be erased or altered. Do cument everything thoroughly from data collection through data use, to include conversations with QA/QC personnel and EPA officials concerning the data. The motto is “Write it down!” Nothing enhances the credibility of a data collection program more than thoroughly detailed documen tation. Data usability, for the futu re as well as the present applications, depends on how well all of these details are documented

If a manual record is kept, any error should be cr ossed out with a single line, and the correct value recorded above the crossed-out entry. It is recommended that manual documentation always use indelible black or blue ink when recording or correcting data entries, that corrections be made as specified above, and that all forms be completed with the signatures and dates required on the forms. Since these records may be subpoenaed, it is important that all field notes be legible. Corrections s hould be initialed and dated as to who made the change and when. Comments at th e bottom of the form can provide clarification as to why a change was made when others review the document

Electronic recording and storage of data is widely used. Electronic recording of the data allows for flagging and retention of additional information that is pertinent to day to day operations that could otherwise be lost with conventional systems. The same information as listed in the above paragraph should be recorded during routine quality checks. Some monitoring organizations like to electronically produce strip charts of data and/or supporting informat ion. This data can be used to enhance and support the validity of the data.

Do not discard original field records; copies of th em are not normally admissible as evidence. For neatness, the field data may be transcribed or copied for incorporation in a fina l report, but the originals should be kept on file.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 8



### Developing a consistent technique for documenti ng information in a logbook and archiving this information is very important. Below is a list of r esources that may be helpful in developing field and laboratory logbooks.

 Basic Requirements of an Electronic Recordkeeping System at EPA http://www.epa.gov/records/tools/erks.htm

 Keeping a Log Book http://www.aerogel.org/?p=814

 Practise Good Lab Book Practices http://www.anu.edu.au/commercia lisation/pdf/goodpractices.pdf

 Keeping A Scientific Notebook Or Loghttp://raider.mountunion.edu/Organizati ons/scienceday/pdf/Scientific%20log.pdf

 Implementing and Auditing Electronic Recordkeepi ng Systems Used in Scientific Research and Development http://www.tandfonline.com/doi/f ull/10.1080/10529410590924577

 "A Laboratory Quality Handbook of Best Practices " By Donald Singer. Chapter 5, Laboratory Documentation and Data, pg. 27-37

 Good Record Keeping –University of Florida http://www.research.ufl.edu/otl/goodrecords.html

 2003 NELAC Standard Section 5.5.5.5 (pg 215 of 324) http://www.nelacinstitute.org/docs/2003nelacstandard.pdf

 NEIC Procedures Manual for the Evidence Audit of Enforcement Investigations by Contractor Evidence Audit : Page IV-8 http://nepis.epa.gov/Adobe/PDF/9100LLFC.PDF



## 5.4 Raw Data

Raw data includes any original factual information from a measurement activity or study recorded in laboratory work sheets, records, memoranda, notes, com puter (electronic) files or exact copies thereof and that are necessary for the reconstruction and evaluation of a concentration, an assessment, a report or a decision. Raw data may include photographs, microf ilm or microfiche copies, computer printouts, magnetic media, including dictated observations, and recorded data from automated instruments. For automated information systems, raw data is consid ered the original observa tions recorded by the information system that are then re duced to data that are reported. Organizations should critically review the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program and create a list of what the organization considers raw data and provide a means to store this informa tion in a manner that is readily accessible.



## 5.5 Data Reporting

In addition to samples and field records, the report of the analysis itself may serve as material evidence. Just as the procedures and data leading up to the final re port are subject to the rules of evidence, so is the report. Written documents are generally consid ered as hearsay and are not admissible as evidence without a proper foundation. A proper foundation co nsists of introducing t estimony from all persons having anything to do with the major portions of the measurement and anal ysis. Thus, the field operator, all persons having custody of the samples and data , and the analyst would be required to lay the

foundation for the introduction of the measurement as evidence. This evidence can and should beQA Handbook Vol II, Section 5.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 8



### recorded in the form of initials and notes written in indelible ink at the time of data collection on paper that is kept on file. The proper f oundation is laid and available in case the data are questioned. Examples of this include strip charts dated and initialed by ope rator when visiting the site for routine quality checks and initials on routine paperwork and in logbooks when events are recorded. Electronic records should also allow for a recording of initials or be traceable to the operator performing the work.

To ensure compliance with legal rules, all measur ement reports should be filed in a safe place by a custodian having this responsibility. Although the fi eld notes and calculations are not generally included in the summary report, these materials may be required at a future date to bolster the acceptability and credibility of the report as evidence in an enforcement proceeding. Therefore, the full report including all original notes and calculation sheets should be kept in the file. Signed receipts for all samples or other data (chain of custody, field data sheets, etc.) should also be filed.

The original of a document is the best evidence; a copy is not normally admissible as evidence. Microfilm, snap-out carbon copies, and similar c ontemporary business methods of producing copies are acceptable in many jurisdictions if the unavailability of the original is adequately explained and if the copy was made in the ordinary course of business.

In summary, although all original calculations and me asurement data need not be included in the final report, they should be kept in the agency’s files. It is a good rule to file all reports together in a secure place. Keeping these documents under lock and key will en sure that the author can testify at future court hearings that the report has not been altered.



## 5.6 Data Management

Much of the data collected for the Ambient Air Qua lity Monitoring Program will be collected through the use of automated systems. These systems must be effectively managed and documented by using a set of guidelines and principles by which adherence will ensure data integrity. Discussions of data management activities and the requirements for documentation can be found in Section 14.



## 5.7 Quality Assurance

Quality assurance information is necessa ry to document the quality of da ta. A monitoring organization’s plan for all quality assurance activiti es must be documented in its QAPP



### . This information should be

retained in a manner that it can be associated with the routine data that it represents. QA information

includes:

 

### Control charts - Use of control charts is explained in Section 10.6.

 

### Data quality assessments (DQAs) - These assessments are a statistical and scientific evaluation of the data set to determine the validity and performance of the data collection design and to determine the adequacy of the data set for its intended use. More discussion on DQAs can be

found in Section 18.

 

### QA Reports - Reports pertaining to the quality of data are discussed in Sections 3 and 16.

 

### Evaluation/Audits - Assessments of various phases of the environmental data operation are

discussed in Section 15.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 16



# 6.0 Monitoring Network Design

The development of a monitoring network of sites for a specific pollutant requires:

1. Understanding the monitoring objective(s).

2. Identifying the spatial scale most appropr iate for the monitoring objective(s).

3. Identifying the general locations where the monito ring site(s) should be placed in order to collect a representative pollutant measurement.

4. Identifying specific monitoring sites.

This section describes the general concepts for estab lishing the SLAMS, NCore, CSN, PAMS, and open path monitoring. Additional details can be found in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D 1 

### and the guidance

information for the various monitor networks that can be found on AMTIC 2



### .

As described in Section 1, air quality monitoring da ta are generally collected for one or more of the following objectives:

 

### To provide air pollution data to th e general public in a timely manner

 

### To support compliance with ambient air quality st andards and emissions strategy development

 

### To support for air pollution research studies

Network information related to these purposes are discussed below.



### Timely Air Quality Public Reporting- AIRNow

The U.S. EPA, NOAA, NPS, tribal, state, and local agencies developed AIRNow 3 

### to provide the public with easy access to national air quality information. Th e AIRNow site offers daily Air Quality Index (AQI):

Conditions- Nationwide and regional real-time ozone and PM 2.5 

### air quality maps covering 46 US States and parts of Canada. These maps are updated daily every hour. A click of a mouse brings up the U.S. map and a second click can bring up the AQI details of a region, state or local area within a

state.

Forecasts - Nationwide daily air quality forecasts for over 300 major cities and areas in the U.S.

In addition this information is also found in local/national newspapers /television, on local and tribal web pages and more recently on smart phone applications.

Federal requirements in 40 CFR Part 58.50 state th at Metropolitan Statistical Areas (MSAs) with a population of more than 350,000 are required to re port the AQI daily to the general public. The U.S. Office of Management and Budget defines MSAs accord ing to the most recent census. However, many monitoring organizations who are not subject to th e 58.50 AQI requirements participate in AIRNow. Guidance for reporting is included in the Technical Assistance Document for the Reporting of Daily Air Quality-The Air Quality Index (AQI) 4

1 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/

3 http://airnow.gov/

4 http://www.epa.gov/airnow/aqi_tech_assistance.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 16



### The air quality data used in AIRNow maps and forecast s are collected using either federal reference or equivalent monitoring methods (FRM/FEM), or approved regional methods (ARM). Since the information needed to make maps must be as "real-t ime" as possible, the data are displayed as soon as practical after the end of each hour. Although some preliminary data quality assessments are performed, the data as such are not fully verified and validated through the quality assurance procedures monitoring organizations use to officially submit and certify da ta on the EPA AQS. Therefore, data are used on the AIRNow Web site only for the purpose of reporting th e AQI. Information on the AIRNow web site is not used to formulate or support regulation, guidance or any other Agency decision or position.



### Compliance Monitoring

The information required for selecting the number of samplers 5 

### and the sampler locations include isopleth maps, population density maps, a nd source locations. The following are suggested guidelines:

 

### the priority area is the zone of highest polluti on concentration expected to occur in the area covered by the network; one or more st ations should be located in this area;

 

### close attention should be given to densely populat ed areas within the region, especially when they are in the vicinity of heavy pollution;

 

### the quality of air entering the region is to be assessed by stations situated on the periphery of the region; meteorological factors (e.g., frequencies of wind directions) are of primary importance in locating these stations;

 

### sampling should be undertaken in areas of projected growth to determine the effects of future development on the environment;

 

### a major objective of compliance monitoring is the evaluation of progress made in attaining the desired air quality; for this purpose, sampling stations should be strategically situated to facilitate evaluation of the implemented control strategies; and

 

### some information of air quality should be ava ilable to represent all portions of the region of

concern.

Some stations will be capable of fulfilling more than one of the guideline described above. For example, a station located in a densely populated area can indicate population exposures and can also document the changes in pollutant concentrations resulting from mitigation strategies used in the area.



### Research Monitoring

There are a number of activities that could be descr ibed under research monitoring. A few are considered

in this section

Environmental and Human Health Effects Research --

Air monitoring networks related to environmental an d human health effects are composed of integrating samplers both for determining pollutant concentrations for < 24 hours and for developing long term (> 24 hour) ambient air quality standards. The research re quires that monitoring points be located so that the resulting data will represent the population group unde r evaluation. Therefore, the monitoring stations

5 A “sampler” in this context refers to both continuous instruments that provide an ambient air concentration without additional preparation or analytical techniques as well as instruments that provide a sample needing additional analysis.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 16



### are established in the centers of small well-define d residential areas within a community. Data

correlations are made between observed health effects and observed air quality exposures.

Some considerations for aerometric monitoring in support of health studies follow:

 

### the station must be located in or near the population under study;

 

### pollutant sampling averaging times must be suffici ently short to allow for use in acute health effect studies that form the scientific basis for short-term standards;

 

### sampling frequency, usually daily, should be sufficient to characterize air quality as a function of time; and

 

### the monitoring system should be flexible and responsive to emergency conditions with data

available on short notice.

Attention must still be paid to QA/QC activities sinc e environmental or human health research activities can lead to policy decisions and potentially complianc e related monitoring. The uncertainty of this

research data should be known and quantified.

Atmospheric and or Methods Research --

Some research will be accomplished either for stud ying a particular atmospheric phenomenon or for determining if a particular sampler or analytical meth od is appropriate for ambient air monitoring. In this regard many of the points described of above for health research are applicable and include:

 Ensuring the data are representative (spatially an d temporally) of the population (or atmospheric conditions) under study

 Enough data are collected (including quality assu rance data) to make definitive statements or

decisions

 Ensuring that (method research) testing covers th e extremes of temperature, pressure, humidity

and other environmental conditions fo r which the method will be exposed

 Testing whether the method can be operated with little maintenance

 That the precision and bias of the method is comparable to the standard



### Additional Types of Monitoring

In addition to the three basic monitoring objectives, the following also occur with the Ambient Air Monitoring Program

Trends Monitoring --

Trends monitoring can be used to determine the extent and nature of air pollution and to determine the variations in the measured levels of the atmospheri c contaminants in respect to the geographical, socioeconomic, climatological and other factors. The data are useful in planning epidemiological investigations and in providing the background agai nst which more intensive regional and community studies of air pollution can be conducted. Trends monitoring is characterized by locating a minimal number of monitoring sites across as large an area as possible while still meeting the monitoring objectives. The NCore network, NATTS and the CSN meet the objectives of trends monitoring.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 16



### At times trends monitoring may classify /evaluate certain areas separately. An example would be monitoring urban and n on-urban areas. Urban sampling stations are usually located in the most densely populated areas of the region. In most regions, ther e are several urban sites. Non-urban stationsencompass various topographical categories such as farmland, desert, forest, mountain and coast. Nonurban stations are not selected specifically to be “clean air” control sites for urban areas, but they do provide a relative comparison between so me urban and nearby non-urban areas.

In interpreting trends data, limita tions imposed by the network design must be considered. Even though precautions are taken to ensure that each sampling s ite is as representative as possible of the designated area, it is impossible to be certain that measurements obtained at a specific site are not unduly influenced by local factors. Such factors can include topogr aphy, structures, sources of pollution in the immediate vicinity of the site, and other variables; the eff ects which cannot always be accurately anticipated, but nevertheless, should be considered in network desi gn. Comparisons among pollution levels for various areas are valid only if the sites are representative of the conditions for which the study is designed.

Emergency Episode Monitoring --

For episode avoidance purposes, data are needed qui ckly--in less than a few hours after the pollutant contacts the sensor. While it is possible to obtain data rapidly by on-site manual data reduction and reporting, the norm is the use of automated monitori ng/reporting networks that can report data back to central information management systems on an hourly basis (see Section 14). The severity of the problem, the size of the receptor area, and the ava ilability of resources all in fluence both the scope and sophistication of the monitoring system.

The control actions for emergencies must be based on real-time measurements that are correlated with the various decisions (e.g., evacuation) that need to be ma de using this information. Therefore it is necessary to use continuous air samplers because of the short du rations of episodes. Based on episode alert criteria and mechanisms now in use, 1-h averaging times are adequate for surveillance of episode conditions. Shorter averaging times provide information on data co llecting excursions, but they increase the need for

automation because of the bulk of data obtained. Longer averaging times (>6 hours) are not desirable because of the delay in response that these im pose. EPA has developed a document titled: EPA Emergency Response Air Monitoring Guidance Tables 6 

### that can be helpful in the selection of the right type of monitoring equipment based on the pollution and its severity.

Collection and analysis must be accomplished rapidly if the data are to be useful immediately. Collection instruments must be fully operable at the onset of an ep isode. For the instrument to be maintained in peak operating condition, either personnel must be stati oned at the sites during an episode or automated equipment must be operated that can provide auto matic data transmission to a central location.

Monitoring sites qualified for emergency episode monitoring should typically be located in areas where

human health and welfare are most threatened such as:

 

### in densely populated areas;

 

### near large stationary source of pollution;

 

### near hospitals or schools;

 

### near high density traffic areas; and

6
http://www.uscg.mil/hq/nsfweb/foscr /ASTFOSCRSeminar/Presentations/R emovalandResponseTech/AirMonGuida nceTables09Ed2.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 16

 

### near homes for the aged.

A network of sites is useful in determining the range of pollutant concentrations within the area, but the most desirable monitoring sites are not necessarily the most convenient. Portability of monitoring equipment and “footprint” can be key. Solar, sat ellite and low power technolog y can make the difference in response time and reporting. Public buildings such as schools, firehouses, police stations, hospitals, and water or sewage plants should be considered for reasons of access, security and existing

communications.



## 6.1 Monitoring Objectives and Spatial Scales

The monitoring network can include monitoring sit es located to meet the following objective(s),:

1. determine the highest concentrations expected to occur in the area covered by the network.

2. measure typical concentrations in areas of high population density.

3. determine the impact of significant sources or source categories on air quality.

4. determine general backgr ound concentration levels.

5. determine the extent of regional pollutant tran sport among populated areas; and in support of secondary standards.

6. measure air pollution impacts on visibility, vegeta tion damage, or other welfare-based impacts.

These six objectives indicate the nature of the data th at the monitoring network will collect that must be representative of the spatial area being studied. The primary monitoring objectives should be determined before any data is collected.

Monitoring stations that are located in areas where pollutant concentra tions are expected to be among the highest and in areas with the highest population dens ities are often used in h ealth effects research networks and generally use automa ted equipment to continually sampl e and analyze pollutant levels. These stations are used to report data to the public through AIRNow 7 

### and the air quality index (AQI) and can be used to alert the public to pote ntial deleterious air pollution episodes.

The goal in siting stations is to correctly match th e spatial scale represented by the sample of monitored air with the spatial scale most appropriate for the mo nitoring objective of the station. This achieves the goal of the data quality indicator representativeness discussed in Section 3. The representative measurement scales of greatest interest are shown below:

Micro Concentrations in air volumes associ ated with area dimensions ranging from several meters up to about 100 meters.

Middle Concentrations typical of areas up to several city blocks in size with dimensions ranging from about 100 meters to 0.5 kilometer. Neighborhood Concentrations within some extended area of the city that has relatively

uniform land use with dimensions in the 0.5 to 4.0 kilometers range.

Urban Overall, citywide conditions with dimensions on the order of 4 to

50 kilometers. This scale would usuall y require more than one site for

definition.

7 http://airnow.gov/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 16



### Regional Usually a rural area of reasonably hom ogeneous geography and extends from

tens to hundreds of kilometers.

National/Global Concentrations characterizing th e nation and the globe as a whole.

Table 6-1 illustrates the relationships among the f our basic monitoring objectives and the scales of representativeness that are generally most appr opriate for that objective. Appendix E provides more detailed spatial characteristics for each pollutant while Table 6-2 provides a summary for a number of the monitoring programs.

Table 6-1 Relationship Among Monitoring Objectives and Scales of Representativeness

Monitoring Objective Appropriate Siting Scale Highest Concentration Micro, middle, neighborhood, (sometim es urban/regional for secondarily

formed Population Neighborhood, urban Source impact Micro, middle, neighborhood General/background & Regiona l Transport Urban/regional Welfare-related Urban/regional



### There is the potential for using open path monitoring for microscale spatial scales. For microscale areas, however, siting of open path analyzers must reflect proper regard for the specific monitoring objectives. Specifically, the path-averaging nature of open path analyzers could result in underestimations of high pollutant concentrations at specific points within th e measurement path for other ambient air monitoring situations. In open path monitoring, monitoring pa th lengths must be commensurate with the intended scale of representativeness and located carefully with respect to local sources or potential obstructions. For short-term/high-concentration or source-oriented monitoring, the monitoring path may need to be further restricted in length and be oriented perpe ndicular to the wind direction(s) determined by air quality modeling leading to the highest concentration, if possible. Alternatively, multiple paths may be used advantageously to obtain both wider area coverage and peak concentration sensitivity.

Table 6-2 Summary of Spatial Scales for SLAM S, NCore, PAMS, and Open Path (OP) Sites

Spatial Scale SLAMS Sites 1 PM 10-2.5 NCore CSN NATTs PAMS OP

SO 2 CO O 3 NO 2 Pb PM 10 PM 2.5 Micro * * * * * * *

Middle * * * * * * * * Neighborhood * * * * * * * * * * * * *

Urban * * * * * * * * * Regional * * * * *

1 SLAMS Site scales based on current listing in 40 CFR Part 58 , Appendix D and do not include NCore spatial sc ale objective.



### 6.1.1 Monitoring Boundaries

The NAAQS refer to several boundaries that are defi ned below. These definitions are derived from the U.S. Office of Management and Budget (OMB).

Core-based Statistical Area (CBSA) – is defined by the OMB as a statistical geographic entity consisting of the county or counties associated with at least one urbanized area/urban cluster of at least 10,000 population, plus adjacent counties having a hi gh degree of social and economic integration.

Metropolitan Statistical Area (MSA) - a category of CBSA with populations greater than 50,000 8



### .

8 

### http://www.census.gov/population/ estimates/metro-city/List1.txtQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 16



### Micropolitan Statistical Area - are a category of CBSA with popul ations between 10,000 and 50,000

Combined Statistical Area (CSA) - is defined by the OMB as a geographical area consisting of two or more adjacent CBSAs with employment interchange of at least 15 percent. Combination is automatic if the employment interchange is 25 pe rcent and determined by local opini on if more than 15 but less than 25 percent 9



### .

New England city and town areas (NECTAs) - are analogous to CBSAs and are similarly classified as either metropolitan NECTAs (corresponding to MS As) or micropolitan NECTAs (corresponding to micropolitan statistical areas). The principal differe nce between a CBSA and a NECTA is that NECTAs use New England towns as building blocks instead of counties. In the New England region, towns are a much more important level of gove rnment than counties. Because of this, NECTAs are usually a much closer approximation to metropolitan areas in New England than MSAs

Monitoring Planning Area (MPA) - means a contiguous geographic ar ea with established, well defined boundaries, such as a CBSA, county or State, having a common area that is used for planning monitoring

locations for PM 2.5 

### . An MPA may cross State boundaries, such as the Philadelphia PA–NJ MSA, and be further subdivided into community monitoring zones. MPAs are generally oriented toward CBSAs or CSAs with populations greater than 200,000, but for convenience, those portions of a State that are not associated with CBSAs can be considered as a single MPA.

Community Monitoring Zone (CMZ)

– means an optional averaging area with established, well defined boundaries, such as county or census block, within an MPA that has relatively uniform concentrations of

annual PM 2.5 

### as defined by 40 CFR Part 50, Appendix N.



## 6.2 Monitoring Site Location

Location of the monitoring site is initially dependent on the monitoring objective. For example once it is known that there is a requirement to monitor for peak ambient CO at a microscale site, it reduces the monitoring site location to specific areas. Hence, the first task when evaluating a possible site location is

to determine the scale for which a candidate loca tion can qualify by considering the following:

1. location and emissions strengths of nearby sources, especially major source

2. prevailing wind direction in the area

3. nearby uniformity of land use

4. nearby population density.

To select locations according to these criteria, it is necessary to have detailed information on the location of emission sources, geographical variability of am bient pollutant concentrations, meteorological conditions and population density. Therefore, selection of the number, locations and types of sampling stations is a complex process. The variability of sources and their intensities of emissions, terrains, meteorological conditions and demographic features requi re that each network be developed individually. Thus, selection of the network will be based upon the b est available evidence and on the experience of the

decision team.

9 

### http://www.census.gov/population/ estimates/metro-city/List6.txtQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 16



### There has been trend for multi-pollutant monitoring (e.g ., NCore). If possible, monitoring organizations should try to take advantage of combining pollutant m onitoring to a smaller network of sites only when it does not conflict with meeting the primary objective for the pollutants at the site.

The sampling site selection process involves considerations of the following factors:

Economics - Site selection economics/expenditures consists of: 1) rental of property, if necessary; 2) installation of power and/phone lines; 3) excavation of the grounds; 4) installation of fencing or other security; 5)installation of lightning pr otection; and 6) delivery of trailer/shelter and monitors to the site. Different site selections may entail significantly different costs.

Security - Experience has shown that in some cases, a pa rticular site may not be appropriate for the establishment of an ambient monitoring station simply due to problems with the security of the equipment in a certain area. If the problems cannot be remedi ed via the use of standard security measures such as lighting, fences, etc., then attempts should be made to locate the site as near to the identified sector as possible while maintaining adequate security.

Logistics - Logistics is the process of dealing with the procurement, maintenance and transportation of material and personnel for a monitoring operation. Th is process requires the full knowledge of all aspects of the data collection operation including:

Planning Staffing Reconnaissance Procurement of goods and services Training Communications Scheduling Inventory Safety

Atmospheric considerations - Atmospheric considerations may include the spatial and temporal variability of the pollutants and its transport to the mon itoring site. Effects of buildings, terrain, and heat sources or sinks on the air trajectories can produce local anomalies of excessive pollutant concentrations. Meteorology must be considered in determining not only the geographical location of a monitoring site but also such factors as height, direction, a nd extension of sampling probes. The following meteorological factors can greatly influence the dispersion of pollutants:

Wind speed affects the travel time from the pollutant source to the receptor and the dilution of polluted air in the downwind direction. The concentrations of air pollutants are inversely proportional to the wind speed.

Wind direction influences the general movements of pollutants in the atmosphere

. Review of

available data can indicate mean wind direction in the vicinity of the major sources of emissions

.

Wind variability refers to the random motions in both hor izontal and vertical velocity components

of the wind. These random motions can be consid ered atmospheric turbulence, which is either mechanical (caused by structures and changes in terrain) or thermal (caused by heating and cooling of land masses or bodies of water). If the scale of turbulent motion is larger than the size of the pollutant plume, the turbulence will move the entire plume and cause looping and fanning; if smaller, it will cause the plume to diffuse and spread out.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 16



### If the meteorological phenomena impact with some regular ity, data may need to be interpreted in light of these atmospheric conditions. Other meteorological c onditions to consider are atmospheric stability and lapse rate (the decrease of an atmospheric variable with height).

A useful way of displaying wind data is a wind rose diagram constructed to show the distribution of wind speeds and directions. The wind rose diagram shown in Figure 6.1 represents conditions as they converge on the center from each direction of the compass. More detailed guidance for meteorological considerations is available in QA Handbook Volume IV Meteorological

Measurements 10 

### . Relevant weather information, such as stability-wind roses, is usually available

from local National Weather Service stations. For PAMS monitoring, in many areas there are three types of high ozone days: overwhelming transport, weak transport (or mixed transport and stagnation) and stagnation. The wind rose concept to site monitors is only applicable to the transport types, but not applicable to the stagnation type.

Meteorological conditions, particularly those that can a ffect light transmission, should also be considered in selecting the location for open path analyzers (e.g., the influence of relative humidity on the creation of fog, the percentage of heavy snow, and the possible fo rmation of haze, etc.). The percent fog, percent snow fall, percent haze, and hourly visibility (from nearest airport) may impact data completeness. Although sites with high relative humidity may have data capture rates around 90 percent, sites with relative humidity greater than 80 percent more than 20 percent of the time should be carefully assessed for data completeness, or avoided. Similarly, severe fog, snow fall, or haze that affects visibility can affect data completeness and should be kept to less than 20 percent of the time. The time of day or season

when such conditions occur should also be determined to ensure that representative data from various time periods and seasons are collected. No more than 20 percent of data in any ti me period should be lost as a result of the aforementioned meteorological conditi ons. Sometimes, high data capture at locations with frequent fog or other obscurant conditions can be enhanced by using a shorter path length of 50 to 100 meters. However, this can be done only for microscale sites. Meteorological data

considerations therefore should include the followi ng measurements: (1) hourly precipitation amounts for climatological comparisons, (2) hourly relative humid ity, (3) percent haze, and (4) airport visibility.

Topography - Both the transport and the diffusion of air pollutants are complicated by topographical features. Minor topographical features may exert sm all influences; major features, such as deep river valleys or mountain ranges, may affect large areas. Be fore final site selection, review the topography of the area to ensure that the purpose of monitoring at that site will not be adversely affected. Table 6-3 summarizes important topographical features, their effects on air flow, and some examples of influences on monitoring site selection. Land use and topograp hical characterization of specific areas can be determined from U.S. Geological Survey (USGS) maps as well as from land use maps.

10 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/met.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 16

Table 6-3 Relationships of Topography, Air Flow, and Monitoring Site Selection

Topographical

Feature Influence on Air Flow Influence on Monitoring Site Selection

Slope/Valley Downward air currents at night and on cold days; up slope winds on clear days when valley heating occurs . Slope winds and valley channeled winds; tendency toward down-slope and down-valley winds; tendency toward inversions Slopes and valleys as special sites for air monitors because pollutants generally are well dispersed;

concentration levels not representative of other geographic areas; possible placement of monitor to determine concentration levels in a population or industrial center in valley

Water Sea or lake breezes inland or parallel to shoreline during the day or in cold weather; land breezes at night. Monitors on shorelines generally for background readings or for obtaining pollution data on water traffic

Hill Sharp ridges causing turbulence; air flow around obstructions during stable conditions, but over obstructions during

unstable conditions Depends on source orientation; upwind source emissions generally mixed down the slope, and siting at foot of hill not generally advantageous; downwind source emissions generally down washed near the source; monitoring close to a source generally desi rable if population centers adjacent or if monitoring protects workers

Natural or

manmade

obstruction Eddy effects Placement near obstructions may not produce representative readings



### Pollutant Considerations - A sampling site or an array of sites for one pollutant may be appropriate for another pollutant species because of the configuration of sources, the local meteorology or the terrain. Pollutants undergo changes in their compositions betw een their emission and their detection; therefore, the impact of that change on the measuring syst em should be considered. Atmospheric chemical reactions such as the production of O 3 

### in the presence of NO

x 

### and hydrocarbons (HCs) and the time delay

between the emission of NO

x 

### and HCs and the detection peak of O 3 

### values may require either a sampling network for the precursors of O 3 

### and/or a different network for the actual O 3 

### measurement.

The success of the PAMS monitoring program is predi cated on the fact that no site is unduly influenced by any one stationary emissions source or small gr oup of emissions sources. Any significant influences would cause the ambient levels measured by that partic ular site to mimic the emissions rates of this source or sources rather than following the changes in nonattainment area-wide emissions as intended by the Rule. For purposes of this screening procedure, if more than 10% of the typical “lower end”

concentration measured in an urban area is due to a nearby source of precursor emissions, then the PAMS site should be relocated or a more refined analysis conducted than is presente d here. Detailed procedures

can be found in the PAMS Implementation Manual 11



### .

None of the factors mentioned above stand alone. Each is dependent in part on the others. However, the objective of the sampling program must be clearly de fined before the selection process can be initiated, and the initial definition of priorities may have to be reevaluated after consideration of the remaining

factors before the final site selection

. While the interactions of the factors are complex, the site selection problems can be resolved. Experience in the operatio n of air quality measurement systems; estimates of air quality, field and theoretical studies of air diffusi on; and considerations of atmospheric chemistry and air pollution effects make up the required expertise needed to select the optimum sampling site for obtaining data representative of the monitoring objectives.

11 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsmain.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 16



### 6.2.1 PAMS Site Descriptions

The PAMS network array for an area should be fashi oned to supply measurements that will assist States in understanding and solvi ng ozone nonattainment problems. Tabl e 6-4 describes the five site types identified in the PAMS network. In 2007, EPA dete rmined that the number of required PAMS sites could be reduced. Only one Type 2 site is required per area regardless of population; Type 4 sites would not be required; and only one Type 1 or one Ty pe 3 site would be required per area.

Table 6-4 Site Descriptions of PAMS Monitoring Sites

Type # Meas. Scale Description

1 Urban Upwind and background characterization to identify those areas which are subjected to overwhelming incoming transport of ozone. The #1 Sites are located in the predominant morning upwind direction from the local area of maximum precu rsor emissions and at a distance sufficient to obtain urban scale measurements. Typically, these si tes will be located near the upwind edge of the photochemical grid model domain.

2 Neighborhood Maximum ozone precurso r emissions impacts located immediately downwind (using the same morning wind direction as for locating Site #1) of the area of maximum precursor emissions and are typically placed near the downwind boundary of the central business district (CBD) or primary area of precursor emissions mix to obt ain neighborhood scal e measurements.

2a Neighborhood Maximum ozone precursor emissions impacts -second-most predominant morning wind

direction

3 Urban Maximum ozone concentrations occurring downwind from the area of maximum precursor

emissions. Locations for #3 Sites should be chosen so that urban scale measurements are obtained.
Typically, these sites are located 10 to 30 miles from the fringe of the urban area

4 Urban Extreme downwind monitoring of transported ozone and its precursor concentrations exiting the

area and will identify those areas which are potentially contributing to overwhelming ozone
transport into other areas. The #4 Sites are located in the predominant afternoon downwind

direction from the local area of maximum precursor emissions at a distance sufficient to obtain

urban scale measurements. Typically, these sites will be located near the downwind edge of the
photochemical grid model domain.



### There are three fundamental criteria to consider wh en locating a final PAMS site: sector analysis, distance, and proximate sources. These three criteria are considered carefully by EPA when approving or disapproving a candidate site for PAMS.



### 6.2.2 NCore Site Descriptions

NCore is a multi pollutant network that integrates several advanced measurement systems for particles, pollutant gases and meteorology. Most NCore stations have been operating since the formal start of the network on January 1, 2011. The NCore Network addresses the following objectives:

 Timely reporting of data to the public by s upporting AIRNow, air quality forecasting, and other public reporting mechanisms;

 Support for development of emission strategies through air quality model evaluation and other observational methods;

 Accountability of emission strategy progress thr ough tracking long-term trends of criteria and non-criteria pollutants and their precursors;

 Support for long-term health assessments that c ontribute to ongoing reviews of the NAAQS;QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 16



###  Compliance through establishing nonattainment/atta inment areas through comparison with the NAAQS;

 Support to scientific studies ranging across technological, health, and atmospheric process disciplines; and

 Support to ecosystem assessments recognizing th at national air quality networks benefit ecosystem assessments and, in turn, benefit from data specifically designed to address ecosystem analyses.

The NCore network began Jan 1, 2011, consisting of 80 sites; 63 urban s ites and 17 rural sites. For more detailed information on each specific site, click on the " sites map " link and this will connect to each site's Characterization Report.

NCore is both a repackaging and an enhancement of existing networks. The emphasis on the term “Core” reflects a multi-faceted, multi-pollutant national netw ork that can be complemented by more specific efforts, such as intensive field campaigns to unders tand atmospheric processes, or personal and indoor measurements to assess human exposure and health e ffects. The NCore network will replace the current National Air Monitoring Station (NAMS) and leverag es all of the major existing networks to produce an integrated multi-pollutant approach to air monitoring.

Emphasis is placed on a backbone of multi-pollutant sites, continuous monitoring methods, and measurement of important pollutants other than the criteria pollutants (e.g., ammonia and NOy). When complete, NCore will meet a number of impor tant data needs: improve d flow and timely reporting of data to the public, including supporting air quality forecasting and information systems such as AIRNow; continued determination of NAAQS complia nce; improved development of emissions control strategies; enhanced accountability for the effectiveness of emission control programs; and more complete information for scientific, public health, and ecosyst em assessments. Structurally, NCore will establish three levels of monitoring sites:

 Level 1– a small number of research-oriented sites accommodating the greatest diversity of instrumentation with specific targeted objectiv es, reasonably analogous to the current PM Supersite program;

 Level 2 – the backbone network of approximately 75 long-term, nationwide multi-pollutant sites, encompassing both urban (about 55 sites) and rural (about 20 sites) locations;

 Level 3 – sites focused primarily on specific pollu tants of greatest concern (PM and O3), with as few as one measured parameter. It is estimated that over 1,000 Level 3 sites will be part of

NCore.

Specific design criteria for NCore can be found in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix D.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 16



## 6.3 Minimum Network Requirements

Rather than place tables for minimum monitoring s ite requirements in the Handbook (since they have a tendency to change), the reader is directed to 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D 12 

### of the most current regulation to find the appropriate mini mum monitoring network requirements.



## 6.4 Operating Schedules

NOTE: The reader should check the most cu rrent version of 40 CFR Part 58 to ensure the schedules below have not changed

.

For continuous analyzers , consecutive hourly averages must be collected except during:

1. 

### periods of routine maintenance;

2. 

### periods of instrument calibration, quality c ontrol checks or performance evaluation; or

3. 

### periods or monitoring seasons exempted by the Regional Administrator.

For Pb manual methods, at least one 24-hour sample must be collected every 6 days except during periods or seasons exempted by the Regional Administrator.

For PAMS VOC samplers, samples must be collected as specified in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D Section 5. Area specific PAMS operating schedules mu st be included as part of the PAMS network description and must be approved by the Regional Administrator.

For manual PM 2.5 

### samplers :

1. Manual PM 2.5 

### samplers at SLAMS stations- a 24-hour sample must be taken from midnight to midnight (local time) to ensure national consiste ncy and other than NCore stations, must operate on at least a 1-in-3 day schedule at sites without a collocated continuously operating PM 2.5 

### monitor. For SLAMS PM 2.5 

### sites with both manual and continuous PM 2.5 

### monitors operating, the monitoring agency may request approval for a reduction to 1-in-6 day PM 2.5 

### sampling or for seasonal sampling from the EPA Regional Administ rator. The EPA Regional Administrator may grant sampling frequency reductions after considera tion of factors, including but not limited to

the historical PM 2.5 

### data quality assessments, the location of current PM 2.5 

### design value sites, and their regulatory data needs.

Required SLAMS stations whose measurements dete rmine the design value for their area and that are within plus or minus 10 percent of the NAA QS; and all required sites where one or more 24- hour values have exceeded the NAAQS each year for a consecutive period of at least 3 years are required to maintain at least a 1-in-3 day sa mpling frequency. A continuously operating FEM or

ARM PM 2.5 

### monitor satisfies this requirement. Requi red SLAMS stations whose measurements determine the 24-hour design value for their area and whose data are within plus or minus 5 percent of the level of the 24-hour PM 2.5 

### NAAQS must have an FRM or FEM operate on a daily schedule if that area's design value for the a nnual NAAQS is less than the level of the annual

PM 2.5 

### standard. A continuously operating FEM or ARM PM 2.5 

### monitor satisfies this requirement unless it is identified in the monitoring agency 's annual monitoring network plan as not

12 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tplQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 14 of 16



### appropriate for comparison to the NAAQS. The national sampling schedule can be found on

AMTIC 13



### .
2. Manual PM 2.5 

### samplers at NCore stations and required regional background and regional transport sites must operate on at least a 1-in-3 day sampling frequency.

3. Manual PM 2.5 

### speciation samplers at CSN stations must operate on a 1-in-3 day sampling frequency.

For PM 10 

### samplers , a 24-hour sample must be taken from midnight to midnight (local time) to ensure national consistency. The minimum monitoring schedul e for the site in the area of expected maximum

concentration shall be based on the relative level of that monitoring site concentration with respect to the 24-hour standard as illustrated in Figure 6.2. If the operating agency demonstrates by monitoring data that during certain periods of the year conditions preclude violation of the PM 10 

### 24-hour standard, the increased sampling frequency for those periods or seasons may be exempted by the Regional Administrator and permitted to revert back to once in six days. The minimum sampling schedule for all other sites in the area remains once every six days.

F igure 6.2 Sampling schedule based on ratio to the 24-hour PM 10 NAAQS



### For manual PM 10–2.5 

### samplers:

1. Manual PM 10–2.5 

### samplers at NCore stations must operate on at least a 1-in-3 day schedule at

sites without a collocated continuous ly operating federal equivalent PM 10–2.5 

### method that has been designated in accordance with 40 CFR Part 53.

2. Manual PM 10–2.5 

### speciation samplers at NCore stations must operate on at least a 1-in-3 day sampling frequency.

13 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/calendar.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 15 of 16



### For NATTS Monitoring, samplers must operate year round and follow the national 1-in-6 day sampling

schedule.

6.5.1 Operating Schedule Completeness

Data required for comparison to the NAAQS have specific completeness requirements. These completeness requirements generally start from comple teness at hourly and 24-hour concentration values. However, the data used for NAAQS determinations in clude 3-hour, 8-hour, quar terly, annual and multiple year levels of data aggregation. Generally, depending on the calculation of the design value, EPA requires data to be 75% complete. All continuous measureme nts come down to what is considered a valid hour and currently all 24-hour estimates based on samp ling (manual PM, Pb, TSP) are based on a 24-hour sampling period. Table 6-5 provides the complete ness goals for the various ambient air program monitoring programs.

The data cells highlighted in Table 6-5 refer to the standards that apply to the specific pollutant. Even though a highlighted cell lists the completeness requi rement, CFR provides additional detail, in some cases, on how a design value might be calculated with less data than the stated requirement. Therefore, the information provided in Table 6-5 should be cons idered the initial completeness goal. Completeness goals that are not highlighted, although not covered in CFR, are very important to the achievement of the CFR completeness goals. So, for example, even tho ugh there is only an 8-hour ozone standard, it’s important to have complete 1-hour values in order to compare to the 8-hour standard.

Table 6-5 Completeness Goals fo r Ambient Air Monitoring Data 

### Completeness Goals and Associated Standards (highlighted)

Pollutants 1-hour 3-hour 8-hour 24-hour Quarterly Annual

CO 45, 1 min. values 75% of hourly values 75% of hourly values 75% of hourly values per quarter

O 3 45, 1 min. values 75% of hourly values

SO 2 45, 1 min. values All 3 hours 75% complete 75% of hourly values 75% of hourly values per quarter

NO 2 45, 1 min. values 75% of hourly values per quarter

PM 10 Cont 45, 1 min. values 18 Hours

PM 2.5 Cont. 45, 1 min. values 18 Hours

PM 10 Manual 23 Hours**

PM 2.5 Manual 23 hours 75% of samples

Pb 23 Hours 3 mo avg

>75% of monthly

means
PAMS 23 Hours

NATTS 23 Hours

CSN 23 Hours

** not defined in CFR



### For continuous instruments, it is suggested that 45, 1-minute values be considered a valid hour. Therefore, it is expected that 1-minute concentration values woul d be archived for a period of time (see statute of limitations in Section 5). Since various QC checks ta ke time to complete, (zero/span/1-point QC) it is suggested that they be implemented in a manner that spans two hours (e.g., at 11:45 PM to 12:15 AM) in order to avoid losing an hour’s worth of data.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 6.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 16 of 16



### 6.5.2 Monitoring Seasons

Most of the monitoring networks operate year round with the exception of PAMS and ozone monitoring.

PAMS - 40 CFR 58, Appendix D stipulates that PAMS pr ecursor monitoring must be conducted annually throughout the months of June, July and August (as a minimum) when peak O 3 

### values are expected in each area. Alternate precursor monitoring periods may be submitted for approval to the Administrator as a part of the annual monitoring network plan.

Ozone - Since O 3 

### levels decrease significantly in the cold er parts of the year in many areas, O 3 

### is required to be monitored at SLAMS monitoring sites only during the ‘‘ozone season’’ as designated in the AQS files on a State-by-State basis and described in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D 14 

### . Deviations from the O 3 

### monitoring season must be approved by the EPA Regi onal Administrator, documented within the annual monitoring network plan, and updated in AQS.



## 6.5 Network Plan Reporting

The following two types of documents related to th e monitoring network are required to be reported to

EPA. Additional information on these assessmen ts can be found in 40 CFR Part 58.10



### Annual Monitoring Network Plan

The monitoring organization shall submit to the Regi onal Administrator an annual monitoring network plan which shall provide for the establishment and main tenance of an air quality surveillance system that consists of a network of SLAMS monitoring stations including FRM, FEM, and ARM monitors that are part of SLAMS, NCore stations, CSN stations, State sp eciation stations, SPM stations, and/or, in serious, severe and extreme ozone nonattainment areas, PAMS stations, and SPM monitoring stations. The plan shall include a statement of purposes for each mon itor and evidence that siting and operation of each monitor meets the requirements of appendices A, C, D, and E of this part, where applicable. The annual monitoring network plan must be made available fo r public inspection for at least 30 days prior to submission to EPA. These network plans are posted on AMTIC 15



### 5-Year Network Assessments

The monitoring organization shall perform and submit to the EPA Regional Administrator an assessment of the air quality surveillance system every 5 years to determine, at a minimum, if the network meets the monitoring objectives defined in 40 CFR part 58 Appendix D to this part, whether new sites are needed, whether existing sites are no longer needed and can be terminated, and whether new technologies are appropriate for incorporation into the ambient ai r monitoring network. The network assessment must consider the ability of existing and proposed sites to support air quality characterization for areas with relatively high populations of susceptible individuals (e .g., children with asthma) and, for any sites that are being proposed for discontinuance, the effect on data users other than the agen cy itself, such as nearby

States and Tribes or health effects studies. For PM2. 5, the assessment also must identify needed changes to population-oriented sites. The State, or where a pplicable local, agency must submit a copy of this 5- year assessment, along with a revised annual network plan, to the Regional Administrator.

14 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

15 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/plans.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 16



# 7.0 The Sampling System

To establish the validity of ambient air monitoring data, it must be shown that:

 

### the proposed sampling method complies with the appropriate monitoring regulations;

 

### the equipment is accurately sited;

 

### the equipment was accurately calibrated usi ng correct and established calibration methods;

 

### there is enough information from data quality indicators to assess data uncertainty;

 

### samples are appropriately handled through proper chain of custody procedures, and

 

### the organization implementing the data coll ection operation are qualified and competent.

For example, if the only reasonable monitoring site has a less than ideal location, the data collection organization must decide whether a representative sample can be obtained at the site. This determination should be recorded and included in the program's QA PP. Although after-the-fact site analysis may suffice in some instances, good quality assurance techniqu es dictate that this analysis be made prior to expending the resources requi red to collect the data.

The purpose of this section is to describe the attri butes of the sampling system that will ensure the collection of data of a quality acceptable for the Am bient Air Quality Monitoring Program. A sampling system for the ambient air monitoring program will include aspects of:

 siting,

 the establishment of a monitoring station or platform for monitors/ samplers,

 outfitting for electricity, HVAC, water etc.,

 use of appropriate probe and inlet material,

 setting up quality control systems, and

 information management systems.

Information management systems will be described in Section



## 7.1 Monitor Placement

Final placement of the monitor at a selected site depends on physical obstructions and activities in the immediate area, accessibility/availab ility of utilities and other support facilities in correlation with the defined purpose of the specific monitor and its design. Because obstructions such as trees and fences can significantly alter the air flow, monitors should be pl aced away from obstructions. It is important for air flow around the monitor to be representative of the gene ral air flow in the area to prevent sampling bias. Detailed information on urban physiography (e.g., bu ildings, street dimensions) can be determined through visual observations, aerial photography and su rveys. Such information can be important in determining the exact locations of pollutant sources in and around the prospective monitoring site areas.

Network designers should avoid sampl ing locations that are unduly influenced by down wash or ground dust (e.g., a rooftop air inlet near a stack or a ground-l evel inlet near an unpaved road); in these cases, the sample intake should either be elevated above th e level of the maximum ground turbulence effect or placed at a reasonable distance from the source of ground dust.QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 16



### Depending on the defined monitoring objective, th e monitors are placed according to exposure to pollution. Due to the various physical and meteor ological constraints discussed above, tradeoffs will be made to locate a site in order to optimize represen tativeness of sample collection. The consideration should include categorization of sites relative to thei r local placements. Suggested categories relating to sample site placement for measuring a corresponding pollution impact are identified in Table 6-5.

Table 7-1 M onitoring Station Categories Relating to Sample Site Placement

Station Category Characterization

A (ground level) Heavy pollutant concentrations, high potential for pollutant buildup. A site 3 to 5 m (10

‐ 16 ft)

from major traffic artery and that has local terrain features restricting ventilation. A sampler
probe that is 3 to 6 m (10

‐ 20 ft) above ground.

B (ground level) Heavy pollutant concentrations, minimal potential for a pollutant buildup. A site 3 to 15 m (15

‐ 50 ft) from a major traffic artery, with good natural ventilation. A sampler probe that is 3 to

6 m (10

‐ 20 ft) above ground.

C (ground level) Moderate pollutant concentrations. A site 15 to 60 m (5

‐ 200 ft) from a major traffic artery. A sampler probe that is 3 to 6 m (10

‐ 20 ft ) above ground.

D (ground level) Low pollutant concentrations. A site 60 > m (> 200 ft) for a traffic artery. A sampler probe that is

3 to 6 m (10

‐ 20 ft) above ground.

E (air mass) Sampler probe that is between 6 and 45 m (20

‐ 150 ft) above ground. Two subclasses: (1) good

exposure from all sides (e.g., on top of building) or (2) directionally biased exposure (probe

extended from window).

F (source

‐ oriented) A sampler that is adjacent to a point source. Monitoring that yields data directly relatable to the

emission source.



## 7.2 Environmental Control

7.2.1 Monitoring Station Design

State and local agencies should design their monitoring st ations with the station operator in mind. Careful thought to safety, ease of access to instruments and optimal work space should be given every consideration. If the station operator has these issues addressed, then he/she will be able to perform their duties more efficiently and diligently. Having the instru ments in an area that is difficult to work in creates frustration, prolongs downtime and may delay require d maintenance (i.e., not cleaning manifolds because they are too hard to get to). The goal is to optimi ze data collection and quality and it starts with designing the shelter and laboratory around staff needs and requirements.

Monitoring stations may be located in urban areas wh ere space and land are at a premium, especially in large cities that are monitoring for NO

x 

### and CO. In many cases, the monitoring station is located in a building or school that is gracious enough to allow an ag ency to locate its equipment. Sometimes, a storage or janitorial closet is all that is available. Howe ver, this can pose serious problems. If the equipment is located in a closet, then it is difficu lt for the agency to control the eff ects of temperature, humidity, light,

vibration and chemicals on the instruments. In addition , security can also be an issue if people other than agency staff have access to the equipment. Monito ring organizations should gi ve serious thought to locating air monitoring equipment in stand-alone shelte rs with limited access, or modify existing rooms to the recommended station design if funds and staff time are available.

In general, air monitoring stations should be d esigned for functionality and ease of access for operation, maintenance and repair. In add ition, the shelter should be rugged enough to withstand local weather condition extremes. In the past, small utility trailers were the norm in monitoring shelters. However, in some areas, this will not suffice. Recently, steel and aluminum storage containers are gaining wideQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 16



### acceptance as monitoring shelters. It is recommended th at monitoring stations be housed in shelters that are fairly secure from intrusion or vandalism. All si tes should be located in fenced or secure areas with access only through locked gates or secure pathways. Th e shelter’s design dictates that they be insulated (R-19 minimum) to prevent temperature extremes within the shelter. All structures should be secured to their foundations and protected from damage during natural disasters. All monitoring shelters should be designed to control excessive vibrations and prevent external light from falling on the instruments, and provide 110/220 VAC voltage throughout the year. When designing a monitoring shelter, make sure that enough electrical circuits are secured for the current load of equipment plus other instruments that may be added later or audit equipment (e.g., NPAP/PEP). Every attempt should be made to reduce the environmental footprint of shelters to make them as energy efficient as possible. Some possibilities include venting of excess heat of monitoring instruments to th e outside in summer months, use of energy efficient fixtures and HVAC systems, and ensuring that the amount of space devoted to the monitors is not excessive (remembering that space is needed at times for a dditional QA equipment). Figure 7.1 represents one shelter design that has proven adequate.

The first feature of the shelter is that there are two rooms separated by a

door. The reasons for this are twofold. The entry and access should be into the computer/data review area.

This allows access to the site without having to open the room that houses the equipment. It also isolates the equipment from cold/hot air that can

come into the shelter when someone enters. Also, the Data Acquisition System (DAS)/data review area is

isolated from the noise and vibration of the equipment. In some cases vibration and noise can be reduced by locating pumps outside the shelter (if appropriate weather conditions exist). This area can be a place where the operator can print data, and prepare samples for the labor atory. This also gives the operator an area where cursory data review can take place. If something is observed during this initial review then possible problems can be corrected or investigated at that tim e. The DAS can be linked through cables that travel through conduit into the equipment ar ea. The conduit is attached to th e ceiling or walls and then dropped

down to the instrument rack.

The air conditioning/heating unit should be mounted to heat and cool the equipment room. When specifying the unit, make sure it will cool the room on the warmest days and heat on the coldest days of the year. Also, make sure the electrical circuits are able to carry the load. If necess ary, keep the door closed between the computer and equipment room to lessen the load on the heating or cooling equipment.

All air quality instrumentation should be located in an instrument rack or equivalent. The instruments and their support equipment are placed on sliding trays or rails. By placing the racks away from the wall, the

rear of the instruments are accessible



### . The trays or rails allow the site operators access to the instruments without removing them from the racks. Most instrume nt vendors offer sliding rails as an optional purchase. 

### If several instruments are placed in an instrument rack, the labeling of all power cords, sample and

Figure 7.1 Example Design for ShelterQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 16



### exhaust lines will help to identify where lines and inlets are and it will help when it comes time to trace things back to an instrument.

7.2.2 Sampling Environment

A proper sampling environment demands control of all physical parameters external to the samples that might affect sample stability, chemical reactions within the sampler, or the function of sampler components. The important parameters to be controlled are summarized in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Environment Control Parameters

Parameter Source of specification Method of Control

Instrument vibration Manufacturer’s specifications Design of instrument housi ngs, benches, etc., per manufacturer’s specifications . Locate pumps outside it appropriate conditions exist.

Light Method description or manufacturer’s specifications Shield chemicals or instruments that can be affected by natural or artificial light

Electrical voltage Method description or manufacturer’s specifications Constant voltage transformers or regulators; separate power lines; isolated high current drain equipment such as hi-vols, heating baths, pumps from regulated circuits

Temperature Method description or manufacturer’s specifications Regulated air conditioning system 24-hour temperature recorder; use electric he ating and cooling only

Humidity Method description or manufacturer’s specifications Regulated air conditioning system; 24-hour temperature recorder



### With respect to environmental temperature for designated analyzers, most analyzers have been tested and qualified over a temperature range of 20 o 

### C to 30 o 

### C; few are qualified over a wider range. When one is outfitting a shelter with monitori ng equipment, it is important to recognize and accommodate the instrument with the most sensitive temperature re quirement. The temperature range specifies both the range of acceptable operating temperatures and the range of temperature change which the analyzer can accommodate without excessive drift. The latter, th e range of temperature change that may occur between zero and span adjustments, is the most impor tant. EPA suggests that shelters be maintained within a standard deviation (SD) of + 2 o 

### C over a 24 hour period. The SD can be assessed using 1- hour shelter temperature estimates.

To accommodate energy conservation regulations or guidelines specifying lower thermostat settings, designated analyzers located in facilities subject to these restrictions may be operated at temperatures

down to 18 o 

### C, provided the analyzer temperature does not fluctuate by more than 10 o 

### C between zero and span adjustments. Operators should be alert to s ituations where environmental temperatures might fall

below 18 o 

### C, such as during night hours or weekends. HVAC system must be able to keep shelters temperatures above 18 o 

### C.

Shelter temperatures above 30 o 

### C also occur, due to temperature control equipment that is malfunctioning, lack of adequate power capacity, or shelters of inadequate design for the environmental conditions.

Occasional fluctuations above 30 o 

### C may require additional assurances th at data quality is maintained. Sites that continually have problems maintaini ng adequate temperatures may necessitate additional temperature control equipment or rejection of the area as a sampling site. If this is not an option, a waiver to operate beyond the required temperature range s hould be sought with the EPA Regional Office, if it

can be shown that the site can meet established data quality requirem ents. In addition, when providingQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 16



### cooling to shelters, care should be taken to a void cool air blowing directly on monitors.

In order to detect and correct temperature fluctuations , it is suggested that a 24-hour temperature recorder that collects hourly values (minimally), be located in the shelter. The device should be accurate to within

+ 2 o 

### C and checked every 6 months by a NIST traceable standard. These recorders can be connected to data loggers and should be considered official docum entation that should be filed (see Section 5). Many vendors offer these type of devices. Usually they ar e thermocouple/thermistor devices of simple design and are generally very sturdy. Reasons for using electronic shelter temperature devices are two-fold: 1) through remote interrogation of the DAS, the agency can tell if values collected by air quality instruments are valid, and 2) that the shelter temperature is within a safe operating range if the air conditioning/heating system fails.



## 7.3 Sampling Probes And Manifolds

7.3.1 Design of Probes and Manifolds for Automated Methods

Some important variables affecting the sampling mani fold design are the diameter, length, flow rate, pressure drop, and materials of construction. With the development of NCore precursor gas monitoring, various types of probe/manifold designs were re viewed. This information can be found in the Technical Assistance Document (TAD) for Precursor Gas Meas urements in the NCore Multi-pollutant Monitoring

Network 1 

### and is also included in Appendix F of this Handbook.

1 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/ monitorstrat/precursor/tadversion4.pdf 

### Of the probe and manifold material looked at over the years, only Pyrex ® 

### glass and Teflon ® 

### have been found to be acceptable for use as intake sampli ng lines for all the reactive gaseous pollutants. Furthermore, the EPA has specified borosilicate glass or FEP Teflon ® 

### as the only acceptable probe materials for delivering test atmospheres in the de termination of reference or equivalent methods. Therefore, borosilicate glass (which includes Pyrex ® 

### ), FEP Teflon ® 

### or their equivalent must be the only material in the sampling train (from inlet probe to the b ack of the analyzer) that can be in contact with the ambient air sample for existing and new SLAMS. In recent years questions have been asked about PFA (perfluoroalkoxy co-polymer). It’s a newer formulated Teflon than FEP. Like FEP, it is translucent which

is also not machined but unlike FEP can be molded in to fittings. It has been accepted as equivalent the

FEP Teflon ® 

### but there is no real advantage to using PFA.

For volatile organic compound (VOC) monitoring at PAMS, FEP Teflon ® 

### is unacceptable as the probe material because of VOC adsorption and desorption reactions on the FEP Teflon ®



### . Borosilicate glass, stainless steel, or its equivalent, are acceptable probe materials for VOC and carbonyl sampling. Care must be taken to ensure that the sample residence time is kept to 20 seconds or less (see below).QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 16



### When determining how to set up a sampling station with regards to probes, inlets and sampling material, monitoring organization have the option of:

1) using individual Teflon ® 

### sampling lines (Fig7.2) which may access the ambient air through one port (with a number of individual lines) but each line would run directly to an analyzer.

2) using glass manifolds (Fig 7.3) which

allow for ambient air to enter from a single inlet, collect in the manifold and then be distributed through manifold outlet ports in individual analyzers.

Either method is appropriate and it may depend on the number of analyzers at the site, how the shelter is configured for access, and what resources are available for maintenance and cleaning.

Residence Time Determination

No matter how nonreactive the sampling probe material ma y be, after a period of use, reactive particulate matter is deposited on the probe walls. Therefore, the ti me it takes the gas to transfer from the probe inlet to the sampling device is critical. Ozone, in the pr esence of nitrogen oxide (NO), will show significant losses even in the most inert probe material when the residence time exceeds 20 seconds. Other studies indicate that a 10 second or less residence time is easily achievable.

Residence time is defined as the amount of time that it takes for a sample of air to travel from the opening of the inlet probe (or cane) to the inlet of the instru ment and is required to be less than 20 seconds for reactive gas monitors. The residence time of pollutants within the sampling manifold is also critical. It is

recommended that the residence time within the manifo ld and sample lines to the instruments be less than 10 seconds (of the total allowable 20 seconds). If the volum e of the manifold does not allow this to occur, then a blower motor or other device (vacuum pump) can be used to decrease the residence time. The residence time for a manifold system is determined in the following way. First the volume of the cane, manifold and sample lines must be de termined using the following equation:

Total Volume = Cv +Mv + Lv

Where: Cv = Volume of the sample cane and extensions, cm 3


### Mv = Volume of the sample manifold and trap, cm 3



### Lv = Volume of the instrument lines, cm 3



### Each of the components of the sampling system must be measured individually. To measure the volumeQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 16



### of the components, use the following calculation:

V = pi * (d/2) 2 

### * L

Where: V = volume of the component, cm 3


### pi = 3.14159 L = Length of the component, cm d = inside diameter, cm

Once the total volume is determined, divide the volume by the flow rate of all instruments. This will give

the residence time.

It has been demonstrated that there ar e no significant losses of reactive gas (O 3 

### ) concentrations in conventional 13 mm inside diameter sampling lines of glass or Teflon if the sample residence time is 10 seconds or less. This is true even in sample lines up to 38 m in length, which collect substantial amounts

of visible contamination due to ambient aerosols. However, when the sample residence time exceeds 20 seconds, loss is detectable, and at 60 sec onds the loss is nearly complete.



### The air flow through the manifold must not be so great as to cause the pressure inside the manifold to be more than one inch of water below ambient. These last two conditions are in opposition to each other, but can be assessed as follows. Construct the manifold. Use a pitot tube to measure the flow of the sample inside the manifold. At the same time, attach a water manometer to a sampling port. Turn on the blower and measure the flow rate and the vacuum. (Remember to allow for the air demand of the instrumentation). Adjust the flow rate to fit between these two parameters. If this is impossible,

the diameter of the manifold is too small.

Placement of tubing on the Manifold : If the manifold that is employed at the station has multiple ports then placement

of the instrument lines can be crucial. If a manifold similar to Figure 7.4 is used ambient air flows down the center tube and then travels up on both sides of the manifold to the analyzer ports. It is suggested that instruments requiring lower flows be placed towards the bottom of the manifold. The general rule of thumb states that the calibration line (if used) placement should be in a location so that the calibration gases flow past the in struments before the gas is evacuated out of the manifold. Figure 7.4 illustrates two potential introduction ports for the calibration gas. The port at the elbow of the sampling cane provides more information about the cleanliness of the sampling system.



### 7.3.2 Placement of Probes and Manifolds

Probes and manifolds must be placed to avoid introducing

bias to the sample. Important considerations are probe height above the ground, probe length (for horizontal probes), and physical influences near the probe. Figure 7.4 Positions of calibration line in sampling manifold Pump

Analyzer Calibrator

Gas Excess Cal. Gas

Analyzer AnalyzerQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 16



### Some general guidelines for probe and manifold placement are:

 

### probes should not be placed next to air outlets such as exhaust fan openings

 

### horizontal probes must extend beyond building overhangs

 

### probes should not be near physical obstructions such as chimneys which can affect the air flow in the vicinity of the probe

 

### height of the probe above the ground depends on the pollutant being measured

Table 7-3 summarizes the probe and monitoring pa th siting criteria while Table 7-4 summarizes the spacing of probes from roadways. This informati on can be found in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix E 2 

### . For

PM 10 

### and PM 2.5 

### , Figure 7.5 provides the acceptable areas for micro, middle, neighborhood and urban samplers, with the exception of microscale street canyon sites.

Table 7-3 Summary of Probe and Mo nitoring Path Siting Criteria
Pollutant Scale (maximum monitoring path length, meters) Height from ground to probe,

inlet or 80% of monitoring path 1

(meters) Horizontal and

vertical distance from supporting

structures 2 to probe, inlet or 90% of monitoring path 1 (meters) Distance from trees to probe,

inlet or 90% of monitoring path 1 (meters) Distance from roadways to probe, inlet or monitoring path 1 (meters)

SO 2 3,4,5,6 Middle (300 m) Neighborhood Urban, and Regional (1 km). 2–15 > 1 > 10 N/A

CO 4,5,7 Micro, Middle (300 m), Neighborhood (1 km). 3 + 1 ⁄ 2: 2–15 > 1 > 10 2–10; see Table 7–3 of

this section for middle and neighborhood scales.

NO 2 , O 3 3,4,5 Middle (300 m) Neighborhood, Urban, and Regional (1 km). 2–15 > 1 > 10 See Table 7-3 of this

section for all scales.

Ozone

precursors (for

PAMS ) 3,4,5. Neighborhood and Urban (1 km) 2–15 > 1 > 10

PM,Pb

3,4,5,6,8 Micro: Middle, Neighborhood, Urban and Regional. 2–7 (micro); 2–7 (middle PM10-2.5); 2–15 (all other scales). > 2 (all scales,

horizontal distance only). > 10 (all scales). 2–10 (micro); see Figure

7.3 of this section for all

other scales N/A—Not applicable.

1 Monitoring path for open path analyzers is applicable only to middle or neighborhood scale CO monitoring and all applicable sc ales for monitoring SO 2 ,O 3 , O 3 precursors, and NO 2

. 2 When probe is located on a rooftop, this separation distance is in reference to walls, parapets, or penthouses located on roof

. 3 Should be >20 meters from the dripline of tree(s) and must be 10 meters from the dripline when the tree(s) act as an obstructi on.

4 Distance from sampler, probe, or 90% of monitoring path to obstacl e, such as a building, must be at least twice the height the obstacle protrudes above the sampler, probe, or monitoring path . Sites not meeting this criterion may be classified as middle scale (see text).

5 Must have unrestricted airflow 270 degrees around the probe or samp ler; 180 degrees if the probe is on the side of a building.

6 The probe, sampler, or monitoring path should be away from minor sources, such as furnace or incineration flues. The separation distance is dependent on the height of the minor source’ s emission point (such as a flue), the type of fuel or waste burned, and the qualit y of the fuel (sulfur,
ash, or lead content)

. This criterion is designed to avoid undue influences from minor sources.

7 For microscale CO monitoring sites, the probe must be >10 meters from a street intersection and preferably at a midblock locati on.

8 Collocated monitors must be within 4 meters of each other and at least 2 meters apart for flow rates > 200 liters/min and at least 1 meter for

flow rates < 200 liters/min .

2 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl All references to CFR in following

sections can be found at this site.QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 16

Table 7-4 Minimum Separation Distance Between Roadways and Sampling Pr obes or Monitoring Paths at Neighborhood and Urban Scales for O 3 , Oxides of Nitrogen (NO, NO 2 , NO

x , NO y ) and CO

Roadway ave. daily traffic vehicles per day O 3 and Oxides of N Neighborhood
& Urban 1 (meters) O 3 and Oxides of N Neighborhood.
& Urban 1& 2 (meters) CO Neighborhood (meters)

< 1,000 10 10

10,000 10 20

< 10,000 10

15,000 20 30 25

20,000 30 40 45

30,000 80

40,000 50 60 115

50,000 135

> 60,000 150

70,000 100 100

> 110,000 250 250

Distance from the edge of the nearest traffic lane. The distance for intermediate traffic counts should be interpolated from the table values based on the actual traffic count.

2 Applicable for ozone monitors whose placement ha s not already been approved as of December 18, 2006.

Figure 7.5 Acceptable areas for PM10 and PM2.5 micro, middle, neighborhood, and urban samplers except for microscale street canyon sites.



### Open Path Monitoring

To ensure that open path monitoring data are re presentative of the intended monitoring objective(s), specific path siting criteria are needed. 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix E, contains specific location criteria applicable to monitoring paths after the general st ation siting has been selected based on the monitoring objectives, spatial scales of representativeness, and other considerations presented in Appendix D. The 

## 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100

Distance of PM10 and PM2.5 Samplers from Nearest Traffic Lane, (meters) A D T o f A f f e c t i n g R o a d s x 1 0

N o

C a t e g o r y

( a ) S i t e s U n a c c e p t a b l e a t a l l t r a f f i c l e v e l s

P r e f e r r e d a r e a f o r c a t e g o r y ( a ) s i t e m i c r o s c a l e i f

m o n i t o r i s 2 - 7 m e t e r s h i g h , m i d d l e s c a l e o t h e r w i s e Middle Scale Suitable for Category (a) site but not preferred

Neighborhood Scale Suitable for category (b) Site

Urban Scale 3QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 16



### open path siting requirements largely parallel the ex isting requirements for point analyzers, with the revised provisions applicable to either a "probe" (fo r point analyzers), a "monitoring path" (for open path analyzers), or both, as appropriate. Criteria for the m onitoring path of an open path analyzer are given for horizontal and vertical placement, spacing fro m minor sources, spacing from obstructions, spacing from trees, and spacing from roadways. These criteria are summarized in Table 7-3.

Cumulative Interferences on a Monitoring Path : To control the sum effect on a path measurement from all the possible interferences which exist aroun d the path, the cumulative length or portion of a monitoring path that is affected by obstructions, trees, or roadways must not exceed 10 percent of the total monitoring path length. This limit for cumulative in terferences on the monitoring path controls the total amount of interference from minor sources, obstructions , roadways, and other factors that might unduly influence the open path monitoring data.

Monitoring Path Length: For NO 2 

### , O 3 

### and SO 2 

### , the monitoring path length must not exceed 1 kilometer for analyzers in neighborhood, urban, or regional scales, or 300 meters for middle scale monitoring sites. These path limitations are necessary in order to produce a path concentration representative of the measurement scale and to limit the averaging of peak concentration values. In addition, the selected path length should be long enough to encompass plume meander and expected plume width during periods when high concentrations are expected. In areas subject to frequent periods of rain, snow, fog, or dust, a shortened monitoring path length should be considered to minimize the loss of monitoring data due to these temporary optical obstructions.

Mounting of Components and Optical Path Alignment : Since movements or instability can misalign the optical path, causing a loss of light and less accurate measurements or poor readings, highly stable optical platforms are critical. Steel buildings and wooden platforms should be avoided as they tend to move more than brick buildings when wind and temperature conditions vary. Metal roofing will, for example, expand when heated by the sun in the summer. A concrete pillar with a wide base, placed upon a stable base material, has been found to work well in field studies. A sketch of an optical platform is included in Figure 7.6. More information on open path monitoring can be found in the document: EPA Handbook: Optical Remote Sensing for Measurement and Monitoring of Emissions Flux 3



### .

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/guidlnd/gd-052.pdfQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 16



### 7.3.3 Probe, Tubing and Manifold Maintenance

Figure 7.7 Examples of contaminated tubing a nd manifolds needing more frequent maintenance



### After an adequately designed sampling probe and/or manifold has been selected and installed, the following steps will help in maintain ing constant sampling conditions:

1. Conduct a leak test. For the conventiona l manifold, seal all ports and pump down to approximately 1.25 cm water gauge vacuum, as indicated by a vacuum gauge or manometer connected to one port. Isolate the system. Th e vacuum measurement should show no change at the end of a 15-min period. 2. Establish cleaning techniques and a schedule. A large diameter manifold may be cleaned by pulling a cloth on a string throug h it. Otherwise the manifold must be disassembled periodically and cleaned with distilled water. Soap, alcohol, or other products that may contain hydrocarbons should be avoided when cleaning the sampling tr ain. These products may leave a residue that may affect volatile organic measurements. Visi ble dirt should not be allowed to accumulate. 3. Plug the ports on the manifold when sampling lines are detached.

4. Maintain a flow rate in the manifold that is either 3 to 5 times the total sampling requirements or at a rate equal the total sampling requirement plus 140 L/min. Either rate will help to reduce the sample residence time in the manifold and ensure adequate gas flow to the monitoring

instruments.

5. Maintain the vacuum in the manifold <0.64 cm water gauge. Keeping the vacuum low will help to prevent the development of leaks.

For monitoring organizations that use individual sam pling lines instead of manifolds, one may want to weigh the cost of cleaning lines versus replacing them.

In addition to the information presented above, the fo llowing should be considered when designing a sampling manifold:

 

### suspending strips of paper in front of the blower 's exhaust to permit a visual check of blower operation;

 

### positioning air conditioner vents away from the mani fold to reduce condensation of water vapor in the manifold ;

 

### positioning air conditioner vents away from analyzers;

 

### positioning sample ports of the manifold to ward the ceiling to reduce the potential forQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 16



### accumulation of moisture in analyzer sampling lin es, and using borosilicate glass, stainless steel, or their equivalent for VOC sampling manifolds at PAMS sites to avoid adsorption and desorption reactions of VOC's on FEP Teflon;

 

### if moisture in the sample train poses a pr oblem (moisture can absorb gases, namely NO

x 

### and

SO 2 

### ), wrap the manifold and instrument lines with “h eat wrap”, a product that has heating coils within a cloth covering that allows the manifold to be maintained at a constant temperature that does not increase the sampled air temperature by more than 3-5 degrees C above ambient

temperature;

 

### ensuring the manifold has a moisture trap and that it is emptied often (water traps in sample lines from the manifold to the instruments should be avoided) ; and

 

### using water resistant particulate filte rs in-line with the instrument.



## 7.4 Reference/Equivalent Methods and Approved Regional Methods

For monitoring in a SLAMS network, either reference or equivalent methods are usually required. This requirement, and any exceptions, are specified in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix C. In addition, reference or equivalent methods may be require d for other monitoring applications, such as those associated with prevention of significant deterioration (PSD). Requiri ng the use of reference or equivalent methods helps to assure the reliability of air quality measuremen ts including: ease of specification, guarantee of minimum performance, better instruction manuals, fl exibility of application, comparability with other data and increased credibility of measurements. However, designation as a reference or equivalent method provides no guarantee that a particular analyzer will always operate properly. 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A requires the monitoring organization to establish an internal QC program. Specific guidance for a minimum QC program is described in Sec tion 10 of this Handbook. The definitions and specifications of reference and equivalent methods ar e given in 40 CFR Part 53. For most monitoring applications, the distinction between reference and equivalent methods is unimportant and either may be used interchangeably.

Reference and equivalent methods may be either ma nual or automated (analyzers). For particulates and Pb, the reference method for each is a unique manual method that is completely specified in 40 CFR Part 50; all other approved methods for particulat es and Pb qualify as equivalent methods. SO 2 

### , has a

reference method and a measure ment principle. For CO, NO 2 

### , and O 3 

### , Part 50 provides only a measurement principle and calibration procedure appli cable to reference methods for these pollutants. Automated methods (analyzers) for these pollutants ma y be designated as either reference methods or equivalent methods, depending on whether the met hods utilize the same measurement principle and calibration procedure specified in Part 50. Because any analyzer that meets the requirements of the specified measurement principle and calibration pro cedure may be designated as a reference method,

there are numerous reference methods for SO 2 

### , CO, NO 2 

### , and O 3 

### . Further information on this subject is in the preamble to 40 CFR Part 53.

Except for the unique reference methods for SO 2 

### , particulates, and Pb specified in 40 CFR Part 50, all reference and equivalent methods mu st be officially designated as such by EPA under the provisions of 40 CFR Part 53. Notice of each designated method is published in the Federal Register at the time of designation. A current list of all designated refere nce and equivalent methods is maintained and updatedQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 16



### by EPA whenever a new method is designated. This list can be found on AMTIC 4



### . Moreover, any analyzer offered for sale as a reference or equivalent method after April 16, 1976 must bear a label or sticker indicating that the analyzer has been desi gnated as a reference or equivalent method by EPA. Sellers of designated automated met hods must comply with the conditio ns as promulgated in 40 CFR Part 53.9. Monitoring organizations should be aware of the vendor condition. Accordingly, in selecting a designated method for a particular monitoring applica tion, consideration should be given to such aspects

as:

 

### the suitability of the measurement principle;

 

### the suitability for the weather and/or geographic conditions at the site;

 

### analyzer sensitivity and available ope rating ranges suitable for the site;

 

### susceptibility to interferences that may be present at the monitoring site;

 

### requirements for support gases or other equipment;

 

### reliability;

 

### maintenance requirements;

 

### initial as well as operating costs;

 

### features such as internal or fully automatic zero and span checking or adjustment capability, etc.;

 

### compatibility to your current and future netw ork, i.e. software and connections (RS 232, Ethernet); and

 

### manual or automated methods.

The order for a new reference or equivalent anal yzer should specify the EPA method designation.

The required performance specifications, terms of th e warranty, time limits for delivery and acceptance testing, and what happens in the event that the anal yzer falls short of perform ance requirements should be documented. Aside from occasional malfunctions, cons istent or repeated noncompliance with any of these conditions should be reported to EPA. In sel ecting designated methods, remember that designation of a method indicates only that it meets certain minimum standards. Competitive differences still exist among designated analyzers. Some analyzers or methods may have performan ce, operational, economic or other advantages over others. A careful selec tion process based on the individual air monitoring application and circumstances is very important.

Some of the performance tests and other criteria used to qualify a method for designation as a reference or equivalent method are intended only as pass/fail t ests to determine compliance with the minimum standards. Test data may not allow quantita tive comparison of one method with another.

FRM/FEM Designated Operating Ranges and the Affect of Span Checks

Although all FRM/FEMs are required to meet the range specified in Table 7-5 5 

### , many instruments are designated for ranges narrower and or broader than the requirement. During the equipment purchase/selection phase, monitoring organizations should select an instrument with ranges most appropriate to the concentration at the site which th e instrument will be established and then use the range that is most appropriate for the monitoring situation. Earlier versions of this Handbook suggested that the concentration of the span checks be 70 – 90% of the analyzers measurement range. Using this guidance and the designated ranges of some of the FRM/FEM method being used, a span check might be selected

4 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html

5 performance specifications can be found in 40 CFR Part 53.23 Table B-1QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 14 of 16



### at a concentration that is never found in the ambient ai r at the site for which the monitor is operating. The span check concentration should be selected that is mo re beneficial to the quality control of the routine data at the site and EPA suggests: 1) the selection of an appropriate measuremen t range, and 2) selecting a span that at a minimum is above 120% of the hi ghest NAAQS (for sites used for designation purposes) and above the 99% of the routine data over a 3 year period. The multi-point verification/calibrations that are performed annually can be used to challenge the instrument and confirm linearity and calibration slope of the selected operating range.

Table 7-5 Performance Specifi cations for Automated Methods



### PM 2.5 

### Reference and Equivalent Methods

All formal sampler design and performance requirement s and the operational requirements applicable to

reference methods for PM 2.5 

### are specified in 40 CFR Part 50, Appendix L. These requirements are quite specific and include explicit design specifications for th e type of sampler, the type of filter, the sample flow rate, and the construction of the sample collect ing components. However, various designs for the flow-rate control system, the filter holder, the opera tor interface controls, and the exterior housing are possible. Hence, various reference method samplers fr om different manufacturers may vary considerably in appearance and operation. Also, a reference met hod may have a single filter capability (single) or a multiple filter capability (sequential) , provided no deviations are necessar y in the design and construction of the sample collection components specifie d in the reference method regulation. A PM 2.5 

### method is not

a reference method until it has been demonstrated to meet all the reference method regulatory requirements and has been officially designated by EPA as a reference method for PM 2.5



### .

Equivalent methods for PM 2.5 

### have a wider latitude in their design, configuration, and operating principle

than reference methods. These methods are not re quired to be based on filter collection of PM 2.5 

### ; therefore, continuous or semi-continuous analyzers and new types of PM 2.5 

### measurement technologies are not precluded as possible equivalent methods. Equivalent methods are not necessarily required to meet allQA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 15 of 16



### the requirements specified for reference methods, but they must demonstrate both comparability to
reference method measurements and similar PM 2.5 

### measurement precision

.

The requirements that some (but not all) candidate methods must meet to be designated by EPA as equivalent methods are specified in 40 CFR Part 53. To minimize the difficulty of meeting equivalent method designation requirements, three classes of equi valent methods have been established in the 40 CFR Part 53 regulations, based on a candidate method’ s extent of deviation from the reference method requirements. All three classes of equivalent me thods are acceptable for SLAMS or SLAMS-related

PM 2.5 

### monitoring, but not all types of equivalent methods may be equally suited to various PM 2.5 

### monitoring requirements or applications.

Class I equivalent methods are very similar to referen ce methods, with only minor deviations, and must meet nearly all of the reference method specificati ons and requirements. The requirements for designation as Class I equivalent methods are only slightly mo re extensive than the designation requirements for reference methods. Also, because of their substantial similarity to reference methods, Class I equivalent methods operate very much th e same as reference methods.

Class II equivalent methods are filter-collection-based methods that differ more substantially from the reference method requirements. The requirement s for designation as Class II methods may be considerably more extensive than for reference or Class I equivalent methods, depending on the specific nature of the variance from the reference method requirements.

Class III equivalent methods cover any PM 2.5 

### methods that cannot qualify as reference or Class I or II equivalent methods because of more profound differe nces from the reference method requirements. This class encompasses PM 2.5 

### methods such as continuous or semi-continuous PM 2.5 

### analyzers and potential

new PM 2.5 

### measurement technologies. The requirements for designation as Class III methods are the most extensive, and, because of the wide variety of PM 2.5 

### measurement principles that could be employed for candidate Class III equivalent methods, the designatio n requirements are not explicitly provided in 40

CFR Part 53.

Approved Regional Methods (ARM)

There are some continuous PM 2.5 

### methods that currently may not be able to meet the national FRM and FEM designation criteria. However, these methods ma y operate at acceptable levels of data quality in certain regions of the country or under certain cond itions. The EPA has expanded the use of alternative

PM 2.5 

### measurement methods through ARMs. A method for PM 2.5 

### that has not been designated as an FRM or FEM as defined in 40 CFR Part 50.1 may be approved as an ARM. If a monitoring organization feels that a particular method may be suitable for use in its network, it can apply for the method to be designated as an ARM. The following provi des a summary of the ARM requirements.QA Handbook Volume II, Section 7.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 16 of 16



### PM 2.5 

### ARM Criteria Summary

1. Must meet Class III Equivalency Criteria

o Precision

o Correlation

o Additive and multiplicative bias

2. Tested at site(s) where it will be used

o 1 site in each MSA/CMSA up to the first 2 highest pop MSA/CMSA

o 1 site in rural area or Micropolitan Statistical Area

o Total of 3 If the ARM has been approved by another agency then:

o 1 site in MSA/CMSA and 1 site in rura l area or Micropolitan Statistical Area

o Total of 2

3. 1 year of testing all seasons covered

o 90 valid sample pairs per site with at least 20 valid sample pairs per season.

o Values < 3 ug/m 3 may be excluded in bias estimates but this does not affect completeness criteria.

4. Collocation to establish precision not required

o peer reviewed published literature or data in AQS that can be presented is enough

5. ARM must be operated on an hourly sampling frequency providing for aggregation into 24-hour average

measurements.

6. Must use approved inlet and separation devices (Part 50 Appendix L or FEM Part 53)

o Exception –methods that by their inherent measurement principle may not need an inlet or separation device.

7. Must be capable of providing for flow audits

o Exception –methods that by their inherent measurement principle measured flow is not required.

8. Monitoring agency must develop and implement appropriate procedures for assessing and reporting precision and bias.

Routine Monitoring Implementation

9. Collocation of ARM and FRM/FEM at 30% of SLAMS network or at least 1/network

o At 1 in 6 day sampling frequency

o Located at design value site among the largest MSA/CMSA

o Collocated FRM/FEM can be substituted for ARM if ARM is invalidated

10. Collocation ARM with ARM

o 7.5% of sites or at least 1 site

11. Bias assessment (PEP)

o Same frequency as Appendix A

ARM Approval

1. New ARM- EPA NERL, RTP, NC

2. ARM that has been approved by another agency- EPA Regional AdministratorQA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 7



# 8.0 Sample Handling and Custody

A critical activity within any data collection phase i nvolving physical samples is the handling of sample media prior to sampling, handling/transporting sample me dia to the field, handling samples in the field at the time of collection, storage of samples (in the fiel d or other locations), transport of samples from the field site, and the analysis of the samples. Docu mentation ensuring that proper handling has occurred throughout these activities is part of the custody record . This documentation initially comes in the form of written sample handling and custody procedure and then in the development, use and archiving of field and laboratory notebooks and chain of custody forms.

Custody records document the “chain of custody”; the date and person responsible for the various sample handling steps associated with each sample and the information that acknowledges that sample integrity remained intact. Custody records also provide a reviewable trail for quality assurance purposes and can be used as evidence in legal proceedings.

Prior to the start of an EDO, the various types of samples should be identified and the following questions

asked:

 

### Does the sample need to be analy zed within a specified time period?

 

### What modes of sample transport are necessary and how secure should they be?

 

### What happens if a sample is collected on Friday? Is the sample shipped for a weekend delivery or (weekday) or stored at the field office a nd what are the appropriate custody procedures?

 

### Can the sample’s integrity be affected by outside influences (e.g. temperature, pressure, humidity, jostling/dropping during shipme nt) and do these need to be monitored (e.g., max/min thermometers, pressure sensors)?

 

### How critical is it that sample integrity be known (e.g., is evidence tape necessary)?

 

### How can it be documented that sample integrity was maintained from the collection to reporting?

 

### What are the procedures when sample integrity is compromised (e.g., flag, don’t analyze)?

These are some of the questions that should be answered and documented in the monitoring organization’s QAPP and chain of custody procedures.

This section specifically addresses the handling and cu stody of physical environmental samples (e.g., exposed filters for particulate matter or lead (PM or Pb) determinations and canis ters containing whole air samples) that are collected at a field location and tr ansported to a laboratory for analysis. For specific details of sample handling and cu stody (i.e., PAMS, NATTS, CSN etc) monitoring organization should consult the appropriate technical assistance documents located in the National Programs summaries in Appendix A.

In addition to physical samples, some types of field da ta collected in hard copy (e.g., strip charts, sampler flow data, etc.) or electronic (e.g., data downloaded from a data logger with limited storage space) format are irreplaceable and represent primary information about physical samples or on-site measurements that are needed to report a final result. When such hard copy or electronic data are transported and/or change custody, it is advised that the same chain of cust ody practices described in this section for physical samples be employed to ensure that irreplaceable da ta can be tracked and are not altered or tampered

with.QA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 7



### For additional information, an EPA on-line self-instructional course, “ Chain-of-Custody Procedures for Samples and Data 1 

### ” is available for review. The National Enforcement Investigation Center 2 

### (NEIC) also offers a course relevant to chain of custody issues.

Laboratory Informatio n Management Systems

A laboratory information management system (LIMS) is a computer system used in the laboratory for the management and tracking of samples, instruments, st andards and other laboratory functions such as data reductions, data transfer and reporting. The goal is to create an EDO where:

 

### Instruments used are integrated in the lab netw ork; receive instructions and worklists from the LIMS and return finished results including raw da ta back to a central repository where the LIMS can update relevant information to exte rnal systems (i.e., AIRNow or AQS).

 

### Lab personnel will review/check calculations, documentation and results using online information from connected instruments, reference datab ases and other resources using electronic lab

notebooks connected to the LIMS.

 

### Management can supervise the lab process, re act to bottlenecks in workflow and ensure regulatory demands are met.

 

### External participants can review results and print out analysis certificates and other documentation (QA Reports, quality cont rol charts, outlier reports etc.).

For monitoring programs that are fairly stable, such as criteria pollutant monitoring, development of a LIMS system may be very cost effective and should be considered. There is an upfront cost in the development of these systems but monitoring organi zations that have devoted resources to their development have seen pay offs in improved da ta quality, sample tracking and data reporting.



## 8.1 Sample Handling

In the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, disc rete samples from manual methods associated with SLAMS, PAMS, NATTS, and other networks, are physical ly handled prior to analysis. One must pay particular attention to the handling of filters for pa rticulate matter and lead since it has been suggested that the process of filter handling may be the largest source of measurement error (especially low-volume methods). Due to the manner in which concentrati ons are determined, it is critical that samples are handled as specified in SOPs. The various phases of sample handling that should be documented in a QAPP and SOP include:

 

### Sample preparation, labe ling and identification;

 

### sample collection;

 

### transportation;

 

### sample analysis; and

 

### storage (at all stages of use) and archival

1 http://www.epa.gov/apti/coc/

2 http://www.epa.gov/oecaerth/t raining/neti/index.htmlQA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 7



### 8.1.1 Sample Preparation, Labeling and Identification

Sample containers should be cleaned and filters prepared (pre-weighing of filters) before being used to collect samples. SOPs should indicate the proper car e and handling of the containers/filters to ensure their integrity. Proper lab documentation that tr acks the disposition of containers/filters through preparation is just as important as the documentation af ter sampling. Care must be taken to properly mark all samples to ensure positive, unambiguous identifica tion throughout the sample collection, handling, and analysis procedures. Figure 8.1 shows a standardi zed identification sticker that may be used to label physical samples. Additional information may be added as required, depending on the particular monitoring program. The rules of evidence used in legal proceedings require that procedures for identification of samples used in analyses form th e basis for future eviden ce. An admission by the laboratory analyst that he/she cannot be positive whethe r he/she analyzed sample No. 6 or sample No. 9, for example, could destroy the validity of the entire t est report. Any information that can be used to assess sample integrity, such as the pressure of canisters or cooler temperature, should be recorded at the time of sample collection. Canister pressure or cooler temperature can then be ascertained at another stage in the analytical process to confirm sample integrity.

Positive identification also must be provided for any filters used in the program. If ink is used for marking, it must be indelible and unaffected by the gases and temperatures to which it will be subjected. Other methods of identification can be used (e.g., bar coding), if they provide a positive means of identification and do not impair the capacity of the filter to function.

(Name of Sampling Organization)

Sample ID No: _________________________ Storage Conditions: _________________________

Sample Type:___________________________ Site Name:_________________________________

Date/Time Collected: _________ ____________ Site Address:_______________________________

Sampler:_______________________________

Figure 8.1 Example Sample Label.



### 8.1.2 Sample Collection

The sample collection phase includes transporting the sa mpling material (e.g., sample filters, canisters) to the sampling site, setting up the samplers to run, an d then collecting the samples for transport to the laboratory. This section does not cover proper insta llation of sampling media in a sample/monitor which is very important but is specific to individual samp ler types and should be covered in detail in SOPs. Custody procedures may start prior to sampling if th ere are specific timeframes when the sampling media must be used (e.g., 30 day filter use for PM 2.5 

### filters). Therefore, custody forms may start from the laboratory that prepared the sample media and care must be taken to review and ensure the sample media

is viable for use.

Sometimes the specific sample media (e.g., specific filter ID) has been identified to a particular sampler at the office rather than at the sampling site. If the site operator is setting up a number of samplers at one site or at a number of sites it is very important the sample media and the chain of custody data is carefully checked to ensure: 1) the chain of custody matches th e sample media ID, and 2) the sample media is used at the correct site and in the correct sampler.QA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 7



### To reduce the possibility of invalidating the results, a ll collected samples must be carefully removed from the monitoring device, placed in labeled, nonreactive containers, and sealed. Use of tamper-evident custody seals are suggested and may be required in certa in cases. The sample label must adhere firmly to the container to ensure that it cannot be accidentally removed. Custody seals on sample containers serve two purposes: to prevent accidental opening of the sample container and to provide visual evidence should the container be opened or tampered with. The best type of custody seal depends on the sample container; often, a piece of tape placed across the seal and signed by the operating technician is sufficient; for other containers, wire locks or tie wraps may be th e best choice. In some cases, the opening of sample containers by unauthorized personnel, such as Transpor tation Security Administration officers, cannot be avoided. The proper use of custody seals minimizes the loss of samples and provides direct evidence whether sample containers have been opened and possibly compromised. Samples whose integrity is questioned should be qualified (flagged).



### 8.1.3 Sample Transportation

Samples should be delivered to the laboratory for analysis as soon as possible following sample

collection. It is recommended that this be done on the same day that the sample is taken from the monitor. If this is impractical, all the samples s hould be placed in transport containers (e.g., carrying case, cooler, shipping box, etc.) for protection from breakage, contamination, and loss and in an appropriate controlled-temperature device (i.e., refri gerator or freezer) if the samples have specific temperature requirements. Each transport container should have a unique identification, such as sampling location, date, and transport container number (e.g., number 2 of 5) to avoid interchange and aid in tracking the complete shipment. The number of the tr ansport containers should be subsequently recorded on the chain of custody (COC) form (described in Section 8.2) along with the sample identification numbers of the samples included within each transport cont ainer. It is advised that the container be sealed using an appropriate tamper-evident method, su ch as with custody tape or a wire lock.

In transporting samples, it is important that precautions be taken to eliminate the possibility of tampering, accidental destruction, and/or physical and chemical action on the sample. The integrity of samples can be affected by temperature extremes, air pressure (air transportation), and the physical handling of samples (packing, jostling, etc.). These practical considerations must be dealt with on a site-by-site basis and should be documented in the organi zation’s QAPP and site specific SOPs.

The person who has custody of the samples must be able to testify that no tampering occurred. Security must be continuous. If the samples are put in a vehicle, lock the vehicle. After delivery to the laboratory, the samples must be kept in a secured place with restricted access.



### 8.1.4 Sample Analysis

SOPs, if properly develope d, have detailed information on the ha ndling of samples at the analysis phase. Similar to the preparation step, if the sample undergo es a number of steps (preparation, equilibration, extraction, dilution, analysis, etc.), and these steps are performed by different in dividuals, there should be a mechanism in place to track the sample through the st eps to ensure SOPs are followed and the integrity of the sample was maintained. Laboratories should make extensive use of laboratory notebooks at the various steps (stations) of the analytical process to record the sample handling process and maintain sample integrity.QA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 7



### 8.1.5 Storage and Archival

Samples must be properly handled to ensure that ther e is no contamination and that the sample analyzed is actually the sample taken under th e conditions reported. For this reason, whenever samples are not under the direct control of the sample custodian, they should be kept in a secured location. This may be a locked vehicle, locked refrigerator, or locked la boratory with limited access. It is highly recommended that all samples be secured until discarded. These sec urity measures should be documented by a written record signed by the handlers of the sample on the COC form or in a laboratory notebook, indicating the storage location and conditions. Any samples not d estroyed during the analysis process (e.g., exposed filters for PM) should be archived as directed by the method requirements or applicable QAPP. 40 CFR Part 58.16 requires PM 10 

### , PM 10-2.5 

### and PM 2.5 

### filters from SLAMS manual lo-volume samplers 

### (samplers having flow rates less than 200 liters/minute) be archived for 5 years from collection. However, it is suggested that they be archived the fi rst year in cold conditions (e.g., at 4  C) and at room temperature for 2 additional years. It is also suggested that non-d estructive lead analysis a nd CSN samples follow this guidance.



## 8.2 Chain of Custody (COC)

In order to use the results of a sampling program as evidence, a written record must be available listing the location of the samples at all times. This is also an important component of good laboratory practices 3 

### . The COC record is necessary to legally demonstr ate that the integrity of samples have been maintained. Without it, one cannot be sure that the samples and sampling data analyzed were the same as the samples and data reported to have been taken at a particular time. Procedures may vary, but an actual COC record sheet with the names and signatures of the relinquishers/receivers works well for tracking physical samples. The samples should be handled on ly by persons associated in some way with the monitoring program. A good general rule to follow is “the fewer hands the better,” even though a properly sealed sample may pass through a number of hands without affecting its integrity.

Each person handling the samples must be able to state from whom and when the item was received and

to whom and when it was delivered. A COC form sh ould be used to track the handling of the samples through various stages of storage, processing, and analys is at the laboratory. It is recommended practice to have each person who relinquishes or receives sa mples sign the COC form for the samples. An example of a form that may be used to establish th e COC for samples generated in the field is shown in Figure 8.2. This form should accompany the samples at all times from the field to the laboratory. All persons who handle the samples should sign the form. Figure 8.3 is an example of a laboratory COC

form. COC forms should be retained and archived as described in Section 5 (Documents and Records).

When using professional services to transport physical samples, only reliable services that provide a tracking number should be used. Information describi ng the enclosed samples should be placed on the bill of lading. A copy of the shipping receipt and tr acking number should be kept as a record. The package should be addressed to the specific person authorized to receive the package, although it is recognized that staff not typically part of the COC may receive the samples and deliver them to the authorized addressee. A procedure must be in place to ensure that samples are delivered to the appropriate person without being opened or damaged. In this circumstan ce, the sample is considered still in transport until received by the authorized addressee. It may be necessary to ship and/or receive samples outside of

3 http://www.epa.gov/oecaerth/monito ring/programs/fifra/glp.htmlQA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 7



### normal business hours. A procedure should be develope d in advance that considers staff availability, secure storage locations, and appropriate storag e conditions (e.g., temperature-controlled).

8.2.1 Sample Inspection and Acceptance

Once the samples arrive at their destination and at every custody change, the samples should first be checked to ensure that their integrity is intact. Th e contents of the shipment should be checked against the COC form to ensure that all samples listed were included in the shipment. If max/min thermometers are used to monitor the temperature of the shipping containers this information should be recorded to document that temperatures were adequately maintain ed. When using passivated stainless steel canisters, the canister pressure, upon receipt, should be recorded and compared to the final sample collection pressure to indicate canister leakage and sample loss. It is recommended that this comparison be made using a certified gauge that is ca librated annually. Any samples whose integrity or identity may be questionable should be brought to the attention of th e person/persons that are in the custody chain and flagged. All flags should be “carried” along with th e samples until the validity of the samples can be proven. This information can be included in the remark section of the COC form.

Chain of Custody Record

Project No. Project Title

Organization
Shipping

Container No. Contact

Field Samplers: print signature Address

Date Time Site/Location Sample Type Sample ID Remarks

Relinquished by ( print and signature ): Received by ( print and signature ): Comments

Figure 8.2 Example Field COC Form.QA Handbook Vol II , Section 8.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 7



### Chain of Custody Record
Project No. Project Title Organization

Laboratory/Plant:



# ________________________
_________________________

Sample Number Number of

Container Sample Description

Person responsible for samples Time: Date: Sample Number Relinquished By: Received By : Time: Date: Reason for change in custody

Figure 8.3 Example Laboratory COC Form.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 9.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 3 

# 9.0 Analytical Methods

The choice of methods used for any environmenta l data operation should be based upon the programs data quality objectives (DQOs). Outputs from the DQO process can help determine acceptable measurement uncertainty and assist in the selection of methods capable of meeting the data quality acceptance limits. Methods are usually selected base d upon their performance characteristics (precision, bias, limits of detection), ease of use, and their reliability in field and laboratory conditions.

Since both field and analytical procedures have been developed for the criteria pollutants in the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, and in the various technical assistance documents for the other national ambient air programs, this section will discuss the gene ral concepts of standard operating procedures and good laboratory practices as they relate to the refe rence and equivalent methods. A more detailed

discussion on the attributes of SOPs can be found in Section 5.

Many ambient air methods utilize continuous inst ruments and therefore do not involve laboratory analysis. However particulate matter methods invo lve both continuous and manual methods and some of the other major monitoring programs involve sampling which requires the use of laboratory analysis. Table 9-1 provides a summary of the pollutants measured and the analytical methods for these programs. For the SLAMS Network pollutants, the methods listed are considered the reference methods and are not the only methods available for use. Federal equivale nt methods are available and posted, once approved, on AMTIC and are considered an acceptable altern ative to the reference method. Information on reference and equivalent methods can be found on the AMTIC website as well as the current list of designated Federal Referen ce and Equivalent Methods 1 

### . CSN 2 

### and NATTS 3 

### SOPs are also on AMTIC.

Table 9-1 Acceptable Analytical Methods

Network Pollutant Acceptable Method Reference

SLAMS PM 10 – Hi-Vol Gravimeteric 40 CFR Part 50 App B

SLAMS PM 10 - dichot Gravimeteric 40 CFR Part 50 App J

SLAMS PM 2.5 Gravimeteric 40 CFR Part 50 App L

SLAMS PM 10-2.5 Gravimeteric- difference 40 CFR Part 50 App O SLAMS Pb from TSP Inductively Coupled Plasma /Mass Spectrometry (ICP/MS) 4 40 CFR Part 50 App G

SLAMS Pb from PM10 Energy Dispersive X-Ray Fluorescence (EDXRF) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q PAMS VOCs Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) TO-15 PAMS Carbonyl compounds High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) TO11-A PAMS Non-methane organic compounds Cryogenic Preconcentration and Direct Flame Ionization Detection (PDFID) TO-12

NATTS Metals Inductively Coup led Plasma (ICP) IO 3.5 NATTS Aldehydes High Performance Liquid Chromatography TO11-A NATTS VOCs Gas Chromatography/M ass Spectrometry (GC/MS) TO-15

CSN PM 2.5 Gravimeteric 40 CFR Part 50 App L CSN Elements Energy Dispersive X-Ray Fluorescence (EDXRF) CSN QAPP and SOPs CSN Anions Ion Chromatography CSN QAPP and SOPs

CSN Cations Ion Chromat ography CSN QAPP and SOPs CSN Organic, Elemental, Carbonate, Total Carbon Thermal Optical Reflectance (IMPROVE_A) CSN QAPP and SOPs

CSN Semi-volatile Organic Compounds Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrome try (GC/MS) CSN QAPP and SOPs

1 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html

2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specsop.html

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtox.html

4 As of the revision of this document, a new federal re ference method for Pb by IC P-MS replaced the Atomic Absorption (AA) method App G. The AA method will remain a federal equivalent method.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 9.0

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 3



### The SLAMS network provides more rigorous quality c ontrol requirements for the analytical methods. These methods are found in 40 CFR Part 50, as describ ed in the references. In addition, the method

identified for Pb is the reference method. There are a number of equivalent analytical methods that are available for the Pb. Some of the NATTS methods are derived from the Toxics Organic Method Compendium 5 

### . Others, like the CSN Network 6 

### may be developed specifically for the program, based on the national laboratory currently performing the analysis. The PAMS, NATTS and CSN networks follow the performance based measurement process paradigm. These Networks’ QA project plans or technical assistance documents suggest a method, but also allow so me flexibility to use other methods that meet the network’s measurement quality objectives. Various, i ndependent proficiency test samples and technical systems audits are performed to ensure that the da ta quality within these networks remain acceptable.

AQS Parameter and Method Codes--

Most monitoring information is reported to the Air Qu ality System (AQS). The pollutant measured is called a “parameter” and the specific method used are designated as the “method codes”. AQS provides a website that can assist in identifying the correct method code for data reporting 7 

### . Any approved reference or equivalent method listed on the AMTI C website has a reference or equivalent method number. An example of an approved reference sample r is the BGI sampler listed below. This sampler can be used by the Parameter Code “88101” (PM 2.5 

### local conditions) and is associated with the method code “116”. The method code is usually the last three dig its of the designated reference (listed as RFPS) or equivalent method (listed as EQPM).

BGI Inc. Models PQ200 or PQ200A PM 2.5 Ambient Fine Particle Sampler

Manual Reference Method: RFPS-0498-116 “BGI Incorporated Models PQ200 and PQ200A PM 2.5 Ambient Fine Particle Sampler,” operated with firmware version 3.88 or 3.89R, for 24-hour continuous sample periods, in accordance with the Model PQ200/PQ200A Instruction Manual and with the requirements and sample collection filters specified in 40 CFR Part 50, Appendix L, and with or without the optional Solar Power Supply or the optional dual-filter cassette (P/N F-21/6) and associated lower impactor h ousing (P/N B2027), where the upper filter is used for

PM 2.5 . The Model PQ200A is described as a portable audit sampler and includes a set of three carrying cases. Federal Register: Vol. 63, page 18911, 04/16/98



## 9.1 Good Laboratory Practices

Good laboratory practices (GLPs) 8 

### refer to general practices that rela te to many, if not all, of the measurements made in a laboratory. They are usua lly independent of the SOP and cover subjects such as maintenance of facilities, records, sample manageme nt and handling, reagent control, and cleaning of laboratory glassware. In many cases, the activities mentioned above may not be formally documented because they are considered common knowledge. Howeve r, for consistency in laboratory technique, these

activities should have some form of documentation.

5 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtox.html

6 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specsop.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/airs/airsaqs/manuals/codedescs.htm

8 http://www.epa.gov/Compliance/monitoring/programs/fifra/glp.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 9.0

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 3



## 9.2 Laboratory Activities

For ambient air samples to provide useful informa tion or evidence, laboratory analyses must meet the following four basic requirements:

1. Equipment must be frequently and properly calibrated and maintained (Section 12).

2. Personnel must be qualified to ma ke the analysis (Section 4).

3. Analytical procedures must be in accordance w ith accepted practice (Section 9.1 above) properly documented and received peer and management review.

4. Complete and accurate records must be kept (Section 5).

It is assumed that at some frequency the laboratory would be audited by an independent part of the monitoring organization or external entity (e.g., EPA Regions) that would document that the basic requirements were being met.

As indicated, these subjects are discussed in other sec tions of this document. For the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, laborat ory activities are mainly focused on the pollutants associated with manual measurements for lead, particulate matter (PM and CSN), NATTS 9 

### and PAMS 10 

### (VOCs). However, many laboratories also prepare reference mate rial, test or certify instruments, and perform other activities necessary to collect and report measurement da ta. Each laboratory should define these critical

activities and ensure there are consiste nt methods for their implementation.

9 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtox.html

10 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pams/newtad.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 12



# 10.0 Quality Control

As described in Section 3, any data collection process that provides an

estimate of a concentration contains two types of uncertainty; population (spatial/temporal variability) and measurement uncertainty. DQOs define the data quality needed to make a correct decision an acceptable percentage of the time.

Measurement quality objectives (MQOs) identify the quality control samples and the acceptance criteria for those samples that will allow one to qua ntify the data quality indicators precision, bias, representativeness, detection limit, completeness and co mparability. The MQOs are designed to evaluate and control various phases (sampling, preparation, an alysis) of the measurement process to ensure that total measurement uncertainty is within the range prescribed by the DQOs.

Data quality assessment (DQAs) 

### is the scientific and statistical evaluation of environmental data to determine if they meet the planning objectives of the project, and thus are of the right type, quality, and quantity to support their intended use 1 

### . DQA is built on a fundamental premise: data quality is meaningful only when it relates to the intended use of the data, which in many cases stem from the DQOs. DQAs can be used to determine whether modifications to the DQOs are necessary or “tighter” quality control is required.



## 10.1 The Quality Control Process

Within any phase or step of the data collec tion process, errors can occur. For example:

 

### samples and filters can be mislabeled;

 

### data can be transcribed or reported incorrectly or information management systems can be programmed incorrectly;

 

### calibration or check standards can be contaminat ed or certified incorrectly resulting in faulty calibrations;

 

### instruments can be set up improperly or over time fail to operate within specifications; and

 

### SOPs may not be followed.

Quality Control (QC) is the overall system of te chnical activities that measures the attributes and performance of a process, item, or service against define d standards to verify that they meet the stated requirements established by the customer 2 

### . Quality control includes establishing specifications or acceptance criteria for each quality characteristic of the monitoring/analytical process, assessing procedures used in the monitoring/analytical pro cess to determine conformance to these specifications, and taking any necessary corrective actions to bring them into conformance. The EPA’s QAPP guidance

1 Data Quality Assessment: Statistical Methods for the Practitioners http://www.epa.gov/quality/qs-docs/g9sfinal.pdf

2 American Nation Standard ANSI/ASQ E4-2004 http://www.asq.org/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 12



### document QA/G5 3


### suggests that “QC

activities are those

technical activities routinely performed, not to

eliminate or minimize errors, but to measure their

effect”. The effect of an error, such as lab contamination, leading to high PM 2.5 

### values might lead to incorrectly concluding a site was in non-attainment. Although there is agreement that the

measurement or assessment of a QC check does not itself eliminate errors, the QC data can and s hould be used to take appr opriate corrective actions which can minimize error or control data to an accepta ble level of quality in the future. So, QC is both proactive and corrective. It estab lishes techniques to determine if fi eld and lab procedures are producing acceptable data and identifies actions to correct unacceptable performance.

The goal of quality control is to provide a reasonabl e level of checking at various stages of the data collection process to ensure that data quality is mainta ined and if it is found that the quality has not been maintained, that it is discovered with a minimal loss of data (invalidation). Figure 10.1 provides an example of some of the QC samples used in the PM 2.5 

### data collection process. The figure also identifies what sources of error are associated with the QC samp le. So, in developing a quality control strategy, one must weigh the costs associated with quality c ontrol against the risks of data loss.

With the objective to minimize data loss, quality contro l data are most beneficial when they are assessed as soon as they are collected. Therefore, information management systems can play a very important role in reviewing QC data and flagging or identifying spurious data for further review. These information management procedures can help the technical staff review the QC checks coming from a number of monitoring sites in a consistent and time efficient manner. There are many graphical techniques (e.g., control charts and outlier checks) that can be employ ed to quickly identify suspect data. More details of information management systems are discussed later in this section. It is the responsibility of the monitoring organization, through the development of its QAPP, policies and procedures, to develop and

document the:

 

### QC techniques;

 

### frequency of the QC checks and the point in the measurement process that the check is introduced;

 

### traceability of QC standards;

 

### matrix of the check sample;

 

### appropriate test concentrations;

 

### actions to be taken in the event that a QC check identifies a failed or changed measurement

3 http://www.epa.gov/quality/qa_docs.html Field
Blank Laboratory Pre- Field Weighing

Field Sampling

Laboratory Post-Field Weighing Lab

Blank QC
Checks

Field

Blank

Field

Blank Routine Sample Collocated Sample

Routine Sample Collocated Sample Routine Sample Collocated Sample

QC
Checks PEP

PEP PEP

Lab
Blank QC
Checks

Meas. System
Contamination Instrument precision/bias Meas. System

Precision Meas. System

Bias Lab
Contamination Weighing lab
Precision/Bias

Figure 10.1 QC samples for PM 2.5 placed at various stage s of measurement processQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 12



### system;

 

### formulae for estimating data quality indicators;

 

### QC results, including control charts; and

 

### the means by which the QC data will be used to determine that the measurement performance is acceptable.



## 10.2 QC Activity Areas

For air monitoring projects the following three areas must have established QC activities, procedures and

criteria:

1. Data Collection.

2. Data management and the verifi cation and validation process.

3. Reference materials.

Data collection includes any process involved in acquiring a concentration or value, including but not limited to: sample preparation, field sampling, sam ple transportation, field analytical (continuous) methods, and laboratory preparation/analytical pro cesses. Depending on the importance of the data and resources available, monitoring programs can implem ent QC samples, as illustrated in Figure 10.1, to identify the errors occurring at various phases of monitoring process. Many of the QC samples can identify errors from more than one phase. Table 10-1 provides a list of the majority of the QC samples utilized in the ambient air program and include both their primary (double check √√ ) and secondary uses (single √ ) in error identification. Many of these checks ar e required in CFR; others are strongly suggested in the method guidance. The MQO/validation temp lates provided in Appendix D provide the minimum requirements for the frequency that these checks be implemented but many monitoring organization choose more frequent checking in order to reduce the ri sk of data invalidation. A good example of this increased effort is the zero/span and one-point preci sion checks for the gaseous criteria pollutants. Although CFR requires the check to be performed on ce every two weeks, due to the advent of more sophisticated automated monitoring systems, many monitoring organization perform these checks every 24-hours (11:45 PM – 12:15 AM). In addition, once the QC checks are developed for a particular monitoring method, it is important to identify the acceptance criteria and what corrective action will be taken once a QC check fails. The MQO/Validation temp late in Appendix D can be used to list the QC samples with a column added to include corrective action. Table 10-2 provides an example of a QC Sample Table for PM 2.5 

### . Although the validation templates provide guidance for when data should be invalidated, it is up to the monitoring organization to provide the specific corrective actions for the failure of a specific QC check and therefore, Table 10-2 does not identify specific corrective actions.

Data management quality control is discussed in more detail in Section 14 and the verification/validation process in Section 17. Auto mated verification/validation processes require some frequency of checking to ensure that they are perfo rmed correctly since errors in programming can cause persistent errors for long periods of time. At tim es new versions of software can cause programs that worked properly in the past to falter. Providing QC checks (e.g., entering a data set that has errors that the programs are expected to identify) to software to ensure they operate properly is strongly suggested.

Reference materials are the standards by which many of the QC checks are performed. Reference material can be gaseous standards as well as devices (e.g ., flow rate standards). If these standards are not checked and verified as to their certified values, th en the quality of data becomes suspect. Reference materials need to be certified and recertified at acceptabl e frequencies in order to maintain the integrity ofQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 12



### the reference material. It is suggested that standa rds be certified annually. More discussion on standards is

included in Section 12.

Other elements of an organization’s QAPP that may contain related sampling and analytical QC requirements include:

 

### Sampling Design which identifies the planned field QC samples as well as procedures for QC sample preparation and handling;

 

### Sampling Method Requirements which includes following the QC requirements of the

reference methods found in CFR Part 50 and for determining if the collected samples accurately represent the population of interest (representativeness);

 

### Sample Handling and Custody Requirements which discusses any QC devices employed to ensure samples are not tampered with (e.g., custody seals) or subjected to other unacceptable conditions during transport;

 

### Analytical Methods Requirements which includes information on the subsampling methods and information on the preparation of QC samples (e.g., blanks and replicates); and

 

### Instrument Calibration and Frequency which defines prescribed criteria for triggering recalibration (e.g., failed calibration checks).



## 10.3 Internal vs. External Quality Control

Quality control can be separated into 2 major categori es: internal QC and external QC. Both types of quality control are important in a well implemented quality system.

Internal –

Most of the quality control activities take place internally; meaning the monitoring organization responsible for collecting the data develops and implements the quality control activities, evaluates the data, and takes corrective action when necessary. The internal activities can be used to take immediate action if data appear to be out of acceptance.

External QC—

External quality control can be implemented as an audit with external/indepe ndent devices or through the submission of samples of two types: “double-b lind” meaning the QC sample is not known (looks like a routine sample) and therefore its concentrati on in unknown, or “single-blind” meaning they are known to be a QC sample but its concentration is unknown to the person or organization performing the measurement. These samples are also called pe rformance evaluation or proficiency test samples and are explained in Section 15. External QC may identify errors occurring in internal QC activities. For example, an external flow rate audit may identify an internal flow rate verification standard that is out of calibration. Because these checks are performed by external organizations, the results are not always immediately available and therefore have a diminished capacity to control data quality in “real-time.” However they are useful as an objec tive test of the internal QC procedures and may identify errors (i.e., biased or contaminated standa rds) that might go unnoticed in an internal QC
system.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 12QA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 12

Table 10-2 PM 2.5 Field and Lab QC Checks

Requirement Frequency Acceptance Criteria Corrective Action

Field QC Checks

Calibration Standard Recertifications

Flow Rate Transfer Std.

Field Thermometer

Field Barometer 1/yr 1/yr

1/yr + 2% of NIST-traceable Std.

+ 0.1 o C resolution

+ 0.5 o C accuracy

+ 1 mm Hg resolution

+ 5 mm Hg accuracy

Verification/ Calibration Flow Rate (FR) Calibration FR multi-point verification One point FR verification

External Leak Check

Internal Leak Check Temperature Calibration Temp multi-point verification One- point temp Verification

Pressure Calibration

Pressure Verification

Clock/timer Verification If multi-point failure 1/yr

1/mo every 5 sampling events every 5 sampling events

If multi-point failure on installation, then 1/yr

1/mo on installation, then 1/yr

1/mo

1/mo + 2% of transfer standard

+ 2% of transfer standard

+ 4% of transfer standard

80 mL/min

80 mL/min

+ 2% of standard

+ 2  Cof standard

+ 4  C of standard

+ 10 mm Hg

+ 10 mm Hg

1 min/mo

Blanks

Field Blanks See 2.12 reference + 30 μg

Precision Checks Collocated samples every 12 days CV < 10%

Audits ( external assessments )

FRM PEP

Flow rate audit

External Leak Check

Internal Leak Check Temperature Audit

Pressure Audit 5 or 8 sites/year

1/6mo

1/6mo

1/6mo 1/year 1/ year + 10%

+ 4% of audit standard

< 80 mL/min

< 80 mL/min

+ 2  C

+ 10 mm Hg
Laboratory QC Checks

Blanks

Lot Blanks Exposure lot blanks

Lab Blanks 9-lot 3 per lot 10% or 1 per weighing

session + 15 μg difference

+ 15 μg difference

+ 15 μg difference

Verification/ Calibration

Balance Calibration Lab Temp. Calibration Lab Humidity Calibration 1/yr

1/6mo

1/6mo Manufacturers spec.

+ 2  C

+ 2%

Bias

Balance Audit

Balance Check 1/year

beginning, every 10th samples, end + 15 μg for unexposed filters

< + 3 μg

Calibration standards Working Mass Stds. Primary Mass Stds. 3-6 mo. 1/yr 25 μg 25 μg

Precision Duplicate filter weighings 1 per weighing session + 15 μg differenceQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 12



## 10.4 CFR Related Qua lity Control Samples

40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A identifies a number of qua lity control samples that must be implemented for the SLAMS (and NCore) SPM and PSD networks. By 200 9, any special purpose monitors that use FRMs or FEMs will be required to follow these requirements unless granted a waiver by the Regional Administrator (or delegate). Table 10-3 provides a su mmary of the QC checks for the criteria pollutants and the CFR reference where an explanation of each ch eck is described. The reader should distinguish the requirements that are related to automated and manual methods since there are some differences.

Table 10-3 Ambient Air Monitoring Measurement Quality Samples
Method CFR Reference Coverage (annual) Minimum frequency MQOs*

Automated Methods One-Point QC:

for SO 2 , NO 2 , O 3 , CO Section 3.2.1 Each analyzer Once per 2 weeks O 3 Precision 7%, Bias + 7%.

SO 2 , NO 2 , CO Precision 10% , Bias + 10% Annual performance

evaluation

for SO 2 , NO 2 , O 3 , CO Section 3.2.2 Each analyzer Once per year See validation templates App

D.

Flow rate verification

PM 10 ,PM 2.5 , PM 10-2.5 , Section 3.2.3 Each sampler Once every month < 4% of standard and 5% of design value

Semi-annual flow rate

audit

PM 10 , PM 2.5 , PM 10-2.5, Section 3.2.4 Each sampler Once every 6 months < 4% of standard and 5% of design value Collocated sampling

PM 2.5 , PM 10-2.5, Section 3.2.5 15% within PQAO Every twelve days PM 2.5 , - 10% precision

PM 10-2.5- - 15% precision TSP – 10% precision

Performance evaluation

program
PM 2.5 ,PM 10-2.5 Section 3.2.7 1. 5 valid audits for primary QA orgs, with < 5 sites 2. 8 valid audits for primary QA orgs, with > 5 sites 3. All samplers in 6 years over all 4 quarters PM 2.5 , - + 10% bias

PM 10-2.5- - + 15% bias

Manual Methods Collocated sampling

PM 10 , , PM 10-2.5, PM 2.5 Pb-TSP, Pb-P 10 3.3.1 and 3.3.5 15% within PQAO Every 12 days PSD every 6 days PM 10 , TSP, PM 2.5 , - 10% precision

PM 10-2.5- - 15% precision

Flow rate verification

PM 10 (low Vol),PM 10-2.5 , PM 2.5, , Pb-PM 10 3.3.2 Each sampler Once every month < 4% of standard and 5% of design value

Flow rate verification

PM 10 (High-Vol), Pb-TSP 3.3.2 Each sampler Once every quarter Varies by instrument type see validation templates

Semi-annual flow rate

audit

PM 10 (low Vol), PM 10-2.5 , PM 2.5 , 3.3.3 Each sampler, all locations Once every 6 months < 4% of standard and 5% of design value

Semi-annual flow rate

audit

PM 10 (High-Vol), Pb-TSP 3.3.3 Each sampler, all locations Once every 6 months Varies by instrument type see validation templates Pb Analysis Audits Pb-TSP, Pb-PM 10 3.3.4 1. Each sampler 2. Analytical (lead strips) 1. Include with TSP 2. Each quarter 1. Same as for TSP.

2. - + 10% bias

Performance evaluation

program PM 2.5, PM 10-2.5 3.3.7 and 3.3.8 1. 5 valid audits for primary QA orgs, with < 5 sites 2. 8 valid audits for primary QA orgs, with > 5 sites 3. All samplers in 6 years Over all 4 quarters PM 2.5 , + 10% bias

PM 10-2.5-, + 15% bias

* Some of the MQOs are found in CFR and others in Appendix D of this guidance document.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 12



### Blanks and Blank Correction

The objective for collecting blanks at various phases of sample collection is to determine whether contamination is occurring at that phase, be it in th e field, during sample transport or at the analytical laboratory, and to try to reduce this contamination if it is greater than acceptance limits. Some level of contamination is acceptable and values below the accep tance limits do not require corrective action or investigation. Values above this le vel should be investigated in order to reduce this contamination to acceptable levels. EPA does not endorse blank correc tion of data unless it is already an accepted practice in a monitoring program/method. In rare cases there may be a laboratory or measurement phase that has a measurable, consistent and documen ted level of contamination that cannot be eliminated and blank correction may be contemplated to adjust the data for this contamination. In this case the agency should contact the EPA Region for advice.



### Operating Ranges, Calibration Scale, Zer o, Span, 1-point QC Checks and Performance

Evaluations

Due to successes over the years in reducing pollution, am bient air monitoring concentrations are steadily decreasing. Many monitoring organizations are now purchasing trace gas monitors not only for NCore sites but also for the routine monitoring sites. The ambi ent air QA regulations have kept up with this trend by lowering and expanding the performance evaluation a udit levels and suggesting that the audit levels

chosen “ should represent or bracket 80 percent of ambien t concentrations measured by the analyzer being evaluated . The regulation also suggest the one-point QA checks for the gasses “should be related to the routine concentrations normally measured at sites within the monitoring network in order to appropriately reflect the precision and bias at these routine concentration ranges”. The intent of the regulatory language is to perform a nd report quality control data at con centrations more reflective of the

routine concentrations.

When the ambient air QA regulations and guidance we re initially promulgated routine concentrations were higher, there were different reference methods , different and less sensitive monitoring instruments and calibration technologies and a different quality of g as standards. All of the technological change has been for the better and should allow for better preci sion and bias at lower concentration ranges. In addition, older guidance may have suggested that monito rs had to be operated and calibrated at one of the ranges for which they were approved. Current guida nce suggests the following fo r each of the QC checks for gaseous pollutants:

Operating Range - This term should be used for the ranges th at are promulgated in the approved federal reference method (FRM) or federal equivalent met hod (FEM) designation. Some instruments have been designated for more than one opera ting range and one range may need to be selected for operating the instrument. This range needs to be acknowledged when determining calibration concentration but only to the extent that one would not operate within one ope rating range and calibrate with points higher than the selected operating range.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 12



### Calibration Scale – The term should

be used to indicate the concentration range that the instrument is calibrated over. EPA feels that monitoring organization should have more flexibility in deciding their calibration scale and although it needs to be within the selected operating range it does not necessarily need to be performed at concentration levels not normally measured by the monitor. Figure 10.2 provides an example of some calibrations performed in the past where the 4 calibration points (plus zero point) were spread evenly across the operating range starting at 80% of the operating range. As indicated, the routine data for this site is clustered around the lowest calibration point. It is suggested that monitoring organizations select a calibration scale that provides more calibration points at the lower concentrations to establish a better test of linearity at the routine concentration ranges.

Zero Point - the bi-weekly zero point is fairly well define d and a straight forward procedure for using zero air generators or standards to measure a zero point. Some air monitoring analyzers are capable of periodically carrying out automatic zero and span ca librations and making their own zero and span self adjustments to predetermined readings. EPA disc ourages the use of automatic span adjustments but considers automatic zero adjustments reasonable when 1) the automatic zero standards pass through the sample inlet and sample conditioning system, 2) the zero point/adjustment is performed daily, and 3) both the adjusted and unadjusted zero response readings can be obtained from the data recording device. Previously collected routine data should not be corrected based upon zero or span values.

Span Point- the bi-weekly s pan points have been traditionally set at 80-90% of the operating range, as indicated in Figure 10-2. The span check concentration should be selected that is more beneficial to the quality control of the routine data at the site a nd EPA suggests: 1) the selection of an appropriate calibration scale (as described above) and, 2) selecting a span that at a minimum is above 120% of the highest NAAQS (for sites used for designation purposes) and above the 99% of the routine data over a 3 year period.

One-Point QC – The bi-weekly one point QC check is require d to be reported within the range of 0.01- 0.10 ppm for O 3 

### , SO 2 

### and NO 2 

### and 1 – 10 ppm for CO and the concen tration selected should be related to the routine concentrations normally measured at s ites within the monitoring network in order to appropriately reflect the precision and bi as at the routine concentration ranges.

Annual Performance Evaluations (PE) - A November 10, 2010 Technical Memorandum 4 

### expanded the

list of annual PE audit levels from 5 to 10 and revised the selection process so that one did not have to

4 Expanded List of Audit Levels for Annual Performance Evaluation for SO 2 , NO 2 , O 3 , and CO as Described in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A Section 3.2.2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 12



### select three consecutive levels. This language will be updated in the next revision of 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A. The audit levels chosen should represent or bracket 80 percent of ambient concentrations measured by the analyzer being evaluated. Due to th e audit levels being expand ed to allow for lower concentration audits to support NCore and trace level work, a February 11, 2011 Technical Memo 5 

### was posted on AMTIC that 

### EPA suggests the use of the following acceptance criteria for levels 1 and 2 audit ranges:

 For O 3 

### , SO 2 

### , and NO 2 

### : + 1.5 ppb difference or + 15 percent difference, whichever is
greater.

 For CO: + 0.03 ppm difference or + 15 percent difference, whichever is greater.

For audit levels 3-10, the 15 percent difference a cceptance criteria, currently in guidance, is acceptable.

Selecting Appropriate Concentration Ranges for Gaseous QC Samples

The regulations attempt to provide some flexibilit y on how monitoring organizations choose the QC concentration ranges. The following scenario is an acceptable approach to selecting the QC concentrations. It uses ozone data from a typical routine monitoring site. Figure 10.3 illustrates this

process.

1) Take 3-years of 8-hour or 1-hour max values ( 101 ppb is highest 8-hour max for this example) 2) Multiply the highest 8-hour or 1-hour max by 1.5, to establish the calibration scale (150 ppb) a) If calculation in step 2 is below NAAQS, use 1.5x of the NAAQS (if sites are used for regulatory purposes) 3) Take 80% of calibration scale (120 ppb) to establish the span check value. The span check can now serve as a bi-weekly check to protect the NAAQS 4) Use the current CFR requirements to select 1-point QC checks. Since the current 1-point QC check range is 10-100 ppb for O 3 

### and the mean 8-hour max is around 50 ppb, 50 ppb would be an adequate concentration for this site. 5) This information can be used to select the

annual PE audit levels. Since the audit

levels should reflect 80% of the routine data, an “80% box” could be created to

select 80% of the routine data. The 80%

5 Guidance on Statistics for Use at Audit Levels 1 and 2 of the Expanded List of Audit Levels for Annual

Performance Evaluation for SO 2 , NO 2 , O 3 , and CO as Described in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A Section 3.2.2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/datamang/20110217lowlevelstatmemo.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 12



### box can slide in both the left and the right direc tion. In the case of Figure 10.3, the box represents the upper 80% of the routine data. Therefore PE a udit levels 3, 4, 5 and 6 would be the most appropriate to select for this site.

The approached described above is an example that allows for flexibility depending on the sites and the concentrations measured within a monitoring network. This approach can be used for individual sites (where there is greater variability in concentrations ac ross the network) or it can be used for an aggregate of sites within a PQAO (where less variability in con centrations exist). The approach can be used with one year of data or it can be used with multiple y ears of data. Two issues should dictate the approach

used:

 Ensure that the calibration scale exceeds the range of real and possible routine concentrations and is above any primary and secondary NAAQS.

 Ensure the span check is protective of the NAAQS. 

### The monitoring organizations QAPP would document the approach used.



## 10.5 Use of Computers for Quality Control

With the wide range of computers now available, a nd the advancements in data acquisition system (DAS) technologies, consideration should be given to a computer system that can process and output the information in a timely fashion. Such a computer system should be able to:

 

### compute calibration equations

 

### compute measures of linearity of calibrations (e.g.,

standard error or correlation coefficient)

 

### plot calibration curves

 

### compute zero/span drift

results

 

### plot zero/span drift data

 

### compute precision and bias

results

 

### compute control chart limits

 

### plot control charts

 

### automatically flag out-ofcontrol results

 

### maintain and retrieve calibra tion and performance records

 

### format data for reporting to AQS .

Some of these checks (e.g., calibrations ) only need to be reviewed as n eeded or when the actual check is performed. Other checks, like zero/span/one point QC checks or programmed routine data range or outlier checks that may occur every day are much more easily performed automatically by properly programmed computer systems. Earlier versions of this Handbook provided examples of quality controlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 10

Revision No:0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 12



### charts for zero and span drifts but with the advanced data acquisition system technologies available, the development of these charts is fairly straight forwar d. Figure 10.4, represents daily CO span checks over a 3 month period. This control chart can be downloa ded from the American Society for Quality (ASQ)

web site 6



### .

Many vendors offering newer generatio n data loggers and ambient air information management systems provide programming of some of the QC checki ng capabilities listed above. EPA has also provided guidance and a Data Assessment Statistical Calculator 7 

### (DASC) tool for the precision and bias calculations of the quality control checks required in CFR Part 58, Appendix A. In addition, the AMP 255 Report in AQS also provides these statistics for many of the QC samples described in Table 10-3 but use of the 255 Report requires data reporting to AQS which does not usually occur in time frames needed for quality control.

6 http://asq.org/learn-about-quality/data-collecti on-analysis-tools/overview/control-chart.html

7 DASC tool on AMTIC at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qareport.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 7



# 11.0 Instrument Equipment Test ing, Inspection and Maintenance

Implementing an ambient air monitoring network, with the various types of equipment needed, is no easy task. Through appropriate testing, inspection and maintenance programs, monitoring organizations can be assured that equipment is capable of operating at acceptable performance levels. Every piece of equipment has an expected life span, and its use s hould be discontinued if its performance quality ceases to meet appropriate standards. For amortization purposes, EPA estimates a 7 year lifespan for most monitoring instruments and a somewhat longer lif espan for more permanent types of equipment (instrument racks, monitoring shelters etc.). This schedule means that funds for replacing capital equipment are provided in resource a llocations and monitoring organizati ons should make the best use of equipment replacement resources. Monitoring organizati ons may be able to prolong the life of equipment but in doing so they may run the risk of additional downtime, more upkeep and a greater chance of data invalidation, while losing out on newer technologies, better sensitivity/stability and the opportunities for better information management technologies.

Due to the many types of equipment that can be used in an ambient air monitoring program, this section provides general guidance on testing, inspection a nd maintenance procedures for broad categories of equipment only. In most cases, equipment manufacturers include inspection and maintenance information in the operating manuals. The role of monitoring organizations, in developing a quality system, is to address the scheduling and documentation of routine testing, inspection, and maintenance.

Detailed maintenance documents shoul d be available for each monitoring site. Elements incorporated into testing, inspection and maintenance documents include:

 

### equipment lists - by organization and station;

 

### spare equipment/parts lists - by equipment, including suppliers;

 

### inspection/maintenance frequency - by equipment;

 

### testing frequency and source of the test concentrations or equipment;

 

### equipment replacement schedules;

 

### sources of repair - by equipment;

 

### service agreements that are in place; and

 

### monthly check sheets and entry forms for documenting testing, inspections and maintenance performed.



## 11.1 Instrumentation

11.1.1 Analyzers and Samplers

Aside from the specific exceptions d escribed in Appendix C of Part 58 1 

### , monitoring methods used for SLAMS monitoring must be a reference or equivale nt method, designated as such by 40 CFR Part 53 2 

### and

will be labeled as such 3 

### . Reference or equivalent methods also must be used at NCore monitoring sites intended for comparison with any NAAQS. Among refe rence and equivalent methods, a variety of analyzer designs and features are available. For certain pollutants, analyzers employing different measurement principles are available. Some an alyzer models only meet the minimum performance specifications (see Table 7-6), while others provide a higher level of performance. Section 7 provides information on what aspects to consider when selec ting a particular monitoring instrument/analyzer.

1 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix C http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

2 40 CFR Part 53

3 40 CFR Part Part 53.9(d)QA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 7



### Upon receiving the new analyzer, the user should caref ully read the instructions or operating manual provided by the manufacturer. Information or instru ctions concerning the following should be found in

the manufacturer’s manual:

 

### unpacking and verifying that all component parts were delivered;

 

### checking for damage during shipment;

 

### checking for loose fittings and electrical connections;

 

### assembling the analyzer;

 

### installing the analyzer;

 

### calibrating the analyzer;

 

### operating the analyzer;

 

### electrical and plumbing diagrams;

 

### preventive maintenance schedule and procedures;

 

### troubleshooting; and

 

### a list of expendable parts.

NOTE: Many vendors have specific time periods when the initial checks for damage in transit need to be made so it may be important to perform an initial check/verification of the equipment as soon as possible. The monitor s hould be assembled and set up according to the

instructions in the manufacturer’s manual.

Initial Set-up and Acceptance Testing

It may be important to do this initial set-up and t esting at the main office or laboratory facility (see Section 11.1.3) before taking the equipment to the s ite. Following analyzer set-up, and allowance for the instrument to reach required operating conditions, an initial verification of performance characteristics such as power flow, noise, response time and a multi-poi nt verification should be performed to determine if the analyzer is operating properly. These guide lines assume that the instrument was previously

calibrated. If the instrument was disassembled after calibration, or no calibration of the instrument had previously been performed, the monitor must have a multi-point verification/calibration to ensure it is within acceptable calibration requirements prior to use. Zero/span drift and precision should be checked during the initial calibration or measured using abbrev iated forms of the test procedures provided in 40 CFR Part 53. Acceptance of the analyzer should be based on results from these performance tests. If the analyzer does not perform to stated specifications, document the testing proce dures and data and contact the manufacturer for corrective action. Once accepted, reference and equivalent analyzers are guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate within the re quired performance specifications for one year 4 

### , unless major repairs are performed or parts are replaced. In such instances, the analyzers must be recalibrated before

use.



### 11.1.2 Support Instrumentation

Experiences of monitoring organization staff; prev entive maintenance requirements, ease of maintenance and general reliability play crucial roles in the sel ection of support equipment. The following examples depict general categories of support equipment and t ypical features to look for when selecting this equipment. This list is meant to guide agencies in the selection of equipment and does not represent required specifications.

4 40 CFR Part 53.9 (c)QA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 7



###  Calibration Standards: Calibration standards fall into several categories:



## - mass flow controlled (MFC) devices;



## - standards that meet the 2012 Traceability Protocol for Gaseous Calibration Standards 5



## - permeation devices;



## - voltage standards for equipment testing;



## - photometers;



## - flow measurement devices;



## - barometric pressure measurement devices; and



## - temperature measurement devices.

It is recommended that the devices be 110 VAC, be compatible with data acquisition systems for automated calibrations, and have digital compatib ility or true transistor-transistor logic (TTL). The most common standards are MFC devices and pe rmeation devices. Both use dilution air to obtain the needed output pollutant concentration.

 Data Acquisition Systems (DAS): DAS should have at least 32-bit logic for improved performance (DAS with at least 16-bit logic can still be used); have modem and internet capabilities; allow remote access and control; allow for digita l input; and be able to initiate automated calibrations and polling. It is also recommended that DAS have software compatible with AQS and AQI reporting and editing. Both da ta loggers and analog chart recorders may be used for recording data; however, the storage, communicability, and flexibility of DAS coupled with data loggers makes the DAS systems the pr eferred option. More information on DAS is

found in Section 14.

 Instrument Racks: Instrument racks should be constructed of steel and be able to accept sliding trays or rails. Open racks help to keep instru ment temperatures down and allow air to circulate freely.

 Instrument Benches: Instrument benches should be of sufficient space to allow adequate room for multiple instruments with room to work and be capable of supporting a fair amount of weight (> 100 lbs). Slate or other hard, water-proof materials (e.g., steel) are recommended.

 Zero Air Systems and Standards: Zero air systems should be able to deliver 10 liters/min of air that is free of ozone, NO, NO 2 

### , and SO 2 

### to 0.001 ppm and CO and non-methane hydrocarbons to 0.1 ppm or below the instruments method detection limit (whichever is lower). With NCore monitoring and the use of trace gas monitors, there may be a need to audit and calibrate at lower level. Therefore monitoring organization may need to acquire zero air systems capable to delivering zero air at 20 to 30 liters/min. There are many commercially available systems; however, simple designs can be obtained by usi ng a series of canisters. In addition, the 2012 Traceability Protocol for Gaseous Calibration Standards includes a discussion of zero gas standards which are commercially available. Alt hough not required for use under protocol gasses, the standards can be used as a check on zero air systems.

5 EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Stan dards (EPA-600/R-23/531) http://www.epa.gov/nrmrl/appcd/ mmd/db-traceability-p rotocol.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 7



### 11.1.3 Laboratory Support

While it is not required, monitori ng organizations should employ full laboratory facilities. These facilities should be equipped to test, repair, troubleshoot, a nd calibrate all analyzers and support equipment necessary to operate the ambient air monitoring netw ork. In cases where individual laboratories are not feasible, a monitoring organization may be able to find a central laboratory (PQAO) where these activities can be performed.

It is recommended that the laboratory be designed to accommodate the air quality laboratory/shop and

PM 10 

### and PM 2.5 

### filter rooms 6 

### , as well as enforcement instrumentation support activities. The air quality portion consists of several benches flanked by instru ment racks. One bench and rack are dedicated to ozone traceability. The other instrument racks are de signated for calibration and repair. A room should be set aside to house spare parts and extra analyzers.

A manifold/sample cane should be mounted behind the bench. If possible, a sample cane that passes through the roof to allow analyzers that are being t ested to sample outside air should be mounted to the bench. This configuration also allows any excess calibra tion gas to be exhausted to the atmosphere. It is recommended that the pump room be extern al to the building to eliminate noise.

Each bench area should have an instrument rack attach ed to the bench. The instrument rack should be equipped with sliding trays or rails that allow easy inst allation of instruments. If instrumentation needs to be repaired and then calibrated, these activities can be performed on the bench top or within the rack. Analyzers then can be allowed to warm up and be calib rated by a calibration unit. Instruments that are to be tested are connected to the sample manifold and allowed to sample air in the same manner as if the analyzer were being operated within a monitoring station. The analyzer is connected to an acquisition system (e.g., DAS, data logger, chart recorder, etc. ) and allowed to operate. Any intermittent problems that occur can be observed on the data logger/chart reco rder. The analyzer can be allowed to operate over several days to see if anomalies or problems reoccur; if they do, there is a record of them. If the instrument rack has a DAS and calibrator, nightly auto QC checks can be performed to see how the analyzer reacts to known gas concentrations. In add ition, the ozone recertifica tion bench and rack should

be attached to a work bench. The rack should house the local ozone level 2 standard 7 

### and the ozone transfer standards (level 3 and greater) that are being checked for recertification. Zero air is plumbed into this rack for the calibration and testing of ozone analyzers and transfer standards.

During FRM/FEM testing EPA tries to ensure that mo nitoring equipment manufacturers test instruments a varying environmental extremes. However within th e period of testing some extremes that exist in some monitoring areas may not be achieved. Monito ring organizations that ha ve large regions with varying extremes of temperature, humidity and pressure may want to invest in an environmental chamber

that can be used to test mon itoring instruments against the ma nufactures advertized performance

standards.



## 11.2 Preventive Maintenance

Every monitoring organization should develop a preventive maintenance program. Preventive maintenance is what its name implies; maintaining the equipment within a network to prevent downtime and costly repairs and data loss. Preventive mainte nance is an ongoing element of quality control and is

6 Guidance on filter room requirements can be found in methods 2.10 and 2.11 for PM 10 and 2.12 for PM 2.5 7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/ qaqc/OzoneTransferStandardGuidance.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 7



### typically enveloped into the daily routine. In add ition to the daily routine, scheduled activities must be performed monthly, quarterly, semi-annually and annu ally. Often the standard operating procedures and/or operation manuals will provide preventa tive maintenance activities for the particular instrument/method. It is suggested that these sections could be assembled into a preventative maintenance document that could be kept at each site and accessed electronically so that maintenance can be implemented and documented in a consistent manner.

Preventive maintenance is the responsibility of the st ation operators and the supervisory staff. It is important that the supervisor review the preventive ma intenance work and continua lly check the schedule. The supervisor is responsible for making sure th at preventive maintenance is being accomplished in a timely manner. Preventive maintenance is not a st atic process; procedures must be updated for many reasons, including, but not limited to, new models or types of instruments and new or updated methods. The preventive maintenance schedule is changed whenev er an activity is completed or performed at an alternate time. For instance, if a multipoint calibra tion is performed in February instead of on the scheduled date in March, then the subsequent six-month calibration date moves from September to August. On a regular basis, the supervisor should review the preventive main tenance schedule with the station operators. Following all repairs, the instrume nts must be verified (multi-point) or calibrated.

Lists can facilitate the organization and tracking of tasks and improve the efficiency of preventive maintenance operations. A checklist of regular main tenance activities (e.g., periodic zero-span checks, daily routine checks, data dump/collection, calibra tions, etc.) is recommended. A spare parts list, including relevant catalog numbers, is also recomme nded, as it facilitates the ordering of replacement parts. Such a list should be readily accessible and should include the types and quantities of spare parts already on-hand.



### 11.2.1 Station Maintenance

Station maintenance is an element of preventive ma intenance that does not occur on a routine basis; rather, these tasks usually occur on an “as needed” basis. Station maintenance items are checked monthly or whenever an agency knows th at the maintenance needs to be performed. Examples of station

maintenance items include:

 

### floor cleaning;

 

### shelter inspection;

 

### security inspection fencing, locks, surveillance cameras, lighting;

 

### visual inspection of probes, and met gear

 

### air conditioner repair;

 

### AC filter replacement;

 

### weed abatement and grass cutting;

 

### roof repair;

 

### general cleaning;

 

### inlet and manifold cleaning;

 

### manifold exhaust blower lube;

 

### desiccant replacement; and

 

### ladder, safety rails, safety inspection, if applicable.

Simple documentation of these activities, whether in station logs or electronic logs, helps provide evidence of continuous attention to data quality.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 7



### 11.2.2 Routine Operations

Routine operations are the checks that occur at specified periods of time during a monitoring station visit. These duties must be performed and documented in or der to operate a monitoring network at optimal levels. Examples of typical routine op erations are detailed in Table 11-1.

Table 11-1 Routine Operation Checks

Item Each Visit Weekly/Monthly Minimum

Observation of unusual

conditions/events X

Review Data X Mark charts, where applicable X

Check/Oil Exhaust Blower X

Check Exterior X Check/Change Desiccant X

Manifold Leak Test X Inspect tubing X Replace Tubing Annually 1

Inspect manifold and cane X Clean manifold and cane Every 6 months or as needed Check HVAC systems X

Check electrical connections X Field site supply inventory X

Residence time calculation If manifold and inlets altered

1 If tubing is used externally as an inlet device it may need to be replaced every 6 months or more frequently depending upon sit e specific issues



### .

In addition to these items, the exterior of the build ing, sample cane, meteorological instruments and tower, entry door, electrical cables, and any other items deemed necessary to ch eck, should be inspected for wear, corrosion, and weathering. Costly repairs can be avoided in this manner.



### 11.2.3 Instrument Logs and Site Logs

Each instrument and piece of support equipment (with the exception of the instrument racks and benches) should have an Instrumentation Repair Log (either pape r or electronic). The log should contain the repair and calibration history of that particular instrume nt. Whenever multipoint verification/calibration, instrument maintenance, repair, or relocation occurs, detailed notes are written in the instrumentation log. The log contains the most recent multipoint verifi cation/calibration report, a preventive maintenance sheet, and the acceptance testing information or refere nce to the location of this information. If an instrument is malfunctioning and a decision is made to relocate that instrument, the log travels with that device. The log can be reviewed by staff for po ssible clues to the reasons behind the instrument malfunction. In addition, if the instrument is shi pped to the manufacturer for repairs, it is recommended that a copy of the log be sent with the instrument. This information helps non-agency repair personnel with troubleshooting instrument problems. Improper r ecording of instrument maintenance can complicate future repair and maintenance procedures. The in strument log should be de tailed enough to determine easily and definitively which instrument was at which site(s) over any given time period. If a problem is found with a specific instrument, the monitoring staff should be able to track the problem to the date it initially surfaced and invalidate data even if the instrument was used at multiple sites.

A site log should be kept documenting maintenan ce of a specific monitoring site and the auxiliary monitoring equipment located there. Information that could be recorded includes the activities listed in the Station Maintenance and Routine Operati ons sections (Sections 11.2.1 and 11.2.2).QA Handbook Vol II, Section 11.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 7



### The site log is a chronology of the events that occur at the monitoring station. The log is an important part of station maintenance because it contains the narrative of past problems and solutions to those problems. Site log notes should be written in the form of a narrative, rather than shorthand notes or bulleted lists. Examples of items that should be recorded in the site log are:

 

### the date, time, and initials of the pers on(s) who have arrived at the site;

 

### brief description of the weather (e.g., clear, breezy, sunny, raining);

 

### brief description of exterior of the site. Any chan ges that might affect the data should be recorded – for instance, if someone is parking a truck or tractor near the site, this note may explain high

NO

x 

### values;

 

### any unusual noises, vibrations, or anything out of the ordinary;

 

### records of any station maintenance or routine operations performed;

 

### description of the work accomplished at the site (e .g., calibrated instruments, repaired analyzer);

and

 

### detailed information about the instruments that may be needed for repairs or troubleshooting.

It is not required that the instrument and site logs be completely independent of each other. However, there is an advantage to having separate instrument logs. If instruments go in for repair, they may eventually be sent to another site. Having a separate instrument log allows the log to “travel” with the instrument. Keeping electronic instrument and stati on maintenance logs at stations and at centralized facilities (see LIMS discussion Section 8) also has record keeping advantages, but there needs to be a way

that these records can be considered official and not be tampered with or falsified. Newer electronic signature technologies are helping ensure that electro nic records can be considered official. It is important, however, that all of the required informatio n for each instrument and site be properly recorded using a method that is comprehensive and easily understood. Many monitoring organizations have developed standard station maintenance forms that c ontain all the items to be checked and the frequency of those checks. It then becomes a very simple proc edure to use this form to check off and initial the activities that were performed.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 10



# 12.0 Calibrations

Calibration is defined as:

the comparison of a measurement standard, instrume nt, or item with a standard or instrument of higher accuracy to detect and quantify ina ccuracies and to report or eliminate those inaccuracies by adjustment 1



### .

Prior to the implementation of any ambient air mon itoring activities, the sampling and analysis equipment

must be checked to assure it is within calibration to lerances, and if it fails these tolerances, must be appropriately calibrated. This function is most r outinely carried out at the field monitoring location.

1 American National Standard Quality Systems for Envi ronmental Data and Technology Programs ANSI /ASQ E4 http://www.asq.org/ 

### Calibration of an analyzer or instrument establish es the quantitative relationship between the actual value of a standard, be it a pollutant concentration, a temperature, or a mass value (in ppm, o 

### C or μg, etc.) and the analyzer's response (chart recorder reading, outpu t volts, digital output, etc.). This relationship is used to convert subsequent analyzer response values to corresponding concentrations. Once an instrument’s calibration relationship is established, it is checked at reasonable frequencies to verify that

it remains in calibration.

Verification Versus Calibration

Since the term calibration is associated with an adju stment in either the instrument or software, these adjustments should be minimized as much as possible. Sometimes perfo rming frequent adjustments to provide the “most accurate data possible” can be self-defeating and be the cause of additional measurement uncertainty. For example, adjusting an instrument based upon a standard that might be degrading or contaminated may actually cause data to be farther from the true concentration. Therefore, quality control procedures that include measurements (e .g., 1-point QC, flow rate verifications, etc.) and multi-point verifications are considered “checks w ithout correction” and are used to ensure the

instruments are within the calibration tolerances. Usua lly these tolerances have been developed so that as long as the instrument is within these tolerances, adjustments do not need to be made. However, verifications should be implemente d at reasonable frequencies to a void invalidating significant amounts

of data.

NOTE: When the term “calibration” is used in the remainder of this section, it is assumed that a multi-point verification is initially pe rformed and the operator has concluded that calibration (adjustment) is necessary.

NOTE: EPA does not recommend post-processing of data to “correct” for data failing one point or multi-point verifications. For example, if after failure of a one-point QC check a subsequent verification and calibration found that data was biased high by 15% the previous routine data up until the last acceptable 1-point QC check is not adjusted down by 15% and reported. Based upon va lidation criteria, the data is either reported as initially

measured or invalidated.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 10



### Each analyzer should be calibrated as directed by th e analyzer's operation or instruction manual and in accordance with the general guidance provided here. For reference methods for CO, NO 2 

### , SO 2 

### and O 3 

### , detailed calibration procedures may also be found in the appropriate reference method Appendix in 40

CFR Part 50 2 

### and the method guidance and technical assistan ce documents listed in the fact sheets in Appendix A.

Calibrations should be carried out at the field monitoring site by allowing the analyzer to sample test atmospheres containing known polluta nt concentrations. In the case of PM and Pb monitors where concentration standards are not available and impr actical, calibrations take place on flow, temperature and pressure devices as best as possible. At times this may need to be accomplished in laboratory settings rather than the field. The analyzer to be calibrated should be in operation for at least several hours (preferably overnight) prior to the calibration so that it is fully warmed up and its operation has stabilized. During the calibration, the analyzer shoul d be operating in its normal sampling mode, and it should sample the test atmosphere through all filte rs, scrubbers, conditioners, a nd other components used during normal ambient sampling and through as much of the ambient air inlet system as is practicable. All operational adjustments to the analyzer should be completed prior to the calibration (see section 12.7). Some analyzers can be operated on more than one range. For sites requiring the use of FRM or FEMs (NAAQS sites), the appropriate ranges are identified in the Designated Reference and Equivalent

Method List found on AMTIC 3 

### . Analyzers that will be used on more than one range or that have autoranging capability should be calibrated separately on each applicable range.

2 http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/ cfr/cfr-table-search.html

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html 

### Calibration documentation should be maintained with each analyzer and also in a central backup file. Documentation should be readily available for re view and should include ca libration data, calibration equation(s) (and curve, if prepared), analyzer id entification, calibration date, analyzer location, calibration standards used and their traceability, iden tification of calibration equipment used, and the person conducting the calibration.



### Full Scale vs. Calibration Scale

Many older documents and some of the CFR refe rence methods refer to calibration at “full scale”. The interpretation of this meant that monitoring organizations would calibrate to full scale of one of the FRM/FEM approved operating range(s) of the instrument. For example, ozone instruments are approved at 0-500 ppb or 0-1000 ppb. Many monitoring organization calibrate the instrument by evenly spacing four upscale points up to around 500 ppb. In this scenario, with most sites readi ng less than 80 ppb, the majority of the upscale calibration points

would be at levels not measur ed in ambient conditions. EPA suggests monitoring organization calibrate using points that are more applicable to the concen trations found in their networks while still be protective of concentrations exceeding the NAAQS . Using this procedure more points can be used to calibrate the instruments at these lower concentration levels and better inform monitoring organizations of stabil ity. For convenience, EPA will use the term

“calibration scale” to refer to the concentration range used for calibrating the monitoring instruments. Section 10 provides mo re details on this process.QA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 10 

## 12.1 Calibration Standards and Reagents

Calibration standards are:

 Reagents of high grade

 Gaseous standards of known concentrations that are certified as EPA protocol gasses

 Instruments and or standards of high sensitivity and repeatability.



### 12.1.1 Reagents

In some cases, reagents are prepared prior to sampling. Some of th ese reagents will be used to calibrate the equipment, while others will become an integral pa rt of the sample itself. In any case, their integrity must be carefully maintained from preparation thro ugh analysis. If there are any doubts about the method by which the reagents for a particular test were prepared or about the competence of the laboratory technician preparing them, the credibility of the ambient air samples and the test results will

be diminished. It is essential that a careful record be kept listing the dates the reagents were prepared, by whom, and their locations at all times from preparation until actual use. Prior to the test, one individual should be given the res ponsibility of monitoring the handling and the use of the reagents. Each use of the reagents should be recorded in a field or lab notebook.

Chemical reagents, solvents, and gases are available in various grades. Reagents can be categorized into the following six grades 4 

### :

1. Primary standard - Each lot is analyzed, and the pe rcentage of purity is certified.

2. Analyzed reagents - Can fall into 2 classes: (a) each lot is analyzed and the percentages of impurities are reported; and (b) conformity with specified tolerances is claimed, or the maximum percentages of impurities are listed.

3. USP and NF Grade - These are chemical reference standards where identity and strength analysis are ensured.

4. “ Pure,” “c.p.,” “chemically pure,” “highest purity” - These are qualitative statements for chemicals without numerical meaning.

5. “Pure,” “purified,” “practical grades” - These are usually intended as starting substances for laboratory syntheses.

6. Technical or commercial grades - These are chemicals of widely varying purity.

The reference and equivalent met hods define the grades and purities n eeded for the reagents and gases required in the Ambient Air Qu ality Monitoring Program.

All reagent containers should be pr operly labeled either with the original label or, at a minimum, the reagent, date prepared, expiration date, strength, preparer, and storage conditions. Leftover reagents used during preparation or analysis should never be returned to bottles.

4 Quality Assurance Principles for Analytical Laborato ries, 3rd Edition. By Frederick M. Garfield, Eugene Klesta, and Jerry Hirsch. AOAC International (2000). http://www.aoac.org/QA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 10 

### 12.1.2 Gaseous Standards

In general, ambient monitoring instruments should be calibrated by allowing the instrument to sample and analyze test atmospheres of known concentrations of the appropriate pollutant in air. The following is an excerpt from 50 CFR Part 58, Appendix A Section 2.6.1:

“Gaseous pollutant concentration standards (p ermeation devices or cylinders of compressed gas) used to obtain test concentrations for carbon mo noxide (CO), sulfur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen oxide (NO), and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) must be traceabl e to either a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Trace able Reference Material (NTRM) or a NIST-certified Gas Manufacturer’s Internal Standard (GMIS), certified in accordance with one of the procedures given in reference 4 of this appendix. Vendors advertising certification with the procedures provided in reference 4 of this appendix and distributing gasses as ‘‘EPA Protocol Gas’’ must participate in the EPA Protocol Gas Verification Program or not use ‘‘EPA’’ in any form of advertising.”

"Traceable" is defined in 40 CFR Parts 50 and 58 as m eaning that a local standard has been compared and certified, either directly or via not more than one intermediate standard, to a primary standard such as a National Institute of Standards and Technology Standard Reference Material (NIST SRM) or a USEPA/NIST-approved Certified Refe rence Material (CRM)”. Norma lly, the working standard should be certified directly to the SRM or CRM, with an intermediate standard used only when necessary. Direct use of a CRM as a working standard is accepta ble, but direct use of an NIST SRM as a working standard is discouraged because of the limited suppl y and expense of SRM's. At a minimum, the certification procedure for a working standard should:

 establish the concentration of the working st andard relative to the primary standard;

 certify that the primary standard (and hence the wo rking standard) is traceable to a NIST primary standard;

 include a test of the stability of the working standard over several days; and

 specify a recertification interval for the working standard.

Certification of the working standard may be estab lished by either the supplier or the user of the standard. As describe in CFR, gas supplier adve rtising “EPA Protocol Gas” will be required to participate in the EPA Protocol Gas Verification Pr ogram. Information on this program, including the gas supplier participating in the program, can be found on AMTIC 5 

### . EPA has developed procedures for the establishment of protocol gasses in the document: EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards 6 

### . Table 2-3 in the Traceability Document provides the maximum certification periods for verification and calibration standards used in the ambient air program. Since these periods sometimes change the table is not presented here.

Test concentrations of ozone must be traceable to a primary standard (see discussion of primary standards below) UV photometer as described in 40 CFR Part 50, Appendix D and the guidance

document: Transfer Standards for the Calibration of Ambient Air Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone 7

.

5 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/

6 http://www.epa.gov/nrmrl/appcd/ mmd/db-traceability-p rotocol.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/ qaqc/OzoneTransferStandardGuidance.pdf 

### For ambient air monitoring activities zero concentra tions can be acquired through zero air generation devices or purchased as standards. Although zero con centrations are not required to be traceable to aQA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 10 

### primary standard, care should be exercised to ensure that zero device or standards used are adequately free of all substances likely to cause a detectable res ponse from the analyzer and at a minimum, below the lower detectable limit of the criteria pollutants be ing measured. Periodically, several different and independent sources of zero should be compared. The one that yields the lowest response can usually (but not always) be assumed to be the “best zer o device/standard.” If several independent zero device/standards produce exactly the same response, it is likely that all the standards are adequate.

Certification periods decrease for concentrations belo w the applicable concentration ranges provide in Table 12-1. For example the certification period for SO 2 

### standards between 13-40 ppm is 6 months. Also, tank size may affect stability in low level sta ndards. Some gas manufacturers claim that standards supplied in smaller tanks are stable for longer periods of time then the same concentration in larger tanks. Although this claim has not been verified, if true it may be helpful in making purchasing decisions.



### Primary Reference Standards

A primary reference standard can be a defined measurement standard designated for the calibration of other measurement standards for quantities of a given kind in a given organization 8 

### . NIST’s standard reference material (SRM’s) are examples of primary reference standards. NIST also describes a Primary Reference Standard as a standard that is designa ted or widely acknowledged as having the highest metrological qualities and whose value is accepted wit hout reference to other standards of the same quality. For example, the NIST-F1 Atomic Clock 9 

### is recognized as a primary standard for time and frequency. A true primary standard like NIST-F1 est ablishes maximum levels for the frequency shifts caused by environmental factors. By summing or comb ining the effects of these frequency shifts, it is possible to estimate the uncertainty of a primary stan dard without comparing it to other standards. NIST maintains a catalog of SRMs that can be accessed through the Internet 10 

### . Primary reference standards are usually quite expensive and are often used to calibrate , develop, or assay working or secondary standards.

In order to establish and maintain NIST trace ability the policies posted at the NIST Website 11 

### should be

observed.

It is important that primary reference standards ar e maintained, stored, and handled in a manner that maintains their integrity. These standards should be kept under secure conditio ns and records should be maintained that document chain of custody information.



### 12.1.3 Instruments

The accuracy of various measurement devices in samp ling and continuous instruments is very important to data quality. For example, in order to produ ce the correct flow rate to establish an accurate PM 2.5 

### cut point, the temperature and barometric pressure sensors, as well as the flow rate device, must be producing accurate measurements. Table 12-1 provides some of th e more prevalent instruments that need to be calibrated at a minimum annually or when shown th rough various verification checks to be out of acceptable tolerances. In addition, the audit standa rds used to implement the checks and calibrations should be certified annually in order to establish th eir accuracy and traceability to higher standards.

8 definition of reference measurement standard from International vocabulary of metrology – Basic and general concepts and associated terms (VIM) http://www.bipm.org/en/publications/guides/vim.html

9 http://www.nist.gov/pml/div688/grp5 0/primary-frequency-standards.cfm

10 http://www.nist.gov

11 http://ts.nist.g ov/traceability/QA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 10

Table 12-1 Instruments an d Devices Requiring Calibration and Certifications.

Criteria Acceptable Range 40 CFR

Reference

Verification/Calibration of devi ces in sampler/analyzer/laboratory against an authoritative standard

Barometric Pressure  10 mm Hg Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.3

Temperature  2  C of standard Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.3

Flow Rate  2% of transfer standard Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2

Design Flow Rate Adjustment  2% of design flow rate Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.6

Clock/timer Verification 1 min/ mo Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4

Mirobalance Calibration Readability 1 μg

Repeatability 1 μg Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1

Verification/Calibration of de vices in shelter or lab agai nst an author itative standard

Lab Temperature  2  C not described

Lab Humidity  2% not described

Mirobalance Calibration Readability 1 μg

Repeatability 1 μg Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1

Verification/calibration standards requiring certification annually

Standard Reference Photometer (SRP)  4% or  4 ppb (whichever greater)

RSD of six slopes  3.7% not described

SRP recertification to local primary standard Std. Dev. of 6 intercepts 1.5
New slope = + 0.05% of previous not described

Flow rate  2% of NIST –Traceable Standard Part 50, App L Sec 9.2

Pressure  1 mm Hg resolution,  1 mm Hg

accuracy not described

Temperature  0.1  C of standard resolution,  0.5  C 1 mm Hg accuracy not described

Gravimetric Standards 0.025 mg not described



## 12.2 Multi-point Verifications/Calibrations

Multi-point calibrations consist of a zero and 4 upscale points, the highest being a concentration above the NAAQS (for SLAMS criteria pollutants) and higher than any routine values one might expect at the site.

This is defined as the calibration scale for the instrument and is different then what has been traditionally defined as the “full scale” operating range defined in the FRM/FEM approval documentation. Multipoint calibrations are used to establish or verify th e linearity of analyzers upon initial installation, after major repairs and at specified frequencies. Most mo dern analyzers have a linear or very nearly linear response with concentration. If a non-linear analy zer is being calibrated, additional calibration points should be included to adequately define the calibra tion relationship, which should be a smooth curve. Calibration points should be plotted or evaluated stat istically as they are obtained so that any deviant points can be investigated or repeated immediately.

Most analyzers have zero and span adjustment contro ls, which should be adjusted based on the zero and highest test concentrations, respectively, to prov ide the desired scale range within the analyzer'sQA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 10 

### specifications (see section 12.5). For analyzers in ro utine operation, unadjusted (''as is") analyzer zero and span response readings should be obtained pr ior to making any zero or span adjustments.

NO/NO 2 

### /NO

x 

### analyzers may not have individual zero and sp an controls for each channel; the analyzer's operation/instruction manual should be consulted for the proper zero and span adjustment procedure. Zero and span controls often interact with each other, so the adjustments may have to be repeated several times to obtain the desired final adjustments.

After the zero and span adjustments have been comple ted and the analyzer has been allowed to stabilize on the new zero and span settings, all calibration test concentrations should be introduced into the analyzer for the final calibration. The final, post-adjusted analyzer response readings should be obtained from the same device (chart recorder, data acquisiti on system, etc.) that will be used for subsequent ambient measurements. The analyzer readings are plot ted against the respective test concentrations, and the best linear (or nonlinear if appropriate) curve to fit the points is determined. Ideally, least squares regression analysis (with an appropriate transformatio n of the data for non-linear analyzers) should be used to determine the slope and inte rcept for the best fit calibration line of the form, y = mx + b, where y represents the analyzer response, x represents the pollu tant concentration, m is the slope, and b is the xaxis intercept of the best fit calibration line. When this calibration relationship is subsequently used to compute concentration measurements (x) from analyzer response readings (y), the formula is transposed to the form, x = (y - b)/m.

For the gaseous pollutants,

the verification/calibration is considered acceptable if all calibration points fall within 2% (or an absolute difference) of the calibration scale, best fit straight line. Which acceptance criteria (percent or absolute difference) is used depends on the

concentration of the calibration points. EPA has developed a Data

Assessment Statistical Calculator (DASC) 12 

### tool that automates this process for data evaluation (See Fig. 12.1). For manual samplers the flow rate,

temperature, pressure
devices are checked at different settings. Acceptance criteria for

these devices can be found

12 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/qareport.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 10 

### in the MQO Tables in Appendix D.

As a quality control check on calibrations, the standard error or correlation coefficient can be calculated along with the regression calculations. A control char t of the standard error or correlation coefficient could then be maintained to monitor the degree of scatte r in the calibration points and, if desired, limits of acceptability can be established.



## 12.3 Frequency of Calibration and Analyzer Adjustment

An analyzer should be calibrated (or recalibrated):

 

### upon initial installation,

 

### following physical relocation,

 

### after any repairs or service that might affect its calibration,

 

### following an interruption in operation of more than a few days,

 

### upon any indication of analyzer malfunction or change in calibration, and

 

### at some routine interval (multi-point verification, see below).

When calibration relationships are applied to analyzer responses to determine actual concentrations, it is suggested that the analyzer undergo multi-point veri fication/calibration periodically to maintain close agreement. The frequency of this routine periodic r ecalibration is a matter of judgment and is a tradeoff among several considerations, including: the inherent stability of the analyzer under the prevailing conditions of temperature, pressure, line voltage, etc ., at the monitoring site; the cost and inconvenience of carrying out the calibrations; the quality of the ambient measurements needed; the number of ambient measurements lost during the calibrations; and the risk of collecting invalid data because of a malfunction or response problem with the analyzer that woul dn't be discovered until a calibration is carried out.

When a new monitoring instrument is first installed, zero/span and one point QC checks should be very frequent, perhaps daily or 3 times per week, because little or no information is available on the drift performance of the analyzer. With the advancemen t in data acquisition system technology, many monitoring organizations are running these QC checks daily. However, the QC checks are required to be implemented every two weeks. Information on another unit of the same model analyzer may be useful; however, individual units of the same model may perfo rm quite differently. After enough information on the drift performance of the analyzer has been accumu lated, the calibration frequency can be adjusted to provide a suitable compromise among the vari ous considerations mentioned above.

To facilitate the process of determining calibration frequency, it is strongly recommended that control charts be used to monitor the zero/span and one-poi nt QC drift performance of each analyzer. Control charts can be constructed in different ways, but the important points are to visually represent and statistically monitor drift, and to be alerted if the drift becomes excessive so that corrective action can be taken. Such control charts make important use of the unadjusted zero and span response readings.



## 12.4 Adjustments to Analyzers

Ideally, all ambient measurements obtained from an analyzer should be calculated on the basis of the most current multipoint calibration or on the basis of both the previous and subsequent calibrations (see Section 12.5). Some acceptable leve l of drift (i.e., deviation from an original or nominal response curve)QA Handbook Vol II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 2/13 Page 9 of 10



### can be allowed before physical adjustments (i.e., ca libration) must be made because the calibration curve used to calculate the ambient measurements is kept in close agreement with the actual analyzer response. The chief limitations are the amount of change in the effective scale range of the analyzer that can be tolerated and possible loss of linearity in the anal yzer's response due to excessive deviation from the design range. Cumulative drifts of up to 15 percent of full scale from the original or nominal zero and span values may not be unreasonable, subj ect to the limitations mentioned above.

Due to the advancement in monitoring technologies, ambient air monitors are much more stable and adjustments not as necessary. Earlier versions of this Handbook included sections for zero/span calibrations as well as physical zero/span adjustments. Precise adjustment of the zero and span controls may not be possible because of: (1) limited resolution of the controls, (2) interaction between the zero and span controls, and (3) possible delayed reaction to adjustment or a substantial stabilization period after adjustments are made. Precise adjustments may not be necessary because calibration of the analyzer following zero and span adjustments will define the precise response characteristic (calibration curve). EPA feels that frequent adjustments of instruments s hould not be necessary and may in fact lead to more data quality uncertainty

. EPA does not recommend span adjustments be made between multi-point calibrations but zero adjustments are appropriate.

EPA is no longer including guidance suggesting th at the calibration equation be updated after each zero/span check and suggests the ambient readings be calculated from the most recent multipoint

calibration curve or from a fixed nominal or "universal " calibration curve (Section 12.5). In this case, the zero and span checks serve only to measure or monito r the deviation (drift error) between the actual analyzer response curve and the calibration curve u sed to calculate the ambient measurements.



### Automatic Self-Adjusting Analyzers

Some air monitoring analyzers are capable of periodically carrying out automatic zero and span calibrations and making their own zero and span sel f adjustments to predetermined readings. EPA discourages the use of automatic span adjustments but considers automatic zero adjustments reasonable when: 1) the automatic zero standards pass through the sample probe inlet and sample conditioning system, 2) the zero test is performed every day, and 3) both the adjusted and unadjusted zero response readings can be obtained from the data recordi ng device. EPA does not suggest zero adjustments on checks that occur every two weeks. However an adjustment does not mean a post processing correction on zero (adjusting the previous 24 hours routine data based on the difference between the current zero reading and the previous 24-hour reading). In fact, the automated zero does not correct routine data. The zero is “reset” every 24 hours. EPA does not recommend making automatic or manual adjustments (corrections) to the span. It is expected that the difference between the unadjusted and adjusted zero response is negligible and not greater than the zero drift acceptance criteria listed in the validation template (App D). Data invalidation and correctiv e action should occur if the differences between the 24-hour unadjusted and adjusted zero drift is great er than the validation template acceptance criteria

. Data loggers should be programmed to provide flags or warnings of this occurrence.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 12.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 2/13 Page 10 of 10



## 12.5 Data Reduction Using Calibration Information

As noted previously, an analyzer's response calibra tion curve relates the analyzer response to actual concentration units of measure, and the response of most analyzers tends to change (drift) unpredictably with passing time. These two conditions mu st be addressed in the m echanism that is used to process the raw analyzer readings into final con centration measurements. Two practical methods are described below. They are listed in order of preference,

1) "Universal" Calibration --A fixed, "universal" calibration is est ablished for the analyzer and used to calculate all ambient readings. All verifications a nd checks are used to measure the deviation of the current analyzer response from the universal calibratio n. Whenever this deviation exceeds the established zero and span adjustment limits, the analyzer is recalibrated.

2) Major Calibration Update --In this method, the calibration slope and intercept used to calculate ambient measurements are updated only for "major " calibration (i.e., semi-annual or annual multi-point verification/calibrations). All ambient measurements are calculated from the most recent major calibration. Between major calibrations, periodic zero and span verifications are used to measure the difference between the most recent major calibration a nd the current instrument response. Physical or automated adjustments of the zero may be appropria te however span adjustment to restore a match between the current analyzer response and the most recent major calibration is not suggested. Whenever this deviation exceeds the established zero and span adjustment limits, the analyzer is recalibrated.



## 12.6 Validation of Ambient Data Based on Calibration Information

When zero or span drift validation limits (see Figur e 12.1) are exceeded, ambient measurements should be invalidated back to the most recent accepta ble zero/span/one-point QC check where such

measurements are known to be valid . Also, data following an analyzer malfunction or period of nonoperation should be regarded as invalid until the ne xt subsequent calibration unless unadjusted zero and span readings at that calibration can support its validity.

Documentation

All data and calculations involved in these calibration activities should be recorded in the instrument log

book described in Section 11.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 13.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 4



# 13.0 Inspection/Acceptance for Supplies and Consumables

Both field operations and laboratory operations need s upplies and consumables. The focus of this section is the management of laboratory and field sampling supplies and consumables. For information on the actual field/lab supplies and consumables needed for any specific method, see the reference method in 40

CFR Part 50 1 

### , the general guidance methods and t echnical assistance documents on AMTIC 2 

### and the manufacturer’s operations manuals. From this information, monitoring organizations, as part of the QAPP requirements, will develop specific SOPs for its monitoring and analytical methods. One section of the SOPs requires a listing of the acceptable supplies and consumables for the method.

Pollutant parameters are measured using electronic (e.g., continuous emission monitors, FTIRs, etc...), wet chemical techniques, or physical methods. Chemi cal analysis always involves the use of consumable supplies that must be replaced on a schedule consiste nt with their stability and with the rate at which samples are taken. Frequently used chemical me thods require adequate supplies of chemicals for operation (i.e. three months) so that the supplier can comply with the delivery schedules and there is no downtime waiting for supplies. In some cases, anal ytical reagents for specific air contaminants deteriorate rapidly and need protective storage. The following information may be helpful when considering the use of these consumable items. Much of the information presented below is derived from

the document Quality Assurance Principles for Analytical Laboratories 3



### .



## 13.1 Supplies Management

Control of supplies and consumables is important to the success of the quality assurance program. It is important that specifications for each item are prepared and adhered to during the procurement process. When specifications are prepared, the following points should be considered: identity, purity, potency, source, tests to be conducted for quality and purity, need for further purification, storage and handling procedures, and replacement dates. As part of supplies management, the following actions are

recommended:

 

### establish criteria and specifications for the important supplies and consumables.

 

### check and test the supplies and consumables agai nst specifications, before placing them in use.

 

### design and maintain a supplies management program to ensure the quality of reagents used in day-to-day operations, paying particular atten tion to primary reference standards, working standards, and standard solutions.

 

### decide on the kinds of purified water that are necessary, and develop suitable tests and testing intervals to ensure the quality of water used in analytical work and for cleaning glassware.

 

### purchase only Class A volumetric glassware and perfo rm calibrations and recalibrations that are necessary to achieve reliable results.

 

### establish procedures for cleaning and storing glasswar e/sample containers with due consideration for the need for special treatment of glasswar e/sample containers used in trace analysis.

 

### establish a useful life for glassware/sample containers and track this.

 

### discard chipped and etched glassware or damaged containers.

1 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/

3 Quality Assurance Principles for Analytical Laboratories , 3rd Edition. By Frederick M. Garfield, Eugene Klesta, and Jerry Hirsch. AOAC International (2000). http://www.aoac.org/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 13.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 4



## 13.2 Standards and Reagents

Discussions on gaseous standards and reagents are found in Section 12. What is most important is that the standards and reagents used are of appropriate purity and certified within the acceptable limits of the program for which they are used. Table 12-1 provid es certification frequencies for gaseous standards, but within these timeframes, and as new cylinders are pur chased, monitoring organizations need to develop a standard checking scheme to establish ongoing acceptan ce of standards. For example a new SRM should be purchased months prior to the expiration (or need for recertification) or complete use of an older

standard in order to de velop a overlapping cylinder acceptance process so there is some establishment of traceability and consistency in monitori ng. For example, if a new SRM is put into use in a monitoring organization and all monitoring instruments traced to the cylinder start failing calibration, it may mean that either the new or older cylinder was not properly certified or has integrity problems. By checking both cylinders prior to new cylinder use, this issue can be avoided.



### 13.2.1 Standard Solutions

Most laboratories maintain a stock of standard solu tions. The following information on these solutions should be kept in a log book:

 identity of solution

 strength

 method of preparation (reference to SOP)

 standardization calculations

 recheck of solution for initial strength

 date made/expiration date

 initials of the analyst

 storage

As mentioned above, all standard solutions should contain appropriate labeling as to contents and expiration dates.



### 13.2.2 Purified Water

Water is one of the most critical but most often fo rgotten reagent. The water purification process should be documented from the quality of the starting raw wa ter to the systems used to purify the water, including how the water is delivered, the containers in which it is stored, and the tests and the frequency used to ensure the quality of the water.



## 13.3 Volumetric Glassware

Use of the appropriate glassware is important si nce many preparations and analyses require the development of reagents, standards, dilutions, and co ntrolled delivery systems. It is suggested that

“Class A” glassware be used in all operations re quiring precise volumes. SOPs requiring volumetric glassware should specify the size/type required for each specific operation.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 13.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 4



## 13.4 Sample Containers

Samples may be contaminated by using containers that have not been properly cleaned and prepared (e.g., VOC canisters, particulate filter cassettes/cont ainers) or purchased from vendors without proper inspection prior to use. In addition, all sample contai ners have a “useful” life. Some containers, such as the low volume PM sample filter cassettes can be damaged over time and cause leaks in the sampling system. It is important to track the inventory of sampling containers from:

 

### date of purchase;

 

### first use;

 

### frequency of use (estimate);

 

### time of retirement.

An inventory of this type can help ensure new contai ners are purchased before the expiration date of older containers. Use of appropriate sample containers is important since the matter of the container could potentially affect the collected sample. Always refer to the specific method to see if a particular type of container (e.g., high density polyeth ylene [HDPE] bottles, amber glass) is required for the storage of the sample.



## 13.5 Particulate Sampling Filters

Filters are used for the manual met hods for criteria pollutants (e.g., PM 10 

### , PM 2.5 

### , PM 10-2.5 

### , total PM, Pb, etc.). No commercially available filter is ideal in all respects. The sampling program should determine the relative importance of certain filter evaluation cr iteria (e.g., physical and chemical characteristics, ease of handling, cost). The reference methods provide detailed acceptance criteria for filters. Some of

the basic criteria that must be met regardless of the filter type follows:

 

### Visual inspection - for pinholes, tears, creases, or other flaws that may affect the collection efficiency of the filter, which may be consistent through a batch. This visual inspection would also be made prior to filter installation and du ring laboratory pre- and post-weighing to assure the integrity of the filter is maintained throughout the data collection process.

 

### Collection efficiency - greater than 99% as measured by DOP test (ASTM 2988) with 0.3 micrometer particles at the sampler’s operating face velocity.

 

### Integrity - (pollutant specific) measured as the concentration equivalent corresponding to the difference between the initial and final weights of the filter when weighed and handled under simulated sampling conditions (equilibration, initia l weighing, placement on inoperative sampler, removal from a sampler, re-equilibration, and final weighing).

 

### Alkalinity - less than 25 microequivalents/gram of filte r of filter following at least two months of storage at ambient temperature and relative humidity.

Note : Some filters may not be suitable for use with all samplers. Due to filter handling characteristics or rapid increases in flow resistance due to episodic lo ading, some filters, although they meet the above criteria, may not be compatible with the model of samp ler chosen. It would be prudent to evaluate more than one filter type before purchasing large quantities for network use. In some cases, EPA Headquarters may have national contracts for acceptable filters th at will be supplied to monitoring organizations.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 13.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 4



## 13.6 Field Supplies

Field instrumentation, which includes samplers and analyzers, require supplies for the actual collection process as well as quality control activities and crucia l operational maintenance. These supplies can include, but are not limited to:

 Gas standards/Permeation standards

 HVAC units

 Maintenance equipment (tools, ladders)

 Safety supplies (first aid kit)

 Information technology supplies (PC, printers, paper, ink, diskettes)

 Sample line filters

 Charcoal

 Desiccant

 Gaskets and O-rings

 Sample lines and manifolds

 Disposable gloves

 Water/distilled water

 Pumps and motors

 Chart paper and ink

 Impaction oil

 TEOM FDMS filter

The site logbook discussed in Section 11 should in clude a list and inventory of these critical field supplies. As part of routine maintenance activities, this inventory can be reviewed to determine if any supplies are in need of restocking. If electronic l ogbooks are used, information from each site can be aggregated at the field office to better assess ne eds and develop efficient ordering processes.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 14

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 15



# 14.0 Data Acquisition and Information Management

Achieving air monitoring objectives depends, in part, on collecting data that are:

 

### reliable;

 

### of known quality;

 

### easily accessible to a variety of users; and

 

### aggregated in a manner consistent with its primary use

In order to accomplish this, information must be co llected and managed in a manner that protects and ensures its integrity. 

### Data management is the “development, execution and supervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that control, protect, deliver a nd enhance the value of data and

information assets” 1



### .

Most of the data reported by the monitoring organiza tion will be collected through automated systems. These systems must be effectively managed according to a set of guidelines and principles designed to ensure data integrity. The EPA document Good Automated Laboratory Practices (GALP) 2 

### defines six data management principles that are worth reviewing:

1. Laboratory management must provide a method of assuring the integrity of all Laboratory information management systems (LIMS) data. Communication, transfer, manipulation, and the storage/recall process all offer potential for data corruption. The demonstration of control

necessitates the collection of evidence to prove that th e system provides reasonable protection against data corruption.

2. The formulas and decision algorithms employed by the LIMS must be accurate and appropriate. Users cannot assume that the test or decision criteria are correct; those formulas must be inspected and verified.

3. A critical control element is the capability to track LIMS Raw Data entry, modification, and recording to the responsible person. This capability utilizes a password system or equivalent to identify the time, date, and person or persons entering, modifying, or recording data.

4. Consistent and appropriate change controls, capable of tracking the LIMS operations and software, are a vital element in the control process. All changes must follow carefully planned procedures, be properly documented, and when appropriate include acceptance testing.

5. Procedures must be established a nd documented for all users to follow. Control of even the most carefully designed and implemented LIMS will be thwarted if the user does not follow these procedures. This principle implies the development of clear directions and SOPs, the training of all users, and the availability of appropriate user support documentation.

6. The risk of LIMS failure requires that procedures be established and documented to minimize and manage their occurrence. Where appropriate, redundant systems must be

1 http://www.dama.org/files/ public/DI_DAMA_DMBOK_Guid e_Presentation_2007.pdf DAMA-DMBOK Guide (Data Management Body of Knowledge) Introduction & Project Status"

2 http://www.epa.gov/irmpoli8/archived/irm_galp/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 15



### installed and periodic system backups must be performed at a frequency consistent with the consequences of the loss of information resulting from a failu re. The principle of control must

extend to planning for reasonable unusual events and system stresses.

Although the GALP is written for LIMS, the principl es listed above are applicable to ambient air monitoring information management systems in the field and at the central office. This section provides guidance in these areas, including identification of advanced equipment and procedures that are recommended for implementation. The recommended pr ocedures rely on digital communication by the data acquisition system to collect a wider variety of information from the analyzers/samplers, to control instrument calibrations, and to allow for more routin e, automated, and thorough data quality efforts. The

section will discuss:

1. Data acquisition- collecting the raw data from the monitor/sampler, storing it for an appropriate interval, aggregating or reducing the data, and transf erring this data to final storage in a local data base (monitoring organizations database)

2. Data transfer - preparing and moving data to external data bases such as AIRNow or the Air Quality System (AQS).

3. Data management

- 

### the development, execution and s upervision of plans, policies, programs and practices that cont rol, protect, deliver and e nhance the value of data and

information assets 3



### In response to guidelines issued by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) 4 

### EPA developed the

document titled Guidelines for Ensuring and Maximizing the Q uality, Objectivity, Utility, and Integrity of Information Disseminated by the Environmental Protection Agency 5 

### . The Guideline contains EPA’s policy and procedural guidance for ensuring and maxi mizing the quality of information it disseminates. The Guideline also incorporates the following performance goals:

 

### Disseminated information should adhere to a basi c standard of quality, including objectivity, utility, and integrity.

 

### The principles of information quality should be integrated into each step of EPA’s development of information, including creation, collection, maintenance, and dissemination.

 

### Administrative mechanisms for correction should be flexible, appropriate to the nature and timeliness of the disseminated information, and incorporated into EPA’s information resources management and administrative practices.

EPA suggests that monitoring organizations review this document since it is relevant to the ambient air information it generates and can help to ensure th at data can withstand challenges to its quality.

3 http://www.dama.org/i4a/pa ges/index.cfm?pageid=1

4 Section 515(a) of the Treasury and General Government Appropri ations Act for Fiscal Year 2001 (Public Law 106-554; H.R. 5658),

5 http://www.epa.gov/quality/informationguidelines /documents/EPA_InfoQualityGuidelines.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 15



## 14.1 Data Acquisition Systems

Continuing advances in computer technology used in monitoring instruments and data loggers are:

 increasing the volume of the pollutant data stream by enabling the capture of more finely, timeresolved data

 providing operational data about instruments that supports data validati on and helps to reduce data loss by identifying problems early, and

 making more data available to users, sooner.

In order to take full advantage of these capabilities, data management software systems will need to support efficient processing and validation of data and provide communication of that data in a format and a timeframe that serves the needs of multiple users. An example of a benefit from using these systems is the forecasting of pollution episodes with near real-time data captured from NCore and ozone monitoring networks.

This section provides information on Data Acquisition Systems (DAS), a term used for systems that collect, store, summarize, report, print, calculate or tr ansfer data. The transfer is usually from an analog or digital format to a digital medium. This section will also discuss limitations of data collected with

DAS.



### 14.1.1 Automated Data Acquisition Systems

DAS have been available to air quality professionals si nce the early 1980s. The first systems were single and multi-channel systems that collected data on magnetic media. This media was usually hand transferred to a central location or laboratory for dow nloading to a central computer. With the advent of digital data transfer from the stations to a central locati on, the need to hand transfer data has diminished.



### 14.1.2 Instrument to Data logger

Figure 14.1 shows the basic transfer of data from the instrument to the final product; a hard copy report, or data transfer to a central computer. Most continuous monitors have the ability to output data in at least two

ways : analog output and an RS232 digital port. Some instrumentation may now be including USB, Ethernet and firewire capability. The instrument usually uses DC voltage. This voltage varies directly with the concentration collected. Most instruments’ output is a DC voltage in the 0-1 or 0-5 volts range. The following provide a brief summary of the analog (A) or digital (D) steps

 

### (A) the voltage is measured by the multiplexer which allows voltages from many

instruments to be read at the same time

.

 

### (A) the multiplexer sends a signal to the a/d converter which changes the analog voltage Ambient

Instrument

Storage

Medium RAM Memory CPU analog/digital

converter Multiplexer

On site printer Data logger Analog Signal

D i g i

t a l S

i g n

a

l

Modem Local

central computer

On-site computer Hard copy
report Ambient

Instrument

Storage

Medium RAM Memory CPU analog/digital

converter Multiplexer

On site printer Data logger Analog Signal

D i g i

t a l S

i g n

a

l

Modem Local

central computer

On-site computer Hard copy
report



### Figure 14.1 DAS data flow Ambient

Instrument

Storage

Medium RAM Memory CPU analog/digital

converter Multiplexer

On site printer Data logger Analog Signal

D i g i

t a l S

i g n

a

l

Modem Local

central computer

On-site computer Hard copy
report Ambient

Instrument

Storage

Medium RAM Memory CPU analog/digital

converter Multiplexer

On site printer Data logger Analog Signal

D i g i

t a l S

i g n

a

l

Modem Local

central computer

On-site computer Hard copy
report



### Figure 14.1 DAS data flowQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 15



### to a low amperage digital signal.

 

### (A) the a/d converter send signals to the central processing unit (cpu) that directs the digital electronic signals to a display or to the random access memory (ram) which stores the short-term data until the end of a pre-defined time period.

 

### (A/D) the cpu then shunts the data from the ram to the storage medium which can be magnetic tape, computer hard-drive or computer diskette.

 

### (A/D) the computer storage medium can be accessed remotely or at the monitoring location

.

The data transfer may occur via modem to a central computer storage area or printed out as hard copy. In some instances, the data may be transferred from one storage medium (i.e. hard drive to a diskette, tape, or CD) to another storage medium. The use of a da ta logging device to automate data handling from a continuous sensor is not a strict guarantee against r ecording errors. Internal validity checks are necessary to avoid serious data recording errors. This can be accomplished by polling a period of data directly from the monitor and comparing that data to data that’s stored in the local central computer.

Analog Versus Digital DAS -

Most analyzers built within the last 15 years have the capability (RS232 ports) to transfer digital signals, yet many monitoring organizations currently perform data acquisition of automated monitors by recording an analog output from each gas analyzer using an electronic data logger. As explained above, the analog readings are

converted and stored in digital memory in the data logger for subsequent automatic retrieval by a remote data management system. This approach can reliably capture the monitoring data, but does not allow complete control of monitoring operations, and th e recorded analog signals are subject to noise that

limits the detection of low concentrations. Furtherm ore, with the analog data acquisition approach, the data review process is typically labor-intensive and not highly automated. For these reasons, EPA encourages the adoption of digital data acquisition methods. In that regard, the common analog data acquisition approach often does not fully utilize the capab ilities of the electronic data logger. Many data loggers have the capability to acquire data in digital form and to control some aspects of calibrations and analyzer operation, but these capabilities are not utili zed in typical analog data acquisition approaches.

Digital data acquisition reduces noise in the reco rding of gas monitoring data, thereby improving sensitivity. It also records and controls the inst rument settings, internal diagnostics, and programmed Station Desktop System CO

PM

(continuous or FRM) SO 2

NOy

Calibrator Zero Air SupplyRS-232 Multi-drop(within manufacturer)

METRS 232 connectionsDigital I/O Dial-up/DSL

Cable

Satellite Wireless

Status Relay control Measurements Diagnostics

Data pushed or pulled from multiple stations

Database

Server P u b l i c r

e p o r t i n g



### AQS S / L / T v

a l i d a t i o n (optional) Manifold/external valves

Figure 14.2 Flow of data from gas analyzers to final reportingQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 15



### activities of monitoring and calibration equipment. Su ch data acquisition systems also typically provide automated data quality assessment as part of the data acquisition process.

It may be cost-effective for monitoring organizations to adopt digital data acquisition and calibration control simply by more fully exploiting the capabilities of their existing electronic data loggers. For example, many gas analyzers are capable of being ca librated under remote control. The opportunity to reduce travel and personnel costs through automated calibrations is a strong motivator for monitoring organizations to make greater use of the capabilities of their existing data acquisition systems. The NCore multi-pollutant sites are taking advantage of the newer DAS technologies. Details of these systems can be found in the technical assistance document for this program 6



### .

Figure 14.2 illustrates the recommended digital data acquisition approach fo r the NCore sites. It presents the data flow from the gas monitors, through a local digital data acquisition syst em, to final reporting of the data in various public databases. This schematic shows several of the key capabilities of the recommended approach. A basic capability is the acqui sition of digital data from multiple analyzers and other devices, thereby reducing noise and minimizing th e effort needed in data processing. Another capability is two-way communication, so that the data acquisition system can interrogate and/or control the local analyzers, calibration systems, and even sa mple inlet systems, as well as receive data from the analyzers. Data transfer to a central location is also illustrated, with several possible means of that transfer shown. Monitoring organizations are urged to take advantage of the latest technology in this part of the data acquisition process, as even technologi es such as satellite data communication are now well established, commercially availabl e, and inexpensive to implemen t for monitoring operations.

Depending on the monitoring objective, it may be im portant that data are reported in formats of immediate use in public data bases such as AQS 7 

### , and the multi-monitoring organization AIRNow 8 

### sites. An advantage of DAS software is the ability to facilitate the assembly, formatting and reporting of monitoring data to these databases.

Digital data acquisition systems such as those in Fi gure 14.2 offer a great advantage over analog systems in the tracking of calibration data, because of the ability to control and record the internal readings of gas analyzers and calibration systems. That is, a dig ital data acquisition system not only can record the analyzer’s output readings, but can schedule and di rect the performance of analyzer calibrations, and record calibrator settings and status. Thus, flagging of calibration data to distinguish them from ambient monitoring data are conducted automatically during da ta acquisition with no ad ditional effort or postanalysis. These capabilities greatly reduce the time an d effort needed to organize and quantify calibration

results.



### 14.1.3 DAS Quality Assurance/Quality Control

Most automated data acquisition systems support the ac quisition of QC data like zero, one point QC, span and calibration data. When QC data are acquired auto matically by a data acquisition system for direct computer processing, the system must be sufficiently sophisticated to:

 

### ensure that the QC data are never inadvertently reported as ambient measurements,

6 Version 4 of the Technical Assistance Document for Pr ecursor Gas Measurements in the NCore Multi-pollutant Monitoring Network. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/ncore/guidance.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a irs/airsaqs/aqsweb/

8 http://airnow.gov/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 15

 

### ignore transient data during the stabilization period before the analyzer has reached a stable QC response (this period may vary considerably from one analyzer to another),

 

### average the stable QC readings over some appropr iate time period so that the readings obtained accurately represents the analyzer’s QC response,

 

### ignore ambient readings for an appropriate period of time immediately following a QC reading until the analyzer response has stabilized to the ambient-level concentration.

In relation to the DAS, quality assurance seeks to ensure that the DAS is being operated within defined guidelines. Usually, this means that each value that is collected by the DAS is the same value that is generated from the analyzer and reported to the Air Qu ality System (AQS) data base. This usually is accomplished by DAS calibrations, and data trail audits.

Calibration- In the case where analog signals from monitoring equipment are record ed by the DAS, the

calibration of a DAS is similar to th e approach used for calibration of a strip chart recorder. To calibrate the DAS, known voltages are supplied to each of th e input channels and the corresponding measured response of the DAS is recorded. Specific calibra tion procedures in the DAS owner’s manual should be followed when performing such DAS calibrations. For DAS that receive digital data from the instruments, a full scale check (the instrument is in a mode and the output is at the full scale of the instrument) should be performed to see if the data re ceived digitally is the same as the display of the instrument. The DAS should be calibrated at least once per year. Appendix G provides a simple approach

for calibration of the DAS.

In addition, gas analyzers typically have an option to set output voltages to full scale or to ramp the analog output voltages supplied by the analyzer over the full output range. Such a function can be used to check the analog recording process fro m the analyzer through the DAS.

Data Trail Audit - The data trail audit consists of follow ing a value or values from the monitoring instrument to the DAS, from the DAS to the local central computer, and then from the local central computer to AQS. A person other than the norma l station operator should perform this duty. A procedure similar to the following should be conducted:

 

### A data value(s) should be collected from the m onitor (usually an hourly value or another aggregated value reported to AQS) and be compared to the data stored in the DAS for the same time period. Also, if strip chart recorders are used, a random number of hourly values should be compared to the data collected by the DAS. Th is audit should be comple ted on a regular defined frequency and for every pollutant reported.

 

### From the central computer, the auditor checks to see if this hourly value is the same.

The above actions should be complete d well in advance of data submittal to AQS. If the data has been submitted to AQS, then the AQS data base should be checked and modified as necessary per the appropriate AQS procedures.

Whether a monitoring organization is transferring th e data from an instrument via an on-site DAS or transferring the data digitally, the data trail a udit should be performed on a routine basis.

Initialization Errors

All data acquisition systems must be initialized. The initialization consists of an operator “setting up” the parameters so that the voltages produced by the inst ruments can be read, scaled correctly and reported inQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 15



### the correct units. Errors in initializations can create problems when the data are collected and reported. Read the analyzer manufacturer’s lite rature before parameters are coll ected. If the manufacturer does not state how these parameters are collected, request this information. The following should be performed when setting up the initializations:

 

### Check the full scale outputs of each parameter.

 

### Calibrations should be followed after each in itialization (each channel of a DAS should be calibrated independently). Appendix G provides an example of a DAS calibration technique.

 

### Review the instantaneous data stream, if possibl e, to see if the DAS is collecting the data correctly.

 

### Save the initializations to a storage medium; if the DAS does not have this capability, print out the initialization and store it at the central computer location and at the monitoring location.

 

### Check to see if the flagging routines are perform ed correctly; data that are collected during

calibrations and down time s hould be flagged correctly.

 

### Check the DAS for excessive noise (v ariability in signal). Noisy data that are outside of the normal background are a concern. Noisy data can be caused by improperly connected leads to the multiplexer, noisy AC power, or a bad multiple xer. Refer to the owner’s manual for help on noisy data.

 

### Check to see that the average tim es are correct. Some DAS consider 45 minutes to be a valid hour, while others consider 48 minutes. Agency guidelines should be referred to before setting up averaging times.



### 14.1.4 Data Logger to Database

Once data are on the data logger at the ambient air mon itoring station, they need to be sent to servers where they can be summarized and disseminated to data users. In most cases this will occur by using a server at the office of the monitoring organization. The conventional way to get data from the monitoring stations has been to poll each of the stations indi vidually. With more widespread availability of the internet, pushing data from monitoring sites on a regular basis will be especially effective in mapping and public reporting of data. Note, in some cases it is possi ble to report data directly from a monitor to a database without the use of a station data logger. This solution is acceptable so long as the monitor is capable of data storage for periods when telemetry is off-line.

Data transfer is usually accomplished in three ways: hard copy printout, downloading data from internal storage medium to external storage medium, or digital transfer via the telephone lines, internet, satellite or

other advanced means of communication. Due to the d esire for real time data for the Air Quality Index (AQI) and other related needs, monitoring organizations should plan to upgrade to digital data acquisition and communication systems.

Hard copy report - With the advent of sophisticated DAS netw orks and data backup systems, hard copy reports are being generated less frequently. Therefore if hard copy reports are not being used it is strongly recommended that monitoring organizations create an electronic back-up of their data on a defined and frequent schedule. The frequency of th e back-ups and any other associated information should be reflected in their Quality Assurance Proj ect Plan (QAPP) and Standard Operating Procedures (SOP). However, for some smaller monitoring ne tworks hard copy reports have some advantages :

 

### they can be reviewed by the station operators prior to and/or during site visits to ascertain the quality of the data;

 

### they can be compared against the historical data stored on the DAS at the site for validation;QA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 15

 

### notes can be made on the hard copy reports for later review by data review staff; and

 

### they create a “back-up” to th e electronically based data.

External Storage - This term refers to storing and transferring the data on external media such as diskettes, flash drives, or CD-ROM’s. Many new generation DAS are computer platforms that contain ports these storage devices. If remote access via tele phone is not an option, then data can be hand transferred to a central office for downloading and data review. This is usually the method used to transfer

data from manual methods.

Digital Transfer - All new generation DAS allow access to the computer via the telephone and modem. These systems allow fast and effective ways to do wnload data to a central location. The EPA recommends using these systems for the following reasons:

 

### in case of malfunction of an ambient instrument, th e appropriate staff at the central location can begin to diagnose problems and decide a course of action;

 

### down loading the data allows the station operators , data processing team, and/or data validators to get a head start on reviewing the data; and

 

### when pollution levels are high or forecasted to be high, digital transf er allows the pollution forecaster the ability to remotely check trends and ensure proper operation of instruments prior to and during an event.



### NOTE : In any of these systems it is necessary to plan for some type of system back-up in case of unexpected crashes in order to reduce and minimize data loss.

14.1.5 Manual Data Acquisition

Most of this section has been devoted to the co llection of data through automated DAS. In some ways, once the DAS is properly set up and check ed, the systems are reliable, can be checked remotely and are easier to manage then manual da ta acquisition. Recovery and collection of data from manual samplers in some ways can more co mplicated because it includes the retrieval of not only samples, which may include the use of hand entered data sheets and chain of custody forms, but electronic sampler information downloa ded to USB flash drives, or portable laptops for data transfer to central offices. The proce ss is further complicated by weather conditions and sample shipping to remote laboratories where additional logging of samples and data take place. Monitoring organization should identify all critical information necessary for a sampling activity, and have standard operating procedures for the procedures necessary to collect all important information pertaining to the sample. As soon as possible, any hand entered information should be recorded electronically. Samp lers have some storage capacity so it is suggested that no data be cleared off the samplers until it is confirmed that the sample r data has been downloaded and

stored in the central office data base. Once stored electronically, th e management of this information should follow the same procedures as those for automated data retrievals.



## 14.2 Data Transfer – Public Reporting

The area of public reporting for air monitoring data may pr ovide the largest number of users of data. For public reporting of the AQI, the AIRNow web site will remain the EPA’s primary medium forQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 15



### distribution of near real- time air monitoring data. The additional continuous monitoring parameters collected from NCore will also be reported to AIRN ow. These parameters are expected to be made publicly available for sharing throughout technical user communities. However, they are not expected to be widely distributed through AIRNow as products for public consumption.

This section will discuss the transfer of data fro m the monitoring organization to two major data repositories: 1) AIRNow for near real-time reporting of monitoring data, and 2) AQS for long term storage of validated data.



### 14.2.1 Real-time Data Re porting to AIRNow

One of the most important emerging uses of ambient monitoring data has been public reporting of the Air Quality Index (AQI). This effort has expanded on EPA’s AIRNow web site from regionally-based near real-time ozone mapping products color coded to the AQI, to a national multi-pollutant mapping, forecasting, and data handling system of real-time data. Since ozone and PM 2.5 

### drive the highest reporting of the AQI in most areas, these two pollu tants are the only two parameters currently publicly reported from AIRNow. This program allows for shor t term non-validated data to be collected by a centrally located computer that displays the data in near real time data formats such as tables and contour

maps.

While other pollutants such as CO, SO 2 

### , NO 2 

### , and PM 10 

### may not drive the AQI, they are still important

for forecasters and other data users to unders tand for model evaluation and tracking of air pollution episodes. Therefore, for the NCore sites, the goal is the report all gaseous CO, SO 2 

### , NO and NOy data and base meteorological measurements to AIRNow



### Reporting Intervals

Currently, hourly averages are the reporting interval for continuous particulate and gaseous data. These are the reporting intervals for both AQS (AQS supports a variety of reporting intervals) and AIR N ow for AQI purposes

. These reporting intervals will meet most of the multiple objectives of NCore for supporting health effects studies, AQI reporting, tr ends, NAAQS attainment decisions, and accountability of control strategies. However, with these objectiv es also comes the desire for data at finer time resolutions: 5 minute averages for gaseous pollutants and sub-hourly averages for certain particulate matter monitors. Examples of this need for finer tim e resolution of data include, but are not limited to: tracking air pollution episodes, providing data for exposure studies, model evaluation, and evaluating shorter averaging periods for potential changes to th e NAAQS. Monitoring organizations generally have the hardware and software necessary to log and report this data. The challenge to obtaining and reporting the data is the current communication packages used , such as conventional telephone modem polling. One widely available solution to this would be the use of internet connectivity; allowing data at individual monitoring sites to be pushed to a central server rath er than being polled. Monitoring organizations should begin to investigate the possibilities of using this media.

With the generation/reporting of data at shorter aver aging intervals, the challenge becomes validation of all the data. The historical perception has been th at each criteria pollutant measurement needs to be verified and validated manually. With the amount of da ta generated, this would be a time-consuming task. To provide a nationally consistent approach for the reporting interval of data, the NCore networks will take a tiered approach to data reporting. At the top tier, hourly data intervals will remain the standard for data reporting. Long term, the NCore networks will be capable of providing at least 5 minute intervals for those methods that have acceptable data quality at those averaging periods. For QA/QC purposes such asQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 15



### zero/span and one-point QC, monitoring organizations should be capable of assessing data on at least a 1-

minute interval.

With instantaneous data going to external websites, monitoring organizations operating their own websites containing the same local and/or regional data should add a statement about the quality of data being displayed at the site. This cautionary statemen t will notify the public that posted data has not been fully quality assured and discrepancies may occur. For an example, the AIRNow Website makes the

statement

“Although some preliminary data quality assessmen ts are performed, the data as such are not fully verified and validated through th e quality assurance procedures monitoring organizations use to officially submit an d certify data on the EPA AQS(Air Quality System). Therefore, data are used on the AIRNow Web site only for the purpose of reporting the AQI. Information on the AIRNow web site is not used to formulate or support regulation, guidance or any other Agency decision or position.”



### 14.2.2 Reporting Frequency and Lag Time for Reporting Data to AIRNow

Continuous monitoring data that ar e being provided to AIRNow in near real-time are to be reported each hour. Data should be reported as soon as practical afte r the end of each hour. For the near term, the goal is to report data within twenty minutes past the end of each hour. This will provi de enough time for data processing and additional data validation at the AIRNow Data Management Center (DMC), generation of reports and maps, distribution of those products to a variety of stakeholders and web sites, and staff review before the end of the hour. This is an impor tant goal to support reporting of air pollution episodes on news media programs by the top of the hour. The l ong term goal for NCore sites is to report all data

within five minutes after the end of an hour.



## 14.3 Data Transfer-Reporting to External Data Bases

Today, the need for the ambient air monitoring data reaches outside the monitoring community. In addition to the traditional needs of the data, de termination of NAAQS compliance and the daily AQI report, a health researcher or modeler may want a ve ry detailed accounting of the available data in the shortest time intervals possible. Atmospheric scientists typically desire data in a relatively unprocessed yet comprehensive form with adequate descriptions (meta data) to allow for further processing for comparability to other data sets. These needs incr ease the demands for the data and require multiple reports of the information.



### 14.3.1 AQS Reporting

All ambient air monitoring data will eventually be tr ansferred and stored in AQS. As stated in 40 CFR

Part 58.16 9 

### , the monitoring organization shall report all ambient air monitoring and associated quality assurance data and information specified by the AQS Users Guide into the AQS format. The data are to be submitted electronically and on a specified quarterly basis. Since changes in reporting requirements occur, monitoring organizations should review CFR for the specifics of this requirement.

9 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tplQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 15



### The AQS manuals are located at the AQS Website 10



### . The AQS Data Coding Manual replaces the previous Volume II and provides coding instructions, edits performed, and system error messages. The AQS User Guide replaces the former Volume III and describes the procedures for data entry. Both manuals will be updated as needed and the new versi ons will be available at the web site. Table 14-1 provides the units and the number of decimal places that , at a minimum, are required for reporting to AQS for the criteria pollutants. These decimal places are u sed for comparison to the NAAQS and are displayed in AQS summary reports. However, monitoring organi zations can report data up to 5 values to the right of the decimal (beyond five AQS will truncate). Within the five values to the right of the decimal place, for NAAQS comparison purposes, AQS will reduce the data as indicated in the last column of Table 14-1.

Table 14-1 AQS Data Reporting Requirements

Pollutant Units Decimal

Places Example Minimum reporting requirement (as described in 40 CFR Part 50)

PM 2.5 μ g/m 3 1 10.2 shall be reported to AQS in micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m 3 ) to one decimal place, with additional digits to the right being truncated (App. N)

PM 10 μ g/m 3 1 26.2 No description found
Lead (Pb)

TSP and

PB-PM 10 μ g/m 3 3 1.525 Pb-TSP and Pb-PM 10 measurement data are reported to AQS in units of micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m 3 ) at local conditions (local temperature and pressure, LC) to three decimal places; any additional digits to the right of the third d ecimal place are truncated (App. R).

O 3 ppm 3 0.108 Hourly average concentrations shall be reported in parts per million (ppm) to the third decimal place, with additional digits to the right of the third decimal place truncated (App. P).

SO 2 ppb 1 35.1 reported to AQS in units of parts per billion (ppb), to at most one place after the decimal, with additional digits to the right being truncated with no further rounding (App. T)

NO 2 ppb 1 53.2 reported to AQS in units of parts per billion (ppb), to at most one place after the decimal, with additional digits to the right being truncated with no further rounding (App. S) CO ppm 1 2.5 No description found

PM 10-2.5 μ g/m 3 1 10.2 No description found

– follow PM2.5 requirements



### 14.3.2 Standard Format for Reporting to AQS

AQS allows flexibility in reporting formats. The form ats previously used by AQS can be used for raw data (hourly, daily, or composite) and for reporting precision and bias data. The system also has new report formats for this data as well as formats for re gistering new sites and monitors. These new formats are defined in the AQS Data Coding Manual. Work is also in progress to define an Extensible Markup Language (XML) schema for AQS reporting. Use of XML as a data format is consistent with EPA and Federal guidelines towards better data integration and sharing

.



### 14.3.3 Important AQS Agency Roles

Some fields in AQS are key to identifying the agency or organization responsible for certain aspects of monitoring. Due to the fact that State agencies may pl ay some overarching roles (such as reporting data or responsible for QA aspects as a PQAO) yet not be responsible for the monitoring of some sites (e.g., local organizations or Tribe), it is im portant to understand, identify and use these roles correctly. Table 14-2 identifies the agency roles for AQS reporting.

10 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/airs/airsaqs/manuals/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 15

Table 14-2 AQS Agency Roles

Role Name Definition Relati onship to a monitor Comments Monitoring Organization (MO) Organization responsible for operation of the monitoring network Each monitor can only be associated with one MO at any particular date time QMPs must be related to the

MO

Primary Quality

Assurance Organization (PQAO) Agency responsible for operation of the monitoring network Each monitor can only be associated with one PQAO at any particular date time There can be multiple MOs in a PQAO and it can be pollutant specific. QAPPs must be related to MO and PQAO Submitting Organization (SO) Organization submitting the data to AQS None Data for particular monitors could be submitted by multiple organizations for example, field data by the MO and analytical data for an analyzing agency Analyzing Agency Organization performing the analysis on samples None

Collecting Organization Organization responsible for collecting data or maintaining

monitor None In some cases the MO may contract out monitoring

activities



### It must be mentioned that at a minimum for any ra w data submittal MO, PQAO and SO must be entered. In many cases they may be the same organization; in other cases they may not.



### 14.3.4 Expanded QA Information to be Reported to AQS

Since the last revision to this Handbook, the process of reporting QA data to AQS has been improved. New QA transactions have been developed that suppo rt the reporting of additional quality control data

that do not need to be “fit” into either an accuracy or precision trans action. Many of the transactions will be optional for use (i.e., duplicates, replicates, a udit of data quality) depending on the monitoring program. However, QA transactions will be required for entry of the traditional Appendix A QC data as well as pertinent information for quality manageme nt plans (QMPs), quality assurance project plans (QAPPs) and Regional Office technical systems audits (TSAs) since they are a requirement for receiving grant funds (QMP/QAPPs) and are included in the 40 CFR Part 58 App A.

PQAO and MO Relationships Relative to QMPs and QAPPs

QMPs--

The following fields will be required for QMP reporting:

1. Submitting Agency Code – MO code

2. Submission Date- Date QMP submitted to EPA , helps with tracking approval process

3. Approving Agency Code – Code for EPA Region

4. Approval Date – EPA Approval Date

5. QMP Status Code6. Comments- free form comments

A MO meeting the definition above and receiving STAG funds must have a QMP approved by EPA. In most cases, the QMP is an overarching document that covers all the pollutants measured by the MO and is separate from the QAPP. In this case, the subm itting agency code should be the MO associated withQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 15



### the QMP.

For smaller organizations (e.g., tribes and small local MOs), EPA has allowed for consolidation of QMP and QAPPs. In this case, even though it is one document, the MO should report a submission and approval date for the QMP and the same date for the QAPP as a separate submission (see QAPP information below).

For some pollutants there may be a number of local monitoring organizations (MOs) that have consolidated to form a single PQAO. In this instan ce, there may be a possibility that a single QMP, or a consolidated QMP/QAPP is developed. However, ev en in this case, each distinguishable MO should report a submission and approval date for the QMP and the same date for the QAPP.

QAPPs--

The following fields will be required for QAPP reporting:

1. Submitting Agency Code - MO code

2. PQAO Code- PQAO Code (may be the same as submitting agency but may not)

3. Parameter classification- Identifies the indivi dual pollutants or the network (CSN, NATTS) for which the QAPP is developed.

4. Submission Date- Date QAPP submitted to EPA, helps with tracking approval process

5. Approving Agency Code –May be EPA or submitting agency

6. Approval Date- Date QAPP approve d by EPA or submitting agency

7. QAPP Status Code- code identify at what stage of review/approval the QAPP is in

8. Comments- free form comments

Since a MO can consolidate to larger PQAOs for a pollutant 11 

### , there is a possibility that a QAPP can be submitted by a MO even though it references its as sociation to a larger PQAO, or a QAPP can be developed by the PQAO that is utilized by all or some of the MOs within the PQAO. In order to determine this for each MO, the PQAO must also be reported. Therefore, each MO as defined in Table 14-2 must report QAPP data for any parameter or parameter classification. Since a MO may be consolidated into a PQAO for one pollutant and not another, for the criteria pollutants the QAPP reporting process will be on the pollutant level. For monitori ng networks like NATTS or CSN, the information can

be submitted at the network identifier level.



### 14.3.5 Annual Certification of Data

The annual data certification is also stored in AQS. The monitoring organization is required to certify the data (by formal letter) for a calendar year (Jan 1-D ec 31) by May 1 of the following year. See 40 CFR Part 58.15 for details since this time period can change. This certification requires the monitoring organization to review the air qualit y data and quality assurance data fo r completeness and validity and to submit a certification letter and accompanying data cer tification reports to the Regional Office. The certification letter and accompanying reports are reviewed and if the results of the review are consistent with the criteria for certification, the certification flag is set in the AQS database. After certification is complete, any updates to the data will cause the critical review process to identify that the certified data has been changed and the certification flag will be dropped. In 2013, EPA developed an automated

11 With the introduction of PQAOs in CFR in 2006, some local monitoring organizations consolidated to a larger PQAO for PM2.5 monitoringQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 14 of 15



### certification process and allows the EPA Regions to cer tify monitoring organization data. At the time of publication of this document the process was still under development.



### 14.3.4 Summary of Desired Performan ce for Information Transfer Systems

To define the needed performance cr iteria of a state-of-the art information technology system, a table of needs has been developed. This table provides pe rformance needs for an optimal information technology system, but is not intended to address what the individual components should look like. For instance, once low level validated data for a specific time pe riod are ready to leave the monitoring station, a number of telemetry systems may actually accomplish moving those data. By identifying the needed performance criteria of moving data, rather than the act ual system to move it, monitoring organizations may be free to identify the most optimal system for their network. Table 14-3 summarizes the performance elements of the data management systems used to log, transfer, validate, and report data from NCore ambient air monitoring stations



### .

Table 14-3 NCore (Level 2 and 3) In formation Technology Performance Needs 12

Performance Element Performance Criteria Notes Sample Periods 5 minutes (long term goal), and 1 hour data (current standard) 5 minutes and 1 hour data to support exposure, mapping and modeling. 1 hour data for Air Quality Index reporting and NAAQS. Sample period may need to be higher for certain pollutant measurement systems depending on method sample period and measurement precision when averaging small time periods. Data Delivery Near Term goal - Within 20 minutes nationally each

hour Long term goal - Within 5 minutes nationally each

hour As monitoring organizations migrate to new telemetry systems the goal will be to report data within 5 minutes. This should be easily obtained with broadband pushing of data to a central server.

Low Level Validation - Last automated zero and QC check acceptable - Range check acceptable - Shelter parameters acceptable -Instrument parameters acceptable Other validation should be applied as available:

- site to site checks - rate of change -lack of change. Data Availability - all QC data, operator notes, calibrations, and pollutant data within network - Low level validated pollu tant data externally Create log of all monitoring re lated activities internally. Allow only validated data to leave monitoring organization network. Types of monitoring data to disseminate-externally -continuous and semi-continuous pollutant data - accompanying meteorological data Associated manual method supporting data (for instance FRM ambient Temperature) should be collected but not reported externally.

Additional data for internal tracking Status of ancillary equi pment such as shelter temperature, power surges, zero air system, calibration system

Relevant site information Latitude, longitude, altitude, land use category, scale of representativeness, pictures and map of area Other site information may be necessary.

Remote calibration Ability to initiate automated calibrations on regular

schedule or as needed Reviewing calibration - allow for 1 minute data as part of electronic calibration log

Initialization of manual

collection method Need to be able to remote ly initiate these or have them set at an action level from a specific monitor Reporting Format Short Term - Maintain “Obs” file format and pipe delimited formats for AIRNow and AQS reporting, respectively

Near Term -XML Need to coordinate develo pment of XML schema with multiple stakeholders. XML is an open format that will be able to be read by most applications.

12 See NCore Technical Assistance Document Version 4 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/ncore/guidance.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 14.0

Revision: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 15 of 15



## 14.4 Data Management

Managing the data collected is just as important as correctly collecting the data. The amount of data collected will continue to grow based on the needs of the data users. Previous sections have confirmed this statement, providing a glimpse of the potential data users and the uses. Generally, data are to be retained for a period of 3 years from the date th e grantee submits its final expenditure report unless otherwise noted in the funding agreement 13 

### . With electronic records and electronic media, this information can be stored and managed with less use of space than with the conventional paper records. However, even with today’s technology there will be so me paper records and those need to be managed in an orderly manner. The manner in which a monitoring organization manages its da ta is documented in its QMP and QAPP. Management is marshaling scarce resources to acco mplish goals. Challenges imposed by the need to capture increasing volumes of data and to make that data available to the public and other groups in various formats and in short timeframes require a strategy for obtaining enough of these resources:

 computer processing capacity,

 data storage, archival storage, paper file storage,

 floor space, and

 support staff; for deployment among central offices, local offices, and monitoring sites to capture data having the quality characteristics listed in 14.0.

Air monitoring organization managers may want to seek the assistance of their organization’s IT staff

and/or hardware/software maintenance contractors. Managers may find it helpful to consult these

references:

 EPA’s records management webpage 14



###  section 5 of this document

 Good Automated Laboratory Practices, posted on the OEI website.

This information should be reviewed not only by those in a monitoring organization responsible for overall data management but also by the monitoring organization’s Systems or Network Administrator. The latter person(s) can provide helpful information in designing the overall data management system according to today’s industry standards. Remember, th e data has to be of known quality, reliable and defensible. In order for monitoring organizations to continue to meet those objectives, many sources of

information need to be reviewed.

13 40 CFR Part 31.42

14 http://www.epa.gov/records/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 14



# 15.0 Assessment and Corrective Action

An assessment is an evaluation process used to meas ure the performance or effectiveness of a system and

its elements. It is an all-inclusive term used to denote any of the following: audit, performance evaluation, management systems review, peer review , inspection and surveillance. For the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program, the following assessments will be discussed: network reviews, performance evaluations, technical systems aud its and data quality assessments.



## 15.1 Network Reviews

As described in 40 CFR 

### § 58.10 1



### , Beginning July 1,2007, the State, or where applicable, local monitoring organizations shall adopt and submit to the Regional Administrator an annual monitoring network plan (40 CFR 58.10) which shall provide for the establishment and maintenance of an air quality surveillance system that consists of a netw ork of SLAMS monitoring stations including FRM, FEM, and ARM monitors that are part of SLAMS, NCore stations, CSN stations, State speciation stations,
SPM stations, and/or, in serious, severe and extreme oz one nonattainment area s, PAMS stations, and SPM stations. The plan shall include a statement of purposes for each monitor and evidence that siting and operation of each monitor meet s the requirements of appendices A, C, D, and E of Part 58, where applicable. The annual monitoring network plan must be made available for public inspection for at least 30 days prior to submission to EPA. The AMTIC Website has a page 2 

### devoted to the progress and adherence to this requirement. This page contains links to State and local ambient air monitoring plans.

In addition to an annual network plan, starting in 2010 , the State, or where applicable, local monitoring organization shall perform and subm it to the EPA Regional Administrato r an assessment of the air quality surveillance system every 5 years to determine, at a minimum, if the network meets the monitoring objectives defined in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D, wh ether new sites are needed, whether existing sites are no longer needed and can be terminated, a nd whether new technologies are appropriate for incorporation into the ambient air monitoring networ k. The network assessment mu st consider the ability of existing and proposed sites to support air qua lity characterization for areas with relatively high populations of susceptible individuals (e.g., children with asthma), and for any sites that are being proposed for discontinuance, the effect on data users other than the monitoring organization itself, such as nearby States and Tribes or health effects studies. For PM 2.5 

### , the assessment also must identify needed changes to population-oriented sites. The state, or where applicable, local monitoring organization must submit a copy of this 5-year assessment, along with a revised annual network plan, to the Regional

Administrator.

In order to maintain consistency in implementing and collecting information from a network review, EPA has developed the document Ambient Air Monitoring Network Assessment Guidance 3 

### . The information presented in this section provides some excerpts from this guidance document.



### 15.1.1 Network Selection

Due to the resource-intensive nature of network re views, it may be necessary to prioritize monitoring organizations and/or pollutants to be reviewed. Th e following criteria may be used to select networks:

1 http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tpl

2 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/plans.html

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 14

 

### date of last review;

 

### areas where attainment/nonattainment designations are taking place or are likely to take place;

 

### results of special studies, saturation sampling, point source oriented ambient monitoring, etc.; and

 

### monitoring organizations which have proposed network modifications since the last network

review.

In addition, pollutant-specific priorities may be c onsidered (e.g., newly designated ozone nonattainment
areas, PM 10 

### "problem areas", etc.). Once the monitoring organizations have been selected for review, significant data and information pertaining to the review should be compiled and evaluated. Such information might include the following:

 

### network files for the selected monitoring organiza tion (including updated site information and site photographs);

 

### AQS reports (AMP220, 225, 255, 380, 390, 450);

 

### air quality summaries for the past five y ears for the monitors in the network;

 

### emissions trends reports for major metropolitan areas;

 

### emission information, such as emission density ma ps for the region in which the monitor is located and emission maps showing the major sources of emissions; and

 

### National Weather Service summaries for monitoring network area.

Upon receiving the information, it should be checked for consistency and to ensure it is the latest revision. Discrepancies should be noted on the checkli st (Appendix H) and resolved with the monitoring organization during the review. Files and/or phot ographs that need to be updated should also be

identified.



### 15.1.2 Conformance to 40 CFR Part 58 Appe ndix D- Network Design Requirements

With regard to 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix D require ments, the network reviewer must determine the adequacy of the network in terms of number and loca tion of monitors: specifically, (1) is the monitoring organization meeting the number of mo nitors required by the design criteria requirements; and (2) are the monitors properly located, based on the monitoring ob jectives and spatial scales of representativeness?



### Number of Monitors

For SLAMS, NCore and PAMs the minimum number of m onitors required is specified in the regulations. As revisions occur to the NAAQS, ther e is a possibility the number of required monitors will also change so the reader should keep abreast of the changes that can occur in Appe ndix D. Adequacy of the network may be determined by using a variety of tools, including the following:

 

### maps of historical monitoring data;

 

### maps of emission densities;

 

### dispersion modeling;

 

### special studies/saturation sampling;

 

### SIP requirements;

 

### revised monitoring strategies (e.g., lead strategy , reengineering air monitoring network); and

 

### best professional judgment.



### Location of Monitors

Appendix D does provide general description of th e location of sites needed for NAAQS related monitoring. The EPA Regional Office and monitoring or ganizations work together to identify the best location for the monitors based upon the siting /location requirement defined in Appendix D. AdequacyQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 14



### of the location of monitors can only be determined on the basis of stated objectives. Maps, graphical overlays, and GIS-based information can be extremel y helpful in visualizing or assessing the adequacy of monitor locations. Plots of potential emissions and/or historical monitoring data versus monitor locations are especially useful.

For PAMS, there is considerable flexibility when locating each site within a nonattainment area or transport region. The three fundamental criteria which need to be considered when locating a final PAMS site are: (1) sector analysis - the site needs to be located in the appropriate downwind (or upwind) sector (approximately 45 o 

### ) using appropriate wind directions; (2) distance - the sites should be located at distances appropriate to obtain a representative samp le of the areas precursor emissions and represent the appropriate monitoring scale; and (3) proximate sources.



### 15.1.3 Conformance to 40 CFR Part 58, Appe ndix E - Probe Siting Requirements

Applicable siting criteria for SLAMS, NCore, and PAMS are specified in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix E.

The on-site visit itself consists of the physical measurements and observations needed to determine compliance with the Appendix E requirements, such as height above ground level, distance from trees, paved or vegetative ground cover, etc. Prior to the site visit, the reviewer should obtain and review the following:

 

### most recent hard copy of site d escription (including any photographs)

 

### data on the seasons with the greatest potential for high concentrations for specified pollutants

 

### predominant wind direction by season

The checklist provided in Appendix H of this Handb ook is also intended to assist the reviewer in determining conformance with Appendix E. In additi on to the items on the checklist, the reviewer should also do the following:

 

### ensure that the manifold and inlet probes are clean

 

### estimate probe and manifold inside diameters and lengths

 

### inspect the shelter for weathe r leaks, safety, and security

 

### check equipment for missing parts, frayed cords, etc.

 

### check that monitor exhausts are not likel y to be introduced back to the inlet

 

### record findings in field notebook and/or checklist

 

### take photographs/video in the 8 cardinal directions

 

### document site conditions, with additional photographs/videoQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 14



### 15.1.4 Checklists and Other Discussion Topics

Checklists are provided in Appendix H to assist ne twork reviewers (SLAMS and PAMS) in conducting

the review. In addition to the items included in the checklists, other subjects for possible discussion as part of the network review and overall ad equacy of the monitoring program include:

 

### installation of new monitors;

 

### relocation of existing monitors;

 

### siting criteria problems and suggested solutions;

 

### problems with data submitta ls and data completeness;

 

### maintenance and replacement of exis ting monitors and related equipment;

 

### quality assurance problems;

 

### air quality studies and special monitoring programs; and

 

### other issues (proposed regulations/funding).



### 15.1.5 Summary of Findings

Upon completion of the network review, a written network evaluation should be prepared. The evaluation should include any deficiencies identified in the review, corrective actions needed to address the deficiencies, and a schedule for implemen ting the corrective actions. The kinds of discrepancies/deficiencies to be identified in the ev aluation include discrepancies between the monitoring organization network description and the AQS networ k description; and deficiencies in the number, location, and/or type of monitors.



## 15.2 Performance Evaluations

Performance evaluations (PEs) are a type of audit in which the quantitative data generated in a measurement system are obtained independently and compared with routinely obtained data to evaluate the proficiency of an analyst, or a laboratory 4 

### . EPA also uses it to evaluate instrument performance. The National Performance Evaluation Programs:

 

### Allow one to determine data comparability and usability across sites, monitoring networks (Tribes, States, and geographic regions), instruments and laboratories.

 

### Provide a level of confidence that monitoring systems are operating within an acceptable le vel of data quality so data users can make decisions with acceptable levels of certainty.

 

### Help verify the precision and bias estimates performed by monitoring organizations.

 

### Identify where improvements (technology/training) are

needed.

4 American National Standard-Quality Systems for Envi ronmental Data and Technology Programs-Requirements with Guidance for Use (ANSI/ASQC E4-2004) PEP Audit NPAP throu g h the p robe auditQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 14

 

### Assure the public of non-biased assessments of data quality.

 

### Provide a quantitative mechanism to defend the quality of data.

 

### Provide information to monitoring organizations on how they compare with the rest of the nation, in relation to the acceptance limits and to assist in corrective actions and/or data improvements.

Some type of national PE program is implemented for all of the ambient air monitoring activities. Table 15-1 provides more information on these activities. It is important that these performance evaluations be independent in order to ensure they are non-biased an d objective. With the passage of the Data Quality

Act 5 

### , there is potential for EPA to receive challe nges to the quality of the ambient air data. Independent audits help provide anot her piece of objective evidence on the quality of a monitoring organizations data and can help EPA defend the quality of the data.

Table 15-1 National Performance Evaluation Activities 6 Performed by EPA Program/ Lead Agency Explanation

NPAP

OAQPS National Performance Audit Program provide s audit standards for the gaseous polluta nts either as devices that the site operator connects to the back of the instrument or th rough the probe in which case the audits are conducted by presenting audit gases through the probe inlet of ambient air m onitoring stations. Flow audit devices and lead strips are also provided through NPAP. NPAP audits are required at 20% of a primary quality assurance organizations sites each year with a goal of auditi ng all sites in 5-7 years.

PM 2.5 PM 10-2.5 PEP

OAQPS Performance Evaluation Program. The strategy is to collocate a portable FRM PM 2.5 or PM 10-2.5 air sampling audit instrument with an established primary sampler at a rou tine air monitoring site, operate both samplers in the same manner, and then compare the results. Each year five PEP audits are required for primary quality assurance organizations (PQAOs) with less than or equal to 5 monitoring sites or eight audits are required for PQAOs with greater than five sites. These audits are not required for PM 10 Pb-PEP Performance Evaluation Program. The strategy is to collocate a portable FRM Pb air sampling audit instrument with an established primary sampler at a routine air monitoring s ite, operate both samplers in the same manner, and then compare the results. Each year five PEP audits (1 PEP collocated sample and 4 samples from monitoring organizations routine collocated instrument) are required for primary quality assurance organi zations (PQAOs) with less than or equal to 5 monitoring sites or eight audits are required for PQAOs w ith greater than five sites (2 PEP collocated samples and 6 samples from monitoring organizations routine collocated instrument).

NATTS PT

OAQPS A National Air Toxics Trend Sites (NATTS) proficiency test (PT) is a type of assessme nt in which a sample, the composition of which is unknown to the analyst, is provi ded to test whether the analyst/laboratory can produce analytical results within the specifi ed acceptance criteria. PTs for volatile organic carbons (VOCs), carbonyls and metals are performed quarterly for the ~22 NATTS laboratories

SRP

EPA-RTP The Standard Reference Photometer (SRP) Program provi des a mechanism to establish traceability among the ozone standards used by monitoring organizations with the Nationa l Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Every year NIST certifies an EPA SRP. Upon certification, this SRP is shipped to the EPA Regions who use this SRP to certify the SRP that remains stationary in the Regional Lab. These sta tionary SRPs are then used to certify the ozone transfer standards that are used by the State, Local and Tribal mon itoring organizations who bring their transfer standards to the Regional SRP for certification. PAMS Cylinder

Certs EPA developed a system to certify the standards used by the monitoring organizations to calibrate their PAMS analytical systems. The standards are sent to the EPA Office of Radiation and Indoor Air (ORIA-LV) who perform an independent analysis/certification of the cylinders. This anal ysis is compared to the vendor concentrations to determine if they are within the contract ually required acceptance tolerance.

CSN/IMPROVE

Round Robins PTs

and Audits

ORIA-AL PM 2.5 Chemical Speciation Network (CSN) and IMPROVE Round Robins are a type of performance evaluation where the audit samples are developed in ambient air; therefore, th e true concentration is unknown. The Office of Indoor Air and Radiation (ORIA) in Montgomery, AL) implement thes e audits for the CSN/IMPROVE programs and for the PEP weighing laboratories. The audit is pe rformed by collecting samples over multip le days and from multiple samplers. These representative samples are then ch aracterized by the ORIA lab and sent to the routine sample laboratories for analysis. Since the true concentrations are unknown, the re ported concentrations are revi ewed to determine general agreement among the laboratories. In addition ORIA impl ements technical systems audits of IMPROVE and CSN

laboratories

Protocol Gas

OAQPS EPA Protocol Gases are used in quality control activities (i.e ., calibrations, audits etc.) to ensure the quality of data derived from ambient air monitors used by every State in the country. EPA developed the Protocol Gas Program to allow standards sold by specialty gas producers to be c onsidered traceable to NIST st andards. This program was

discontinued in 1998. In 2010 EPA established an Ambient Air-Protocol Gas Verification Program 7 that utilizes volunteers from the ambient air monitoring community.

5 see www.eenews.net/Greenwire/Backissues/081604/08160403.htm

6 many of the National PEs can be found at the following website http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/npepqa.html

7 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/aapgvp.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 14



### Although Table 15-1 lists seven performance evaluati on programs operating at the federal level, the NPAP and PEP Programs will be discussed in more de tail. Additional information on both programs can

be found on the AMTIC Website 8 

### . The October 17, 2006 monitoring rule identified the monitoring organizations as responsible for ensuri ng the implementation of these audits 9 

### . Monitoring organizations can either self-implement the program or continue to participate in the federally implemented program. This choice is provided to the monitoring organization on an annual basis through a memo from OAQPS through the EPA Regions. In order for monitoring or ganization to self-implement the program they must meet criteria related to the adequacy of the audit ( number of audits and how it is accomplished) as well as meet independence requirements (see Figure 15.1).



### 15.2.1 National Performance Audit Program 10



### Monitoring organizations operating SLAMS/PAMS/PSD are required to participate in the National Performance Evaluation Programs by providing adequate and independent audits for its monitors as per Section 2.4 of 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A. One way of providing the audits is to participate in the NPAP program either through self-impleme ntation or federal implementation.

The NPAP is a cooperative effort among OAQPS, the 10 EPA Regional Offices, and the monitoring organizations that operate the SLAMS/PAMS/PSD air po llution monitors. The NPAP’s goal is to provide

audit materials and devices that will enable EPA to assess the proficiency of monitoring organizations that are operating monitors in the SLAMS/PAMS/PSD networks. To accomplish this, the NPAP has established acceptable limits or performance criteria, based on the data quality needs of the networks, for

each of the audit materials and devices used in the NPAP.

All audit devices and materials used in the NPAP are ce rtified as to their true value, and that certification

is traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) sta ndard material or device wherever possible. The audit materials used in the NPAP are as representative and comparable as possible to the calibration materials and actual air samples used and/or collected in the SLAMS/PAMS/PSD networks. The audit material/gas cy linder ranges used in the NPAP are specified in the Federal Register.

Initially the NPAP system was a mailable system wher e standards and gasses were mailed to monitoring organizations for implementation. In 2003, OAQPS st arted instituting a through the probe audit system where mobile laboratories are sent to monitoring s ites and audit gasses are delivered through the inlet probe of the analyzers. The goal of the NPAP audit is:

 

### Performing audits at 20 percent of monitori ng sites per year, and 100% in 5-7 years.

 

### Data submission to AQS within 3 months of audit.

 

### Development of a delivery system that will a llow for the audit concentration gasses to be introduced to the probe inlet where logistically feasible.

 

### Use of audit gases that are NIST certified and validated at least once a year for CO, SO 2 

### , and

NO 2



### .

 

### Validation/certification with the EPA NPAP pr ogram (if self-implementing) through collocated auditing, at an acceptable number of sites each year. The comparison tests would have to be no greater than 5 percent different from the EPA NPAP results.

8 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/npepqa.html

9 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/40cfr53.html



### - Final - Revisions to Ambient Air Monitoring Regulations



### . 10 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/npapgen.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 14

 

### Incorporation of NPAP in the monitoring organi zation’s quality assurance project plan (if selfimplementing).

The validation template in Appendix D list the acceptance limits of the NPAP audits.

NPAP Corrective Action

Since NPAP can only visit 20% of any monitoring organizations sites in a given year, the data is more useful in providing EPA with a national assessment of data comparability across the criteria pollutant

network. However when individual sites fail an a udit, EPA will attempt to work with the monitoring agency to discover the reasons for the failure. Usually the failure is related to a site specific issue (e.g., leak) and not a network issue (e.g. bad calibration gas used to calibrate all monitors). If time is available, the auditor can attempt to re-audit while at the s ite. If not the EPA Region and monitoring organization can communicate on auditing the site at a later date. Un less the failure is related to an issue with NPAP equipment, the original results will be reported alon g with any additional audit results after corrective

action.



### 15.2.2 PM 2.5 

### , PM 10-2.5 

### , and Pb Performance Evaluation Programs (PEP)

The Performance Evaluation Program 11 

### is a quality assurance activity wh ich will be used to evaluate measurement system bias of

the PM 2.5 

### , the PM 10-2.5 

### and the Pb monitoring networks. The pertinent regulations for this performance audit are found in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A. The strategy is to collocate a portable PEP

instrument with an

established routine air monitoring site, operate both monitors in exactly the same manner and then compare the

results of this instrument against the routine sampler at the site. For primary quality assurance organizations with less than or equal to five monitoring sites, five valid performance evaluation audits

must be collected and reported each year. For primary quality assurance organizations with greater than five monitoring sites, eight valid performance

evaluation audits must be collected and reported each

11 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmpep.html Organization

3rd Level
Supervision

Organization

2nd Level
Supervision

Organization

1st Level
Supervision

Organization

Personnel QA Lab Analysis Organization

1st Level
Supervision

Organization

Personnel QA Field Sampling Organization

2nd Level
Supervision

Organization

1st Level
Supervision

Organization

Personnel
Routine Lab Analysis Organization

1st Level
Supervision

Organization

Personnel Routine Field Sampling Independent assessment - an assessment performed by a qualified individual, group, or organization that is not part of the organi zation directly performing and accountable for the work being assessed. This auditing or ganization must not be involved with the generation of the routine ambient air monito ring data. An organization can conduct the PEP if it can meet the above definition and has a management structure that, at a minimum, will allow for the separation of its routine sampling personnel from its auditing personnel by two levels of management, as illustrated in the figure below. In addition, the pre and post weighing of aud it filters must be performed by separate laboratory facility using separate laborator y equipment. Field and laboratory personnel would be required to meet the FRM Performan ce Audit field and laboratory training and

certification requirements. The State and local orga nizations are also asked to consider participating in the centralized field an d laboratory standards certification process.

Figure 15.1 Definition of independent assessmentQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 14



### year. A valid performance evaluation audit mean s that both the primary monitor and PEP audit

concentrations are valid and above 3 μ g/m 3



### .

The Pb-PEP operates somewhat differently then the PM 2.5 

### , the PM 10-2.5 

### PEP in that it includes a combination of independent audits and data obtained form the monitoring organization collocated Pb sampler that is then sent to the National PEP Laborat ory. More details on this process, including all documentation including the PEP Implementation Plan, QAPP, Field and Laboratory SOPs, and reports

for each PEP can be found on the AMTIC Bulletin Board at the PEP Website 12



### .

12 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmpep.html 

### Since performance evaluations are independent asse ssments, Figure 15.1 was developed to define independence for the FRM performance evaluation to allow monitoring organizations to self-implement this activity.

Since the regulations define the performance eval uations as an NPAP like activity, EPA has made arrangements to implement this audit. Monitoring organizations can determine, on a yearly basis, to utilize federal implementation by directing their appr opriate percentage of grant resources back to the OAQPS or implement the audit themselves. The fo llowing activities will be established for federal PEP implementation:

 

### field personnel assigned to each EPA Region, the hours based upon the number of required audits in the Region; and

 

### one national laboratory in Region 4 will serve as a national weighing lab and will include data submittal to AQS.

PEP Corrective Action

Unlike the NPAP, which can provide immediate feedb ack on results, the PEP results are not available until the monitoring organizations have reported their results (data from the routine monitor) to AQS. This process can take at least 3 months but sometime s longer. Therefore, feedback cannot be immediate and so the PEP has limited use (compared to NPAP) for corrective action at a monitoring organization level. However, over the years that the PEP has been implemented, EPA has been able to identify bias at the PQAO level as well as national levels among met hod designations. The PEP then helps to inform those monitoring organizations that may be outsi de the DQOs or the norm or that have method designations that may need some corrective action.



### 15.2.3 State and Local Organization Performance Audits

Any of the performance evaluation activities mentioned in this section can be performed internally by the monitoring organizations. If the monitoring organiza tion intends to self-implement NPAP or PEP then they will be required to meet the adequacy and i ndependence criteria mentioned in earlier sections. Since a monitoring organization may want more audits th en can be supplied by the NPAP and PEP, it may decide to “augmen t” the federally implemented programs w ith additional performance audits. These

audits can be tailored to the needs of the monito ring organization and do not necessarily need to follow NPAP and PEP adequacy and independence requirement s. Some information on the procedures for this audit can be found in Appendix H.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 14



## 15.3 Technical Systems Audits

A technical systems audit is an on-site review and inspection of a monitoring organization’s ambient air monitoring program to assess its compliance with established regulations governing the collection, analysis, validation, and reporting of ambient air quality data. A systems audit of each monitoring organization within an EPA Region is performed every three years by a member of the Regional Quality Assurance (QA) staff. Detailed discussions of th e audits performed by the EPA and the monitoring organizations are found in Appendix H; the inform ation presented in this section provides general guidance for conducting technical systems audits. A systems audit should consist of three separate phases:

 

### Pre-audit activities.

 

### On-site audit activities.

 

### Post-audit activities.

Summary activity flow diagrams have been included as Figures 15.2, 15.3 and 15.5 respectively. The reader may find it useful to refer to these diagrams while reading this guidance.



### 15.3.1 Pre-Audit Activities

At the beginning of each fiscal year, the audit lead or a designated member of the

audit team should establish a tentative schedule for on-site systems audits of the monitoring organizations within their Region. It is suggested that the audit lead develop an audit plan. This plan should

address the elements listed in Table 15-2. The audit plan is not a major undertaking and in most cases will be a one page table or report. However, the document represents thoughtful and conscious planning for an efficient and successful audit. The audit plan should be made available to the organization audited, with adequate lead time to ensure that appropriate personnel and documents are available for the audit. Three months prior to the audit, the audit lead should contact the quality assurance officer (QAO) of the organization to be a udited to coordinate specific dates and schedules for the on-site audit visit. During this initial contact, the audit lead should arrange a tentative schedul e for meetings with key personnel as well as for inspection of selected ambient air quality monitoring and measurement operations. At the same time,

a schedule should be set for the exit interview used to debrief the monitoring organization director orQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 14



### his/her designee, on the systems audit outcome. As part of this scheduling, the audit lead should indicate any special requirements such as acces s to specific areas or activities. The audit lead should inform the monitoring organization QAO that the QAO will receive a questionnaire, which is to be reviewed and completed.

Table 15-2 Suggested Elemen ts of an Audit Plan

Audit Title - Official title of audit that will be used on checksheets and reports Date/Audit # Year and number of audit can be combined; 08-1, 08-2 Scope - Establishes the boundary of the audit and identifies the groups and activities to be evaluated. The scope can vary from general overview, to tal system, to part of system, which will determine the length of the audit. Purpose - What the audit should achieve Standards - Standards are criteria against which performa nce is evaluated. These standards must be clear and concise and should be used consistently when auditing similar facilities or procedures. The use of audit checklists is suggested to assure that the full scope of an audit is covered. An example checklist for the Regional TSA is found in Appendix H.

Audit team - Team lead and members. Auditees - People who should be available for the audit from the audited organization. This should include the program manager(s), principal investigator(s), monitoring leads, organizations QA representative(s), and other management and technicians as necessary. Documents - Documents that should be available in order for the audit to proceed efficiently. Too often documents are asked for during an audit, when auditors do not have the time to wait for these documents to be found. Documents could include QMPs, QAPPs, SOPs, GLPs, control charts, raw data, QA/QC data, previous audit reports etc. Timeline - A timeline of when organizations (auditors/a uditees) will be notified of the audit in order for efficient scheduling and full participation of all parties.



### The audit lead should emphasize that the completed ques tionnaire is to be returned within one (1) month (or time frame deemed appropriate) of receipt. The in formation within the questionnaire is considered a minimum, and both the Region and the monitoring organization under audit should feel free to include additional information. Once the completed questionn aire has been received, it should be reviewed and compared with the pertinent criteria and regulations. The AQS precision, bias and completeness data as well as any other information on data quality can augment the documentation received from the reporting organization under audit. This pre liminary evaluation will be instrumental in selecting the sites to be

evaluated and in the decision on the extent of the mon itoring site data audit. The audit team should then prepare a checklist detailing specific points for di scussion with monitoring organization personnel.

The audit team should be made up of several memb ers to offer a wide variety of backgrounds and expertise. This team may then divide into groups once on-site, so that both audit coverage and time utilization can be optimized. A possible division may be that one group assesses the support laboratory and headquarters operations while another evaluates sites, and subsequently assesses audit and calibration information. The audit lead should confirm the pr oposed audit schedule with the audited organization immediately prior to traveling to the site.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 14



### 15.3.2. On-Site Activities

The audit team should meet initially with the audited monitoring organization’s director or his/her designee to discuss the scope, duration, and activities involved with the audit. This should be followed by a meeting with key personnel identified from the completed questionnaire, or indicated by the monitoring organization QAO. Key personnel to be interviewed during

the audit are those individuals with responsibilities for: planning, field operations, laboratory operations, QA/QC, data management and reporting. At the conclusion of these introductory meetings, the audit team may begin work as two or more independent groups, as illustrated in Figure 15.3. To increase uniformity of site inspections, it is suggested that a site checklist be developed and used. The format for Regional TSAs can be found in Appendix H.

The importance of the audit of data quality (ADQ) cannot be overstated. Thus, sufficient time and effort should be devoted to this activity so that the audit team has a clear understanding and complete documentation of data flow. Its importance stems from the need to have documentation on the quality of ambient air monitoring data for all the criteria pollutants fo r which the monitoring organization has monitoring requirements. The ADQ will serve as an effective fra mework for organizing the extensive amount of information gathered during the audit of laboratory, field monitoring and support functions within the monitoring organization.

The entire audit team should prepare a brief written summary of findings, organized into the following areas: planning, field operations, laboratory ope rations, quality assurance/quality control, data management, and reporting. Problems with specifi c areas should be discussed and an attempt made to rank them in order of their potential impact on data qu ality. For the more serious problems, audit findings should be drafted (Fig. 15.4).

The audit finding form has been designed such that one is filled out for each major deficiency that requires formal corrective action. They inform the monitoring organization being audited about a serious finding that may compromise the quality of the data and therefore require specific corrective actions. They are initiated by the audit team, and discussed at the debriefing. During the debriefing discussion, evidence may be pre sented that reduces the significance of the finding; in which case the finding may be removed. If the au dited monitoring organizati on is in agreement withQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 14



### the finding, the form is signed by the monitoring organization's director or his/her designee during the exit interview. If a disagreement occurs, the QA Team should record the opinions of the monitoring organization audited and set a time at some later date to address the finding at issue.

The audit is now completed by having the audit team members meet once again with key personnel, the QAO and finally with the monitoring organization's director to present their findings. This is also the opportunity for the monitoring organization to present their disagreements.

The audit team should simply state the audit results, including an indication of the potential data quality impact. During these meetings, the audit team should also discuss the systems audit reporting schedule and notify monitoring organization personnel that they will be given a chance to comment in writing, within a certain time period, on the prepared audit report in advance of any formal

distribution.



### 15.3.3 Post-Audit Activities

The major post-audit activity is the preparation of the systems audit report. The report will include:

 

### audit title, number and any other identifying information;

 

### audit team leaders, audit team participants and audited participants;

 

### background information about the project, purpose of the audit, dates of the audit, particular measurement phase or parameters that were audited, and a brief description of the audit process;

 

### summary and conclusions of the audit and corrective action requirements; and

 

### attachments or appendices that include all audit evaluations and audit finding forms.

To prepare the report, the audit team should meet and compare observations with collected documents and results of interviews and discussions with key personnel. Expected QA project plan implementation is compared with observed accomplishments and deficiencies and the audit findings are reviewed inQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 14



### detail. Within thirty (30) calendar days of the completion of the audit, the audit report should be prepared and

submitted.

The TSA report is submitted to the audited monitoring organization. It is suggested

that a cover letter be used to

reiterate the fact that the audit report is being provided for

review and written comment.

The letter should also indicate that, should no written comments be received by the audit lead within thirty (30) calendar days from the report date, it will be assumed acceptable to the monitoring organization in its current form, and will be formally distributed without further changes.

If the monitoring organization

has written comments or questions concerning the audit report, the audit team should review and incorporate them as appropriate, and subsequently prepar e and resubmit a report in final form within thirty (30) days of receipt of the written comments. Copies of this re port should be sent to the monitoring organization director or his/her designee for internal distribution. The transmittal letter for the amended report should indicate official distribution and again draw atten tion to the agreed-upon schedule for corrective action implementation.



### 15.3.4 Follow-up and Corrective Action Requirements

As part of corrective action and follow-up, an audit fi nding response form (Fig 15.6) is generated by the audited organization for each finding form submitted by the audit team. The audit finding response form is signed by the audited organization’s director and sent to the organization responsible for oversight who reviews and accepts the corrective action. The audit response form should be completed by the audited organization within 30 days of acceptance of the audit report.



### 15.3.5 TSA Reporting to AQS

All 40 CFR Appendix A required TSAs will be repor ted to AQS. In 2013, a QA transaction was developed to allow the reporting of 5 parameters: 1) the monitoring orga nization audited, 2) the auditing agency, 3) the begin and 4) end date of the audit, a nd 5) the close out date. The close out date is defined

as the date when all corrective actions identified in the audit were completed. 

### Audit Finding Response Form

Audit Title: Audit #: Finding #:

Finding:

Cause of the problem:

Actions taken or planned for correction:

Responsibilities and timetable for the above actions:

Prepared by: Date:

Reviewed by: Date:

Remarks:

Is this audit finding closed? When?

File with official audit records. Send copy to auditee

Figure 15.6 Audit response formQA Handbook Vol II, Section 15.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 14 of 14



## 15.4 Data Quality Assessments

A data quality assessment (DQA) is the statistical anal ysis of environmental da ta, to determine whether the quality of data is adequate to support the decisions which are based on the DQOs. Data are appropriate if the level of uncertainty in a decision, based on the data, is acceptable. The DQA process is

described in detail in the guidance document: Data Quality Assessment : A Reviewers Guide (EPA QA/G9R), in Section 18 and is summarized below.

1) Review the data quality objectives (DQOs) and sa mpling design of the program: review the DQO and develop one, if it has not already been done. Define statistical hypothesis, tolerance limits,

and/or confidence intervals.

2) Conduct preliminary data review: Review QA da ta and other available QA reports, calculate summary statistics, and develop plots/graphs. L ook for patterns, relationships, or anomalies.

3) Select the statistical test: select the best test for analysis based on the preliminary review, and identify underlying assumptions about the data for that test.

4) Verify test assumptions: decide whether the underlying assumptions made by the selected test hold true for the data and the consequences.

5) Perform the statistical test: perform test and do cument inferences. Evaluate the performance for

future use.

EPA QA/G-9S, a companion document to EPA QA/G-9R, provides many appropriate statistical tests. Both can be found on the EPA Quality Staffs Website 13



### .

OAQPS plans on performing data quality assessments fo r the pollutants of the Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Network at a yearly frequency for da ta reports and at a 3-year frequency for more interpretative reports. Currently EPA produces annua l box and whisker plots of the gaseous pollutants

titled: Criteria Pollutant Quality Indicator Summary Report that are posted on AMTIC 14 

### and develops 3- year QA reports for PM 2.5 15 

### . As more QA data becomes accessible and improvements are made in reporting and assessment technologies, EPA hopes to deve lop a library of reports that users can run at more frequent intervals. Monitoring organizations are encouraged to implement data quality assessments

for their data.

Data not meeting DQOs does not necessarily invalidate this data but it means that those using the information for NAAQS decisions or for other objectives have a higher probability of making an incorrectdecision (declaring an area attainment when it should in truth be non-attainment or declaring an area nonattainment when in truth it is in attainment). These types of errors can have serious financial and health risk consequences and monitoring organizations not meeting DQOs should make every effort to discover

the reasons for the measurement uncertainties in their monitoring networks. EPA Regions or the monitoring organization QA staff may want to re vise TSA schedules based on the results from data quality assessment.

13 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/

14 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/qareport.html

15 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/anlqa.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 16.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 4



# 16.0 Reports to Management

This section provides guidance and suggestions to air monitoring organizations on how to report the quality of the aerometric data, and how to convey information and requests for assistance concerning quality control and qua lity assurance problems. The guidance offe red here is primarily intended for PQAOs that provide data to one or more of these national networks:

 SLAMS (State and Local Air Monitoring Stations)

 Tribal Monitoring Stations

 PAMS (Photochemical Air Monitoring Stations)

 PSD (Prevention of Significant Deterioration stations)

 NCore (National Core Monitoring Network)

 Chemical Speciation Network

 NATTS (National Air Toxic Trend Stations)

This guidance may also be useful in preparing re ports that summarize data quality of other pollutant measurements such as those made at Special Purpo se Monitoring Stations (SPMS) and state-specific

programs.

Several kinds of reports can be prepared. The size and frequency of the reports will depend on the information requested or to be conveyed. A brief, corrective action form or letter-style report might ask for attention to an urgent problem. On the other hand, an annual quality assurance report to management would be a much larger report containing sections such as:

 executive summary,

 network background and present status,

 quality objectives for measurement data,

 quality assurance procedures,

 results of quality assurance activities,

 recommendations for further quality assurance work, and

 suggestions for improving performance that include items such as fixing equipment problems, personnel training need, and infrastructure improvements

A report to management should not solely consist of tabulations of analyzer-by-analyzer precision and bias check results for criteria pollutant s. This information is required to be submitted with the data each quarter and is thus already available to manageme nt through AQS. Instead, the annual quality assurance report to management should summarize and discuss the results of such checks. These summaries from individual PQAOs can be incorporated into additional re ports issued by the state, local, tribal and/or the EPA Regional Office.

This section also provides general information for the preparation of reports to management and includes:

 the types of reports that might be prepared, the general content of each type of report, and a suggested frequency for their preparation,

 sources of information that can be tapped to retrieve information for the reports, and

 techniques and methods for concise and e ffective presentation of information.

Appendix I presents examples of two types of reports to management; the annual quality assurance report to management and a corrective action request.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 16.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 4



## 16.1 Guidelines for Preparatio n of Reports to Management

16.1.1 Types of QA Reports to Management

Listed in Table 16-1 are examples of typical QA reports to management. An individual reporting organization may have others to add to the list or ma y create reports that are combinations of those listed

below.

Table 16-1 Types of QA Reports to Management

Type of QA Report

to Management Contents Suggested Reporting Frequency

As required Week Month Quarter Year

Corrective action

request Description of problem; recommended action required; feedback on resolution of problem. x

Control chart with

summary Repetitive field or lab activity; control limits versus time. Prepare monthly or

whenever new check or calibration samples are used. x x x x

National Performance Evaluation Program

results Summary of PEP,NPAP, NATTS PT

and CSN audit results. x x

State and local organization performance audits Summary of audit results; recommendations for action, as needed. x x

Technical systems

audits Summary of system audit results; recommendations for action, as needed. x x

Quality assurance

report to management Executive summary. Precision, bias, and system and performance audit results. x x

Network reviews (by EPA Regional Office) Review results and suggestions for actions, as needed. x



### 16.1.2 Sources of Information

Information for inclusion in the various reports to management may come from a variety of sources including: records of precision and bias checks (A MP255 reports), results of systems and performance audits, laboratory and field instrument maintenance logbooks, and NPAP audits. Table 16-2 lists useful sources and the type of inform ation expected to be found.

Table 16-2 Sources of Information for Preparing Reports to Management

Information Source Expected Information and Usefulness Location

State implementation plan Types of monitors, locations, and sampling

schedule. http://www.epa.gov/airquality/urbanair /sipstatus/overview.html

Annual Network Plans Provides for locations of networks and objectives of mon itoring sites. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/plans.ht

ml Quality management plans and quality assurance project plans Data quality indicators and goals for precision, bias, completeness, timeliness. On file at monitoring organization and in most cases EPA Regional Offices.

Quality objectives for measurement

data document Quality objectives for measurement data. Audit procedures and frequency. Most criteria pollutants posted in CFR. Some under criteria pollutant QA site. http://www.epa.gov/ttn /amtic/qapolluta

nt.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 16.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 4

Information Source Expected Information and Usefulness Location

Laboratory and field instrument maintenance logbooks Record of maintenance activity, synopsis of failures, recommendations for equipment overhaul or replacement. Internal monitoring organization

documents

Laboratory weighing room records of temperature, humidity A record of whether or not environmental control in the weighing room is adequate to meet goals. Internal monitoring organization

documents

Audit results (NPAP, local, etc.) Results of audit tests on ambient air pollutant measurement devices. AQS data base

Quality control data on local information management systems or AQS Results are generally considered valid and

can be used to determine achievement of data quality objectives. AQS data base



### 16.1.3 Methods of Presenting Information

Reports to management are most effective when the information is given in a succinct, well-summarized fashion. Methods useful for distilling and presenting in formation in ways that are easy to comprehend are listed in Table 16-3. A 2008 Guidance Document, d esigned to assist Tribes in developing monitoring programs contains an expanded section (Section 7) th at discusses many of the statistical techniques

described in Table 16-3 1 

### . Several of these methods are available on-line in AirData 2 

### ; others are available in commercially available statistical and spreadsheet computer programs.

Table 16-3 Presentation Methods for Use in Reports to Management

Presentation Method Typical Use Examples Written text Description of results and responses to problems Appendix I

Control chart Shows whether a repetitive process stays within QC limits. Figure 10.4 of this Handbook

Black box report Visually highlights information by color coding boxes to indicate where project goals, DQOs, etc were/were not met Executive Summary of Appendix I. Three year PM 2.5 QA Reports on

AMTIC Bar charts Shows relationships between numerical

values. Included in most graphic and spreadsheet programs
X Y (scatter) charts Shows rela tionships between two variables. Included in most graphic and spreadsheet programs Probability limit charts and box and whisker plots Show a numerical value with its associated precision range. Figure 1 of Appendix I



### 16.1.4 Annual Quality Assurance Report

The annual quality assurance report (an example is provi ded in Appendix I) should consist of a number of sections that describe the quality objectives for measu rement data and how those objectives have been met. A suggested organization might include:

Executive Summary of Report to Management - The executive summary should be a short section (typically one or two pages) that summarizes the annual quality assurance report to management. It should contain a checklist graphic that lets the reader know how the reporting organization has met its goals for the report period. In addition, a s hort discussion of future needs and plans should be

included.

1 Technical Guidance for the Developm ent of Tribal Monitoring Programs http://www.epa.gov/ttn/oarpg/t1/memor anda/techguidancet ribalattch.pdf

2 http://www.epa.gov/airdata/QA Handbook Vol II, Section 16.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 4 

### Introduction - This section describes the quality objectiv es for measurement data and serves as an overview of the reporting organization’s structure and functions. It also briefly describes the procedures used by the reporting organizati on to assess the quality of field and laboratory

measurements.

Quality Information for each Ambien t Air Pollutant Monitoring Program - These sections are organized by ambient air pollutant category (e.g., gaseous criteria pollutants, air toxics). Each section includes the following topics:

 program overview and update

 quality objectives for measurement data

 data quality assessment



### 16.1.5 Corrective Action Request

A corrective action request should be made whenev er anyone in the monitoring organization notes a problem that demands either immediate or long-term action to correct a safety defect, or an operational problem (either instrument malfunctions or procedural errors). A typical corrective action request form, with example information entered, is shown in A ppendix I. A separate form should be used for each problem identified.

The corrective action report form is designed as a closed -loop system. First it identifies the originator; the person who reports and identifies the problem, states th e problem and may suggest a solution. The form then directs the request to a specific person or person s (i.e., the recipient), who would be best qualified to “fix” the problem. Finally, the form closes the loop by requiring that the recipient state how the problem

was resolved and the effectiveness of the solution. The form is signe d and a copy is returned to the originator and other copies are sent to the supervisor and the applicable files fo r the record. The concepts of the corrective action requests and form apply to either hardcopy or electronic processing of this information. Laboratory/monitoring organization in formation management systems may be capable of implementing this process.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 10



# 17.0 Data Review, Verification and Validation

Data review, verification and valida tion are techniques used to accept, reject or qualify data in an objective and consistent manner. Verification can be defined as confirmation, through provision of objective evidence that specified requirements have been fulfilled 1 

### . Validation can be defined as confirmation through provision of objective eviden ce that the particular requirements for a specific

intended use are fulfilled. So, for example one could veri fy that for a monitor all 1-point QC were performed every two weeks ( specified requirement ) as described in standard operating procedures ( specified requirement ). However, if the checks were higher than expected, the validation process might determine that the data could not be used for NAAQS determinations ( intended use ). It is important to describe the criteria for deciding the degree to whic h each data item has met its quality specifications as described in an organization’s QAPP. This secti on will describe the techniques used to make these

assessments.

In general, these assessment activ ities are performed by persons implementing the environmental data operations as well as by personnel “independent” of the operation, such as the organization’s QA personnel, and at some specified frequency. The procedures, personnel and frequency of the assessments should be included in an organization’s QAPP. Thes e activities should occur prior to submitting data to AQS and prior to final data quality assessments that will be discussed in Section 18.

Each of the following areas of discussion described below should be considered during the data review/verification/validation processes. Some of th e discussion applies to situations in which a sample is collected and transported to a la boratory for analysis and data gene ration; others are applicable to

automated instruments. The follo wing information is an excerpt from EPA G-5 2 

### :

Sampling Design - How closely a measurement represents the actual environment at a given time and location is a complex issue that is considered duri ng development of the sampling design. Each sample should be checked for conformity to the specifications . By noting the deviations in sufficient detail, subsequent data users will be able to determine the data’s usability under scenarios different from those included in project planning. Deviations should be noted on sample documentation (i.e., chain of custody forms, field data forms or log books) in a manner conducive to subsequent data entry. For example, development of a detailed set of data qualifiers (flags) makes data aggregation and assessment in information management systems much easier, can help identify how often a qualifier is used and whether the identified deviation has an effect on data quality.

Sample Collection Procedures - Details of how a sample is collected are important for properly interpreting the measurement results. Sampling me thods and field SOPs provide these details, which include sampling and ancillary equipment and pro cedures (including equipment decontamination). Acceptable departures (for example, alternate equipmen t) from the QAPP, and the action to be taken if the requirements cannot be satisfied, should be specifi ed for each critical criterion. Validation activities should note potentially unacceptable departures from the QAPP. Comments or findings on deviations from written sampling plans made during field technical systems audits or reviews should be noted.

Sample Handling- Details of how a sample is physically treated and handled during transportation to and from the field site, through all laboratory handling stag es prior to final analysis/reporting, are extremely

1 American National Standard Quality Systems of Enviro nmental Data and Technology Programs ANSI/ASQ E4-

2004 http://ansi.org/

2 EPA Guidance to Quality Assurance Project Plans http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g5-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 10



### important. Correct interpretation of the subsequent measurement results requires that deviations from the sample handling section of the QAPP/SOPs, and the actions taken to minimize or control the changes, be

detailed. Data collection SOPs should indicate events that occur during sample handling that may affect the integrity of the samples. At a minimum, tho se responsible for reviewing/verifying/validating should confirm that the appropriate sample containers and the preservation methods are appropriate to the nature of the sample and the type of data generated from th e sample. Checks on the identity of the sample (e.g., proper labeling and chain of custody records) as well as proper physical/chemical storage conditions (e.g., chain of custody and storage records) should be ma de to ensure that the sample continues to be representative of its native environment as it moves through the analytical process.

Analytical Procedures- Each sample should be verified to ensu re that the procedures used to generate the data were implemented as specified. Accepta nce criteria should be developed for important components of the procedures, along with suitable co des (qualifiers) for characterizing each sample's deviation from the procedure. Data validation activities should determine how seriously a sample deviated beyond the acceptable limit so that the potenti al effects of the deviation can be evaluated during the DQA.

Quality Control - The quality control section of the QAPP specifies the QC checks that are to be performed during sample collection, handling and anal ysis. These include analyses of check standards, blanks and replicates, which provide indications of the quality of data being produced by specified components of the measurement process. For each specified QC check, th e procedure, acceptance criteria, and corrective action (and changes) should be specified. Data validation should document the corrective actions that were taken, which samples were affected, and the potential effect of the actions on the validity of the data.

Calibration - Calibration of instruments and equipment and the information that should be presented to

ensure that the calibrations:

 

### were performed before sampling began a nd at frequencies specified in the QAPP

 

### were performed in the proper sequence (i.e., there may be a sequence of checks or other implementation activities that must take place prior to calibration)

 

### included the proper number of calibration points

 

### were performed using standards that “bracket ed” the range of reported measurement results otherwise, results falling outside the calib ration range should be flagged as such

 

### had acceptable linearity checks and other checks to ensure that the measurement system was stable when the calibration was performed

When calibration checks are found to be outside the accep table limits proscribed in the QAPP, raw data sampled between this calibration and the previous ca librations should be handled as described in the QAPP. This could involve use of data flaggi ng techniques for subsequent data evaluation.

Data Reduction and Processing - Data reduction/processing may be an irreversible process that involves a loss of detail in the data and may involve averaging across time (i.e., 5-minute, hourly or daily averages) or space (i.e., example, compositing results from samples t hought to be physically e quivalent). Since this summarizing process produces few values to represent a gr oup of many data points, its validity should be well-documented in the QAPP. One can take a subset of raw data and perform the data reduction process by hand to verify the reduction/processing techniqu es are performing as required in the QAPP and SOPs.

The information generation step involves the synthesi s of the results of previous operations and theQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 10



### construction of tables and charts suitable for use in reports. In many cases these types of reports are generated on a frequent basis. A process should be developed that verifies that the reports are being properly generated. This can incl ude hand generating a subset of the report and reviewing and verifying the programming code used to generate the reports.



## 17.1 Data Review Methods

The flow of data from the field environmental data operations to the storage in the database requires several distinct and separate steps:

 

### initial selection of hardware and software for the acquisition, storage, retrieval and transmittal of

data

 

### organization and the control of the data flow fro m the field sites and the analytical laboratory

 

### input and validation of the data

 

### manipulation, analysis and archival of the data

 

### submittal of the data into the EPA’s AQS database.

More details of information management systems are included in Section 14. Both manual and computeroriented systems require individual reviews of all da ta tabulations. As an individual scans tabulations, there is no way to determine that all values are va lid. The purpose of manual inspection is to spot unusually high (or low) values (outliers) that might indi cate a gross error in the data collection system.

Manual review of data tabulations also allows detection of uncorrected drift in the zero baseline of a continuous sensor. Zero drift may be indicated wh en the daily minimum concentration tends to increase or decrease from the norm over a period of several days. For example, at most sampling stations the early morning (3:00 a.m. to 4:00 a.m.) concentrations of carbon monoxide tend to reach a minimum (e.g., 2 to 4 ppm). If the minimum concentration differs significant ly from this, a zero drift may be suspected. Zero drift could be confirmed by review of zero control chart information.

In an automated data processing system, procedures for data validation can easily be incorporated into the basic software. The computer can be programmed to scan data values for extreme values, outliers or ranges. These checks can be further refined to account for time of day, time of week, and other cyclic conditions. Questionable data values are then flagged to indicate a possible error. Other types of data review can consist of preliminary evaluations of a set of data, calculating some basic statistical quantiles and examining the data usi ng graphical representations.

DAS Data Review

The data review is an ongoing process that is perfo rmed by the station operators (SO) and the data processing team (DP). At a minimum a cursory review is performed daily, preferably in the morning to provide a status of the data and instrument perform ance at monitoring sites. Detailed analysis can be extremely difficult for the data processing team when reviewing the raw data without the notations, notes and calibration information that the station operator s provide for the group. The typical review process for the station operator and data reviewer(s) include:

 

### (SO) Review of zero, span, one point QC verifi cation information, the hourly data, and any flagsQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 10



### that could effect data and reco rd any information on the daily summaries that might be vital to proper review of the data.

 

### (SO) Transfer strip charts both analog and digital information, daily summaries, monthly maintenance sheets, graphic displays of meta data and site log notes to the central location for a secondary and more thorough review.

 

### (SO) At the central location, review the data, ma rking any notations of i nvalidations and provide electronic strip charts, meta data charts, daily summaries, site notes, and monthly maintenance sheets for ready access by the data processing staff.

 

### (DP) Review zero, span and one point QC veri fications, station notes, and monthly maintenance sheets for the month. Compare a defined number of hand reduced and/or strip chart readings to electronic data points generated by the DAS. If significant differences are observed, determine what corrective action is required.

Outliers

Outliers are “measurements that are extremely large or small relative to the rest of the data and are suspected of misrepresenting the population from which they were collected” (EPAQA/G9R) 3 

### . When reviewing data, some potential outliers will be obvious such as, spikes in concentrations, data remaining the same for hours, or a sudden drop in concentrati on but still in the normal ra nge of observed data. Many of these outlier checks can be automated and provide efficient real-time checks of data. Outliers do not necessarily indicate the data is invalid; they serve to alert the station operator and/or data reviewers there may be a problem. In fact, the rule of thumb for outli ers should be that the data be considered valid until there is an explanation for why the data should be invalidated. At some point it may be necessary to exclude outliers from instantaneous reporting to th e AIRNow network and/or AQI reporting until further investigation has occurred. EPA Guidance Documents 4 

### Guidance on Environmental Data Verification

and Validation (EPA QA/G8) and Guidance for Data Quality A ssessment – a Reviewers Guide (EPA QA/G9R) provide insight on outlier and data reviews in general.

In order to recognize that the reported concentration of a given pollutant is extreme, the individual must have basic knowledge of the major pollutants and of air quality conditions prevalent at the reporting station. Data values considered questionable shoul d be flagged for verification. This scanning for high/low values is sensitive to spurious extreme values but not to intermediate values that could also be grossly in error. If possible, use of statistical t echniques to identify data anomalies and outliers are encouraged since they provide a more consistent evaluation. Some of these techniques and checks may be incorporated into data logging systems and we ll as main office information management systems.

NOTE: During submission of data to AQS a numbe r of outlier (see outlier information below) and gap checks are performed. The AQS website has documents describing these checks. When an outlier is observed, a warning is ge nerated and sent to the monitoring organization. Monitoring organizations may ignore this wa rning and submit the data. However, it is suggested that the data being reviewed. If the da ta is valid, a “V” qualifier can be added to the data indicating the validity of the value. Duri ng automated annual data certification, any outlier that does not have a “V” flag will be identified and will require the monitoring organizations to

review the data and either invalidate the data point or add a “V” qualifier. Therefore, EPA

3 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g9r-final.pdf

4 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 10



### suggests that it is better to review and validate outliers during initial reporting rather than delay the certification process.



## 17.2 Data Verification Methods

Verification can be defined as confirmation, through provision of objective evidence that specified requirements have been fulfilled 5 

### . The verification requirements for each data operation are included in the organizations’ QAPP and in SOPs and should include not only the verification of sampling and analysis processes but also operations like data en try, calculations and data reporting. The data verification process involves the inspection, analysis, and acceptance of the field data or samples. These inspections can take the form of technical systems aud its (internal or external) or frequent inspections by field operators and lab technicians. Questions that might be asked during the verification process include

but are not limited to:

5 http://www.epa.gov/quality/qa_docs.html Guidance on Environmental Data Verification and Data Validation (QA/G-8)  

### Were the environmental data operations perfo rmed according to the SOPs governing those operations?

 

### Were the environmental data operations perform ed on the correct time and date originally specified? Many environmental operations must be performed within a specific time frame; for example, the NAAQS samples for some partic ulates are collected once every six days from midnight to midnight. The monitor timing mechanisms must have operated correctly for the sample to be collected within the time frame specified.

 

### Did the sampler or monitor perform correctly? Individual checks such as leak checks, flow checks, meteorological influences, and all ot her assessments, audits, and performance checks must have been acceptably performed and documented.

 

### Did the environmental sample pass an initial visual inspection? Many environmental samples can be flagged (qualified) during th e initial visual inspection.

 

### Have manual calculations, manual da ta entry, or human adjustments to software settings been

checked? Automated calculations should be verifi ed and accepted prior to use, but at some frequencies these calculations should be reviewed to ensure that they have not changed.



## 17.3 Data Validation Methods

Data validation is a routine process designed to en sure that reported values meet the quality goals of the environmental data opera tions. Data validation is furt her defined as examination and provision of objective evidence that the particular requirements for a specific intended use are fulfilled. A progressive, systematic approach to da ta validation must be used to ensure and assess the quality of data. Effective data validati on procedures usually are handled completely independently from the procedures of initial data collection.

Because the computer can perform computations an d make comparisons extremely rapidly, it can also make some determination concerning the valid ity of data values that are not necessarily high

or low. Data validation SOPs are needed to en sure the validation process is consistently followed within a monitoring organization. For example, one can evaluate the difference betweenQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 10



### successive data values, since one would not normally expect very rapid changes in concentrations of a pollutant during a 5-min or 1-h reporti ng period. When the difference between two successive values exceeds a predetermined value, the tabulation can be flagged, with an appropriate symbol.

Quality control data can support data validati on procedures (see section 17.3.3). If data assessment results clearly indicate a serious r esponse problem with the analyzer, the agency should review all pertinent quality control inform ation to determine whether any ambient data, as well as any associated assessment data, should be i nvalidated. Therefore, if ambient data are determined to be invalid, the associated precisi on, bias and accuracy readings related to the routine data should not be reported to AQS 6 

### . Section 17.3.4 provides additional guidance on how to handle QC data when routine data are inva lidated. Any data quality calculations using the invalidated readings should be redone. Also, the precision, bias or accuracy checks should be rescheduled, preferably in the same calendar quarter. The basis or justification for all data invalidations should be permanently documented.

Measurement quality objectives, based upon requ irements in CFR, QAPPs and SOPs, in combination with field and laboratory technical expe rtise, may be used to invalidate a sample or measurement. Many organizations use flags or result qualifiers to identify potential problems with data or a sample. Flags can indicate th e reason that a data value (a) did not produce a numeric result, (b) produced a numeric result but it is qualified in some respect relating to the type or validity of the result, or (c) produced a numeric result but for administrative reasons is not to be reported outside the organization. Flags can be used both in the field and in the laboratory to signify data that may be suspect due to contamin ation, special events or failure of QC limits. Flags can be used to determine if individual samples (data), or samples from a particular instrument, will be invalidated. In all cases, the sample (data) should be thoroughly reviewed by the organization and invalidated only for cause (i .e. objective evidence can be found that it does not fulfill the requirements for its intended use).

Flags may be used alone or in combination to invalidate samples. Since the possible flag combinations can be overwhelming and can not al ways be anticipated, an organization needs to review these flag combinations and determine if single values or values from a site for a particular time period will be invalidated. The organization should keep a record of the combination of flags that resulted in invalidating a sample or set of samples. These combinations can be used to ensure that the organization eval uates and invalidates data in a consistent manner

and should be documented in th e QAPP and updated as needed.

Procedures for screening data for possible errors or anomalies should also be implemented. The data quality assessment document series (EPA QA/G-9R 7 

### , EPA QA/G-9s 8 

### ) provide several statistical screening procedures for ambient air qualit y data that should be applied to identify data

outliers.

6 See QA EYE Newsletter Issue #13 Page 6 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qa/qanews13.pdf

7 Data Quality Assessment: A Reviewer’s Guide http://www.epa.gov/quality 1/qs-docs/g9r-final.pdf

8 Data Quality Assessment: Statis tical Methods for Practitioners http://www.epa.gov/quality 1/qs-docs/g9s-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 10



### NOTE: it is strongly suggested that flags, specifically the appropriate null data code flags, replace any routine values that are invalidated wh en reporting data to AQS. This provides an

indication to data users/ assessors to the reasons why data that was expected to be collected was missing. The actual data values and associat ed flags should remain in the monitoring organizations local database.



### 17.3.1 Automated Methods

When zero, span or one-point QC checks exceed acceptance limits, ambient measurements should be invalidated back to the most recent point in time where such measurements are known to be valid. Usually this point is the previous check , unless some other point in time can be identified and related to the probable cause of the excessive drift or exceedance (such as a power failure or malfunction). Also, data following an analyzer malfunction or period of non-operation should be regarded as invalid until the next subsequent acceptable check or calibration. Based on the sophistication of DAS (see Section 14) monito ring organizations may have other automated programs for data validation. These programs should be described in the monitoring organization’s approved QAPP prior to implemen tation. Even though the automated technique may be considered acceptable, the raw invalidated data should be archived based on the statute of

limitations discussed in Section 5.



### 17.3.2 Manual Methods

For manual methods, the first level of data valid ation should be to accept or reject monitoring data based upon results from operational checks selecte d to monitor the critical parameters in all three major and distinct phases of manual methods--s ampling, analysis, and data reduction. In addition to using operational checks for data valid ation, observe all limitations, acceptance limits, and warnings described in the reference and equiva lent methods per se that may invalidate data. It

is further recommended that results from nationa l performance evaluations required in 40 CFR 58, Appendix A not be used as the sole criteria for data invalidation because these checks are performed fairly infrequently, not at every site and would result in a significant invalidation of data depending on how the information was used . The performance evaluations are used to provide an assessment of data comparability and bi as at the PQAO level rather than an evaluation of a particular monitor. So although a performance evaluation result might lead to a question about the data quality of a particular monitor it is expected that other quality control data would also be used in the data validation process.



### 17.3.3 Validation Templates

In June 1998, a workgroup was formed to develop a procedure that could be used by monitoring organizations that would provide for a consistent validation of PM 2.5 

### mass concentrations across the US. The Workgroup developed three tables of criteria where each table has a different degree of implication about the quality of the data. The criteria included on the tables are from 40 CFR Part 50, Appendices L and N, 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A, Method 2.12, and a few criteria that

are neither in CFR nor Method 2.12.

One of the tables has the criteria that must be met to ensure the quality of the data. An exampleQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 10



### criterion is that the average flow rate for the samp ling period must be maintained to within 5% of 16.67 liters per minute. The second table h as the criteria that indicate that there might be a problem with the quality of the data and furthe r investigation is warranted before making a determination about the validity of the sample or samples. An example criterion is that the field filter blanks should not change weight by more than 30μg between weighings. The third table has criteria that indicate a potentially systematic problem with the environmental data collection activity. Such systematic problems may impact th e ability to make decisions with the data. An example criterion is that at least 75% of th e scheduled samples for each quarter should be successfully collected and validated.

To determine the appropriate table for each cr iterion, the members of the workgroup considered how significantly the criteria impact the resulting PM 2.5 

### mass. This was based on experience from workgroup members, experience from non-workgroup members, and feasibility of implementing the criterion.

Criteria that were deemed critical to maintaini ng the integrity of a sample or group of samples were placed on the first table. Observations th at do not meet each and every criterion on the

Critical Criteria Table should be invalidated unless there ar e compelling reason and justification for not doing so. Basically, the sample or group of samples for which one or more of these criteria are not met is invalid until proven otherw ise. The cause of not operating in the acceptable range for each of the violated criteria must be investigated and minimized to reduce the likelihood that additional samples will be invalidated.

Criteria that are important for maintaining and eval uating the quality of the data collection system are included on the second table, the Operational Criteria Table . Violation of a criterion or a number of criteria may be cause for invalidati on. The decision should consider other quality control information that may or may not indicate the data are acceptable for the parameter being controlled. Therefore, the sample or group of samples for which one or more of these criteria are not met is suspect unless other quality control in formation demonstrates otherwise. The reason for not meeting the criteria MUST be investigated, mitigated or justified.

Finally, those criteria which are important for the correct interpretation of the data but do not usually impact the validity of a sample or group of samples are included on the third table, the Systematic Criteria Table . For example, the data quality objec tives are included in this table. If the data quality objectives are not met, this does not invalidate any of the samples but it may impact the error rate associated with the attainment/non-attainment decision.

NOTE: the designation Operational or Systematic do not imply that these quality control checks need not be performed. If an operational or systematic quality control check that is required by regulation is not perfo rmed it can be a basis for invalidation of all

associated data.

Based on the success and use of the PM 2.5 

### validation template, the Workgroup embarked on the development of similar templates for the remaining criteria pollutants. Appendix D provides templates for each criteria pollutant. The valida tion templates are based on the current state of knowledge at the time of development of the Ha ndbook. However, the templates will also beQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 10



### placed as a standalone document on AMTIC 9 

### . The user is directed to AMTIC to determine if any changes have occurred to the template after the date of the Handbook revision. A table will 

### be updated with any changes occurring after the date of this Handbook

The template will evolve as new information is discovered about the impact of the various criterion on the error in the resulting concentration es timate. Interactions of the criteria, whether synergistic or antagonistic, should also be incor porated when the impact of these interactions becomes quantified. Due to the potential misuse of invalid data, data that are invalidated should not be uploaded to AQS but should be retained on the monitoring organizations local database.

This data will be invaluable to the evolution of the validation template.

NOTE: Strict adherence to the validation template s is not required. They are meant to be a guide based upon the knowledge of the Wor kgroup who developed them and may be a starting point for monitoring organization specific validation requirement.



### 17.3.4 Reporting QC Data Relative to Data Validation

The intent of the QC data that are reported to the AQS is to provide an estimate of precision and
bias of the routine data collected during a particular time period. For example the 1-point QC
check is performed minimally every two weeks fo r the gaseous pollutants and so the data from
the check represents that the mon itor was within acceptance specifications for that time period.
Upon failure of the QC checks and subsequent in validation of the data (should that occur) it is
expected that null value codes would replace the routine data and the QC check would not be
reported to AQS. Since the routine data would not be available it would not be appropriate to
provide a QC value that would be used in overall estimates of precision and bias of that site. The
estimate of precision and bias for that site shoul d represent the valid routine data being reported

for the site.

It is suggested that only those QC checks that are performed on each monitor/sampler are subject
to removal and only for the checks within the sa me time period that the routine data were
invalidated. As an example, if the Annual PE for ozone was performed in April, 2012 and the
ozone data for Dec, 2012 were invalidated, the Ap ril, 2012 PE could remain in AQS and only the
1-point QC checks for Dec. would be removed. Not all Appendix A checks fit nicely into this
paradigm. For example:

Collocated data- since they represent a PQAO and not an individual site it becomes more of a

dilemma. However if routine data from a collocated site were invalidated due to a finding based
on imprecision of the collocated data then one would not want to have these data represent the
other sites in the PQAO.

9 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 17.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 10



### NPAP and PEP data - Similar to the collocated data, this data represents the PQAO and is not
often used to invalidate data. However, there are cases where NPAP data have been used in
concert with other data quality information that led to the invalidation routine data and in that
case it would not be appropriate to report the NPAP results to AQS.

Other concerns might arise in connection with the annual PEs, or audits mentioned above.
Consistent with many agencies’ Quality Assura nce Project Plans (QAPPs), data will not be

invalidated on the basis of an audit alone. Ma ny agencies will verify, such as by independent
tests, the results of a “failed” audit. It might not be practical in all cases to verify an audit result,
immediately recalibrate the “failed” chan nel and schedule a second audit following the
recalibration. Accordingly, excluding the audit resu lt that discovered a problem in the first place
could cause the responsible agency either to incu r additional audit costs or, alternatively, be
“penalized” for appearing to fail to meet the re quired number of audits. Many agencies would be
concerned about having a less than complete aud it count appear in the AMP255 at the time of

annual data certification.

As suggested above, monitoring agencies should keep in mind the objective of reporting the
results of QA and QC checks to AQS; representing the precision and bias of the reported raw
data. The analysts who report these data should be mindful that precision and bias calculations
can apply at the monitor level or at the PQAO le vel. Often, a result that falls outside criteria

indicates an out-of-control situation that is subse quently corrected such as by invalidating data
and recalibrating. Under other circumstances, afte r-the-fact review of QC checks with poor, but
“passing,” results might reveal a trend consistent with a problem that was only discovered by

some other means.

Because of concerns such as these, it is importa nt to consider these recommendations in the

context of corrective action. It is recommended that QAPPs include wording that addresses when
to retain and when to exclude QA and QC da ta from AQS and when to conduct replacement
QA/QC checks. However, it is impossible to foresee every circumstance that might lead to a poor
QA/QC result and, in some cases, it might not be obvious whether to report or exclude a result. In
these cases decisions may fall to the responsible QA officers or managers. Discussions between
the EPA Region and monitoring organizations might also need to occur to determine the best

course of action.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 11



# 18.0 Reconciliation with Data Quality Objectives

Section 3 described the data quality objective (DQO) process, which is an important planning tool to determine the objectives of an environmental data operation, to understand and agree upon the allowable uncertainty in the data and, with that, to optimize the sampling design. This information, along with sampling and analytical methods and appropriate QA/QC, should be documented in an organization’s QAPP. The QAPP is then implemented by the monito ring organizations under the premise that if it is followed, the DQOs should be met. Reconciliation with the DQO involves reviewing both routine and QA/QC data to determine whether the DQOs have been attained and that the data are adequate for their intended use. This process of evaluating the data against the DQOs has been termed data quality assessment (DQA).

The DQA process has been developed for cases where formal DQOs have been established. These procedures can also be used for data that do not form al DQOs but some idea of the decisions that will be

made with the data are needed. Guidance on the DQA process can be found in the documents titled Data Quality Assessment: A Reviewer’s Guide (EPA QA/G-9R) 1 

### It has a companion document Data Quality Assessment: Statistical Tools for Practitioners (EPA QA/G-9S ) 2 

### that focuses on evaluating data for fitness in decision-making and also provides many graphical and statistical tools.

As stated in EPA QA/G-9R “ Data quality, as a concept, is meaningful only when it relates to the intended use of the data ”. By using the DQA Process, one can answer four fundamental questions:

1. Can the decision (or estimate) be made with the d esired level of certainty, given the quality of the

data set?

2. How well did the sampling design perform?

3. If the same sampling design strategy is used again for a similar study, would the data be expected to support the same intended use with the desired level of uncertainty?

4. Is it likely that sufficient samples were taken to enable the reviewer to see an effect if it was really present?

The DQA is a key part of the assessment phase of the da ta life cycle (Figure 18.1), which is very similar to the ambient air QA life cycle described in Section 1. As the part of the assessment phase that follows data validation and verification, DQA determines how well the validated data ca n support their intended

use.

It is realized that some monitoring organizations ma y not have the statistical support available to use the formal DQA process described below. The information below is intended to provide a good example of the steps that would be followed for a formal DQA fo r those capable and interested in the approach. EPA, through the development of the criteria pollutant DQOs and the assessments it produces through 3-year QA reports, AQS AMP reports, and annual box and whis ker plots attempts to provide information to assist monitoring organizations in their data quality assessments. In addition, there are many software packages available that can generate the statistics mentioned in the following DQA steps and there are a

number of internet sites that can be searched to info rm one how to use these sta tistics. Some additional guidance will be provided after the five step pro cess that can be used to help evaluate data.

1 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g9r-final.pdf

2 http://www.epa.gov/quality1/qs-docs/g9s-final.pdfQA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 2 of 11



## 18.1 Five Steps of the DQA Process

As described in EPA QA/G-9R 1 

### and EPA QA/G-9S 2 

### , the DQA process is comprised of five steps. The steps are detailed below. Since DQOs are available for the PM 2.5 

### program, they will be used as an example for the type of information that might be considered in each step. The PM 2.5 

### information is

italicized and comes from a model PM 2.5 

### QAPP 3 

### for a fictitious PQAO called Palookaville. The model QAPP was developed to help monitoring orga nizations develop QAPPs based upon the R-5 QAPP requirements. Most of the information that follo ws will be provided verbatim from the Model QAPP. However, notes will be added where updates, relativ e to the date of this Handbook, are needed.

The DQA discussed below is based on a 3 year assessment. The PM 2.5 

### DQOs were developed with goals for a 3 year precision estimate of 10 percent coefficient of variation and a 3 year bias estimate of + 10 percent. Some steps below may seem inefficient si nce monitoring organizations evaluate QC data on a more frequent basis than every three years. Howe ver, the example below is used relative to the achievement of the 3 year PM 2.5 

### DQO.

Figure 18.1 DQA in the cont ext of data life cycle.



### Step 1. Review DQOs and Sampling Design. Review the DQO outputs to assure that they are still applicable. If DQOs have not been developed, sp ecify DQOs before evaluating the data (e.g., for environmental decisions, define the statistical hypoth esis and specify tolerable limits on decision errors; for estimation problems, define an acceptable conf idence probability interval width). Review the

3 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmqa.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 3 of 11



### sampling design and data collection documentati on for consistency with the DQOs observing any potential discrepancies.

The PM 2.5 

### DQOs define the primary objective of the PM 2.5 

### ambient air monitoring network (PM 2.5 

### NAAQS comparison), translate the objective into a statis tical hypothesis (3-year average of annual mean PM 2.5 

### concentrations less than or equal to 15 μg/m 3 

### and 3-year average of annual 98th percentiles of the PM 2.5 

### concentrations less than or equal to 35 μg/m 3 

### ), and identify limits on the decision errors (incorrectly conclude area in non-attainment when it truly is in attainment no more than 5% of the time, and incorrectly conclude area in attainment when it trul y is in non-attainment no more than 5% of the time).

The CFR contains the details for the sampling design , including the rationale for the design, the design assumptions, and the sampling locations and frequency. If any deviations from the sampling design have occurred, these will be indicated and their potential e ffect carefully considered throughout the entire DQA.

NOTE: CFR now requires an annual air monitoring network plan 4 

### that may be helpful in the evaluation of this step.

Step 2. Conduct Preliminary Data Review. Review QA reports, calculate basic statistics, and generate graphs of data. Use this inform ation to understand the structure of the data and identify patterns, relationships, or potential anomalies.

A preliminary data review will be performed to uncov er potential limitations of using the data, to reveal outliers, and generally to explore the ba sic structure of the data. The fi rst step is to review the quality

assurance reports 5 

### . The second step is to calculate basi c summary statistics, generate graphical presentations of the data, and review these summary statistics and graphs.

Review Quality Assurance Reports . Palookaville will review all relevant quality assurance reports that describe the data collection and reporting process. Par ticular attention will be directed to looking for anomalies in recorded data, missing values, and any deviations from standard operating procedures. This is a qualitative review. However, any concerns w ill be further investigated in the next two steps.

Calculation of Summary Statistics and Generation of Graphical Presentations . Palookaville will generate prominent summary sta tistics for each of its primary and QA samplers. These summary statistics will be calculated at the quarterly, annual, and three-year levels and will include only valid samples. The summary statistics are:

Number of samples, mean concentration, median conc entration, standard deviation, coefficient of
variation, maximum concentration, minimum concentration, interquartile range, skewness and

kurtosis.

These statistics will also be calculat ed for the percent differences at the collocated sites. The results will
be summarized in a table. Particular attention will be given to the impact on the statistics caused by the observations noted in the quality assurance review. For example , Palookaville may evaluate the

4 Monitoring plans can be found on AMTI C at: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/plans.html

5 At the writing of the Handbook , the AQS system produces the AMP255 Data Quality Indicator report which is the primary report for the assessment of quality assurance data for criteria pollutants.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 4 of 11



### influence of a potential outlier by evaluating the change in the summary statistics resulting from exclusion of the outlier.

Palookaville will generate graphics to present the results from the summary statistics and show the spatial continuity over the sample areas. Maps will be created for the annual and three-year means, maxima, and interquartile ranges for a total of 6 ma ps. The maps will help uncover potential outliers and will help in the network design review. Additionally, basic histograms will be generated for each of the primary and QA samplers and for the percent difference at the collocated sites. The histograms will be useful in identifying anomalies and evaluating th e normality assumption in the measurement errors.

Step 3. Select the Statistical Test. Select the most appropriate procedure for summarizing and analyzing the data based upon the reviews of the pe rformance and acceptance crite ria associated with the DQOs, the sampling design, and the preliminary data review. Identify the key underlying assumptions that must hold for the statistical procedures to be valid.

The primary objective for the PM 2.5 

### mass monitoring is determining compliance with the PM 2.5 

### NAAQS. As a result, the null and alternative hypotheses are:

3 3 3 3

0



### / 35 / 15 : / 35 / 15 :

m g Y or m g X H m g Y and m g X H

A 

###    

   

where X is the three-year average PM 2.5 

### concentration and Y is the th ree-year average of the annual 98th percentiles of the PM 2.5 

### concentrations recorded for an individual monitor. The exact calculations for X and Y are specified in 40 CFR Part 50, Appendix N. The null hypothesis is rejected; that is, it is concluded that the area is not in compliance with the PM 2.5 

### NAAQS when the observed three-year average of the annual arithmetic me an concentration exceeds 15.05 μg/m 3 

### or when the observed three-year average of the annual 98th percentiles exceeds 35.5 μg/m 3 

### . If the bias of the sampler is ± 10% and the precision is within 10%, then the error rates (T ype I and Type II) associated with this statistical test are less than or equal to 5%. The definitions of bias and precision will be outlined in the following

step.

Step 4. Verify Assumptions of Statistical Test. Evaluate whether the underlying assumptions hold, or whether departures are acceptable, given the actua l data and other information about the study.

The assumptions behind the statistical test include those associated with the development of the DQOs in addition to the bias and precision assumptions. The me thod of verification will be addressed in this step. Note that when less than three years of data are avail able, this verification will be based on as much data

as are available.

The DQO is based on the annual arithmetic mean NAAQS

. For each primary sampler, Palookaville will determine which, if either, of the PM 2.5 

### NAAQS concentration is viol ated. In the DQO development,

it was assumed that the annual stan dard is more restrictive than the 24-hour standard. If there are any samplers that violate ONLY the 24-hour NAAQS, then this assumption is not correct. The seriousness of violating this assumption is not clear. Concept ually, the DQOs can be developed based on the 24-hour NAAQS and the more restrictive bias and precision lim its selected. However, Palookaville will assume

the annual standard is more restric tive, until proven otherwise.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 5 of 11



### Normal distribution for measurement error. Assuming that measurement errors are normally distributed is common in environmental monitoring. Palookaville has not investigated the sensitivity of the statistical test to violate this assumption; alt hough, small departures from normality generally do not create serious problems. Instead, Palookaville will evaluate the reasonableness of the normality assumption by reviewing a normal probability plot, and calculating the Shapiro-Wilk W Test statistic (if sample size less than 50) or calculating the Kolmogorov -Smirnoff Test statistic (if sample size greater than 50). All three techniques are provided by standard statistical packages. If the plot or statistics indicate possible violations of normality, Palookaville may need to determine the sensitivity of the DQOs to departures in normality.

Decision error can occur when the estimated 3-year average differs from the actual (true) 3-year average. This is not really an assumption as much as a statement that the data collected by an ambient air monitor is stochastic, meaning that there are errors in the measurement process, as mentioned in the previous assumption.

The limits on precision and bias are based on the sma llest number of required sample values in a 3-year period. In the development of the DQOs, the smallest number of required samples was used. The reason for this was to ensure that the confidence was sufficient in the minimal case; if more samples are collected, then the confidence in th e resulting decision will be even high er. For each of the samplers, Palookaville will determine how many samples were coll ected in each quarter. If this number meets or exceeds 12, then the data completen ess requirements for the DQO are met.

The decision error limits were set at 5%. If the oth er assumptions are met, th en the decision error limits are less than or equal to 5%.

Measurement imprecision was established at 10% coeffic ient of variation (CV). For each sampler, Palookaville will review the coefficient of variation calc ulated in Step 2. If any exceed 10%, Palookaville may need to determine the sens itivity of the DQOs to larger level s of measurement imprecision.

Table 18-1 will be completed during each DQA. Th e table summarizes which, if any, assumptions have been violated. A check will be placed in each of th e row/column combinations that apply. Ideally, there will be no checks. However, if th ere are checks in the table, the imp lication is that the decision error rates are unknown, even if the bias and precision limits are achieved. As mentioned above, if any of the DQO assumptions are violated, then Pal ookaville will need to reevaluate its DQOs.

Achievement of bias and precision limits. Lastly, Palookaville will ch eck the assumption that at the 3-year level of aggregation, the sampler bias is within + 10% and precision is < 10%. The data from the collocated samplers will be used to calculate quar terly, annual, and 3-year bias and precision estimates even though it is only the 3-year estimates that are critical for the statistical test.

Since all the initial samplers being de ployed by Palookaville will be FRM s, the samplers at each of the collocated sites will be identical method designations. As such, it is difficult to determine which of the collocated samplers is closer to the true PM 2.5 

### concentration. Palookaville will calculate an estimate of precision. A bias measure will also be calculated, but it can only describe the relative difference of one sampler to the other, not definitively indicate which sa mpler is closer to the “tru e” value. The following paragraphs contain the algorithms for calculatin g precision and bias. These are similar, but differ slightly, from the equations in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 6 of 11

Table 18-1 Summary of Violations of DQO Assumptions

Site Violate 24-Hour

Standard ONLY? Measurement Errors

Non-Normal? Data Complete? (  12 samples per quarter) Measurement CV

> 10%?

Primary Samplers

A1

A2

A3

A4

B1

QA Samplers

A1

B1



### Before describing the algorithm, some ground wo rk is necessary. When less than three years of collocated data are available, then the three-year bias and precision estimates must be predicted. Palookaville’s strategy for accomplishing this will be to use all available quarters of data as the basis for projecting where the bias and precision estimates will be at the end of the three-yea r monitoring period. Three-year point estimates will be computed by weig hting the quarterly components, using the most applicable of the following assumptions:

1. Most recent quarter’s precision and bias are mo st representative of what the future quarters will

be.

2. All previous quarters precision and bias are equa lly representative of what the future quarter’s

will be.

3. Something unusual happened in the most recent quar ter, so the most rep resentative quarters are all the previous ones, minus the most recent.

Each of these scenarios results in weights that will be used in the following algorithms. The weights are

shown in Table 18-2 where the vari able Q represents the number of quar ters for which observed bias and precision estimates are available. Note that when Q=12, that is, when there are bias and precision values for all of the quarters in the three-year period, then all of the following scenarios result in the same weighting scheme.

Table 18-2 Weights for Estimati ng Three-Year Bias and Precision

Scenario Assumption Weights

1 Latest quarter most representative w q = 12 -(Q- 1 ) for latest quarter,

w q = 1 otherwise

2 All quarters equall y representative w q = 12 /Q for each quarter

3 Latest quarter unrepresentative w q = 1 for latest quarter,

w q = 11/( Q -1) otherwise



### In addition to point estimates, Pal ookaville will develop confidence intervals for the bias and precision estimates. This will be accomplished using a re- sampling technique. The protocol for creating the confidence intervals are outlined in Box 18.1.QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 7 of 11



### The algorithms for determining whether the bias and precision DQOs have been achieved for each sampler follow:

Bias Algorithm

1. For each measurement pair, es timate the percent relative bias, d i



### .



#   100 2 /   



i i i

i

i 

### X Y X

Y d %

where X i 

### represents the concentration reco rded by the primary sampler and Y i 

### represents the concentration recorded by the collocated sampler.

2. Summarize the percent relative bias to the quarterly level, D j,q 

### , according to



# 

 

###  q j n

i i

q j q j 

### d

n D ,

1

, , 

### 1

where n j,q 

### is the number of collocated pairs in quarter q for site j.

3. Summarize the quarterly bias estimates to the three-year level using 

### Box 18.1 Method for Estimatin g Confidence in Achieving Bias and Precision DQOs

Let Z be the statistic of interest (bias or precision). For a given weighting scenario, the re-sampling will be implemented as follows:

1. Determine M, the number of collocated pairs per q uarter for the remaining 12-Q quarters (default is M=15 or can use M=average number observed for the previous Q quarters. 2. Randomly select with replacement M collocated pairs per quarter for each of the future 12-Q quarters in a manner consistent with the given weighting scenario. Scenario 1: Select pairs from latest quarter only. Scenario 2: Select pairs from any quarter. Scenario 3: Select pairs from any quarter except the latest one. Result from this step is “complete” collocated data for a three-year period, from which bias and precision

estimates can be determined. 3. Based on the “filled-out” three-year period from st ep 2, calculate three-year bias and precision estimate, using Equation 1 where w q = 1 for each quarter. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 numerous times, such as 1000 times. 5. Determine P, the fraction of the 1000 simulations for which the three-year bias and precision criteria are met. P is interpreted as the probability that the sa mpler is generating observations consistent with the

three- y ear bias and p recision D Q Os



### .QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 8 of 11



#  







### 

q q

n

q q n

q q j q

j



### w D w

D

1 1 ,



### ˆ Equation 18-1

where n q 

### is the number of quarters with actual collocated data and w q 

### is the weight for quarter q as specified by the scenario in Table 18-2.

4. Examine D j,q 

### to determine whether one sampler is c onsistently measuring above or below the other. To formally test this, a non-parametric test will be used (Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test), which is described in EPA QA/G-9S 2 

### . If the null hypothesis is rejec ted, then one of the samplers is consistently measuring above or below the other. This information may be helpful in directing the investigation into the cause of the bias.

Precision Algorithm

1. For each measurement pair, calcul ate the coefficient of variation, cv i 

### ,



### 2 i

i 

### d

v c 

2. Summarize the coefficient of va riation to the quarterly level, CV j,q 

### , according to

q j n

i i

q j 

### n CV

CV j

, 1 2

, 

# 

 

### 

where n j,q 

### is the number of collocated pairs in quarter q for site j.

3. Summarize the quarterly precision estim ates to the three-year level using



#  

 







### 

q q

n

q q n

q q j q

j



### w CV w

CV

1 1 2

, ^ 

### Equation 18-2

where n q 

### is the number of quarters with actual collocated data and w q 

### is the weight for quarter q as specified by the scenario in Tabl e 24-2 (reference to Model QAPP).

4. If the null hypothesis in the Wilcoxon Signed R ank Test was not rejected, then the coefficient of variation can be interpreted as a measure of p recision. If the null hypothesis in the WilcoxonQA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 9 of 11



### Ssigned Rank Test was rejected, the coefficient of variation has both a component representing precision and a component representing the (squared) bias.

Confidence in Bias and Precision Estimates

1. Follow the method described in Box 18.1 to estimate the probability that the sampler is generating observations consistent with th e three-year bias and precision DQOs. The re-sampling must be done for each collocated site.

Summary of Bias and Precision Estimation

The results from the calculations and re-sampling will be summarized in Table 18-3. There will be one line for each site operatin g a collocated sampler.

Table 18-3 Summary of Bias and Precision

Collocated Three-year Bias Estimate (Equation. 1) Three-year Precision Estimate (Equation. 2) Null Hypothesis of Wilcoxon Test Rejected? P (Box 18-1)

A1

B1



### Step 5. Draw Conclusions from the Data. Perform the calculations required for the statistical test and

document the inferences drawn as a result of these calculati ons. If the design is to be used again, evaluate the performance of the sampling design.

Before determining whether the monitored data indicate compliance with the PM 2.5 

### NAAQS, Palookaville must first determine if any of the assumptions upon whic h the statistical test is based are violated. This can be easily checked in Step 5 because of all th e work done in Step 4. In particular, as long as

 in Table 18-1, there are no checks, and

 in Table 18-3,

o the three year bias estimate is in the interval [-10%,10%], and

o the three year precision estimate is less than or equal to 10%

then the assumptions underlying the test appear to be valid. As a result, if the observed three-year average PM 2.5 

### concentration is less than 15 μg/m 3 

### and the observed three-year average 98th percentile is less than 35 μg/m 3 

### , the conclusion is that the area seem s to be in compliance with the PM 2.5 

### NAAQS, with an error rate of 5%.

If any of the assumptions have been violated, then the level of confid ence associated with the test is suspect and will have to be further investigated.

What if the DQOs Are Not Met?

DQOs provide a goal on which to build a quality syst em. As the DQO process is developed, the EPA identifies what are expected to be reasonable and achievable measurement quality objectives that if met it can be assumed that the DQOs will be achieved. The DQA process is implemented to confirm the achievement of the DQOs. However, achieving th e DQOs does not equate to one hundred percent certainty that every NAAQS decision (attainment, non-atta inment) will be a correct decision. Even when a DQO is achieved, the chances of making an incorrect decision increase as the data (e.g., design value)QA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 10 of 11



### get closer to the action limit (NAAQS). Similarly, if the DQOs are not met it does not mean that the pollutant data cannot be used for NAAQS decisions; it means that the decision makers will have less confidence that they will make the correct decision, especially around the action limit. Based on this understanding of uncertainty EPA listed the DQOs as goals in CFR. Data quality indicator reports demonstrate that these goals are being met for the majo rity of the monitoring organizations so they are considered achievable. However if DQOs are de veloped and through assessments EPA finds that the goals cannot be met then either the DQOs must be revised or new technologies (sampling or analytical methods) must be developed to achieve the DQO.



### DQA Tools

Over the years EPA has developed DQOs for each cr iteria pollutant as the criteria pollutant moved through the NAAQS review process. In addition, monitoring organizations collect enough types of QA/QC data to estimate the quality of their data a nd should be able to express the confidence in that information. The following reports and tools can help monitoring organization assess the quality of their

information.

AMP255 Report –

At a minimum the quality control information described in 40 CFR Part 58 Appe ndix A that is submitted to AQS can be used to perform assessments of measurement uncertain ty. The AMP255 report is the most important QA report in AQS for the criteria pollutants. It provides an assessment of each quality control sample based on the statistical criteria set fort h in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A. It aggregates data by PQAO and depending on the begin da ta and end date of the selected report, it will summarize data by year as well as 3-year intervals. It will assess quality control data completeness as well as precision and bias (depending on the type of quality control sample). A user ID is required to access AQS and data is required to be loaded in AQS in order to run report s. This can be problematic based on the lag time of information that is reported to AQS.

Data Assessment Statistical Calculator (DASC) Tool –

In order to provide monitoring organizations access to CFR statistics prior to submission to AQS, EPA developed the DASC Tool. This tool, developed in Microsoft Excel, provides for local entry of QC data and uses the same statistics provided in 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A. The software and a guidance document

for its use can be found on AMTIC 6

6 Data Assessment Statistical Calculator http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/qareport.htmlQA Handbook Vol II, Section 18.0

Revision No: 0

Date: 5/13 Page 11 of 11



### Annual Box and Whisker Plots

The AMP255 and DAC tools are very useful but EPA was also looking for more graphical ways to display precision and bias data in order to assist mon itoring organizations identify monitoring site in need of corrective action. Each year, after the May certif ication, AQS develops the Annual Box and Whisker Plots for the criteria gaseous pollutant data certifie d in May. Therefore, the report will be for the previous year. Figure 18.3 provides an example of the report. The plots are created using the 1-point QC checks for the gaseous pollutants or each site within the PQAO and include the same precision and bias information that is generated AMP255 and well as the number of observations used in the assessment (yellow band of data in Fig. 18.3). In addition, the graphical display can identify sites that are biased or are variable. In the example below, all sites dem onstrate acceptable precision with 2 sites showing an acceptable but positive bias one site show no positive or negative bias (no sign) and one site shows an acceptable negative bias. Information on how to asse ss the box and whisker information, as well as the annual reports, are found on AMTIC 7 

### . At present, the report has not been automated so it is run by EPA once a year. In the future, EPA hopes to automate the report for use at any time.

Figure 18.3 Example Box and Whisker Plots

7 Criteria Pollutant Quality Indicator Summary Report for AQS Data http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qareport.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 11



# Appendix A

National Air Quality Monitoring Program Fact Sheets

The following information provides a fact sh eet on a number of national ambient air monitoring networks including:

 

### State or Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS) Network

 

### National Core (NCore) Network

 

### Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS)

 

### PM 2.5 

### Chemical Speciation Network (CSN)

 

### National Toxics Trends Network (NATTS)

 

### Interagency Monitoring of Protecte d Visual Environments (IMPROVE)

 

### Clean Air Status and Tre nds Network (CASTNET)

 

### National Atmospheric De position Network (NADP)

 

### National Air Toxics Assessment (NATA)

Only the SLAMS, NCore, PAMS, CSN an d NATTS pertain to the information

covered in the Handbook. The other networ ks described are for the benefit of the

reader.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 2 of 11



### Page intentionally left blankQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 3 of 11



## State or Local Air Monitori ng Stations (SLAMS) Network

Background

The SLAMS make up the ambient air quality monitoring sites that are operated by State or local agencies for the primary purpose of comparison to the Natio nal Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), but may serve other purposes such as:

 provide air pollution data to the general public in a timely manner;

 support compliance with air quality standards and emissions strategy development; and

 support air pollution research studies.

The SLAMS network includes stations classified as NCore, PAMS, and Speciation, and formerly categorized as NAMS, and does not in clude Special Purpose Monitors (SPM) and other monitors used for non-regulatory or industrial monitoring purposes.

In order to support the objectives, the monitoring networ ks are designed with a variety of monitoring sites that generally fall into the following categories which are used to determine:

1. the highest concentrations expected to occu r in the area covered by the network;

2. typical concentrations in areas of high population density;

3. the impact on ambient pollution levels of significant sources or source categories;

4. the general background concentration levels;

5. the extent of regional pollutant transport among populated areas, and in support of secondary standards; and

6. air pollution impacts on visibility, vegetation damage, or other welfare- based impacts.

The monitoring aspects of the SLAM S program are found in the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Parts 50, 53 and 58

.

SLAMS must use approved Federal reference method (F RM), Federal equivalent method (FEM), or Approved Regional Method (ARM) monitors for ambient po llutant levels being compared to the NAAQS.

Reference Category References Comments Program References 40 CFR Part 50, 53 and 58 http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/

Pollutants Measured O 3 , CO, SO 2 , NO 2 PM 2.5 , PM 10 , Pb

Methods References 40 CFR Part 50 and 58 Appendix C http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/criteria.html Must be FRM, FEM, or ARM for NAAQS comparisons.

Website lists de signated methods Network Design References 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix D, E Siting Criteria 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix E Quality System References 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/quality.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn /amtic/met.html Website for QA Handbook Vol II Eebsite for QA Handbook Vol IV Data Management

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/airs/airsaqs/ Air Quality SystemQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 4 of 11



## National Core (NCore) Network

Background

NCore is a multi pollutant network that integrates several advanced measurement systems for particles, pollutant gases and meteorology. Most NCore stations have been operating since the formal start of the network on January 1, 2011. The NCore Network addresses the following objectives:

 Timely reporting of data to public by supportin g AIRNow, air quality forecas ting, and other public reporting mechanisms;

 Support for development of emission strategies through air quality model evaluation and other observational methods;

 Accountability of emission strategy progress thro ugh tracking long-term trends of criteria and non-criteria pollutants and their precursors;

 Support for long-term health assessments that contribute to ongoing reviews of the NAAQS;

 Compliance through establishing nonattainment/atta inment areas through comparison with the NAAQS;

 Support to scientific studies ranging across technological, health, an d atmospheric process disciplines; and

 Support to ecosystem assessments recognizing that national air quality networks benefit ecosystem assessments and, in turn, benefit from data speci fically designed to address ecosystem analyses.

The objective is to locate sites in broadly representativ e urban (about 55 sites) and rural (about 20 sites) locations throughout the country to help characterize regional and urban patterns of air pollution.

In many cases, states will collocate these new stations with STN sites measuring speciated PM 2.5 components, PAMS sites already measuring O 3 precursors, and/or NATTS sites measuring air toxics. Bycombining these monitoring programs at a single location, EPA and its partners will maximize the multipollutant information available. This greatly enha nces the foundation for future health studies, NAAQS revisions, validation of air quality models, assessm ent of emission reduction programs, and studies of ecosystem impacts of air pollution.

Reference Category References Comments Program References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/monitor.html

Pollutants Measured SO 2 , CO, NO and NO y , and O 3 , PM 2.5 , PM 10-2.5 , basic meteorological parameters

Methods References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/precur.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/ncore/guidance.html

Network Design

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/monstratdoc.html

Siting Criteria http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/ncore/networks.html

Quality System References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/ncore/guidance.html

Data Management

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/ncore/guidance.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 5 of 11



## Photochemical Assessment Mo nitoring Stations (PAMS)

Background

Section 182(c)(1) of the 1990 Clean Air Act Ame ndments (CAAA) require the Administrator to promulgate rules for the enhanced monitoring of ozone, oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and volatile organic compounds (VOC) to obtain more comprehensive an d representative data on ozone air pollution. Immediately following the promulgation of such rules, the affected states were to commence such actions as were necessary to adopt and implement a progra m to improve ambient mon itoring activities and the monitoring of emissions of NOx and VOC. Each Stat e Implementation Plan (SIP) for the affected areas must contain measures to implement the ambient monitoring of such air pollutants. The subsequent revisions to Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 58 (40 CFR 58) required states to establish Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS) as part of their SIP monitoring networks in ozone

nonattainment areas classified as serious, severe, or extreme.

The chief objective of the enhanced ozone monitoring revisions is to provide an air quality database that will assist air pollution control agencies in evaluating, tracking the progress of, and, if necessary, refining control strategies for attaining the ozone NAAQS. Am bient concentrations of ozone and ozone precursors

will be used to make attainment/nonattainment deci sions, aid in tracking VOC and NOx emission inventory reductions, better characterize the nature and extent of the ozone problem, and prepare air quality trends. In addition, data from the PAMS w ill provide an improved database for evaluating photochemical model performance, especially for future control strategy mid-course corrections as part of the continuing air quality management process. The data will be particular ly useful to states in ensuring the implementation of the most cost-effective regulatory controls.

Reference Category References Comments Program References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsrein.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/pamsmain.html

Pollutants Measured Ozone, Nitrogen Oxides , VOCs, surface meteorological http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/pamsguidance.html

Methods References

Network Design References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/pamssites.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/pamsguidance.html Siting Criteria http://www.epa.gov/ttn/am tic/pamsguidance.html

Quality System References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsdata.html

Data Management

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsdata.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 6 of 11



## PM 2.5 

## Chemical Speciation Network

Background

As part of the PM 2.5 National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) review comp leted in 1997, EPA

established a PM 2.5 Chemical Speciation Network (CSN) consis ting of Speciation Trends Network (STN) sites and supplemental speciation sites. The CSN is a component of the National PM 2.5 Monitoring Network. Although the CSN is intended to complement the activities of the much larger gravimetric PM 2.5 measurements network component (whose goal is to establish if the NAAQS are being attained), CSN data is not used for attainment or nonattainment decisions. CSN data is used for multiple objectives, which

include:

 The assessment of trends;

 The development of effective State Implementati on Plans (SIPs) and determination of regulatory compliance;

 The development of emission control strategies and tracking progress of control programs;

 Aiding in the interpretation of health studies by linking effects to PM 2.5 constituents;

 Characterizing annual and seasonal spatial variation of aerosols;

 Comparison to chemical speciation data collected from the IMPROVE network.

As of 2012, the PM 2.5 Chemical Speciation Network includes ab out 50 STN sites and about 150 State and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS) supplemental sites. All STN sites oper ate on a one-in-three day sample collection schedule. The majority of the SL AMS supplemental sites operate on a one-in-six day sample collection schedule. CSN sites collect aerosol samp les over 24 hours on filters that are analyzed for

PM 2.5 mass, a number of trace elements, major ions (sulfate, nitrate, ammonium, sodium and potassium), and organic and elemental carbon.

CSN data users include those at EPA seeking to determine concentration trends of PM 2.5 chemical species over a period of 3 or more years and decision-makers at tribal, state and local levels who use the data as input to models and for development of emission control strategies and determination of their long-term effectiveness. Other users include public hea lth officials and epidemiological researchers.

Reference Category References Comments Program References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/speciepg.html

Pollutants Measured Mass, trace elements, ions, and organic and element carbon

Methods References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specsop.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/spectraining.html

Network Design

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/specgen.html

Siting Criteria http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/specgen.html

Quality System

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specguid.html

Data Management

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/specdat.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/airs/airsaqs/ detaildata/downloadaqsdata.htm http://www.epa.gov/airdata/QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 7 of 11



## National Toxics Trends Network (NATTS)

Background

The National Air Toxics Trends Sta tion (NATTS) Network was developed to fulfill the need for long-term HAP monitoring data of consistent quality. Among th e principle objectives are assessing trends and emission reduction program effectiveness, assessing and verifying air quality models (e.g., exposure assessments, emission control strategy development, etc.), and as direct input to source-receptor models. The current network configuration includes 27 sites (2 0 urban, 7 rural) across the United States; thirteen

sites were established in 2003, ten sites in 2004, and two sites each in 2007 and 2008. There are typically over 100 pollutants monitored at each NATTS (though only 19 of those are required; included are VOCs, carbonyls, PM10 metals, hexavalent chromium, and PAHs. Specifically, it is anticipated that the NATTS

data will be used for:

 tracking trends in ambient levels to facilitate tr acking progress toward emis sion and risk reduction goals, which is the major objective of this program;

 directly evaluating public exposure & environmental impacts in the vicinity of monitors;

 providing quality assured data AT for risk characterization;

 assessing the effectiveness of specific emission reduction activities; and

 evaluating and subsequently improving air toxics emission inventories and model performance.

Currently the NATTS program is made up of 27 monitoring sites; representing urban (20) communities and rural (7) communities.

Reference Category References Comments

Program

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn /amtic/natts.html

Pollutants

Measured 33 HAPS which include metals, VOCs and carbonyls http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files /ambient/airtox/nattsworkplante mplate.pdf

Methods

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn /amtic/airtox.html http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files /ambient/airtox/nattsworkplante mplate.pdf

Network Design

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/airtoxqa.html

, National Air Toxics Trends Stations – Quality Management Plan –final

09/09/05

Siting Criteria 40 CFR part 58 Appendix E, PAMS Probe and Path Siting Criteria Quality System

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/a mtic/airtoxqa.html

Data Management

References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/toxdat.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 8 of 11



## Interagency Monitoring of Protected Visual Environments (IMPROVE)

Background

The Interagency Monitoring of Protected Visual Environments (IMPROVE) program is a cooperative measurement effort governed by a steering committ ee composed of representatives from federal and regional-state organizations. The IMPROVE monitoring program was established in 1985 to aid the creation of Federal and State Implementation Plans fo r the protection of visibility in Class I areas ( 156 national parks and wilderness areas ) as stipulated in the 1977 amendments to the Clean Air Act

. The objectives of IMPROVE are:

1. to establish current visibility and aerosol conditions in mandatory class I areas;

2. to identify chemical species and emission sources responsible for existing man-made visibility impairment;

3. to document long-term trends for assessing progress towards the national visibility goal;

4. and with the enactment of the Regional Haze Rule , to provided regional haze monitoring representing all visibility-protected federal class I areas where practical.

IMPROVE has also been a key participant in visib ility-related research, including the advancement of monitoring instrumentation, analysis techniques, visibility modeling, policy formulation and source

attribution field studies. In addition to 110 IM PROVE sites at visibility-p rotected areas, IMPROVE Protocol sites are operated identically at locations to serve the needs of state, tribes and federal agencies.

Reference Category References Comments

Program

References http://vista.cira.colostate.edu/improve/ http://vista.cira.colostate.edu/improve/Overview/IMPROVEP rogram_files/frame.htm

Pollutants

Measured PM 10 & PM 2.5 mass concentration, and PM 2.5 elements heavier than sodium, anions, organic and elemental carbon concentrations. Optical & met. parameters at select sites All sites have aerosol speciation monitoring by one day in three 24-hour duration sampling

Methods

References http://vista.cira.colostate.ed u/improve/Publications/IMPROV E_SOPs.htm Network Design

References http://vista.cira.colostate.ed u/improve/Publications/IMPROV E_SOPs.htm Siting Criteria http://vista.cira.colostate.ed u/improve/Publications/IMPROV
E_SOPs.htm

Quality System

References http://vista.cira.colostate.edu/improve/Data/QA_QC/qa_qc_B

ranch.htm

Data Management

References http://vista.cira.colostate.edu/improve/Data/data.htmQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 9 of 11



## Clean Air Status and Tre nds Network (CASTNET)

Background

The Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET ) is a national air quality monitoring network designed to provide data to assess trends in air qu ality, atmospheric deposition, and ecological effects due to changes in air pollutant emissions. CASTNET began collecting measurements in 1991 with the incorporation of 50 sites from the National Dry Depo sition Network, which had been in operation since 1987. CASTNET provides long-term monitoring of air qua lity in rural areas to determine trends in regional atmospheric nitrogen, sulfur, and ozone concentrations and deposition fluxes of sulfur and nitrogen pollutants in order to evaluate the effectiveness of national and regional air pollution control programs. CASTNET operates more than 80 regional sites throughout the contiguous United States, Alaska, and

Canada. Sites are located in areas where urban influences are minimal. Ozone measurements became CFR 40 Part 58, Appendix A compliant in 2011. Meteorological measurements are made at approximately 30 sites, and are available for all sites prior 2010. Modeled dry deposition velocities are also provided.

The main objectives of the network are to:

1) track the effectiveness of national and re gional scale emission control programs; 2) report high quality, publicly available data on the temporal and geographic patterns of air quality and atmospheric deposition trends; and 3) provide the necessary information for understanding the environmental effects in sensitive terrestrial and aquatic receptor areas associat ed with atmospheric loadings of pollutants.

Reference Category References Comments

Program

References CASTNET Main Webpage http://www.epa.gov/castnet/ CASTNET Annual Report http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do

Pollutants

Measured sulfate, nitrate, ammonium, sulfur dioxide , nitric acid, base cations, ozone

CASTNET Factsheet http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do

Methods

References CASTNET Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP) Main Body http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do

Network Design

References CASTNET QAPP Main Body http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do

Siting

Criteria CASTNET QAPP Main Body http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do Quality System

References CASTNET QAPP Main Body http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.do

Data Management

References CASTNET QAPP Appendix 6: CASTNET Data Operations Standard Operating

Procedures http://java.epa.gov/castnet/documents.doQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 10 of 11



## National Atmospheric Deposition Network (NADP)

Background

The National Atmospheric Deposition Program (NADP) provides quality-assure d data and information in support of research on the exposure of managed and natural ecosystems and cultural reso urces to acidic compounds, nutrients, base cations, and mercury in precipit ation. The NADP also provides data on ambient con centrations of speciated mercury and gaseous ammoni a. NADP data serve science and edu cation and support informed decisions on air quality issues related to preci pitation and atmospheric chemistry.

The NADP operates three preci pitation chemistry ne tworks: the 250-station Nationa l Trends Network (NTN), 7- station Atmospheric Integrated Research Monitori ng Network (AIRMoN), and 100-station Mercury Deposition Network (MDN) and two ambient mon itoring networks: the 20-station At mospheric Mercury Network (AMNet) and the 50-station Ammonia Monitoring Network. The NTN provides the only long-term nationwide record of the wet deposition of acids, nutrients, an d base cations. NTN stations collect one-week precipitation samples in 48 states, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, and Quebec Province, Canada. Complementing the NTN is the 7-station AIRMoN. The daily precipit ation samples collected at AIRMoN st ations support continued research of atmospheric transport and removal of air pollutants a nd the development of computer simulations of these processes. The 100-station MDN offers the only regional measurements of mercury (Hg) in North American precipitation. MDN data are used to quantify Hg depos ition to water bodies that have fish and wildlife consumption advisories due to this toxic chemical. The AMNet compliments the MDN by measuring speciated hourly samples of ambient Hg at 25 monitoring sta tions. AMNet measur ements are made using a Tekran instrument which analyzes ambient samples for elemental, gaseous a nd particulate bound Hg fractions. The AMoN is the only national monitoring network measuring am bient ammonia (NH 3 ) concentrations. Bi-weekly

measurements of NH 3 compliment the NTN and CASTNET networks by filling a gap in the total nitrogen budget. Work continues on developing rou tine model estimates for Hg and NH 3 bi-directional dry deposition velocities.

In addition to these long-term monitoring networks, the NADP is respons ive to emerging issues requiring new or expanded measurements. Its measurement system is efficient, its data meet pre-defined data quality objectives, and its reports and products are designed to meet user needs.

Reference Category References Comments

Program

References NADP http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/

NTN http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/NTN/

AIRMoN http://nadp.isws.il linois.edu/AIRMoN/

MDN http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/MDN/

AMNet http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/amn/

AMoN http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/AMoN/

Pollutants

Measured In precipitation: sulfate, nitr ate, chloride, ammonium, calcium, magnesium, sodium, potassium, pH, mercury Ambient concentrations: speciated mercury, ammonia

Methods

References http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/lib/manuals/opman.pdf http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/lib/manuals/mdnopman.pdf http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/amn/ docs/AMNet_Operations_Manual.pdf

Network Design

References http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/lib/manuals /NADP_Site_Selection_ and_Installation _Manual.pdf

Siting

Criteria http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/lib/manuals /NADP_Site_Selection_ and_Installation _Manual.pdf Quality System

References http://nadp.isws.illinoi s.edu/lib/qaPlans.aspx http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/lib/qaReports.aspx

Data Management

References http://nadp.isws.illinois. edu/lib/qaplans/NADP_Network_Quality_Assurance_Pl an.pdf http://nadp.isws.illinois.edu/amn/doc s/AMNet_Data_Management_Manual.pdfQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix A

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 11 of 11



## National Air Toxics Assessment (NATA)

Background

NATA is a national-scale assessment of 33 air pollutants (a subset of 32 air toxics on th e Clean Air Act's list of 188, plus diesel particulate matter ). The assessment considers the year 1996 (an up date to 1999 is in preparation), including:

 compilation of a national emissions inventory of air toxics emissions from outdoor sources;

 estimates of ambient conc entrations across the con tiguous United States;

 estimates of population exposures; and

 characterizations of potential pub lic health risks including both ca ncer and non-cancer effects.

NATA identifies those air toxics which are of greatest poten tial concern, in terms of c ontribution to population risk.

This information is relevant and useful in assessing risk for tribal programs.

Reference Category References Comments Program References http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw/nata/index.html

Pollutants Measured http://www.epa.gov/ttn/atw/nata/34poll.html 33 air pollutants (see link)

Methods References Network Design References Siting Criteria Quality System References Data Management

ReferencesQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix B

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 4



# Appendix B

Ambient Air Monitoring Qualit y Assurance Information and

Web Addresses

The following information provides key gu idance documents and reports that can

be found on various sites within the Am bient Monitoring Technical Information Center (AMTIC) Website. The following identifiers are used to describe national ambient air monitoring programs

SLAMS- State or Local Air Mo nitoring Stations Network

NCore- National Core Network

PAMS - Photochemical Assess ment Monitoring Stations

CSN PM 2.5 

### Chemical Speciation Network

NATTS- National Toxics Trends Network

SLAMS-NPAP- National Pe rformance Audit Program

SLAMS-PEP- National PM2.5 Perf ormance Evaluation ProgramQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix B

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 2 of 4



### Page intentionally left blankAmbient Air Quality Assurance InformationIdentifier TitleEPA Number Pub Date Year URLCSN Particulate Matter (PM2.5) Speciation Guidance Document1999http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/spec/specfinl.pdfNATTS NATTS Technical Assistance Document (TAD)2009http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/airtox/nattsTADRevision2_508Compliant.pdfNCore NCore Technical Assistance Document (TAD)2005http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/monitorstrat/precursor/tadversion4.pdfNCore QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume IVMeteorlogical Measurment SystemsEPA-454/B-08-002 2008http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/met/Volume%20IV_Meteorological_Measurements.pdfPAMS Technical Assistance Document (TAD) for Sampling and Analysisof Ozone Precursors;EPA/600-R-98/161 1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pams/newtad.pdfSLAMS QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems Volume IIAmbient Air Quality Monitoring ProgramEPA-454/B-13-003 2013http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.htmlSLAMS Guideline on the Meaning and the Use of Precision and Bias DataRequired by 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix AEPA-454/B-07-001 2007http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/P&B%20Guidance%2010.10.07%20vers1.1.pdfSLAMS Transfer Standards for the Calibration of Air Monitoring Analyzersfor OzoneEPA-454/B-10-001 2010http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/OzoneTransferStandardGuidance.pdfSLAMS PM2.5 PM2.5Quality Assurance Program Overview1997http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/pm25qa.pdfCSN PM 2.5 Speciation Lab Audit Reports and AssessmentsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmspec.htmlNATTS National Air Toxics Trends Stations Quality Assurance AnnualReports and Proficiency ReportsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtoxqa.htmlSLAMS Annual Precision, Bias and Completeness Reports for CriteriaPollutantsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/parslist.htmlPAMS PAMS Data Analysis and ReportsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pamsdata.htmlSLAMS-PM2.5 3-Year and Annual QA ReportsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/anlqa.htmlSLAMS AA-PGVP Annual ReportsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/aapgvp.htmlSLAMS-PEP Laboratory Comparison Study of Gravimetric Laboratories Various Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pmpep.htmlMethodsCSN Speciation Field Guidance DocumentsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specguid.htmlNATTS Air Toxics Methods- Various Methods2007http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/airtox.htmlNCore NCore Training VideosVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.htmlSLAMS QA Handbook Vol II (DRAFT Procedure for the "Determination ofOzone By Ultraviolet Analysis")1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/ozone4.pdfSLAMS Sec. 2.10 of QA Handbook - Draft - PM10- Dichot revised to localstandard and pressureEPA-600/4-77-027a 1997http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/2-10meth.pdfSLAMS Sec. 2.11 of QA Handbook - Draft - PM10 Hi Vol revised to localstandard and pressure1997http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/2-11meth.pdfSLAMS Section 2.3 -- DRAFT - Reference Method for the Determination ofNitrogen Dioxide in the Atmosphere (Chemiluminescence)2002http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/no2.pdfSLAMS-NPAP DRAFT SOP for Through-the-Probe Performance Evaluations ofAmbient Air Quality Monitoring of Criteria Air Pollutants2007http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/npapsop.htmlSLAMS-PEP Method Compendium "Field Standard Operating Procedures forthe PM2.5Performance Evaluation Program"2009http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/PEP_Field_SOP.pdfGUIDANCE DOCUMENTSQA REPORTS3Ambient Air Quality Assurance InformationIdentifier TitleEPA Number Pub Date Year URLSLAMS-PEP Method Compendium "PM2.5Mass Weighing Laboratory StandardOperating Procedures for the Performance Evaluation Program1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/peplsop.pdfSLAMS-PM2.5 2.12 "Monitoring PM2.5in Ambient Air Using Designated Referenceor Class I Equivalent Methods"1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/m212covd.pdfSLAM-Pb Approved Equivalent MethodsVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pb-monitoring.htmlSLAM-Pb RTI Procedure for the development of Pb Analysis Audits (TSP)2010http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pb/rtipbauditstrip2010.pdfSLAM-Pb RTI Procedure for the development of Pb Analysis Audits (Teflonfor ICP-MS)2012http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pb/rtipbauditsopteflon.pdfSLAMS-Pb MO Procedure for the development of Pb Analysis Audits (TSP)2009http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pb/MOAuditStripMethod.pdfCSN Speciation Laboratory Standard Operating ProceduresVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specsop.htmlCSN Quality Chemical Speciation Network QAPP for NCore andSupplemental SitesEPA-454/B-12-003 2012http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/spec/CSN_QAPP_v120_05-2012.pdfCSN Quality Management Plan for the PM2.5Speciation Trends NetworkEPA-454/R-01-009 2001http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/spec/finlqmp.pdfNATTS Model Quality Assurance Project Plan for the National Air ToxicsTrends Stations - updated version 1.12007http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/airtox/NATTS_Model_QAPP.pdfNATTS Model QAPP for Local-Scale Monitoring Projects"EPA-454/R-01-007 2006http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/airtox/pilotqapp.pdfNATTS National Air Toxics Trends Stations - Quality Management PlanFinal2005http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/airtox/nattsqmp.pdfPAMS PAMS Implementation ManualEPA-454/B-93-051 1994http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pams/b93-051a.pdfSLAMS Quality Assurance Project Plan for the Audit Support Program -NPAP and NATTS2008http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/NPAPQAPPrvsn071007onforTTP.pdfSLAMS PM2.5 PM2.5Model QA Project Plan (QAPP)"EPA-454/R-98-005 1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/totdoc.pdfSLAMS PM2.5 PM2.5 FRM Network Federal Performance Evaluation ProgramQuality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP)2007http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/pepqapp_DRAFT_12-2007_cmt_vrsn.pdfSLAMS PM2.5 PM2.5Performance Evaluation Program Implementaion Plan1998http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/qa/pep-ip.pdfAA-PGVP Ambient Air Protocal Gas Verification Program QAPP2010http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/pgvp-qappmarch2010v2.pdfAA-PGVP Ambient Air Protocal Gas Verification Program ImplementationPlan2010http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/qaqc/aapgvpimpplan.pdfCSN Current List of CSN Sites as of 07-11-20072013http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/specgen.htmlCSN Modification of Carbon Procedures in the Speciation Network;Overview and Frequently Asked Questions2006http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/pm25/spec/faqcarbon.pdfSLAMS Training and ConferencesVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/training.htmlSLAMS QA NewslettersVarious Yearshttp://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qanews.htmlIMPLEMENTATION PLANS and QAPPsWHITE PAPERS/IMPORTANT MEMOS4QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 7



# Appendix C

Using the Graded Approach for the Development of QMPs and QAPPs in Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Programs

NOTE: As of the date of th is Handbook publication the EPA Qu ality Staff is revising some of the requirements for QAPPs and QMPs. Pl ease visit the Quality Staffs website for updates on these documents (http://www.epa.gov/quality1/)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 1

Date:12/08 Page 2 of 7



### This page intentionally left blankQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 3 of 7



### Using the Graded Approach for the Developm ent of QMPs and QAPPs in Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Programs

EPA policy requires that all organizations f unded by EPA for environmental data operations (EDOs) develop quality management plans (Q MPs) and quality assurance project plans (QAPPs). In addition, EPA has provided flexibility to EPA organizations on how they implement this policy, allowing for use of a graded approa ch. The following proposal explains the graded approach for data collection activities related to ambient air monitoring. OAQPS proposes a graded approach for the development of QAPPs and QMPs.

The Graded Approach

The QMP describes the quality system in terms of the organizational structure, functional responsibilities of management and staff, lines of authority, and requi red interfaces for those planning, implementing, and assess ing activities involving EDOs. Each program should provide appropriate documentation of thei r quality system. Here are a few ways that this could be

handled.

Concept - Small organizations may have limited ability to develop and implement a quality system. EPA should provide options for those who are capable of making progress towards developing a quality system. If it is clear that the EDO goals are underst ood and that progress in quality system development is being made, a non-optimal quality system structure, for the interim, is acceptable. The concept is to work with the small organization to view the QMP as a long-term strategic plan with an open ended appr oach to quality system development that will involve continuous improvement. The graded appr oach to QMP development is described below and is based on the size of the organization and experience in working with EPA and the associated QA requirements.

1. Small organization that just received its fi rst EPA grant or using a grant for a discrete, small, project-level EDO. Such organizati ons could incorporate a description of its quality system into its QAPP. 2. Small organization implementing EDOs with EPA at more frequent intervals or implementing long-term monitoring programs w ith EPA funds. If such an organization demonstrates capability of de veloping and implementing a stand-alone quality system, it is suggested that an appropria te separate QMP be written. 3. Medium or large organization. Develop QMP to describe its quality system and QAPPs for specific EDOs. Approval of the recipient's QMP by the EPA Project Officer and the EPA Quality Assurance Manager may allow delegation of the authority to review and approve Quality Assurance Project Plans (QAPPs) to the grant recipient based on acceptable procedures documented in the QMP.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 1

Date:12/08 Page 4 of 7



### Quality Assurance Project Plans

The QAPP is a formal document describing, in comprehensive detail, the necessary QA/QC and

other technical activities that must be implemented to ensure that the results of work performed will satisfy the stated performance criteria, which may be in the form of a data quality objective (DQO). The quality assurance policy of the EPA requires every EDO to have written and approved quality assurance project plans (QAPPs) prior to the start of the EDO. It is the responsibility of the EPA Project Officer (perso n responsible for the technical work on the project) to adhere to this polic y. If the Project Officer gives permission to proceed without an approved QAPP, he/she assumes all responsibility. If a grantee’s QMP is approved by EPA and provides for delegation of QAPP ap proval to the grantee, the gran tee is responsible to ensuring approval of the QAPP prior to the start of the EDO.

The Ambient Air Monitoring Program recommends a four-tiered project category approach to the Ambient Air QA Program in order to effec tively focus QA. Categor y I involves the most stringent QA approach, utilizing all QAPP elements as described in EPA R5 a 

### (see Table 2), whereas category IV is the least stringent, utilizing fewer elemen ts. In addition, the amount of detail or specificity required for each element will be less as one moves from category I to IV. Table 1 provides information that helps to de fine the categories of QAPPs based upon the data collection objective. Each type of ambient ai r monitoring program EDO will be associated with one of these categories. The comment area of the table will identify whether QMPs and QAPPs can be combined and the type of data quality objectives (DQOs) required (see below). Table 2 identifies which of the 24 QAPP elements are required for each category of QAPP. Based upon a specific project, the QAPP approving authority may add/delete elements for a particular category as it relates to the project but in general, this table will be applicable based on the category of QAPP.

Flexibility on the systematic pla nning process and DQO development

Table 1 describes 4 QAPP/QMP categories which require some type of statement about the program or project objectives. Three of the cat egories use the term da ta quality objectives (DQOs), but there should be flexibility with the systematic planning process on how these DQOs are developed based on the particular category. Fo r example, a category 1 project would have formal DQOs. Examples of cate gory I projects, such as the Stat e and Local Monitoring Stations (SLAMS), have DQOs developed by OAQPS. Category II QAPPS may have formal DQOs developed if there are national im plications to the data (i.e., Sp eciation Trends Network) or less formal DQOs if developed by orga nizations implementing important projects that are more local in scope. Categories 3 and 4 woul d require less formal DQOs to a point that only project goals (category 4) may be necessary.

a EPA Requirements for QA Project Plans (QA/R-5) http://www.epa.gov/qu ality/qa_docs.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 5 of 7



### Standard Operating Procedures- (SOP)

SOPs are an integral part of the QAPP devel opment and approval process and usually address key information required by the QAPP elements. Th erefore, SOPs can be referenced in QAPP elements as long as the SOPs are availabl e for review or are part of the QAPP.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 1

Date:12/08 Page 6 of 7QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix C

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 7 of 7

Table 2 QAPP Elements

QAPP Element Category Applicability

A1 Title and Approval Sheet

A2 Table of Contents

A3 Distribution List A4 Project/Task Organization A5 Problem Definition/Background A6 Project/Task Description A7 Quality Objectives and Criteria for Measurement Data A8 Special Training Requirements/Certification

A9 Documentation and Records

B1 Sample Process (Network) Design B2 Sampling Methods Requirements B3 Sample Handling and Custody Requirements B4 Analytical Methods Requirements B5 Quality Control Requirements B6 Instrument/Equipment Testing, Inspection & Maintenance B7 Instrument Calibration and Frequency B8 Inspection/Acceptance Requir ements for Supplies and Con. B9 Data Acquisition Requirements for Non-direct Measurements B10 Data Management

C1 Assessments and Response Actions C2 Reports to Management

D1 Data Review, Validation, and Verification Requirements

D2 Validation and Verification Methods D3 Reconciliation and User Requirements I, II, III, IV
I, II, III
I,
I, II, III
I, II, III
I, II, III, IV
I, II, III, IV

I
I, II, III

I, II, III, IV
I, II, III,
I, II, III
I, II, III, IV
I, II, III, IV
I, II, III
I, II, III
I,
I, II, III
I, II

I, II,
I, II,

I, II, III
I, II
I, II,QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix D

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 48



# Appendix D

Measurement Quality Objectiv es and Validation Templates

Table of Contents

(click on link to go to individual tables) Validation Template Page

O 3 

### 4

CO 7

NO 2 

### , NOx, NO 10

SO 2 

### 13

PM 2.5 

### Filter Based Local Conditions 16

Continuous PM2.5 Local Conditions 21

PM10c for PM 10-2.5 

### Low –Volume , Filter-Based Local Conditions 24

PM 10 

### Filter Based Dichot STP Conditions 29

PM 10 

### Filter Based High Volu me (HV) STP Conditions 32

Continuos PM10 STP Conditions 35

PM 10 

### Low Volume STP Filter-Based Local Conditions 37 Pb High Volume (TSP) 42 Pb Low Volume (PM 10 

### ) 46

NOTE: There is a potential that information on the validation templates have been changed. They are posted here for reference purposes. However the user is directed to the AMTIC

website.

http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.html

The attached validation tables ar e found there as well as a table th at is updated with any change occurring after the publication date of the Handbook

In addition, at the time of pub lication NCore validation templa tes were being reviewed and refined. When completed they will be posted on the AMTIC Website listed above.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix D

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 2 of 48



### In June 1998, a workgroup was formed to develo p a procedure that coul d be used by State and locals that would provide for a consistent validation of PM 2.5 

### mass concentrations across the US. The workgroup included personnel from the mon itoring organizations, EP A Regional Offices, and OAQPS who are involved with assuring the quality of PM 2.5 

### mass and was headed by a State and local representative. The workgroup developed three tables of criteria where each table has a different degree of implication about the quality of the data. The criteria included on the tables are from 40 CFR Part 50 Appendices L and N, 40 CFR Part 58 Appendix A, Method 2.12, and a

few criteria that were neither in CFR nor Method 2.12 but which the workgroup felt should be included. Upon completion and use of the table, it was decided that a “validation template” should be developed for all the criteria pollutants.

One of the tables has the crit eria that the workgroup felt must be met to ensure the quality of the data. An example criterion for PM 2.5 

### is that the average flow ra te for the sampling period must

be maintained to within 5% of 16.67 liters per minute. The second table has the criteria that

indicate that there might be a problem with the quality of th e data and further investigation is warranted before making a determination about the validity of the sample or samples. An example criterion is that the field filter blanks should not ch ange weight by more than 30 micrograms between weighings. The third table has criteria that indicate a potentially systematic problem with the environmental data collection activity. Such systematic problems may impact the ability to make decisions with the data. An example criterion is that at least 75% of the scheduled samples for each quarter should be successfully collected and validated.

To determine the appropriate table for each crit erion, the members of the workgroup considered how significantly the criterion impacted the resulting concentration. This was based on experience from workgroup members, experience from non-workgroup members, and feasibility of implementing the criterion.

Criteria that were deemed critical to maintaini ng the integrity of a samp le or group of samples were placed on the first table. Observations that do not meet each and every criterion on the

Critical Criteria Table should be invalidated unless there are compelling reason and justification for not doing so. The sample or gr oup of samples for which one or more of these criteria are not met is invalid until proven otherwise. The cause of not operating in the acceptable range for each of the violated criteria must be investigated and minimized to reduce the likelihood that additional samples will be invalidated.

Criteria that are important for maintaining and evaluating the quality of the data collection system are included on the second table, the Operational Evaluations Table . Violation of a

criterion or a number of criter ia may be cause for invalidati on. The decision maker should consider other quality control information that may or may not indicate the data are acceptable for the parameter being controlled. Therefore, th e sample or group of samples for which one orQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix D

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 3 of 48



### more of these criteria are not met is susp ect unless other quality control information

demonstrates otherwise. The reason for not meeting the criteria MUST be investigated, mitigated or justified.

Finally, those criteria which are important for the correct interp retation of the data but do not usually impact the validity of a sample or group of samples are included on the third table, the Systematic Issues Table . For example, the data quality objectiv es are included in this table. If the data quality objectives are not met, this do es not invalidate any of the samples but it may impact the error rate associated with the attainment/non-attainment decision.

Please note the designation Operational or Systematic do not imply that these quality control checks need not be performed. If an operational or syst ematic quality control check that is required by regulation is not performed that can be a basis for invalidation of all

associated data.

Following are the tables for all th e criteria pollutants. For each criterion, the tables include: (1) the requirement (2) the frequency with which co mpliance is to be evaluated, (3) acceptance criteria, and (4) information where the require ment can be found or additional guidance on the requirement. The validation templates have been developed based on the current state of knowledge. The templates should evolve as new information is disc overed about the impact of the various criteria on the error in the resulting mass estimate or concentration. Du e to the potential misuse of invalid data, data that are invalidated will not be uploaded to AQS but should be retained on the monitoring organizations local database. This data will be invaluable to the evolution of the validation template.

Use of Bold Italics Font to Identify CFR Requirements.

The criteria listed in the valida tion templates are either requirem ents that can be found in the Code of Federal Regulations, guidance found in a variety of guidance documents, or recommendations by the QA Workgroup or EPA. Any time a CFR requirement is identified in the Requirement, Frequency or Acceptance Cr iteria column it will be identified by bold and

italics font. The Information/Action column will pr ovide the appropriate references for CFR or guidance documents.

Hyperlink References

Where requirements or guidance documents are found on the web, a hyperlink is created which

will lead the user to the closest URL address. Any links to CFR are directed to the electronic CFR document (e-CFR) which is the most up-to-dat e. E-CFR will not get you to an individual section. Therefore e-CFR is only hyperlinked once on each page.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix D

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 4 of 48



### PM 10 

### Note of Caution

The validation templates for PM 10 

### get complicated because PM 10 

### is required to be reported at standard temperature and pressure (STP) for comparison to the NAAQS (and follow 40 CFR Part 50 App J) and at local conditions if using it to monitor for PM 10-2.5 

### (and follow 40 CFR Part 50 App O). Moreover, PM 10 

### can be measured with filter-based sampling techniques as well as with automated methods. The validation templates developed for PM 10 

### try to accommodate these differences, but monitoring organizations ar e cautioned to review the operations manual for the monitors/samplers they use and augment th e validation template with QC information specific to their EPA reference or equi valent method designa tion and instrument. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/file s/ambient/criteria/referenc e-equivalent-methods-list.pdfQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 5 of 48Ozone Validation Template1) Requirement (O3) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA-OZONEOne Point QC CheckSingle analyzer1/ 2 weeks<+7% (percent difference)1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58 App A Sec 3.23) Recommendation based on DQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1.2. QC Check Conc range 0.01 - 0.10 ppm,relative to routine concentrationsZero/span check1/ 2 weeksZero drift <+1.5 ppbSpan drift <+7 %1 and 2)QA Handbook Volume 2Section 12.33) Recommendation and related to DQOOPERATIONAL CRITERIA -OZONEShelter Temperature RangeDaily(hourly values)20 to 30oC. (Hourly avg)orper manufacturers specifications if designatedto a wider temperature range1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Generally the 20-30oC range will apply but the mostrestrictive operable range of the instruments in the sheltermay also be used as guidance. FRM/FEM list found onAMTICprovides temp. range for given instrument.FRM/FEM monitor testing is required at 20-30oC rangeper 40 CFR Part 53.32ShelterTemperature ControlDaily (hourly values)<+2oC SD over 24 hours1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Shelter Temperature DeviceCheck1/6 mo+2oC of standard1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Annual PerformanceEvaluation Single analyzerEvery site 1/year within period ofmonitor operation, 25 % of sitesquarterlyPercent difference of audit levels 3-10 <+15%Audit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference or+15%1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.23) Recommendation- 3audit concentrations not includingzero. AMTIC guidance 2/17/2011http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlFederal Audits (NPAP)1/year at selected sites 20% of sitesauditedAudit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference all otherlevels percent difference +10%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.42) NPAP adequacy requirements onAMTIC3) NPAP QAPP/SOPVerification/CalibrationUpon receipt/adjustment/repair/installation/moving and repair andrecalibration of standard of higherlevel1/6 months if manual zero/spanperformed biweekly1/year if continuous zero/spanperformed dailyAll points within +2 % of calibration rangeofbest-fit straight lineLinearity error <5%1) 40 CFR Part 50 App D2) Recommendation3) Recommendation- Linearity error 40 CFR Part 50 AppDMulti-point calibration (0 and 4 upscale points) 40 CFRPart 50 App D sec 5.2.3Zero Air/Zero Air Check1/yearConcentrations below LDL1) 40 CFR Part 50 App D Section 4.12 and 3) RecommendationOzone Level 2 StandardCertification/recertification toStandard ReferencePhotometer (Level 1)1/yearsingle point difference <+3%1) 40 CFR Part 50 App D Section 5.42 and 3)Transfer Standard Guidance EPA-454/B-10-001QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 6 of 481) Requirement (O3) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /ActionLevel 2 standard (formerlycalled primary standard)usually transported to EPA Regions SRP for comparisonLevel 2 and Greater TransferStandard Precision1/yearStandard Deviation less than 0.005 ppm or 3%whichever is greater1) 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix D Sec 3.12) Recommendation, part of reverification3) 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix D Sec 3.1(if recertified via a transferstandard)1/yearRegression slopes = 1.00 +0.03 and twointercepts are 0 +3 ppb1, 2 and 3) Transfer Standard GuidanceEPA-545/B-10-001Ozone Transfer standard(Level 3 and greater)QualificationUpon receipt of transfer standard+4% or +4 ppb (whichever greater)1, 2 and 3) Transfer Standard Guidance EPA-545/B-10-001CertificationAfter qualification and uponreceipt/adjustment/repairRSD of six slopes <3.7%Std. Dev. of 6 intercepts 1.51, 2 and 3) Transfer Standard Guidance EPA-545/B-10-001 1Recertification to higher levelstandardBeginning and end of O3 season or1/6 months whichever lessNew slope = +0.05 of previous andRSD of six slopes <3.7%Std. Dev. of 6 intercepts 1.51, 2 and 3) Transfer Standard Guidance EPA-545/B-10-001 recertification test that thengets added to most recent5 tests. If does not meet acceptability certification failsDetection (FEM/FRMs)NoiseUpon receipt/adjustment/repair/installation/moving and repair andrecalibration or 1/year<0.005 ppm1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (b) (definition & procedure)2) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1Lower detectable level1/year0.01 ppm1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (b) (definition & procedure)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA-OZONESampler/Monitor/ Transfer andCalibration StandardNAMeets requirementslisted in FRM/FEMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listStandard Reporting UnitsAll datappm (final units in AQS)1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App I sec 2.1.1Rounding convention for datareported to AQSAll data3 places after decimal with digits to righttruncated1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App I sec 2.1.1Completeness (seasonal)3-Year Comparison>90% (avg) daily max available in ozoneseason with min of75% in any one year.1) 40 CFR Part 50 App I2) 40 CFR Part 50 App I Section 2.33) 40 CFR Part 50 App I Section 2..3 (b)8- hour average>75% of hourly averages for the 8-hour1) 40 CFR Part 50 App I2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App I Section 2.1.1Valid Daily Max>75% of the 24, 8 hour averages (18 of 24 8-hour averages1) 40 CFR Part 50 App I2) 40 CFR Part 50 App I Section 2.1.23) 40 CFR Part 50 App I Section 2.1.2 (b)Sample Residence TimeVerification1/year< 20 seconds1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)Sample Probe, Inlet, SamplingAll sitesBorosilicate glass (e.g., Pyrex®) or Teflon®1)40 CFR Part 58 App E, sectionsec 9 (a)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 7 of 481) Requirement (O3) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /Actiontrain2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section sec 9 (a)FEP and PFA have been accepted as a equivalent materialto Teflon. Replacement or cleaning is suggested as 1/yearand more frequent if pollutant load or contaminationdictateSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-62) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-6EPA Standard Ozone ReferencePhotometer (SRP)Recertification (Level 1)1/yearRegression slope = 1.00 +0.01and intercept < 3 ppb1,2 and 3)) Transfer Standard GuidanceEPA-454/B-10-001This is usually at a Regional Office and is comparedagainst the traveling SRPPrecision(using 1-point QCchecks)Calculated annually and asappropriate for design valueestimates90% CL CV <7%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A 2.3.1.2 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.2Bias (using 1-point QC checks)Calculated annually and asappropriate for design valueestimates95% CL <+7%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A 2.3.1.2 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.3Annual PE Primary QAOrganization (PQAO)Evaluation1/year95% of audit percent differences fall withinthe one point QC check 95% probabilityintervals at PQAO level of aggregation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A Section 3.2.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.4 & 4.1.5QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 8 of 48COValidation Template1) Requirement (CO) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA-COOne Point QC CheckSingle analyzer1/ 2 weeks<+10% (percent difference)1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58 App A Sec 3.23) Recommendation based on DQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1. QC Check Conc range 1 - 10 ppmrelative to routine concentrationsZero/span check1/ 2 weeksZero drift <+0.03 ppmSpan drift <+10 %1 and 2)QA Handbook Volume 2Section 12.33) RecommendationOPERATIONAL CRITERIA-COShelterTemperature rangeDaily(hourly values)20 to 30oC. (Hourly avg)orper manufacturers specifications if designated toa wider temperature range1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Generally the 20-30oC range will apply but the mostrestrictive operable range of the instruments in theshelter may also be used as guidance. FRM/FEM listfound onAMTICprovides temp. range for giveninstrument.FRM/FEM monitor testing is required at20-30oC range per 40 CFR Part 53.32ShelterTemperature ControlDaily (hourly values)<+2oC SD over 24 hours1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Shelter Temperature DeviceCheck1/6 mo+2oC of standard1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Annual PerformanceEvaluation Single AnalyzerEvery site 1/year 25 % of sitesquarterlyPercent difference of audit levels 3-10 <+15%Audit levels 1&2 +0.03 ppm difference or +15%1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.23) Recommendation- 3audit concentrations notincluding zero. AMTIC guidance 2/17/2011http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlFederal Audits (NPAP)1/year at selected sites 20% of sitesauditedAudit levels 1&2 +0.03 ppm difference all otherlevels percent difference +15%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.42) NPAP adequacy requirements onAMTIC3) NPAP QAPP/SOPVerification/CalibrationUpon receipt/adjustment/repair/installation/moving1/6 months if manual zero/spanperformed biweekly1/year if continuous zero/spanperformed dailyAll points within +2 % of calibration range ofbest-fit straight line1) 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix C Section 42 and 3) RecommendationSee details about CO2 sensitive instruments Multi-pointcalibration (0 and 4 upscale points)Gaseous StandardsAll gas cylindersNIST Traceable(e.g., EPA Protocol Gas)1) 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix C Section 4.3.12) NAGreen book3) 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix CSection 4.3.1 See detailsabout CO2 sensitive instrumentsGas producer used must participate in EPAAmbient AirProtocol Gas Verification Program40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.6.1Zero Air/Zero Air Check1/year< 0.1 ppm CO1)40 CFR Part 50 App CSection 4.3.22) RecommendationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 9 of 481) Requirement (CO) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /Action3) 40 CFR Part 50 App C Section 4.3.2Gas Dilution Systems1/year or after failure of 1 point QCcheck or performance evaluationAccuracy +2 %1,2 and 3) Recommendationbased on SO2 requirementin 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1 Sec 4.1.2Detection (FEM/FRMs)Noise1/year0.2 ppm (standard range)0.1 ppm (lower range)1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (b) (definition & procedure)2) Recommendation- info obtained from LDL3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1Lower detectable level1/year0.4 ppm(standard range)0.2 ppm (lower range)1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (c) (definition & procedure)2) Recommendation3)40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA-COSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listStandard Reporting UnitsAll datappm (final units in AQS)1, 2 and 3) ) 40 CFR Part 50.8 (a)Rounding convention for datareported to AQSAll data1 decimal place1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50.8 (d) (for averaging valuesfor comparison to NAAQS notfor reporting individualhourly values.)Completeness8-hour standard75% of hourly averages for the 8-hour period1) 40 CFR Part 50.8(c)2) 40 CFR Part 50.8(a-2)3) 40 CFR Part 50.8(c)Sample Residence TimeVerification1/year< 20 seconds1,2, and 3) Recommendation.CO not a reactive gas butsuggest following same methods other gaseous criteriapollutants.Sample Probe, Inlet, SamplingtrainAll SitesBorosilicate glass (e.g., Pyrex®) or Teflon®1,2, and 3) Recommendation.CO not a reactive gas butsuggest following same methods other gaseous criteriapollutants. FEP and PFA have been accepted as aequivalent material to Teflon. Replacement/cleaning issuggested as 1/year and morefrequent if pollutant loaddictate.Siting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-62) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-6Precision(using 1-point QCchecks)Calculated annually and asappropriate for design valueestimates90% CL CV <10%1) 40 CFR part 58 App A sec 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.2Bias (using 1-point QC checks)Calculated annually and asappropriate for design valueestimates95% CL <+10%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.3Annual PE Primary QAOrganization (PQAO)Evaluation1/year95% of audit percent differences fall within theone point QC check 95% probability intervals atPQAO level of aggregation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A Section 3.2.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.4 & 4.1.5QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 10 of 48NO2, NOx, NO Validation Template1) Requirement (NO2) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- NO2One Point QC CheckSingle analyzer1/ 2 weeks<+15% (percent difference)1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58 App A Sec 3.23) Recommendation based on DQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1.5QC Check Conc range 0.01 - 0.10 ppmRelative to routine concentrationsZero/span check1/ 2 weeksZero drift <+ 1.5 ppbSpan drift<+10 %1 and 2)QA Handbook Volume 2Section 12.33) Recommendation and related to DQOConverter EfficiencyDuring multi-point calibrations, span andaudit1/ 2 weeks(>96%)96% – 104%1) 40 CFR Part 50 App F Section 1.5.10 and 2.4.102) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50 App F Section 1.5.10 and 2.4.10Regulation states >96%, 96 – 104% is arecommendation.OPERATIONAL CRITERIA- NO2ShelterTemperature RangeDaily(hourly values)20 to 30oC. (Hourly avg)orper manufacturers specifications if designatedto a wider temperature range1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Generally the 20-30oC range will apply but the mostrestrictive operable range of the instruments in theshelter may also be used as guidance. FRM/FEM listfound onAMTICprovides temp. range for giveninstrument.FRM/FEM monitor testing is required at20-30oC range per 40 CFR Part 53.32ShelterTemperature ControlDaily (hourly values)<+2oC SD over 24 hours1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Shelter Temperature DeviceCheck1/6 mo+2oC of standard1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Annual PerformanceEvaluation Single AnalyzerEvery site 1/year 25% of sites quarterlyPercent difference of audit levels 3-10 <+15%Audit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference or +15%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.22) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.23) Recommendation - 3audit concentrations notincluding zero. AMTIC guidance 2/17/2011http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlFederal Audits (NPAP)1/year at selected sites 20% of sitesauditedAudit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference all otherlevels percent difference +15%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.42) NPAP adequacy requirements onAMTIC3) NPAP QAPP/SOPVerification/CalibrationUpon receipt/adjustment/repair/installation/moving1/6 months if manual zero/spanperformed biweekly1/year if continuouszero/span performeddailyInstrument residence time <2 minDynamic parameter >2.75 ppm-minAll points within +2 % of calibration range ofbest-fit straight line1) 40 CFR Part 50 App F2 and 3) RecommendationMulti-point calibration (0 and 4 upscale points)Gaseous StandardsAll gas cylindersNIST Traceable1) 40 CFR Part 50 App F Section 1.3.1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 11 of 481) Requirement (NO2) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /Action(e.g., EPA Protocol Gas)50-100 ppm of NO in Nitrogen with < 1 ppmNO22) NAGreen book3) 40 CFR Part 50 App F Section 1.3.1Gas producer used must participate in EPAAmbientAir Protocol Gas Verification Program40 CFR Part58 App A sec 2.6.1Zero Air/ Zero Air Check1/yearConcentrations below LDL1)40 CFR Part 50 App FSection 1.3.22 and 3) RecommendationGas Dilution Systems1/year or after failure of 1 point QCcheck or performance evaluationAccuracy +2 %1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on SO2requirement in 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1 Sec 4.1.2Detection (FEM/FRMs)NoiseNA0.005 ppm1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (b) (definition & procedure)2) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1Lower detectable level1/year0.01 ppm1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (c) (definition & procedure)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA- NO2Sampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listStandard Reporting UnitsAll datappb (final units in AQS)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App S Sec 2 (c)Rounding convention for datareported to AQ SAll data1 place after decimal with digits to righttruncated1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App S Sec 4.2 (a)CompletenessAnnual Standard≥75% hours in year1) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.1(b)2) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.1(a)3) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.1(b)1-hour standard1) 3consecutive calendars years of completedata2) 4 quarters complete in each year3)≥75% sampling days in quarter4)≥75% of hours in a day1) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.2(b)2) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.2(a)3) 40 CFR Part 50 App S sec 3.2(b)More details in 40 CFR Part 50 App SSample Residence TimeVerification1/year< 20 seconds1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)Sample Probe, Inlet, SamplingtrainAll sitesBorosilicate glass (e.g., Pyrex®) or Teflon®1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E sec 9 (a)FEP and PFA have beenaccepted as equivalentmaterial to Teflon. Replacement or cleaning issuggested as 1/year and more frequent if pollutantload or contamination dictateSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-6QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 12 of 481) Requirement (NO2) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /Action2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-6Precision(using 1-point QCchecks)Calculated annually and as appropriatefor design value estimates90% CL CV <15%1)40 CFR Part 58 App Asec 2.3.1.5 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.2Bias (using 1-point QC checks)Calculated annually and as appropriatefor design value estimates95% CL <+15%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.3.1.5 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.3Annual PE Primary QAOrganization (PQAO)Evaluation1/year95% of audit percent differences fall withinthe one point QC check 95% probabilityintervals at PQAO level of aggregation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A Section 3.2.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.4 & 4.1.5QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 13 of 48SO2Validation Template1) Requirement (SO2) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- SO2One Point QC CheckSingle analyzer1/ 2 weeks<+10% (percent difference)1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58 App A Sec 3.23) Recommendation based on DQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1.2QC Check Conc range 0.01 - 0.10 ppmRelative to routine concentrationsZero/span check1/ 2 weeksZero drift <+ 1.5 ppbSpan drift <+10 %1 and 2)QA Handbook Volume 2Section 12.33) Recommendation and related to DQOOPERATIONAL CRITERIA- SO2ShelterTemperature RangeDaily(hourly values)20 to 30oC. (Hourly avg)orper manufacturers specifications if designatedto a wider temperature range1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Generally the 20-30oC range will apply but the mostrestrictive operable range of the instruments in theshelter may also be used as guidance. FRM/FEM listfound onAMTICprovides temp. range for giveninstrument.FRM/FEM monitortesting is required at 20-30oC range per 40 CFR Part 53.32ShelterTemperature ControlDaily (hourly values)<+2oC SD over 24 hours1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Shelter Temperature DeviceCheck1/6 mo+2oC of standard1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Annual PerformanceEvaluation Single AnalyzerEvery site 1/year 25% of sites quarterlyPercent difference of audit levels 3-10 <+15%Audit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference or +15%1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.23) Recommendation - 3audit concentrations notincluding zero. AMTIC guidance 2/17/2011http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/cpreldoc.htmlFederal Audits (NPAP)1/year at selected sites 20% of sitesauditedAudit levels 1&2 +1.5 ppb difference all otherlevels percent difference +15%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.42) NPAP adequacy requirements onAMTIC3) NPAP QAPP/SOPVerification/CalibrationUpon receipt/adjustment/repair/installation/moving1/6 months if manual zero/spanperformed biweekly1/year if continuous zero/spanperformed dailyAll points within +2 % of calibration range ofbest-fit straight line1) 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1 Section 42 and 3) RecommendationMulti-point calibration (0 and 4 upscale points)Gaseous StandardsAll gas cylindersNIST Traceable(e.g., EPA Protocol Gas)1) 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1 Section 4.1.6.12) NAGreen book3) 40 CFR Part 50 App F Section 1.3.1Producers must participate inAmbient Air Protocol GasVerification Program40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.6.1Zero Air/ Zero Air Check1/yearConcentrations below LDL< 0.1 ppm aromatic hydrocarbons1)40 CFR Part 50 App A-1Section 4.1.6.22) RecommendationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 14 of 481) Requirement (SO2) 2) Frequency 3) Acceptance Criteria Information /Action3) Recommendation and 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1Section 4.1.6.2Gas Dilution Systems1/year or after failure of 1 point QCcheck or performance evaluationAccuracy +2 %1) 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1sec 4.1.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50 App A-1 sec 4.1.2Detection (FEM/FRMs)NoiseNA0.001 ppm (standard range)0.0005 ppm (lower range)1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (b) (definition & procedure)2) NA3) ) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1Lower detectable level1/year0.002 ppm (standard range)0.001 ppm (lower range)1) 40 CFR Part 53.23 (c) (definition & procedure)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 53.20 Table B-1SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA- SO2Sampler/MonitorNAMeets requirementslisted in FRM/FEMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.1 2) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listStandard Reporting UnitsAll datappb (final units in AQS)1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App T Sec 2 (c)Rounding convention for datareported to AQSAll data1 place after decimal with digits to righttruncated1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App T Sec 2 (c)Completeness1 hour standardHour – 75% of hourDay- 75% hourly ConcQuarter- 75% complete daysYears- 4 complete quarters5-min value reported only for valid hours1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App T Section 3 (b), (c)More details in CFR on acceptable completeness.5-min values or 5-min max value only reported for thevalid portion of the hour reported. If the hour isincomplete no 5-min or 5-min max reported.Sample Residence TimeVerification1/year< 20 seconds1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, section 9 (c)Sample Probe, Inlet, SamplingtrainAll sitesBorosilicate glass (e.g., Pyrex®) or Teflon®1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E sec 9 (a)FEP and PFA have been accepted as equivalent materialto Teflon. Replacement orcleaning is suggested as1/year and more frequent if pollutant load orcontamination dictateSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Precision(using 1-point QCchecks)Calculated annually and as appropriatefor design value estimates90% CL CV <10%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.3.1.6 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.2Bias (using 1-point QC checks)Calculated annually and as appropriatefor design value estimates95% CL <+10%1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 2.3.1.6 & 3.2.12) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4 (b)3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.3Annual PE Primary QAOrganization (PQAO)Evaluation1/year95% of audit percent differences fall within theone point QC check 95% probability intervalsat PQAO level of aggregation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App A Section 3.2.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 4.1.4 and 4.1.5QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 15 of 48PM2.5Filter Based Local Conditions Validation Template1) Criteria (PM2.5 LC )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM2.5Filter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filters<7 days 9 hours from sample end date1, 2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App LSec 10.10Sampling Period (includingmultiple power failures)all filters1380-1500 minutes, orvalue if < 1380 and exceedance of NAAQS1/midnight to midnight local standard time1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App L Sec 3.3See details if less than 1380 min sampledSampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage within 5% of 16.67 liters/minute1, 2 and 3) Part50 App L Sec 7.4.3.1Variability in Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opCV <2%1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.2One-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+4% of transfer standard+5% of flow rate design value1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5 and 7.4.3.1and 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix A Sec 3.2.3 & 3.3.2Laboratory ActivitiesPost-sampling Weighingall filters<10 days from sample end date if shipped atambient temp, or<30 days if shipped below avg ambient (or 4oCor below for avg sampling temps < 4oC ) fromsample end date1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App L Sec 8..3.6Filter Visual Defect Check(unexposed)all filtersCorrect type & size and for pinholes, particles orimperfections1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 10.2Filter Conditioning EnvironmentEquilibrationall filters24 hours minimum1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.5Temp. Rangeall filters24-hr mean 20-23oC1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.1Temp.Controlall filters+2oC SD* over 24 hr1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.2Humidity Rangeall filters24-hr mean 30% - 40% RH or<5% sampling RH but > 20%RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.3Humidity Controlall filters+5% SD* over 24 hr.1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.4Pre/post Sampling RHall filtersdifference in 24-hr means <+5% RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.3Balanceall filterslocated in filter conditioning environment1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.2OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE PM2.5Filter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesSampling InstrumentIndividual Flow Ratesevery 24 hours of opno flow rate excursions > +5% for > 5 min.1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.1Filter Temp Sensorevery 24 hours of opno excursions of > 5oC lasting longer than 30 min1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.11.4Routine VerificationsQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 16 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 LC )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionExternal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min(see comment #1)1)40 CFR Part 50 App L, Sec 7.4.6.12) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.1Internal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.22) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.2One-point Temp Verification1/mo+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32)Method 2.12Table 6-13) RecommendationPressure Verification1/mo+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32) Method 2.12 Table 6-13) RecommendationAnnual Multi-point Verifications/CalibrationsTemperature multi-pointVerification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.4Pressure Verification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.5Sampler BP verified against independent standardverified against a lab primary standard that is certified asNIST traceable 1/yearFlow Rate Multi-pointVerification/ CalibrationElectromechanicalmaintenance or transport or1/yr+4% of transfer standard1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.1.3, Method 2.12Table 6-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Design Flow Rate Adjustmentat one-point or multi-pointverification/calibration+2% of design flow rate1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.6Other Monitor Calibrationsper manufacturers’ op manualper manufacturers’ operating manual1,2 and 3) RecommendationPrecisionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sitesby method designationCV <10% of samples > 3 μg/m31) and 2) Part 58 App A Sec 3.2.53 Recommendation based onDQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1.3AccuracyTemperature Audit1/yr+2oC1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12Sec. 10.2.2 & Table 3-1Pressure Audit1/yr+10 mm Hg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.3 & Table 3-1Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+4% of audit standard+5% of design flow rate1 and 2) Part 58, App A, Sec 3.3.33) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.1 & Table 10-1Monitor MaintenanceImpactor (WINs)every 5 sampling eventscleaned/changed1, 2,and 3)Method 2.12Sec 8.3.1Very Sharp Cut Cycloneevery 30 dayscleaned/changed1,2 and 3) RecommendationInlet/downtube Cleaningevery 15 sampling eventscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Filter Chamber Cleaning1/mocleaned1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3 and 9.4.1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 17 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 LC )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCirculating Fan Filter Cleaning1/mocleaned/changed1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPLaboratory ActivitiesFilter ChecksLot Blanks9 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1, 2, 3) Recommendation and used to determine filterstability of the lot of filters received from EPA orvendor.Exposure Lot Blanks3 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Used for preparing a subset of filters for equilibrationFilter Integrity (exposed)each filterno visual defects1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.10Filter Holding TimesPre-samplingall filters< 30 days before sampling1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50, App.LSec 8.3.5Lab QC ChecksField Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+30 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.12 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Lab Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.22 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Balance Check (working standards)beginning, 10th sample, end<3 +μg1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.9Duplicate Filter Weighing1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 7.11Microbalance Audit1/yr+0.050 mg or manufacturers specs, whichever istighter1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.6Verification/CalibrationLab Temperature1/6 months+2oC1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation. Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2Lab Humidity1/6 months+2%1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2Microbalance CalibrationAt installation and prior toeach weighing session1/yrManufacturer’s specification1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.12) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1 and Method 2.12Sec. 7.23) NACalibration & Check Standards -Working Mass Stds. (compare toprimary standards)Primary standards1/3 mo.1/yr0.025 mg0.025 mg1, 2 and 3)Method 2.12Sec 4.3 and 7.3SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM2.5Filter Based Local ConditionsSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1)40 CFR Part 58 App CSection 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 18 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 LC )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data CompletenessAnnual Standard>75% scheduled samplingdays in each quarter1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50,App. N, Sec. 4.1 (b) 4.2 (a)24- Hour Standard>75% scheduled samplingdays in each quarter1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50,App. N, Sec. 4.1 (b) 4.2 (a)Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at ambient temp/pressure (PM2.5)1. 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App N Sec 3.0 (b)Rounding convention for datareported to AQSall filtersto one decimal place, withadditional digits to theright being truncated1. 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App N Sec 3.0 (b)Annual 3-yr averageall concentrationsnearest 0.1 μg/m3(>0.05 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App. N Sec 3 and 4Rounding convention for data reported to AQS is arecommendation24-hour, 3-year averageall concentrationsnearest 1 μg/m3(>0.5 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App. N Sec 3 and 4Rounding convention for data reported to AQS is arecommendationDetection LimitLower DLall filters 

2 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.1Upper Conc. Limitall filters

200 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.2PrecisionSingle analyzer (collocatedmonitors)1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% for values > 3μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation in order to provide early(quarterly) evaluation ofachievement of DQOs.Primary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, Sec 4.3.1 and 2.3.1.1.BiasPerformance Evaluation Program(PEP)5 audits for PQAOs with <5sites8 audits for PQAOs with > 5sites+10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, Sec 3.2.7, 4.3.2 and2.3.1.1Field ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards Recertifications – All standards should have multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% ofNIST TraceableStd.1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.22) Method 2-12 Section 6.3.3 and Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.2Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Clock/timer Verification1/mo1 min/mo1and 2) Method 2.12 Table 3-13)40 CFR Part 50, App.LSec 7.4.12Laboratory ActivitiesMicrobalance Readabilityat purchase1 μg1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 19 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 LC )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionMicrobalance Repeatability1/yr1 μg1) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.62) Recommendation3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.6Primary Mass.Verification/CalibrationStandardsRecertifications1/yr0.025 mg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.7 & Table 3-2Comment #1It’s stated in the CFR that the criteria is<80mL/min. Exactly what samplers use this unit of measure? Most, if not all samplers that I know of use either the “in Hg” or the “mmHg” unit.How can you convert a “liquid” unit of measure to a “pressure” unitof measure? Is there any way to change or add more applicable units to ease the confusion?The following is in thePM2.4 PEP SOP.To pass the test, the actively displayed differential system pressure (shown on the right side ofthe screen as “SP”) must notdrop by more than 5-cm of water during the2-minute time interval (or 10-cm of water if using a 10-minute time interval). This is equivalent to the 80 mL/min acceptance criteria stated in related QA documents.1/ value must be flagged SD * = standarddeviation CV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 20 of 48Continuous PM2.5 Local Conditions Validation TemplateNOTE:There may be a number of continuous monitors that may be designated as an FEM or an ARM. These monitors may have different measurement or samplingattributes that cannot be identified in this validation template. Monitoring organizations should review specific instrument operating manuals to augment this validationtemplate as necessary. In general, 40 CFR Part 58 App A and40 CFR Part 50 App L requirements apply to Continuous PM2.51) Criteria (PM2.5 Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM2.5Continuous, Local ConditionsSampling Period 24 hour estimateevery sample period>75% (18) of hourly averages1,2and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App NSec 3 (c)See additional details for sample periods less than18 hours.Hourly estimatesEvery hourInstrument dependentSee operators manualSampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage within 5% of 16.67 liters/minute1, 2 and 3) Part50 App L Sec 7.4.3.1Variability in Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opCV <2%1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.2One-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+4% of transfer standard+5% of flow rate design value1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5, 40CFR Part 58, Appendix A Sec 3.2.3 & 3.3.2BAM Specific Critical CriteriaReference Membrane Span FoilVerification (BAM)Hourly+4% of ABS Value1,2 and 3) BAM 1020 Operation ManualOPERATIONAL CRITERIA- PM2.5Continuous, Local ConditionsAnnual Multi-point Verifications/CalibrationsLeak Checkevery 30 days< 1.0 lpm BAM (Not Thermo BAMS)+0.15 lpm TEOM1) 40 CFR Part 50 App L, Sec 7.4.6.12) Recommendation3) BAM SOP Sec 10.1.2TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.6Thermo BAM leak check should not be attempted.Foils could be ruptured.Temperature multi-pointVerification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.4One-point Temp Verification1/mo+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32)Method 2.12Table 6-13) RecommendationPressure Verification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.5BP verified against independent standard verifiedagainst a lab primary standard that is certifiedNIST traceable 1/yearQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 21 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionFlow Rate Multi-pointVerification/ CalibrationElectromechanicalmaintenance or transport or1/yr+4% of transfer standard1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.1.3, Method 2.12Table 6-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Design Flow Rate Adjustmentat one-point or multi-pointverification/calibration+2% of design flow rate1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.6Other Monitor Calibrationsper manufacturers’ op manualper manufacturers’ operating manualPrecisionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sitesby method designationCV <10% of samples > 3 μg/m31) and 2) Part 58 App A Sec 3.2.53 Recommendation based onDQO in 40 CFR Part58 App A Sec 2.3.1.3AccuracyTemperature Audit1/yr+2oC1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12Sec. 10.2.2 & Table 3-1Pressure Audit1/yr+10 mm Hg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.3 & Table 3-1Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+4% of audit standard+5% of design flow rate1 and 2) Part 58, App A, Sec 3.3.33) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.1 & Table 10-1Shelter TemperatureTemperature rangeDaily(hourly values)20 to 30oC. (Hourly avg)orper manufacturers specificationsif designated to a widertemperature rangeGenerally the 20-30oC range will apply but themost restrictive operablerange of the instrumentsin the shelter may also be used as guidanceTemperature ControlDaily (hourly values)<+2oC SD over 24 hours1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Temperature Device Check1/6 mo+2oC1, 2 and 3) QA Handbook Volume 2 Section 7.2.2Monitor MaintenanceVirtual Impactor (VSCC)Every 30 dayscleaned/changed1,2 and 3) RecommendationInlet CleaningEvery 30 dayscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Filter Chamber CleaningEvery 30 dayscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Circulating Fan Filter Cleaning1/mocleaned/changed1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPTEOM Specific Operational CriteriaTotal Flow Verificationevery 30 daysSum of flow rates from 3 paths equal designflow rate +5%1,2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.2Bypass leak check (TEOM)every 30 days+0.60 lpm1,2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.6 or TEOMOperating Manual Sec 5-4Replace TEOM filtersevery 30 daysAs filter loading approached 100%1,2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.8Replace the 47-mm FDMS (Purge)filtersevery 30 days or any timeTEOM filters are replacedreplaced1,2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.10Internal/External Data Logger DataEvery 30 days10 randomly selected valuesagree exactly (digital) and +1 μg/m3(analog)1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.1.24Replace In-line filters1/6 moreplaced1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.2QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 22 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionClean cooler assembly1/yrcleaned1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.3.1Clean/Maintain switching valve1/yrcleaned1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.3.2Clean air inlet system of masstransducer enclosure1/yrcleaned1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.3.3Replace the dryers1/yr or due to poor performancereplaced1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.3.4Calibration (KO) constantverification1/yrPass or Fail(<2.5%)1, 2 TEOM SOP Sec 10.3.63) 1405-DF operating guide.Verification softwareeither passes or fails the verification. Acceptancecriteria is <2.5 %Rebuild sampling pump18 months< 66% of local pressure1, 2 and 3) TEOM SOP Sec 10.4GRIMM Specific Operational CriteriaInternal rinsing air filterAfter a few yearsChanged1, 2 and 3) GRIMM SOP Sec 12.4May require a trained service staff to change. Mayonly require changing if a message reads “checknozzle and air inlet”Change Dust Filter1/yearChanged1, 2 and 3) GRIMM SOP Sec 12.3BAM Specific Operational CriteriaCleaning Nozzle and Van (BAM)Every 30 dayscleaned1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.1.3Replace or Clean pump Muffler1/6 moCleaned or changedInternal/External Data Logger Data(BAM)Every 30 days10 randomly selected valuesagree exactly (digital) and +1 μg/m3(analog)1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.1.9Capstan shaft and pinch rollercleaning (BAM)Every 30 dayscleaned1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.1.3Smart Heater Test1/6 moHeater turns when forced off1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.3.3Clean/replace internal debris filter1/year72-Hour zero filter testAt installation and 1/year1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 9.6.10Check of membrane span foil1/yearAvg. < +5% of ABS1, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.4.3Beta detector count rate1/yearBetween 600,00 and 1,000,0001, 2 and 3) BAM SOP Sec 10.4.4SYSTEMATICCRITERIA-PM2.5Continuous, Local ConditionsSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1)40 CFR Part 58 App CSection 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completenessquarterly>75%Part 50, App. N, Sec. 4.1 (b) 4.2 (a)Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at ambient temp/pressure (PM2.5)1. 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App N Sec 3.0 (b)Rounding convention for datareported to AQSall filtersto one decimal place, with additional digits to the rightbeing truncated1. 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App N Sec 3.0 (b)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 23 of 481) Criteria (PM2.5 Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionAnnual 3-yr averageall concentrationsnearest 0.1 μg/m3(>0.05 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App. N Sec 3 and 4Rounding convention for data reported to AQS is arecommendation24-hour, 3-year averageall concentrationsnearest 1 μg/m3(>0.5 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App. N Sec 3 and 4Rounding convention for data reported to AQS is arecommendationDetection LimitLower DLall filters 

2 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.1Upper Conc. Limitall filters

200 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.2Verification/Calibration Standards Recertifications - All standards should have multi-pointcertifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% ofNIST TraceableStd.Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.2Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracyMethod 2.12 Sec 4.2.2Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracyMethod 2.12 Sec 4.2.2Calibration & Check StandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.Part 50, APP L, Sec 9.1 & 9.2Verification/CalibrationClock/timer Verification1/mo1 min/mo**Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4PrecisionSingle analyzer (collocatedmonitors)1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation in order to provideearly (quarterly) evaluation of achievement ofDQOs.Primary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, Sec 4.3.1 and2.3.1.1 .BiasPerformance Evaluation Program(PEP)5 audits for PQAOs with <5sites8 audits for PQAOs with > 5sites+10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, Sec 3.2.7, 4.3.2and 2.3.1.11/ value must be flagged due to current implementation of BAM ( sampling 42 minute/hour) only 1008 minutes of sampling in 24 hour periodSD= standard deviation , CV= coefficient of variation** = need to ensure data system stamps appropriate time period with reported sample valueQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 24 of 48PM10c for PM10-2.5Low –Volume , Filter-Based Local Conditions Validation TemplateNOTE:The following validation template was constructed for use of PM10at local conditions where PM10cis used in the calculation of the PM10-2.5measurement or forobjectives other than comparison to the PM10NAAQS. Although the PM10-2.5method is found in40 CFR Part 50 Appendix O,Appendix O references Appendix L (thePM2.5Method) for the QC requirements listed below.Therefore, the information action column, in most cases, will reference40 CFR Part 50 App L.Monitoringorganizations using PM10data for a NAAQS comparison purposes should refer to the PM10validation template for STP(standardtemperature and pressure correction).In addition, since the samplers are very similar to the PM2.5 samplers,Guidance Document 2.12Monitoring PM2.5 in Ambient Air Using Designated Reference or Class1 Equivalent Methodsis referred to where appropriate.1) Criteria (PM10c )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10cFilter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filters<7 days 9 hours from sample end date1, 2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App LSec 10.10Sampling Period (includingmultiple power failures)all filters1380-1500 minutes, orvalue if < 1380 and exceedance of NAAQS1/midnight to midnight local standard time1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App L Sec 3.3See details if less than 1380 min sampledSampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage within 5% of 16.67 liters/minute1, 2 and 3) Part50 App L Sec 7.4.3.1Variability in Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opCV <2%1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.2One-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+4% of transfer standard+5% of flow rate design value1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50,App.L, Sec 9.2.5, 40 CFRPart 58, Appendix ASec 3.2.3 & 3.3.2Laboratory ActivitiesPost-sampling Weighingall filters<10 days from sample end date if shipped atambient temp, or<30 days if shipped below avg ambient (or 4oCor below for avg sampling temps < 4oC ) fromsample end date1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App L Sec 8..3.6Filter Visual Defect Check(unexposed)all filtersCorrect type & size and for pinholes, particles orimperfections1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 10.2Filter Conditioning EnvironmentEquilibrationall filters24 hours minimum1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.5Temp. Rangeall filters24-hr mean 20-23oC1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.1Temp.Controlall filters+2oC SD* over 24 hr1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.2Humidity Rangeall filters24-hr mean 30% - 40% RH or<5% sampling RH but > 20%RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.3Humidity Controlall filters+5% SD* over 24 hr.1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.4Pre/post Sampling RHall filtersdifference in 24-hr means <+5% RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.3QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 25 of 481) Criteria (PM10c )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionBalanceall filterslocated in filter conditioning environment1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.2OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE- PM10c Filter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesSampling InstrumentIndividual Flow Ratesevery 24 hours of opno flow rate excursions > +5% for > 5 min.1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.1Filter Temp Sensorevery 24 hours of opno excursions of > 5oC lasting longer than 30 min1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.11.4Routine VerificationsExternal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min(see comment #1)1)40 CFR Part 50 App L, Sec 7.4.6.12) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.1Internal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.22) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.2One-point Temp Verification1/mo+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32)Method 2.12Table 6-13) RecommendationPressure Verification1/mo+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32) Method 2.12 Table 6-13) RecommendationAnnual Multi-point Verifications/CalibrationsTemperature multi-pointVerification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.4Pressure Verification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.5Sampler BP verified against independent standardverified against a lab primary standard that is certifiedas NIST traceable 1/yearFlow Rate Multi-pointVerification/ CalibrationElectromechanicalmaintenance or transport or1/yr+4% of transfer standard1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.1.3, Method 2.12Table 6-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Design Flow Rate Adjustmentat one-point or multi-pointverification/calibration+2% of design flow rate1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.6Other Monitor Calibrationsper manufacturers’ op manualper manufacturers’ operating manual1,2 and 3) RecommendationPrecisionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sitesby method designationCV <15% of samples > 3 μg/m31) and 2) Part 58 App A Sec 3.2.53 Recommendation based onDQO in 40 CFR Part 58App A Sec 2.3.1.3AccuracyTemperature Audit1/yr+2oC1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12Sec. 10.2.2 & Table 3-1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 26 of 481) Criteria (PM10c )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionPressure Audit1/yr+10 mm Hg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.3 & Table 3-1Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+4% of audit standard+5% of design flow rate1 and 2)Part 58 App A, Sec 3.3.33) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.1 & Table 10-1Monitor MaintenanceImpactor (WINs)every 5 sampling eventscleaned/changed1, 2,and 3)Method 2.12Sec 8.3.1Very Sharp Cut Cycloneevery 30 dayscleaned/changed1,2 and 3) RecommendationInlet/downtube Cleaningevery 15 sampling eventscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.4.1Filter Chamber Cleaning1/mocleaned1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Circulating Fan Filter Cleaning1/mocleaned/changed1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPLaboratory ActivitiesFilter ChecksLot Blanks9 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1, 2 and 3) Recommendation and used to determinefilter stability of the lot of filters received from EPA orvendor.Exposure Lot Blanks3 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Used for preparing a subset of filters for equilibrationFilter Integrity (exposed)each filterno visual defects1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.10Filter Holding TimesPre-samplingall filters< 30 days before sampling1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.5Lab QC ChecksField Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+30 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.12 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Lab Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.22 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Balance Check (working standards)beginning, 10th sample, end<3 μg1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.9Duplicate Filter Weighing1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 7.11Microbalance Audit1/yr+0.050 mg or manufacturers specs, whichever istighter1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.6Verification/CalibrationLab Temperature1/6 months+2oC1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2Lab Humidity1/6 months+2%1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 27 of 481) Criteria (PM10c )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionMicrobalance CalibrationAt installation and prior toeach weighing session1/yrManufacturer’s specification1)40 CFR Part 50, App.L,Sec 8.12) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1 and Method 2.12Sec. 7.23) NACalibration & Check Standards -Working Mass Stds. (compare toprimary standards)1/3 mo.0.025 mg1, 2 and 3)Method 2.12Sec 4.3 and 7.3SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10c Filter Based Local ConditionsSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data CompletenessNA>75% scheduled sampling days in each quarter1, 2 and 3) Recommendation based on PM2.5requirements in 40 CFR Part50, App. N, Sec. 4.1 (b)4.2 (a)Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at ambient temp/pressure (PM2.5)1. 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App NRounding convention for datareported to AQSall concentrationsnearest 0.1 μg/m3(>0.05 round up)1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on PM2.5requirements 40 CFR Part50 App N sect 4.3Detection LimitLower DLall filters<3μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App O Sec 3.1Upper Conc. Limitall filters>200 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.O Sec 3.2PrecisionSingle analyzer (collocatedmonitors)1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% for values > 3μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation in order to provide earlyevaluation of achievement of DQOs.Primary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% for values > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58, App A Sec 4.3.1 and 2.3.1.1BiasPerformance Evaluation Program(PEP)5 audits for PQAOs with <5sites8 audits for PQAOs with > 5sites+10% for values > 3 μg/m31, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 58,App A, Sec 3.2.7, 4.3.2 and2.3.1.1Field ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards Recertifications – All standards should have multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.LSec 9.1 & 9.22) Method 2-12 Section 6.3.3 and Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.2Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 28 of 481) Criteria (PM10c )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionVerification/CalibrationClock/timer Verification1/mo1 min/mo1 and 2)Method 2.12Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.12Laboratory ActivitiesMicrobalance Readabilityat purchase1 μg1, 2 and 3) ) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1MicrobalanceRepeatability1/yr1 μg1) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.62) Recommendation3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.6Primary Mass Stds.1/yr0.025 mg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.7 & Table 3-2Comment #1It’s stated in the CFR that the criteria is<80mL/min. Exactly what samplers use this unit of measure? Most, if not all samplers that I know of use either the “in Hg” or the “mmHg” unit.How can you convert a “liquid” unit of measure to a “pressure” unitof measure? Is there any way to change or add more applicable units to ease the confusion?The following is in thePM2.4 PEP SOP.To pass the test, the actively displayed differential system pressure (shown on the right side ofthe screen as “SP”) must notdrop by more than 5-cm of water during the2-minute time interval (or 10-cm of water if using a 10-minute time interval). This is equivalent to the 80 mL/min acceptance criteria stated in related QA documents.1/ value must be flagged , SD= standard deviation, CV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 29 of 48PM10Filter Based Dichot STP Conditions Validation Template1) Criteria (PM10 DichotSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10Filter Based DichotField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filtersASAP1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Jsec 9.15Sampling Periodall filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.1.5Sampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage 16.67 liters/minute1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 2.1Verification/CalibrationOne-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+7% of transfer standard1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 Table 3-1Lab ActivitiesFilterVisual Defect Check (unexposed)all filterssee reference1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 4.2Collection efficiencyall filters>99 %1,2 and 3) Part 50, App J sec 7.2.2Alkalinityall filters< 25.0 microequivalents/gram1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App J sec 7.2.4Filter Conditioning EnvironmentEquilibrationall filters24 hours minimum1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 9.3Temp. Rangeall filters15-30oC1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.1Temp.Controlall filters+3oCSD*over 24 hr1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.2SD statistic is recommendationHumidity Rangeall filters20% - 45% RH1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.3Humidity Controlall filters+5% SD*over 24 hr1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.4SD use is recommendationPre/post Sampling RHall filtersdifference in 24-hr means <+5% RH1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on 40 CFR Part 50,App.L sec 8.3.3Balanceall filterslocated in filter conditioning environment1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on 40 CFR Part 50,App.L sec 8.3.2OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE PM10Filter Based DichotField ActivitiesVerification/CalibrationSystem Leak CheckDuring precalibration checkVacuum of 10 to 15 in. &rate of decline to 0>60 seconds1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 2.2.1FR Multi-pointVerification/Calibration1/yrCorrelation coefficient of >.990 with no pointdeviating more than 0.5 L/min for total or 0.05L/min for coarse1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J, sec 8.02 and 3) Method 2.10 Sec 2.2.4Field Temp M-point Verificationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on Part 50, App.LPrecisionQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 30 of 481) Criteria (PM10 DichotSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sites5μg/m3for concentrations below 80μg/m3and7%forconcentrations above 80μg/m31 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.13) Part 50, App J sec 4.1Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+10% of audit standard1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.3.33) Method 2.10 Sec 7.1.5Monitor MaintenanceImpactor1/3 mocleaned/changed1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 6.1.2Inlet/downtube Cleaning1/3 mocleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 6.1.2Vacuum pump1/yrReplace diaphragm and flapper valves1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 6.1.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPLab ActivitiesBalance Checkbeginning, 10th sample, end4 μgof true zero<2 μgof 10 mg check weight1,2 and 3) Method 2 .10 sec 4.5“Standard” filter QC check10%+20 μgchange from original value1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 4.5From standard non-routine filter“Routine” duplicate weighing5-7 per weighing session+20 μgchange from original value1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 4.5From routine filter setIntegrity-Random sample of testfield blank filters10%+5 μg/m31) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.2.3 2 and2) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.2.3Lab Temperature Calibration1/6 months+2oC1,2 and 3) Recommendation related to 40 CFR Part 50,App.LLab Humidity Calibration1/6 months+2%1,2 and 3) Recommendation related to 40 CFR Part 50 AppL sec 5.8.1Microbalance Calibration1/yrManufacturer’s specification1,2 and 3) Recommendation related to 40 CFR Part 50 AppLFilter Weighing Audit1/yr+20 μgchange from original value1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 Table 7-1Balance Audit1/yrObserve weighing technique and check balancewith ASTM Class 1 standard1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 Table 7-1 section 7.2.2SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10Filter Based DichotSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completeness24- Hour Standard>75% scheduled sampling days in eachquarter1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App. K, sec. 2.3bReporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at standard temperature and pressure1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App KQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 31 of 481) Criteria (PM10 DichotSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionRounding convention for datareported to AQSEach routine concentrationnearest 10 μg/m3(>5 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App K sec 2PrecisionSingle analyzer1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation 3 μg/m3cut off in 40 CFRpart 58 App A sec 4Single analyzer1/ yrCV <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation 3μg/m3cut off in 40 CFR part58 App A sec 4Primary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) Recommendation 3μg/m3cut off in 40 CFR part58 App A sec 4Field ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards andRecertifications - All standards shouldhave multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Jsec 7.3Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.1oC accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 section 1.1.2Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 section 1.1.2Clock/timer Verification1/6 mo15 min/day1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 9Lab ActivitiesMicrobalanceat purchaseReadability 1 μg, Repeatability1 μg1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 4.4Primary Mass Stds. (compare toNIST-traceable standards)1/yrNIST traceable(e.g., ANSI/ASTM Class 1, 1.1 or 2)1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 9*SD= standard deviation CV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 32 of 48PM10Filter Based High Volume (HV) STPConditions Validation Template1) Criteria (PM10 Hi-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10Filter Based Hi-VolField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filtersASAP1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Jsec 9.15Sampling Periodall filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.1.5Average Flow Rateevery 24 hours of op~1.13 m3/min (varies with instrument)1,2 and 3) Method 2.11Verification/CalibrationOne-point Flow Rate Verification1/3 mo+7% of transfer standard and 10% fromdesign1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.2.33) Method 2.11 sec 3.5.1, Table 2-1Lab ActivitiesFilterVisual Defect Check (unexposed)all filterssee referenceMethod 2.11 sec 4.2Collection efficiencyall filters99 %1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App J sec 7.2.2Alkalinityall filters< 25.0 microequivalents/gram1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App J sec 7.2.4Filter Conditioning EnvironmentEquilibrationall filters24 hours minimum1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 9.3Temp. Rangeall filters15-30oC1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.1Temp.Controlall filters+3oC SD* over 24 hr1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.2Humidity Rangeall filters20% - 45% RH1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.3Humidity Controlall filters+5% SD* over 24 hr1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.4.4Pre/post Sampling RHall filtersdifference in 24-hr means <+5% RH1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on Part 50, App.L sec 8.3.3Balanceall filterslocated in filter conditioning environment1,2 and 3) Recommendation based on Part 50, App.L sec 8.3.2OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE PM10Filter Based Hi-VolField ActivitiesVerification/CalibrationSystem Leak CheckDuring precalibration checkAuditory inspection with faceplate blocked1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 2.3.2FR Multi-pointVerification/Calibration1/yr3 of 4 cal points within +10% of design1, 2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 2.3.2Field Temp M-point Verificationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1,2 and 3) RecommendationPrecisionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sitesCV <10% of samples > 15 μg/m31) and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.2.53) RecommendationSemi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+7% of transfer standard and 10% fromdesign1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.3.33) Method 2.11 sec 7 Table 7-1Monitor MaintenanceInlet/downtube Cleaning1/3 mocleaned1, 2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 6Motor/housing gaskets1/3 moInspected replaced1, 2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 6QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 33 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Hi-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionBlower motor brushes600-1000 hoursReplace1, 2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 6Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPNALab ActivitiesLab QC ChecksBalance Check (Standard WeightCheck and Calibration Check)beginning, 15th sample, end+0.5 mg of true zero and +0.5 mg 1-5 gcheck weight1,2, and 3) Method 2 .11 sec 4.5.1 and 4.5.2“Routine” duplicate weighing5-7 per weighing session+2.8 mg change from original value1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 4.5.3From routine filter setIntegrity-Random sample of testfield blank filters10%+5 μg/m31)40 CFR Part 50 App Jsec 7.2.32) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.2.3Lab Temperature Calibration1/6 months+2oC1,2 and 3) Recommendation related to 40 CFR Part 50, App.LLab Humidity Calibration1/6 months+2%1,2 and 3) Recommendation related to 40 CFR Part 50 App LMicrobalance Calibration1/yrManufacturer’s specificationAuditsFilter Weighing1/yr+5 mg change from original value1) Method 2.11 Table 7-12) Recommendation3) Method 2.11 Table 7-1Balance Audit1/yrObserve weighing technique and checkbalance with ASTM Class 1 standard1) Method 2.11 Table 7-12) Recommendation3) Method 2.11 Table 7-1SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10Filter Based Hi-VolSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed inFRM/FEM/ARM designation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C, Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completenessquarterly>75%1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App. K, sec. 2.3b & cReporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at standard temperature and pressure1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App K sec. 1Rounding convention for datareported to AQSEach routine concentrationnearest 10 μg/m3(>5 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App K sec 1PrecisionSingle analyzer1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% > 15μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationSingle analyzer1/ yrCV <10% > 15 μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationPrimary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% > 15 μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationField ActivitiesQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 34 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Hi-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionVerification/Calibration Standards andRecertifications - All standards shouldhave multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.1)40 CFR Part 50, App.Jsec 7.32) Method 2.11 Sec 1.1.33) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.3Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 Sec 1.1.2Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 Sec 1.1.2Clock/timer Verification4/year5 min/morecommendationLab ActivitiesMicrobalanceat purchaseReadability 0.1 mg Repeatability0.5 mg(HV)1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.J sec 7.53) Method 2.11 sec 4.4Primary Mass Stds. (compare toNIST-traceable standards)1/yrNIST traceable(e.g., ANSI/ASTM Class 1, 1.1 or 2)1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 9SD= standard deviation CV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 35 of 48Continuos PM10 STP Conditions Validation TemplateNOTE:There are a number of continuous PM10 monitors that are designated as FEM. These monitors may have different measurement or sampling attributes thatcannot be identified in this validation template. Monitoring organizations should review specific instrument operating manualsand augment the validation template withQC information specific to their EPA reference or equivalent method designation and instrument.”http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/files/ambient/criteria/referenceequivalent-methods-list.pdf. In general, 40 CFR Part 58 App A and 40 CFR Part 50 App J requirements apply to Continuous PM10. Since a guidance document wasnever developed for continuous PM10, many of the requirements reflect a combination of manual and continuous PM2.5 requirementsand are therefore consideredrecommendations.1) Criteria (PM10Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10ContinuousSampling Periodall filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.1.5Average Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opAverage within +5% of designrecommendationVerification/CalibrationOne-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+7% of transfer standard1 and 2)40 CFR Part 58, App A,sec 3.2.33) Method 2.10 Table 3-1OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE PM10ContinuousVerification/CalibrationSystem Leak CheckDuring precalibration checkAuditory inspection with faceplate blocked1,2 and 3) Method 2.11 sec 2.3.2FR Multi-pointVerification/Calibration1/yr3 of 4 cal points within +10% of design1) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 8.02 and 3) Method 2.10 Sec 2.2.4AuditsSemi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+10% of audit standard1,2) Part 58, App A, sec 3.2.43) Method 2.10 Sec 7.1.5Monitor MaintenanceInlet/downtube Cleaning1/3 mocleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 6.1.2Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPSYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10ContinuousSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed inFRM/FEM/ARM designation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completeness24-hourquarterly23 hours>75%Recommendation40 CFR Part 50 App. K, sec. 2.3Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at standard temperature and pressure(STP)40 CFR Part 50 App KQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 36 of 481) Criteria (PM10Cont)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionRounding convention for datareported to AQS24-hour, 3-year averagequarterlynearest 10 μg/m3(>5 round up)40 CFR Part 50 App Ksec 1Verification/Calibration Standards andRecertifications - All standards shouldhave multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Jsec 7.3Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.1oC accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 section 1.1.2Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 section 1.1.2Clock/timer Verification1/6 mo15 min/day1,2 and 3) Method 2.10 sec 9QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 37 of 48PM10Low Volume STP Filter-Based Local Conditions Validation TemplateMonitoring organizations can use low-volume PM instruments for PM10monitoring. However, PM10data collection for NAAQS purposes must be reported in standardtemperature and pressure (STP). 40 CFR Part 50 App J describes the reference method for PM10but thismethodwas promulgated for dichot and high volume methodsthat have improved over the years. Sincemonitoring organization may be able to usethe low volume methods for multiple uses (PM10c, PM10-Pb) it is suggested that thevalidation criteria for this method follow the method requirements associated with the PM2.5which is Appendix L. Where thereare particular requirement directlyrelated to the NAAQS evaluation App J will be used.1) Criteria (PM10 Lo-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10Lo-Vol Filter Based STPField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filters<7 days 9 hours from sample end date1, 2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App LSec 10.10Sampling Period (includingmultiple power failures)all filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App J sec 7.1.5Sampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage within 5% of 16.67 liters/minute1, 2 and 3) Part50 App L Sec 7.4.3.1Variability in Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opCV <2%1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.2One-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+4% of transfer standard+5% of flow rate design value1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5, 40 CFR Part 58,Appendix A Sec 3.2.3 & 3.3.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5 & 7.4.3.1Laboratory ActivitiesPost-sampling Weighingall filters<10 days from sample end date if shipped atambient temp, or<30 days if shipped below avg ambient (or 4oCor below for avg sampling temps < 4oC ) fromsample end date1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App L Sec 8..3.6Filter Visual Defect Check(unexposed)all filtersCorrect type & size and for pinholes, particles orimperfections1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 10.2Filter Conditioning EnvironmentEquilibrationall filters24 hours minimum1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.5Temp. Rangeall filters24-hr mean 20-23oC1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.1Temp.Controlall filters+2oC SD* over 24 hr1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.2Humidity Rangeall filters24-hr mean 30% - 40% RH or<5% sampling RH but > 20%RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.3Humidity Controlall filters+5% SD* over 24 hr.1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.2.4Pre/post Sampling RHall filtersdifference in 24-hr means <+5% RH1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.3Balanceall filterslocated in filter conditioning environment1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.2QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 38 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Lo-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionOPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE PM10Lo-Vol Filter Based STPField ActivitiesSampling InstrumentIndividual Flow Ratesevery 24 hours of opno flow rate excursions > +5% for > 5 min.1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.1Filter Temp Sensorevery 24 hours of opno excursions of > 5oC lasting longer than 30 min1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.11.4Routine VerificationsExternal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min(see comment #1)1)40 CFR Part 50 App L, Sec 7.4.6.12) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.1Internal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.22) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.2One-point Temp Verification1/mo+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32)Method 2.12Table 6-13) RecommendationPressure Verification1/mo+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32) Method 2.12 Table 6-13) RecommendationAnnual Multi-point Verifications/CalibrationsTemperature multi-pointVerification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.4Pressure Verification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.5Sampler BP verified against independent standardverified against a lab primary standard that is certified asNIST traceable 1/yearFlow Rate Multi-pointVerification/ CalibrationElectromechanicalmaintenance or transport or1/yr+4% of transfer standard1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.1.3, Method 2.12Table 6-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Design Flow Rate Adjustmentat one-point or multi-pointverification/calibration+2% of design flow rate1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.6Other Monitor Calibrationsper manufacturers’ op manualper manufacturers’ operating manual1,2 and 3) RecommendationPrecisionCollocated Samplesevery 12 days for 15% of sitesCV <10% of samples > 3 μg/m31) and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A Sec 3.2.53) RecommendationAccuracyTemperature Audit1/yr+2oC1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12Sec. 10.2.2 & Table 3-1Pressure Audit1/yr+10 mm Hg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2 & Table 3-1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 39 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Lo-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionSemi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+4% of audit standard+5% of design flow rate1 and 2) Part 58, App A, Sec 3.3.33) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.1 & Table 10-1Monitor MaintenanceImpactor (WINs)every 5 sampling eventscleaned/changed1, 2,and 3)Method 2.12Sec 8.3.1Very Sharp Cut Cycloneevery 30 dayscleaned/changed1,2 and 3) RecommendationInlet/downtube Cleaningevery 15 sampling eventscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3 & 9.4.1Filter Chamber Cleaning1/mocleaned1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Circulating Fan Filter Cleaning1/mocleaned/changed1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPLaboratory ActivitiesFilter ChecksLot Blanks9 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1, 2, 3) Recommendation and used to determine filterstability of the lot of filters received from EPA orvendor.Exposure Lot Blanks3 filters per lotless than 15 μg change between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Used for preparing a subset of filters for equilibrationFilter Integrity (exposed)each filterno visual defects1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.10Filter Holding TimesPre-samplingall filters< 30 days before sampling1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50, App.LSec 8.3.5Lab QC ChecksField Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+30 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.12 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Lab Filter Blank10% or 1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.3.7.22 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.7Balance Check (working standards)beginning, 10th sample, end<3 μg1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 7.9Duplicate Filter Weighing1 per weighing session+15 μgchange between weighings1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 7.11Microbalance Audit1/yr+0.050 mg or manufacturers specs, whichever istighter1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.6Verification/CalibrationLab Temperature1/6 months+2oC1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2Lab Humidity1/6 months+2%1) Method 2.12 Table 3-22) Recommendation Table 3-2 suggests every 3 mo.3) Method 2.12 Table 3-2QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 40 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Lo-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionMicrobalance CalibrationAt installation and prior toeach weighing session1/yrManufacturer’s specification1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.12) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 8.1 and Method 2.12Sec. 7.23) NACalibration & Check Standards -Working Mass Stds. (compare toprimary standards)1/3 mo.0.025 mg1, 2 and 3)Method 2.12Sec 4.3 and 7.3SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10Lo-Vol Filter Based STPSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1)40 CFR Part 58 App CSection 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completeness24- Hour Standard>75% scheduled samplingdays in each quarter1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App. K, sec. 2.3bReporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at standard temperature and pressure1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App K sec. 1Rounding convention for datareported to AQSEach routine concentrationnearest 10 μg/m3(>5 round up)1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App K sec 1Detection LimitLower DLall filters 

2 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.1Upper Conc. Limitall filters

200 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 3.2PrecisionSingle analyzer1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationSingle analyzer1/ yrCV <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationPrimary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <10% > 3 μg/m31,2 and 3) RecommendationField ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards Recertifications – All standards should have multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% ofNIST TraceableStd.1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.22) Method 2-12 Section 6.3.3 and Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.2Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Clock/timer Verification1/mo1 min/mo1and 2) Method 2.12 Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.12Laboratory ActivitiesMicrobalance Readabilityat purchase1 μg1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 8.1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 41 of 481) Criteria (PM10 Lo-VolSTP)2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionMicrobalance Repeatability1/yr1 μg1) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.62) Recommendation3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.6Primary Mass.Verification/CalibrationStandardsRecertifications1/yr0.025 mg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.3.7 & Table 3-2Comment #1It’s stated in the CFR that the criteria is<80mL/min. Exactly what samplers use this unit of measure? Most, if not all samplers that I know of use either the “in Hg” or the “mmHg” unit.How can you convert a “liquid” unit of measure to a “pressure” unitof measure? Is there any way to change or add more applicable units to ease the confusion?The following is in thePM2.4 PEP SOP.To pass the test, the actively displayed differential system pressure (shown on the right side ofthe screen as “SP”) must notdrop by more than 5-cm of water during the2-minute time interval (or 10-cm of water if using a 10-minute time interval). This is equivalent to the 80 mL/min acceptance criteria stated in related QA documents.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 42 of 48Pb High Volume (TSP) Validation TemplateNote:in 2008, the NAAQS was lowered for Pb and new monitoring rules were promulgated which allowed for the use of federal equivalent analytical methods and theuse of PM10sampling in certain circumstances. The following information isguidance based on the current FRM which is sampling by TSP and analysis by atomicabsorption. Information is this table is derived from the TSP sampling method in 40 CFR Part 50 App B, and QA Handbook Method2.2 (1977). The analyticalrequirements/guidance is derived from 40 CFR Part 50, App G and QA Handbook Method 2.8 (1981). Monitoring for Pb based on thenew NAAQS requirements willbegin in calendar year 2010.Revised and/or additional Pb validation templates will be included in this section (if published before this version of the Handbook)or posted on AMTIC1) Criteria2) Frequency3) Acceptable Range4) Information/ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- Pb in TSPField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filtersASAP1, 2 and 3 ) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 6.3Sampling Periodall filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 8.15Sampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of op1.1-1.70 m3/min (varies with instrument) inactual condition1, 2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Bsec 8.8One-point Flow Rate Verification1/3 mo+7% from transfer standard1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.13) Method 2.2 sec 2.6Lab ActivitiesFilterVisual Defect Check (unexposed)all filtersInitial backlight inspection- no pinholes orimperfections.Visual inspection prior to shippingto analytical lab1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 8.2Collection Efficiencyall filters99 %1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 7.1.4Pressure Drop Rangeall filters42-54 mm Hg1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 7.1.5pHall filters6-101,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App B sec 7.1.6Pb Contentall filters pre-sampling batchcheck<75μg/filter1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App G sec 6.1.1.1Method 2.8 sec 6.2.1. Moreinformation relative towhether filters should be corrected for blanks.Calibration Reproducibility ChecksBeginning, every 10 samplesand end+5% of value predicted by calibration curve1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App G Sec 9.3May be FEM dependentReagent BlankEvery analytical batch< LDL1,2 and 3) RecommendationDaily CalibrationDaily (on day of analysis)until good agreement is obtained among replicates1,2 and 3) Method 2.8 sec 2.8.5OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE Pb in TSPField ActivitiesVerification/CalibrationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 43 of 481) Criteria2) Frequency3) Acceptable Range4) Information/ActionSystem Leak CheckDuring precalibration checkVisual and Auditory inspection with faceplateblocked1, 2 and 3) RecommendationFR Multi-pointVerification/CalibrationAfter receipt, after motormaintenance or failure of 1-point check and1/yr5 points over range of 1.1 to 1.7 m3/minwithin +5% limits of linearity1, 2 and 3) Method 2.2 sec 2.6PrecisionCollocated Samples15% of each method code inPQAOFrequency - every 12 daysCV <20% of samples > 0.02μg/m3(cutoff value)1 and 2 )40 CFR Part 58 App Asec 3.3.4.33) Recommendation for early evaluation of DQOsSemi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+7% of audit standard1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.3.4.13) Method 2.2 Table 8.2Monitor MaintenanceInlet cleaning1/3 mocleaned1,2 and 3) RecommendationMotor/housing gaskets~400 hoursInspected replaced1, 2 and 3) Method 2.2 sec 7Blower motor brushes400-500Replace1, 2 and 3) Method 2.2 sec 7Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPNALab ActivitiesAnalysis Audits6 strips/quarter3 at each concentration range10% (percent difference)1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.3.4.23) RecommendationField Filter Blank1/quarter< LDL1,2 and 3) RecommendationLab Blanks1/ sample run< LDL1,2 and 3) RecommendationControl Standards ( 1 μg Pb/ml anda standard between 1-10 μg Pb/ml)1st, every 10 samples and lastsample.Deviation of < 5% from value predicted bycalibration curve1,2 and 3) Method 2.8 section 5.7.3SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -Pb Filter Based Hi-VolSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEM/ARMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listAlso described in 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 7.2Siting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5Data Completeness3-year standardaverage of the 3 constituent monthly means>75% .1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App. R, sec. 4. In additionthere are substitution tests thatcan be used for data notmeeting completeness criteria.Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at local temperature and pressure.1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App R sec 3 (b)Rounding convention for datareported to AQS(3-montharithmetic mean)quarterlyReport data to 3 decimal places (data after 3 aretruncated.1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App Rsec 3 (b)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 44 of 481) Criteria2) Frequency3) Acceptable Range4) Information/ActionLower Detectable Limit (AA)all samples0.07 μg Pb/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App G sec 2.3PrecisionSingle analyzer1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <20% > 0.02μg/m31 and 2 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.33) Recommendation related to DQOPrimary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <20% > 0.02μg/m31, 2 and 3 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.3 and sec2.3.1.4BiasPerformance Evaluation Program(PEP)5 audits for PQAOs with <5sites8 audits for PQAOs with > 5sites95% CL Absolute bias +15% > 0.02μg/m31, 2 and 3 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.4 and sec2.3.1.4The PEP include 1 or independent collocated audits and 4or 6 samples from the monitoring organizations collocatedmonitor sent to the independent National PEP Laboratory.Field ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards andRecertifications - All standards shouldhave multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yrResolution 0.02 m3/min+2% reproducibility1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.82) Method 2.2 section 2.53) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.8Field Thermometer1/yr2oC resolution1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.5Field Barometer1/yr+5 mm Hg resolution1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.62) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.B sec 7.6Clock/timer Verification1/3 mo.+2 min/24-hourR1,2 and 3) Method 2.2. section 2.3Lab ActivitiesAnalytical StandardsReagents (HNO3and HCL)allACS reagent grade1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App G sec.6.2.1Pb nitrate Pb (NO3)2allACS reagent grade (99.0% purity)1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App G sec.6.2.8SD= standard deviationCV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 45 of 48PM10-Pb Low Volume Filter-Based Local Conditions Validation TemplateNOTE:The following validation template was constructed for use of PM10-Pb at local conditions where PM10cmethod in 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix O is referenced.Although the PM10-2.5method is found in40 CFR Part 50 Appendix O,Appendix O also references Appendix L (the PM2.5Method) for the QC requirements listedbelow.Therefore, the information action column, in most cases, will reference40 CFR Part 50 App L.In addition, since the PM10 samplers are very similar to thePM2.5 samplers,Guidance Document 2.12Monitoring PM2.5 in Ambient Air Using Designated Reference or Class 1 Equivalent Methodsis referred to whereappropriate. At present the only analyticalFRM is XRF. Therefore quality controlcriteria are associated with the XRF methodwhich is promulgated in40 CFR Part50 Appendix Q.1) Criteria (PM10-Pb LoVol )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionCRITICAL CRITERIA- PM10-PbFilter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesFilter Holding TimesSample Recoveryall filtersASAP1, 2 and 3 ) 40 CFR part 50 App B sec 6.3If filters are used for more than one purpose (i.e.,Pband PM10) the sample recovery is dictated by themost stringent requirement.Sampling Period (includingmultiple power failures)all filters1440 minutes +60 minutesmidnight to midnight local standard time1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App B sec 8.15If filters are used for more than one purpose (i.e.,Pband PM10) the sample recovery is dictated by themost stringent requirement.Sampling InstrumentAverage Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opaverage within 5% of 16.67 liters/minute1, 2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50 App LSec 7.4.3.1Variability in Flow Rateevery 24 hours of opCV <2%1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.2One-point Flow Rate Verification1/mo+4% of transfer standard+5% of flow rate design value1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5, 40 CFR Part58, Appendix A Sec 3.2.3 & 3.3.22) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Laboratory Activities(XRF Analysis)Filter Visual Defect Check(unexposed)all filtersCorrect type & size and for pinholes, particles orimperfections1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 10.2Pb blank filter Acceptance Testing~ 20 test filters per lot90% of filters < 4.8 ng Pb/cm21, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q Sec 6.1.2OPERATIONAL EVALUATIONS TABLE- PM10-Pb Filter Based Local ConditionsField ActivitiesSampling InstrumentIndividual Flow Ratesevery 24 hours of opno flow rate excursions > +5% for > 5 min.1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4.3.1QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 46 of 481) Criteria (PM10-Pb LoVol )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionFilter Temp Sensorevery 24 hours of opno excursions of > 5oC lasting longer than 30 min1/1, 2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 7.4Routine VerificationsExternal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min(see comment #1)1)40 CFR Part 50 App L, Sec 7.4.6.12) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.1Internal Leak Checkevery 5 sampling events< 80 mL/min1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.22) Method 2-12 Table 8-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.6.2One-point Temp Verification1/mo+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32)Method 2.12Table 6-13) RecommendationPressure Verification1/mo+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32) Method 2.12 Table 6-13) RecommendationAnnual Multi-point Verifications/CalibrationsTemperature multi-pointVerification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+2oC1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.4Pressure Verification/Calibrationon installation, then 1/yr+10 mm Hg1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.32 and 3) Method 2.12 sec 6.5Sampler BP verified against independent standardverified against a lab primary standard that iscertified as NIST traceable 1/yearFlow Rate Multi-pointVerification/ CalibrationElectromechanicalmaintenance or transport or1/yr+4% of transfer standard1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.1.3, Method 2.12Table 6-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.5Design Flow Rate Adjustmentat one-point or multi-pointverification/calibration+2% of design flow rate1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 9.2.2Other Monitor Calibrationsper manufacturers’ op manualper manufacturers’ operating manual1,2 and 3) RecommendationPrecisionCollocated Samples15% of each method code inPQAOFrequency - every 12 daysCV <20% of samples > 0.02μg/m3(cutoff value)1 and 2 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.33) Recommendation for early evaluation of DQOsAccuracyTemperature Audit1/yr+2oC1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12Sec. 10.2.2 & Table 3-1Pressure Audit1/yr+10 mm Hg1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.3 & Table 3-1Semi Annual Flow Rate Audit1/6 mo+4% of audit standard+5% of design flow rate1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58 App A, Sec 3.3.33) Method 2.12 Sec. 10.2.1 & Table 10-1Monitor MaintenanceQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 47 of 481) Criteria (PM10-Pb LoVol )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionImpactor (WINs)every 5 sampling eventscleaned/changed1, 2,and 3)Method 2.12Sec 8.3.1Very Sharp Cut Cycloneevery 30 dayscleaned/changed1,2 and 3) RecommendationInlet/downtube Cleaningevery 15 sampling eventscleaned1,2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3 & 9.4.1Filter Chamber Cleaning1/mocleaned1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Circulating Fan Filter Cleaning1/mocleaned/changed1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 9.3Manufacturer-RecommendedMaintenanceper manufacturers’ SOPper manufacturers’ SOPLaboratory Activities (XRF Analysis)Filter Holding TimesPre-samplingall filters< 30 days before sampling1,2 and 3)40 CFR Part 50, App.LSec 8.3.5Required only if filters will be used for PM10cmass as well as Pb. If only used for Pb then 30 daypre-sampling holding time not requiredAnalysis Audits6 filters/quarter3 at each concentration range10% (percent difference)1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 58, App A, sec 3.3.4.23) RecommendationField Filter Blank1/quarter< 0.01 μg/m31)40 CFR Part 50 App Qsec 6.1.2.12 and 3) RecommendationLab Filter Blank1/ sample run<.003 μg/m31 40 CFR part 50 App Q sec 6.1.2.12 and 3) RecommendationThin Film Standards (standardreference materials)Beginning and end of eachanalytical runXRF conc. +3x the 1 sigma uncertainty overlapsthe NIST certified conc. + 1x its reporteduncertainty.1) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q sec 6.2.32 and 3) recommendationRun time quality control standardsChecking peak areas, backgroundareas, centroid and FWHMBeginning and end of eachanalytical runTarget value +3 SD1,2,and 3) RecommendationTarget values and SD ofQC samples establishedprior to analysis.XRF analyzer calibration1/year or when significantrepairsor changes occur orQC limits exceededXRF conc. +3x the 1 sigma uncertainty overlapsthe NIST certified conc. + 1x its reporteduncertainty.1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q sec 6.2.43) RecommendationBackground Measurement andCorrection20 clean blank filtersfor each filter lot usedNA1 and 2) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q sec 6.2.4.2SYSTEMATIC CRITERIA -PM10-Pb Filter Based Local ConditionsSampler/MonitorNAMeets requirements listed in FRM/FEMdesignation1) 40 CFR Part 58 App C Section 2.12) NA3) 40 CFR Part 53 &FRM/FEM method listSiting1/yearMeets siting criteria or waiver documented1) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-52) Recommendation3) 40 CFR Part 58 App E, sections 2-5QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix DRevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 48 of 481) Criteria (PM10-Pb LoVol )2) Frequency3) Acceptable RangeInformation /ActionData Completeness3-year standardaverage of the 3 constituent monthly means>75% .1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App. R, sec. 4. Inaddition there are substitution tests that can be usedfor data not meeting completeness criteria.Reporting Unitsall filtersμg/m3at local temperature and pressure.1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App R sec 3 (b)Rounding convention for datareported to AQS(3-monthmean)quarterlyReport data to 3 decimal places (data after 3 aretruncated.1,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App R sec 3 (b)Lower DLall filters<0.001μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50 App Q Sec 2.2Upper Conc. Limitall filters>200 μg/m31,2 and 3) 40 CFR Part 50, App.Q Sec 3.1PrecisionSingle analyzer1/3 mo.Coefficient of variation (CV) <20% > 0.02μg/m31 and 2 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.33) Recommendation related to DQOPrimary Quality Assurance Org.Annual and 3 year estimates90% CL of CV <20% > 0.02μg/m31, 2 and 3 ) 40 CFR Part 58 App A sec 3.3.4.3 andsec 2.3.1.4BiasPerformance Evaluation Program(PEP)5 audits for PQAOs with <5sites8 audits for PQAOs with > 5sites95% CL Absolute bias +15% > 0.02μg/m31, 2 and 3 )40 CFR Part 58 App Asec 3.3.4.4and sec 2.3.1.4The PEP includes 1 or 2 independent collocatedaudits and 4 or 6 samples from the monitoringorganizations collocated monitor sent to theindependent National PEP Laboratory.Field ActivitiesVerification/Calibration Standards Recertifications – All standards should have multi-point certifications againstNIST TraceablestandardsFlow Rate Transfer Std.1/yr+2% of NIST-traceable Std.1) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.22) Method 2-12 Section 6.3.3 and Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L Sec 9.1 & 9.2Field Thermometer1/yr+0.1oC resolution, +0.5oC accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Field Barometer1/yr+1 mm Hg resolution, +5 mm Hg accuracy1, 2 and 3) Method 2.12 Sec 4.2.2 & Table 3-1Verification/CalibrationClock/timer Verification1/mo1 min/mo1 and 2)Method 2.12Table 3-13) 40 CFR Part 50, App.L, Sec 7.4.12Comment #1It’s stated in the CFR that the criteria is<80mL/min. Exactly what samplers use this unit of measure? Most, if not all samplers that I know of use either the “in Hg” or the “mmHg”unit. How can you convert a “liquid” unit of measure to a “pressure”unit of measure? Is there anyway to change or add more applicable units to ease the confusion?The followingis in the PM2.4 PEP SOP.To pass the test, the actively displayed differential system pressure (shown on the right side of the screen as “SP”) must notdrop by more than 5-cm ofwater during the 2-minute time interval (or10-cm of water if using a 10-minute time interval). This is equivalent to the 80 mL/min acceptance criteria stated in related QAdocuments.1/ value must be flagged SD= standard deviation CV= coefficient of variationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix E

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 9



# Appendix E Characteristics of Spatial Scales Related to Each Pollutant

The following tables provide information in order to match the spatial scale represented by the monitor with the monitoring objectives.

NOTE: This information can also be found in 40 CFR Part 58, Appendix D and since there is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated, users should also review CFR. http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40tab_02.tplQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix E

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 2 of 9



### Page intentionally left blankQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 3 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.NCore UrbanRuralGenerally located at urban or neighborhood scale to provide representative concentrations of exposure expected throughout the metropolitan area;however, a middle-scale site may be acceptable in cases where the site can represent many such locations throughout a metropolitan area.Rural NCore stations are to be located to the maximum extent practicable at a regional or larger scale away from any large local emission source, sothat they represent ambient concentrations over an extensive area.PM10MicroMiddleNeighborhoodThis scale would typify areas such as downtown street canyons, traffic corridors, andfence line stationary source monitoring locations where thegeneral public could beexposed to maximum PM10 concentrations. Microscaleparticulate matter sites should be located near inhabited buildings orlocations where the general public can be expected to be exposedto the concentration measured. Emissions from stationary sources such as primaryand secondary smelters, power plants, andother large industrial processes may, under certain plume conditions, likewise resultin high ground levelconcentrations at the microscale. In the latter case, the microscale would represent an area impacted by the plume with dimensions extending up toapproximately 100 meters. Data collected at microscale sites provide information for evaluating and developing hot spot controlmeasures.Much of the short-term public exposure to coarse fraction particles (PM10) is on thisscale and on the neighborhood scale. People moving throughdowntown areas or living near major roadwaysor stationary sources, may encounter particulate pollution that would be adequately characterized bymeasurements of this spatial scale. Middle scale PM10 measurements can be appropriate for the evaluation of possible short-termexposure publichealth effects. In many situations, monitoring sites that arerepresentative of micro-scale ormiddle-scale impacts are not unique and arerepresentative of many similar situations. This can occur alongtraffic corridors or other locations in a residential district.In this case, one location isrepresentative of a neighborhood of small scale sites and is appropriate for evaluation of long-termor chronic effects. This scale also includes thecharacteristic concentrations for other areas with dimensions of a few hundred meterssuch as the parking lot and feeder streets associated withshopping centers, stadia, and office buildings. In the case of PM10,unpaved or seldomly swept parking lots associated with these sources could be animportant source.Measurements in this category represent conditions throughout some reasonablyhomogeneous urban subregion with dimensions of afew kilometersand of generally more regular shape than the middle scale. Homogeneity refers to the particulate matter concentrations, as wellas the land use andland surface characteristics. In some cases, a location carefully chosen toprovide neighborhood scale data would represent notonly the immediateneighborhood but also neighborhoods of the same type in otherparts of the city. Neighborhood scale PM10 sites provide information about trendsand compliance with standards because they often represent conditions in areas where people commonly live and work for extendedperiods.Neighborhood scale data could provide valuableinformation for developing, testing, andrevising models that describe the largerscale concentrationpatterns, especially those models relying on spatially smoothedemission fields for inputs. The neighborhood scale measurementscould also be usedfor neighborhood comparisons within or between cities.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 4 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.SO2MicroMiddleNeighborhoodUrbanThis scale would typify areasin close proximity to SO2point and area sources. Emissions from stationary point and area sources, and non-roadsources may, under certain plume conditions, result in high ground level concentrations at the microscale. The microscale typically represents an areaimpacted by the plume withdimensions extending up toapproximately 100 meters.This scale generally represents air quality levels in areas up to several city blocks in size with dimensions on the order of approximately 100 metersto 500 meters. The middle scale may include locations of expected maximum short-term concentrations dueto proximity to major SO2point, area,and/or non-road sources.The neighborhood scale would characterize air quality conditionsthroughout some relatively uniform land use areas with dimensions in the 0.5 to 4.0kilometer range. Emissions from stationarypoint and area sources may, under certain plume conditions, result in high SO2concentrations at theneighborhood scale. Where a neighborhood siteis located away from immediate SO2sources, the site may be useful in representing typical airquality values for a larger residential area, and therefore suitable for population exposure and trends analysesMeasurements in this scale would be used to estimate concentrations over large portions of an urban area with dimensions from 4to 50 kilometers.Such measurements would be useful for assessing trends in area-wide air quality, and hence, the effectiveness of large scale air pollution controlstrategies. Urban scale sites may also support other monitoring objectives of the SO2monitoring network such asidentifying trends, and whenmonitors are sited upwind of localsources, backgroundconcentrations.CO MicroMiddleNeighborhoodThis scale applies when air quality measurements are to be used to represent distributions within street canyons, over sidewalks, and near majorroadways. In the case with carbon monoxide,microscale measurements in onelocation can often be considered as representative of other similarlocations in a city.Middle scale measurements are intended to represent areas with dimensions from 100 metersto 0.5 kilometer. In certain cases, middle scalemeasurements may apply to areas that have a total length ofseveral kilometers, such as ‘‘line’’ emission source areas. This type of emission sourcesareas would include air quality along a commercially developed street orshopping plaza, freeway corridors, parking lots and feeder streetsNeighborhood scale measurements areintended to represent areas with dimensions from 0.5 kilometers to 4kilometers. Measurements of CO in thiscategory would represent conditions throughoutsome reasonably urban sub-regions. In some cases, neighborhood scale data may represent not onlythe immediate neighborhood spatial area, but also other similar such areas across thelarger urban area. Neighborhood scale measurements providerelative area-wide concentration data which are useful for providing relative urban background concentrations, supporting health and scientificresearch, and for use in modeling.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 5 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.O3NeighborhoodUrbanRegionalMeasurements in this category represent conditions throughout some reasonably homogeneous urban subregion, with dimensions of afewkilometers. Homogeneity refers to pollutantconcentrations. Neighborhood scale data will provide valuable information for developing, testing, andrevising concepts and models thatdescribe urban/regional concentration patterns.These data will be useful to the understanding and definition ofprocesses that take periods of hours tooccur and hence involve considerable mixingand transport. Under stagnation conditions,a site located in theneighborhood scale may also experience peak concentration levels within a metropolitan area.Measurement in this scale will beused to estimate concentrations over large portions of an urban area with dimensions of several kilometers to 50 ormore kilometers. Such measurements will beused for determining trends, and designing area-wide control strategies. The urban scale sites wouldalso be used to measure high concentrations downwind of the area having the highest precursor emissions.This scale of measurement will be used totypify concentrations over large portions of a metropolitan area and even larger areas with dimensions ofas much as hundreds of kilometers. Such measurements will be useful for assessingthe O3 that is transported to and from a metropolitan area, as wellas background concentrations. In some situations, particularly when considering very large metropolitan areas with complex source mixtures,regional scale sites can be the maximum concentration location.NO2MicroscaleMiddleNeighborhoodUrbanThis scale represents areas in close proximity to major roadwaysor point and area sources. Emissions from roadways result in high ground level NO2concentrations at the microscale, where concentration gradients generally exhibit a marked decrease with increasing downwind distance from majorroads. As noted in appendix E of this part, near-road NO2monitoring stations are requiredto be within 50 meters of target road segments in order tomeasure expected peak concentrations. Emissions from stationary point and areasources, and non-road sources may, under certainplume conditions,result in high ground level concentrations at the microscale. Themicroscale typically represents anarea impacted by the plumewith dimensionsextending up to approximately 100 meters.Dimensions from about 100 meters to 500 meters. The middle scale may include locationsof expected maximum hourly concentrations due toproximity to major NO2point, area, and/or non-road sources.The neighborhood scale represents air quality conditions throughout some relatively uniform land use areas with dimensions in the 0.5 to 4.0kilometer range.Measurements in this scale would be used to estimate concentrations over large portions of an urban area with dimensions from 4to 50 kilometers.Such measurements would be useful for assessing trends in area-wide air quality, and hence, the effectiveness of large scale air pollution controlstrategiesQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 6 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.PM2.5 MicroscaleMiddleNeighborhoodUrbanRegionalAreas such as downtown street canyons and traffic corridors where the general public would be exposed to maximum concentrationsfrom mobilesources. In some circumstances, the microscale is appropriate for particulate sites; community-oriented SLAMS sites measured atthe microscalelevel should, however, belimited to urban sites that are representative oflong-term human exposure and of many such microenvironments in thearea. In general, microscale particulate matter sites should be located near inhabitedbuildings or locations where the generalpublic can be expectedto be exposed to the concentration measured. Emissions from stationary sources such as primaryand secondary smelters, power plants, and otherlarge industrial processes may, under certain plume conditions, likewise result in high ground level concentrations at the microscale. In the lattercase, the microscale would represent an area impacted by the plume with dimensions extending upto approximately 100 meters. Data collected atmicroscale sites provide information for evaluating and developinghot spot control measures.People moving through downtown areas, or living near major roadways, encounter particle concentrations that would be adequatelycharacterized bythis spatial scale. Thus, measurements of this type would be appropriate forthe evaluation of possible short-term exposure public health effects ofparticulate matter pollution. In many situations, monitoring sites that are representative of microscale or middle-scale impacts are not unique and arerepresentative of many similar situations. This can occur alongtraffic corridors or other locations in a residential district.In this case, one location isrepresentative of a number of small scale sites and is appropriate for evaluation of long-termor chronic effects. This scale also includes thecharacteristic concentrations for other areas with dimensions of a few hundred meterssuch as the parking lot and feeder streets associated withshopping centers, stadia, and office buildings.Measurements in this category would represent conditions throughout some reasonably homogeneous urban sub-region with dimensions of a fewkilometers and of generally more regular shape than the middle scale. Homogeneity refers to the particulate matter concentrations, as well as the landuse and land surface characteristics. Muchof the PM2.5 exposures are expected to beassociated with thisscale of measurement.In some cases, alocation carefully chosen to provide neighborhood scale datawould represent the immediate neighborhood as well as neighborhoods of the same typein other parts of the city. PM2.5 sites of this kind provide goodinformation about trends and compliance with standards because they often representconditions in areas where people commonly liveand work for periods comparable to those specified in the NAAQS. In general, most PM2.5monitoring in urban areasshould have this scale.This class of measurement would be usedto characterize the particulate matter concentration over an entire metropolitan or rural area ranging insize from 4 to 50 kilometers. Such measurements would be useful for assessing trendsin area-wide air quality, and hence, the effectiveness of largescale air pollution control strategies. Community-oriented PM2.5 sites may have this scale.These measurements would characterize conditions over areas with dimensions of asmuch as hundreds of kilometers. As noted earlier, usingrepresentative conditions for an area implies some degree of homogeneity in that area. For this reason, regional scale measurements would be mostapplicable to sparsely populated areas. Datacharacteristics of this scale would provide informationabout larger scale processes of particulate matteremissions, losses and transport. PM2.5transport contributes to elevated particulate concentrations and may affect multiple urban and State entitieswith large populations such as in the eastern United States. Development of effective pollution control strategies requires anunderstanding atregional geographical scales of the emission sources and atmospheric processes that are responsiblefor elevated PM2.5levels and may also beassociated with elevated O3and regional haze.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 7 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.Pb MicroMiddleNeighborhoodThis scale would typify areas in close proximity to lead point sources. Emissions from point sources such as primary and secondary lead smelters,and primary copper smelters may under fumigation conditions likewise result in highground level concentrations at the microscale. In the latter case,the microscale would represent an area impacted by the plume with dimensions extending up to approximately 100 meters. Pb monitors in areaswhere the public has access, and particularly children have access, are desirable because of the higher sensitivity of childrento exposures of elevatedPb concentrations.This scale generally represents Pb air quality levels in areas up to several city blocksin size with dimensions on the order of approximately 100meters to 500 meters. The middle scale mayfor example, include schools and playgroundsin center city areas which are close tomajor Pb pointsources. Pb monitors in such areas are desirable because of thehigher sensitivity of children to exposures of elevated Pb concentrations. Emissionsfrom point sources frequently impact on areas at which single sites may be located to measure concentrations representing middle spatial scales.The neighborhood scale would characterize air quality conditionsthroughout some relatively uniform land use areas with dimensions in the 0.5 to 4.0kilometer range. Sites of this scale would provide monitoring data in areas representing conditions where children live and play. Monitoring in suchareas is important sincethis segment of the population is more susceptibleto the effects of Pb. Where a neighborhood site islocated away fromimmediate Pb sources, the site may be very useful in representing typical air quality values for a larger residential area, andtherefore suitable forpopulation exposure and trends analyses.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 8 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.PAMsThe PAMS program provides more comprehensive data on O3air pollution in areas classified as serious, severe, or extreme nonattainment for O3than would otherwise be achieved through the NCore and SLAMS sites.More specifically, the PAMSprogram includes measurements for O3,oxides of nitrogen, VOC, and meteorology.PAMS design criteria are site specific. Concurrent measurements of O3, oxides of nitrogen, speciatedVOC, CO, and meteorology are obtained at PAMSsites. Design criteria for the PAMS network are based on locations relative to O3precursor sourceareas and predominant wind directions associated with high O3events. Specific monitoring objectives are associated with each location. The overalldesign should enable characterization of precursoremission sources within the area, transport of O3and its precursors, and the photochemicalprocesses related to O3nonattainment. Specific objectives that must beaddressed include assessing ambient trends in O3, oxides of nitrogen, VOCspecies, and determining spatial and diurnal variability of O3, oxides of nitrogen, and VOC species. Specific monitoring objectives associated witheach of these sites may result in four distinct site types. Detailed guidance for the locating of these sites may be found in reference 9 of this appendix.(a) Type 1 sites are established to characterize upwind background and transported O3and its precursor concentrations entering the area and willidentify those areas which are subjected to transport.(b) Type 2 sites are established to monitor the magnitude and type of precursor emissions in the area where maximum precursor emissions areexpected to impact and are suited for the monitoring of urban air toxic pollutants.(c) Type 3 sites are intended to monitor maximum O3concentrations occurring downwind from the area of maximum precursor emissions.(d) Type 4 sites are established to characterize the downwind transported O3and its precursor concentrations exiting the area and will identify thoseareas which are potentially contributing to overwhelming transport in other areas.Minimum Monitoring Network Requirements. A Type 2 site is required for each area. Overall, only two sites are required for each area, providingall chemical measurements are made. For example, if a design includes two Type 2 sites, then a third site will be necessary tocapture the NOymeasurement. The minimum required number and type of monitoring sites and sampling requirements are listed in Table D-6 of thisappendix. Anyalternative plans may be put in place in lieu of these requirements, if approved by the Administrator.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix ERevision No. 0Date:05/13Page 9 of 9PollutantSpatialScaleCharacteristics NOTE: This information can also be found in 40CFR Part 58, Appendix D and sincethere is a possibility that spatial scales have been updated,users should also review CFR.PM10-2.5MicroMiddleNeighborhoodThe only required monitors for PM10-2.5are those required at NCore Stations. Although microscale monitoring may beappropriate in somecircumstances, middle and neighborhood scale measurementsare the most important station classifications for PM10-2.5This scale would typify relatively small areas immediately adjacent to: Industrial sources; locations experiencing ongoing construction,redevelopment, and soil disturbance; and heavily traveled roadways. Data collectedat microscale stations would characterize exposure over areas oflimited spatial extent and population exposure,and may provide information useful forevaluating and developing source oriented control measures.People living or working near major roadways or industrial districts encounter particle concentrations that would be adequatelycharacterized by thisspatial scale. Thus, measurements of thistype would be appropriate for the evaluationof public health effects of coarse particle exposure. Monitorslocated in populated areas that are nearlyadjacent to large industrial point sourcesof coarse particles provide suitable locations for assessingmaximum population exposure levels and identifying areas of potentially poor air quality. Similarly, monitors located in populated areas that borderdense networks of heavily-traveled traffic are appropriate forassessing the impacts of resuspended road dust. This scale alsoincludes thecharacteristic concentrations for other areas with dimensions of a few hundred meterssuch as school grounds and parks that arenearly adjacent tomajor roadways and industrial point sources, locations exhibiting mixed residential and commercial development, and downtown areas featuringoffice buildings, shopping centers, and stadiums.Measurements in this category would represent conditions throughout some reasonably homogeneous urban sub-region with dimensions of a fewkilometers and of generally more regular shape than the middle scale. Homogeneity refers to the particulate matter concentrations, as well as the landuse and land surface characteristics. Thiscategory includes suburban neighborhoods dominated by residences that are somewhat distant from majorroadways and industrial districts but still impacted by urban sources, and areas of diverse land use where residences are interspersed with commercialand industrial neighborhoods. In some cases,a location carefully chosen to provideneighborhood scale data would represent theimmediateneighborhood as well as neighborhoods of the same type in other parts of the city. Thecomparison of data from middle scale andneighborhood scalesites would provide valuable information for determining thevariation of PM10–2.5 levels across urban areas and assessing thespatial extent ofelevated concentrations caused by major industrial point sources and heavily traveled roadways. Neighborhood scale sites wouldprovideconcentration data that are relevant toinforming a large segment of the population oftheir exposure levels on a given day.PM2.5SpeciationNA Each State shall continue to conduct chemical speciation monitoring and analyses at sites designated to be part of the PM2.5 Chemical SpeciationTrends Network (CSN). The selection and modification of these CSN sites mustbe approved by the Administrator.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 13



# Appendix F

Sample Manifold Design fo r Precursor Gas Monitoring

The following information is extracted from the document titled: Version 4 of the Technical Assistance Document for Precursor Gas Measurements in the NCore Mu lti-pollutant Monitoring Network


### which can be found on the AMTIC website at: http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/pretecdoc.htmlQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 13



### Page intentionally left blankQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 13 

# Sample Manifold Design for Precursor Gas Monitoring

Many important variables affect sampling manifold design for ambient precursor gas monitoring: residence time of sample gases, materials of construction, diameter, length, flow rate, and pressure drop. Considera tions for these parameters are discussed below.

Residence Time Determination: The residence time of air pollutants within the sampling system (defined as extending from the entrance of the sa mple inlet above the inst rument shelter to the bulkhead of the precursor gas analyzer) is criti cal. Residence time is defined as the amount of time that it takes for a sample of air to trav el through the sampling system. This issue is

discussed in detail for NO y 

### monitoring in Sectio n 4.2, and recommendations in Section 4 for the arrangement of the molybdenum converter and in let system should be followed. However, residence time is also an issue for other precurs or gases, and should be considered in designing sample manifolds for those species. For example, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40 Part 58, Appendix E.9 states, “Ozone in the presen ce of NO will show significant losses even in the most inert probe material when the reside nce time exceeds 20 seconds. Other studies indicate

that 10-second or less residen ce time is easily achievable.” 1 

### Although 20-second residence time is the maximum allowed as specified in 40 CF R 58, Appendix E, it is recommended that the residence time within the sampling system be less than 10 seconds. If the volume of the sampling system does not allow this to occur, th en a blower motor or other device (such as a vacuum pump) can be used to increase flow rate and decrease the residence time. The residence time for a sample manifold system is determined in the following way. First the total volume of the cane (inlet), manifold, and sample lines mu st be determined usi ng the following equation:

Total Volume = Cv + Mv + Lv Equation 1

Where:

Cv = Volume of the sample cane or inlet and extensions Mv = Volume of the sample manifold and moisture trap

Lv = Volume of the instrument lines from the manifold to the instrument bulkhead

The volume of each component of the sampling sy stem must be measured individually. To measure the volume of the components (assumin g they are cylindrical in shape), use the following equation:

V = π * (d/2) 2 

### * L Equation 2

Where: V = volume of the component, cm 3



### π = 3.14 L = Length of the component, cm d = inside diameter of the component, cmQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 13



### Once the total volume is determined, divide the tota l volume by the total sample flow rate of all

instruments to calculate the residence time in the inlet. If the residence time is greater than 20 seconds, attach a blower or vacuum pump to incr ease the flow rate and decrease the residence

time.

Laminar Flow Manifolds : In the past, vertical laminar fl ow manifolds were a popular design. By the proper selection of a large diameter vert ical inlet probe and by maintaining a laminar flow throughout, it was assumed that the sample air w ould not react with the walls of the probe. Numerous materials such as glass, plastic, galvanized steel, a nd stainless steel were used for constructing the probe. Removable sample lines constructed of FEP or PTFE were placed to protrude into the manifold to provide each instru ment with sample air. A laminar flow manifold could have a flow rate as high as 150 L/min, in or der to minimize any losses, and large diameter tubing was used to minimize pressure drops. Ho wever, experience has shown that vertical

laminar flow manifolds have demonstrated many disadvantages which are listed below:

 Since the flow rates are so hi gh, it is difficult to supply e nough audit gas to provide an adequate independent assessment fo r the entire sampling system;

 Long laminar flow manifolds may be diffi cult to clean due to size and length;

 Temperature differentials may exis t that could change the character istics of the gases, e.g., if a laminar manifold’s inlet is on top of a bu ilding, the temperature at the bottom of the building may be much lower, thereby droppi ng the dew point and condensing water.

 Construction of the manifold is fr equently of an unapproved material.

For these technical reasons, EPA strongly discourages the use of laminar flow manifolds in the national air monitoring netw ork. It is recommended that agenci es that utilize laminar manifolds migrate to conventional manifold de signs that are described below.

Sampling Lines as Inlet and Manifold : Often air monitoring agencies will place individual sample lines outside of their shelter for each in strument. If the sample lines are manufactured out of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), perfl uoroalkoxy (PFA) or fluor oethylpropylene (FEP) Teflon®, this is acceptable to the EPA. The adva ntages to using single sample lines are: no breakage and ease of external auditing. In addi tion, rather than cleaning glass manifolds, some agencies just replace the sampling lines. Howe ver, please note the following caveats:

1. lines can deteriorate when exposed to atmo spheric conditions, particularly ultraviolet radiation from the sun. Therefore, it is reco mmended that sample lines be inspected and replaced regularly.

2. Small insects and particles can accumulate inside of the tubing. It has been reported that small spiders build their webs inside of tubing. This can ca use blockage and affect the response of the instruments. In addition, particle s can collect inside th e tubing, especially at the entrance, thus affecting precursor gas concentrations. Check the sampling lines and replace or clean the tubi ng on a regular basis.

3. Since there is no central manifold, these confi gurations sometimes have a “three-way” tee, i.e., one flow path for supplying calibration mixtures and the other for the sampling of ambient air. If the three-way tee is not placed near the outermost limit of the sample inletQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 13



### tubing, then the entire sampling system is not challenged by the provision of calibration gas. It is strongly recommended that at least on a periodic basis calibration gas be supplied so that it floods the entire sample line. This is best done by placing the three-way tee just below the sample inlet, so that calibration gas supplied there is dr awn through the entire sampling line.

4. The calibration gas must be deliv ered to the analyzers at near ambient pressure. Some instruments are very sensitive to pressure changes. If the calibration gas flow is excessive, the analyzer may sample the gas under pressu re. If a pressure effect on calibration gas response is suspected, it is recommended that th e gas be introduced at more than one place in the sampling line (by placement of the tee, as described in item #3 above). If the response to the calibration gas is the same regardless of delivery point, then there is likely no pressure

effect.

Conventional Manifold Design - A number of “conventional” manifold systems exist today. However, one manifold feature must be consiste nt: the probe and manifold must be constructed of borosilicate glass or Teflon® (PFA or PTFE). These are the only materials proven to be inert to gases. EPA will accept manifolds or inlets that are made from other materials, such as steel or aluminum, that are lined or coat ed with borosilicate glass or th e Teflon® materials named above. However, all of the linings, join ts and connectors that could possibly come into contact with the sample gases must be of glass or Teflon®. It is recommended that probes and manifolds be constructed in modular sections to enable freque nt cleaning. It has been demonstrated that there are no significant losses of reactiv e gas concentrations in conven tional 13 mm inside diameter (ID) sampling lines of glass or Teflon® if the sample residence time is 10 seconds or less. This is true even in sample lines up to 38 m in le ngth. However, when the sample residence time exceeds 20 seconds, loss is detectable, and at 60 seconds the loss can be nearly complete. Therefore, EPA requires that residence times mu st be 20 seconds or less (except for NOy). Please note that for particulate matter (PM) m onitoring instruments, such as nephelometers, Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance (TEOM) instruments, or Beta Gauges, the ambient precursor gas manifold is not recommended. Particle monitoring instruments should have separate intake probes that are as short and as straight as pos sible to avoid particulate losses due to impaction on the walls of the probe.

T-Type Design : The most popular gas sampling system in use today consists of a vertical "candy cane" protruding through th e roof of the shelter with a horizontal sampling manifold connected by a tee fitting to the vertical sec tion (Figure 1). This type of manifold is commercially available. At the bottom of the t ee is a bottle for collecting particles and moisture that cannot make the bend; this is known as the “drop out” or moisture trap bottle. Please note

that a small blower at the exhaus t end of the system (optional) is used to provide flow through the sampling system. There are several issues th at must be mitigated with this design:

 The probe and manifold may have a volume such that the total draw of the precursor gas analyzers cannot keep the residence time less than 20 seconds (except NOy), thereby requiring a blower motor. However, a blower motor may prevent calibration and audit gases from being supplied in sufficient quant ity, because of the high flow rate in the manifold. To remedy this, the blower mo tor must be turned off for calibration.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 13



### However, this may affect the response of th e instruments since they are usually operated

with the blower on.

 Horizontal manifolds have been known to colle ct water, especially in humid climates. Standing water in the manifold can be pulled into the instrument lines. Since most monitoring shelters are maintained at 20-30 o 

### C, condensation can occur when warm

humid outside air enters the manifold and is cooled. Station operato rs must be aware of this issue and mitigate this situ ation if it occurs. Tilting the horizontal manifold slightly and possibly heating the manifold have been used to mitigate the condensation problem. Water traps should be emptied when ever there is standing water.

Sample Cane

Blower Motor Teflon Connectors - Bushing

Modular Manifold

Moisture Trap roof line

Screw Type Opening

"T" adaptor



### Figure 1. Conventional T-Type Glass Manifold System

California Air Resources Board “Octopus” Style : Another type of manifold that is being widely used is known as the California Air Resources Board (CARB) style or “Octopus” manifold, illustrated in Figure 2. This manifold has a reduced profile, i.e., there is less volume in the cane and manifold; therefore, there is less need for a blower motor. If the combined flow rates of the gas anal yzers are high enough, then an additi onal blower is not required.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 13



### roof line

Screw Type Opening



### Moisture Trap Sample Cane

Teflon Connectors - Bushing 

### 8-port "Octopus"

Manifold



### Figure 2. CARB or “Octopus” Style ManifoldQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 13



### Placement of Tubing on the Manifold : If the manifold employed at the station has multiple ports (as in Figure 2) then the pos ition of the instrument lines rela tive to the calibration input line can be crucial. If a CARB “Octopus” or similar manifold is used, it is suggested that sample connections for analyzers requiring lower flows be placed towards the bottom of the manifold. Also, the general rule of thumb states that the ca libration gas delivery line (if used) should be in

a location so that the ca libration gas flows past the analyzer inlet points before the gas is evacuated out of the manifold. Figure 3 illustra tes two potential locations for introduction of the calibration gas. One is located at the ports on the “Octopus” manifold, an d the other is upstream near the air inlet point, using an audit or probe in let stub. This stub is a tee fitting placed so that “Through-the-Probe” audit line or sampling system tests and ca librations can be conducted.

roof line Sample Cane Audit and probe
inlet stub



## Instrument
inlet lines Calibration
outlet line

Instrument
inlet lines

Figure 3. Placement of Lines on the ManifoldQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 13

3

14 2

8 1

4

15 13 12 12 9

11 7 6

16 5 Measurements and Features

1. Knurled Connector 2. O-ring 3. Threaded opening 4. Top extension - 56 mm 5. Overall Length - 304 mm

6. Outside diameter - 24 mm 7. Top and bottom shoulder - 50 mm 8. Length of inlet tube - 30 mm

9. Distancebetween inlet tubes - 16 mm 10. Length of internal tube - 145 mm

11. Width of inlet tube OD - 6 mm

12. Distance from inner tube to wall - 18 mm

13. Inside width of outer tube 60 mm 14. Down tube length 76 mm

15. Width Down tube OD - 24 mm

16 Overall Width ~ 124 mm 10

7



### Figure 4. Specifications for an ‘Octopus” Style ManifoldQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 13



### Figure 4 illustrates the specifi cations of an Octopus style manifold. Please note that EPAOAQPS has used this style of mani fold in its precursor gas analyz er testing program. This type of manifold is commercially available.

Vertical Manifold Design: Figure 5 shows a schematic of the vertical manifold design. Commercially available vertical manifolds have been on the market for some time. The issues with this type of manifold are the same with other c onventional manifolds, i.e., when sample air moves from a warm humid atmosphere into an ai r-conditioned shelter, condensation of moisture

can occur on the walls of the manifold. Commer cially available vertical manifolds have the option for heated insulation to mitigate this prob lem. Whether the manifold tubing is made of glass or Teflon®, the heated insulation prevents viewing of the tubing, so the interior must be inspected often. The same issues apply to this manifold style as with horizontal or “Octopus” style manifolds: additional blower motors should not be used if the residence time is less than 20 seconds, and the calibration gas inlet should be pl aced upstream so that the calibration gas flows past the analyzer inlets before it exits the manifold.

roof line Support Pipe

Glass Manifold

Sample Ports

Blower Motor Insulation

Heater Power Cord

Manifold Support Exhaust Hose



## Floor "T" Connector



### Figure 5. Example of Vert ical Design ManifoldQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 13



### Manifold/Instrument Line Interface : A sampling system is an integral part of a monitoring station, however, it is only one part of the w hole monitoring process. With the continuing integration of advanced electronics into monitori ng stations, manifold design must be taken into consideration. Data Acquisition Systems (DASs) are able not only to co llect serial and analog data from the analyzers, but also to contro l Mass Flow Calibration (MFC) equipment and solid state solenoid switches, communicate via modem or Ethernet, and monitor conditions such as shelter temperature and manifold pressure. As described in Chapter 6, commercially available DASs may implement these features in an electronic data logger, or via software installed on a personal computer. Utili zation of these featur es allows the DAS and support equipment to perform automated calibrations (Autocals). In addition to performing th ese tasks, the DAS can flag data during calibration periods and allow the data to be stored in separate files that can be reviewed remotely.

Figure 6 shows a schematic of the integrated mo nitoring system at EPA’s Burden Creek NCore monitoring station. Note that a series of so lenoid switches are positioned between the ambient

air inlet manifold and an additional “calibration” manifold. This configuration allows the DAS to control the route from which the analyzers draw their sample. At the beginning of an Autocal, the DAS signals the MFC unit to come out of standby mode and start producing zero or calibration gas. Once the MFC has stabilized, th e DAS switches the analyzers’ inlet flow (via solenoids) from the ambient air manifold to th e calibration manifold. The calibration gas is routed to the instruments, and the DAS monitors and averages the res ponse, flagging the data appropriately as calibration data. When the Autocal has terminated, the DAS switches the analyzers’ inlet flow from the calibration manifold back to the ambient manifold, and the data system resets the data flag to the normal ambient mode.

The integration of DAS, solenoid switches, and MF C into an automated configuration can bring an additional level of complexity to the monitori ng station. Operators must be aware that this additional complexity can create situations where leaks can occur. For instance, if a solenoid switch fails to open, then the inlet flow of an an alyzer may not be switched back to the ambient manifold, but instead will be sampling interior room air. When the calibrations occur, the instrument will span correctly, but will not return to ambient air sa mpling. In this case, the data collected must be invalidated. These problems are usually not discovered until there is an external “Through-the Probe” audit, but by then exte nsive data could be lost . It is recommended that the operator remove the calibration line from the calibration manifold on a routine basis and challenge the sampling system from the inlet probe. This test will discover any leak or switching problems within the entire sampling system.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 13



### Figure 6. Example of a Manifold/Instrument Interface

Figure 7 shows a close up of an ambient/calibration manifold, illustrating the calibration

manifold – ambient manifold interface. This is the same interface used at EPA’s Burden’s Creek monitoring station. The interface consists of thre e distinct portions: the ambient manifold, the solenoid switching system and the calibration manifol d. In this instance, the ambient manifold is a T-type design that is being utilized with a blow er fan at the terminal. Teflon® tubing connects the manifold to the solenoid switching system. Two-way solenoids have two configurations. Either the solenoid is in its passive state, at which time the ports that are connected are the normally open (NO) and the common (COM). In th e other state, when it is energized, the ports that are connected are the normally closed (N C) and the COM ports. Depending on whether the solenoid is ‘active’ or not, the solenoid routes the air from the calibration or ambient manifold to

the instrument inlets. There are two configurations that can be instituted with this system.

1. Ambient Mode: In this mode the solenoids are in “passive” state. The flow of air (under vacuum) is routed from the NO port through the solenoid to the COM port.

2. Calibration Mode: In this mode, the solenoids are in the “active” state. An external switching device, usually the DAS, must suppl y direct current to the solenoid. This causes the solenoid to be energized so that the NO port is shut and the NC port is now connected to the COM port. As in all cases , the COM port is always selected. The switching of the solenoid is done in conj unction with the MFC unit becoming active; Burden's Creek Sampling Station - OAQPS/MQAG

Environics 9100 Cal Sys TECO 42CY TL

NOx

TECO 43CTL
SO2

TECO 48CTL

CO P

V V S S S S F

V

Other Monitor (O3 etc) C C C C

NC NC NC NC

NO NO NO NO External Moly
Converter Sampling Cane

Manifold Fan

Charcoal
Scrubber 4-ft

Notes: S - Teflon 3-way Solenoid P - Pump
F - Manifold Fan/Blower

V - Vent

- Particulate Filte r Sample tubing lengths < 3-ft Cal Standard (triblend) Temp /
Pressure/RH

Calibration Manifold A mbient Sampling Manifold

UPS Power Supply Zero Air
Source Cal NOy

NO

Sample In

EnviDAS Data

A cquisition System

A nalog Inputs - To Analyzers /

Sensors Control Outputs

- To Environics

Cal Sys Control Out- To Solenoids

Modem

Desktop SystemQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix F

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 13



### generally, the MFC is controlled by the DAS . When the calibration sequences have finished, the DAS stops the direct current from being sent to the solenoid and switches automatically back to the NO to COM (inactiv e) port configuration. This allows the air to flow through the NO to COM port and the instrument is now back on ambient mode.

Air Flow to the Analyzers N O N C

N O N O N C N C

COM Calibration

Gas from the Mass
Flow Calibrator Exhaust Air Flow Air Flow Air Flow

to

Exhaust
Fan

Air Flow Air Flow Air Flow



### Figure 7. Ambient – Calibration Manifold Interface

Reference

1. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 58, Appendix E.9QA Handbook Vol II, Appendix G

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 3



# Appendix G

Example Procedure for Calibrating a Data Acquisition SystemQA Handbook Vol II, Appendix G

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 3



### This page left blank intentionallyQA Handbook Vol II, Appendix G

Revision No: 0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 3



## DAS Calibration Technique

The following is an example of a DAS calib ration. The DAS owner’s manual should be followed. The calibration of a DAS is perfor med by inputting known voltages into the DAS and measuring the output of the DAS.

1. The calibration begins by obtaining a vo ltage source and an ohm/voltmeter.

2. Place a wire lead across the input of the DAS multiplexer. With this "shorted" out, the

DAS should read zero.

3. If the output does not read zero, adjust the output according to the owners manual.

4. After the background zero has been determine d, it is time to adjust the full scale of the system. Most DAS system work on a 1, 5 or 10 volt range, i.e., the full scale equals an output of voltage. In the case of a 0 - 1000 ppb range instrument, 1.00 volts equals 1000 ppb. Accordingly, 500 ppb equals 0.5 volts (500 m ilivolts). To get the DAS to be linear throughout the range of the instrument bei ng measured, the DAS must be tested for linearity.

5. Attach the voltage source to a voltmeter. Ad just the voltage source to 1.000 volts (this is critical that the output be 1.000 volts ) . Attach the output of the voltage source the DAS multiplexer. The DAS should read 1000 ppb. Adjust the DAS voltage A/D card accordingly. Adjust the output of the vo ltage source to 0.250 volts. The DAS output should read 250 ppb. Adjust the A/D card in the DAS accordingly. Once you have adjusted in the lower range of the DAS, ch eck the full scale point. With the voltage source at 1.000 volts, the output should be 1000 p pb. If it isn't, then adjust the DAS to allow the high and low points to be as close to the source volta ge as possible. In some cases, the linearity of the DAS ma y be in question. If this oc curs, the data collected may need to be adjusted using a linear regre ssion equation. See Section 2.0.9 for details on data adjustment. The critical range for many instruments is in the lower 10 % of the

scale. It is critical that this be linear.

6. Every channel on a DAS should be calibrated. In some newer DAS systems, there is only one A/D card voltage adjustment which is carried throughout the multiplexer. This usually will adjust all channels. It is reco mmended that DAS be calibrated once per year.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 1 of 48



## United States Environmental Protection Agency

National Ambient Air Monitoring Technical Systems Audit Checklist

This version attached is very si milar to the checklist in the 2008 QA Handbook. It is an example that has been modified for use in EPA Region 5.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 2 of 48



### Page intentionally left blankQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 3 of 48

Table of Contents

1) General / Quality Management a) Program Organization b) Facilities c) Independent Quality Assurance and Quality Control d) Planning Documents (including QMP, QAPPs, & SOPs) e) General Documentation Policies f) Training g) Corrective Action h) Quality Improvement i) External Performance Audits 2) Network Management / Field Operations a) Network Design b) Changes to the Network since the last audit c) Proposed changes to the Network d) Field Support i) SOPs ii) Instrument Acceptance iii) Calibration iv) Repair v) Record Keeping vi) Site and Monitor Information Form 3) Laboratory Operations a) Routine Operations b) Quality Control c) Laboratory Preventive Maintenance d) Laboratory Record Keeping e) Laboratory Data Acquisition and Handling f) Specific Pollutants: PM10,PM 2.5 and Lead 4) Data and Data Management a) Data Handling b) Software Documentation c) Data Validation and Correction d) Data Processing e) Internal Reporting f) External ReportingQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 4 of 48



### a) 

## Program Organization

Key Individuals

Agency Director:

Ambient Air Monitoring (AAM) Network Manager:

Quality Assurance Manager:

QA Auditors:

Field Operations Supervisor / Lead:

Laboratory Supervisor:

QA Laboratory Manager:

Data Management Supervisor / Lead: 

## 1) General / Quality Management

State/ Local / Tribal Agency Audited:

Address:

City, State, and Zip Code:

Date of Technical System Audit:

Auditor / Agency:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 5 of 48

Attach an Organizational Chart:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 6 of 48

Comment on the need for addition al personnel if applicable.

List personnel who have authority or are responsible for: Activity Name Title QA Training Field/Lab Grant Management Purchases greater than $500 Equipment and Service Contract Management Staff appointment Flow Chart:

Key position staffing. Number of personnel availa ble to each of the following program areas: Program Area N umber of People Primary N umber of People Backup Vacancies Program Area N umber of People Primary N umber of People Backup Vacancies

N etwork Design and Siting Data and Data Management QC activities Equipment repair and

maintenance QA activities Financial Management List available personnel by name and percent age of time spent on each task category.

Name Network Design and Siting QC

Activities QA

Activities Equipment repair and

maintenance Data and

Data Management Financial ManagementQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 48



### b) 

## Facilities

Identify the principal facilities where the age ncy conducts work that is related to air monitoring. Do not include monitoring

stations but do include fa cilities where work is performed by cont ractors or other organizations.

Facility AAM Function Offices responsible for ensuring adequacy Location Adequate Y/N To be completed by auditor

Instrument repair,

Certification of Standards e.g. gases, flow transfers, MFC, PM filter weighing,

Data verification and processing, General office space,

Storage space, short and long

term, Air Toxics (Carbonyls, VOCs, Metals): Indicate any facilities that should be upgraded. Identify by function:

Are facilities adequate concerning safety? Yes No

Please explain if answer is no:

Suggested improvements or recommendations for the items above:

Are there any significant changes which are likely to be implemented to agency facilitie s within the next one to two years? Comment on agency’s needs for additional physical space (laboratory, office, storage, etc.).

Facility Function Proposed Change - DateQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 8 of 48



### c) 

## Independent Quality Assurance and Quality Control

Status of Quality Assurance Program

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency perform QA activities with internal personnel? If no go to Section d. Does the agency maintain a separate laboratory to support quality assurance activities? Has the agency documented and implemented specific audit procedures separate from monitoring procedures? Are there two levels of management separation between QA and QC operations? Please describe

below:

Does the agency have identifiable auditing equipment and standards (specifically intended for sole use) for

audits?



### Internal Performance Audits

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency have separate facilities to support

audits and calibrations? If the agency has in place contracts or simila r agreements either with another agency or contractor to perform audits or calibr ations, please name the organization and briefly describe the type of agreement.

If the agency does not have a performance audit SOP (included as an attachment), please describe performance audit procedure fo r each type of pollutant.

Does the agency maintain independence of audit standards and personnel?

Please provide information on certification of audit standards currently being used. Include information on vendor and interna l or

external certification of standards.

Does the agency have a certified source of zero air for performance audits? Does the agency have pro cedures for auditing and/or validating performance of Meteorological monitoring?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 48

Please provide a list of the agency’s audit equipment and age of audit equipment.

Is audit equipment ever used to support routine calibration and QC checks required for monitoring network operations? If yes, please describe.

Are standard operating pr ocedures (SOPs) for air monitoring available to all field personnel?

Has the agency established and has it documented criteria to define agency-acceptable audit results?

Please complete the table below with the pollutant, monitor and acceptance criteria.

Pollutant How is performance tracked (e.g., control charts) Audit Result Acceptance Criteria

CO

O3

NO2

SO2

PM10

PM2.5

Pb

VOCs

Carbonyls

PM2.5 speciation

PM10-2.5 speciation

PM10-2.5 FRM Mass

Continuous PM2.5

Trace Levels (CO)

Trace Levels (SO2)

Trace Levels (NO)

Trace Levels (NOy)

Surface Meteorology

OthersQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 10 of 48

Question Yes No Comment
Were these audit criteria based on, or derived from, the guidance found in Volume II of the QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement System, Section 10.3? If no, please explain.

If yes, please explain any changes or assumptions made in the derivation.

What corrective action may be taken if criteria are exceeded? If possible, indicate two examples of corrective actions, taken within the period since the previous systems audit which are based directly on the criteria discussed above.

Corrective Action # 1

Corrective Action #2QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 48



### d) 

## Planning Documents (incl uding QMP, QAPP, & SOPs)

QMP questions Yes No Comment Does the agency have an EPA-approved quality management plan?

If yes, have changes to the plan been approved by

the EPA?

Has the QMP been approved by EPA within the last five years?

Please provide: Date of Original Approval: Date of Last Revision: Date of Latest Approval:


### QAPP questions Yes No Comment

Does the agency have an EPA-approved quality assurance project plan?

If yes, have changes to the plan been approved by

the EPA?

Has the QAPP been reviewed by EPA annually?

Please provide: Date of Original Approval: Date of Last Revision: Date of Latest Approval: Does the agency have any revisions to your QA project plan still pending?

How does the agency verify the QA pr oject plan is fully implemented?

How are the updates distributed?

What personnel regularly receive updates?



### SOP questions

Has the agency prepared and implemented standard operating procedures (SOP s) for all facets of agency operation?

Do the SOPs adequately address ANSI/ASQC E-4 quality system required by 40 CFR 58, Appendix

A?

Are copies of the SOP or pertinent sections available to agency personnel?

How does the agency verify that the SOPs are implemented as provided? How are the updates distributed?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 12 of 48



### e) 

## General Documentation Policies

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency have a documented records management plan?

Does the agency have a list of file s considered official records and their media type i.e., paper, electronic?

Does the agency have a schedule for retention and disposition of

records?

Are records for at least three years?

Who is responsible for the storage and retrieval of records?

What security measures are utilized to protect records?

Where/when does the agency rely on electronic files as primary

records?
What is the system for the storage, retrieval and backup of these

files?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 48

Indicate below the three most recent tr aining events and identify the personnel participating in them.

Event Dates Participant(s) 

### f) 

## Training

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency have a training program and training plan?

Where is it documented?

Does it make use of seminars, courses, EPA sponsored college level courses?
Are personnel cross-trained for other ambient air monitoring duties?
Are training funds specifi cally designated in the annual budget?
Does the training plan include: Training requirements by position

Frequency of training

Training for contract personnel

A list of core QA related coursesQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 14 of 48



### g) 

## Oversight of Contractors and Suppliers

Questions about Contractors Yes No Comment Who is responsible for oversight of contract personnel?

What steps are taken to ensure contract personnel meet training and experience criteria?

How often are contracts reviewed and/or renewed?

Questions about Suppliers

Have criteria and specification b een established for consumable supplies and for equipment? What supplies and equipment have established specifications?

Is equipment from suppliers open for bid?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 15 of 48



### h) 

## Corrective Action

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency have a comprehensive corrective action program in place and operational?
Have the procedures been documented?

As a part of the QA project plan?

As a separate standard operating procedure?

Does the agency have established and do cumented corrective limits for QA and QC activities?
Are procedures implemented for corrective actions based on results of the following which fall outsid e the established limits:

Performance evaluations?

Precision goals?

Bias goals?

NPAP audits?

PEP audits?

Validations of one point QC check goals?

Completeness goals?

Data audits?

Calibrations and zero span checks?

Technical Systems Audit findings?

Have the procedures been documented?

How is responsibility for implementing corrective actions assigned? Briefly discuss.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 16 of 48

How does the agency follow up on implemented corrective actions?

Briefly describe recent examples of the ways in which the above corrective action system was employed to remove problems.



### i) 

## Quality Improvement

Question Yes No Comment What actions were taken to improve the quality system since the last TSA?

Since the last TSA do your control charts indicate that the overall data quality for each pollutant steady or improving? For areas where data quality appears to be declining has a cause been

determined?

Have all deficiencies indicted on the previous TSA been corrected?

If not explain.

Are there pending plans for quality improvement such as purchase of new or improved equipment, standards, or instruments?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 17 of 48



### j) 

## External Performance Audits

Question Yes No Comment Does your agency par ticipate in NPAP, PM 2.5 PEP, Pb PEP Pb Strip Audit, AA_PGVP and other performance audits performed by an external party and/or using external

standards? If the agency does not particip ate, please explain why not.

Are NPAP audits performed by QA staff, site operators, calibration staff, and/or another group?

National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) and Additional Audits Does the agency participate in the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) as required under 40 CFR 58, Appendix A? If so, identify the individual with primary responsibility for the require d participation in the National Performance Audit Program. Name: Program Function:

Please complete the table below:

Parameter Audited Date of Last NPAP Audit

CO

O 3

SO 2

NO 2

PM 10

PM 2.5

Pb

VOCs

Carbonyls

Trace CO

Trace SO 2

Trace NO

Trace NO YQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 18 of 48



## 2) Network Management/Field Operations

State/Local/Tribal Agency Audited:

Address:

City, State, and Zip Code:

Auditor / Agency:

Key Individuals

Ambient Air Monitoring Network Manager:

Quality Assurance Manager:

Field Operations Supervisor/Lead:

Field Operations Staff involved in the TSA:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 19 of 48



### a) 

## Network Design

Complete the table below for each of the pollutants monitored as part of your air monitoring network. (Record applicable count by category.) Also indicate seas onal monitoring with an S for a Paramet er/Category as appropriate. Provide the

most recent annual moni toring network plan, including date of approval and AQS quick look or if not available, network description and other similar summary of site data, including SLAMS, Other and Toxics. Category* SO2 NO2 CO O3 PM10 PM2.5 Pb Other (type) Other (type)

NCore

SLAMS

SPM

PAMS

Total *NCore - National Core monitoring stations; SLAMS - state and local air monitoring stations; SPM - special purpose monitors; PAMS - photochemical assessment monitoring stations

Question Yes No Comment What is the date of the most current Monitoring Network Plan?

Is it available for public inspection?

Does it include the informa tion required for each site?

AQS Site ID #?

Street address and geographic coordinates?

Sampling and Analysis Method(s)?

Operating Schedule?

Monitoring Objective and Sc ale of Representativeness?

Site suitable/not suitable for comparison to annual PM2.5 NAAQS?

MSA, CBSA or CSA indi cated as required?

Indicate by AQS Site ID # any non-conformance with the requirements of 40 CFR 58, Appendices D and E along with any waivers granted by the Regional Office (provide waiver documentation).

Monitor Site ID Reason for Non-Conformance

SO 2

O 3

CO

NO 2

PM 10

PM 2.5

PbQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 20 of 48

Question Yes No Comment Are hard copy site information files retained by the agency for all air monitoring

stations within the network? Does each station have the required information including:

AQS Site ID Number?

Photographs/slides to the four cardinal compass points?

Startup and shutdown dates?

Documentation of instrumentation?

Who has custody of the current network documents Name:

Title: Does the current level of monitoring e ffort, station placement, instrumentation, etc., meet requirements imposed by current grant conditions? How often is the network siting reviewed? Frequency:

Date of last review:

Are there any issues?

Do any sites vary from the required frequency in 40 CFR 58.12?

Does the number of collocated monitoring stations meet the requirements of 40 CFR 58 Appendix A?



### b) 

## Changes to the Network since the last audit

What is the date of the most recent network assessment? (Pro vide copy) Are all SLAMS parameters included? Any others?

Please provide information on any site changes since the last audit.

Pollutant Site ID Site Address Site

Added/Deleted/

Relocated Reason (Assessment, lost lease, etc. Provide documentation of reason for each site change.)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 21 of 48



### c) 

## Proposed changes to the Network

Are future network changes proposed? Please provide information on proposed site changes, including docum entation of the need for the chan ge and any required approvals

Pollutant Site ID Site Address Site to be

Added/Deleted/

Relocated Reason (Assessment, lost lease, etc. Provide documentation of reason for each site change.)



### d) 

## Field Support

Question Yes No Comment On average, how often are most of your stations visited by a field operator? Is this visit frequency consistent for all reporting organizations within your agency? On average, how many stations does a single operator have responsibility for?

How many of the stations of your SLAMS/NCORE network are equipped with sampling manifolds? Do the sample inlets and manifolds meet the requirements for through the probe

audits?

I. Briefly describe most common manifold type.

II. Are Manifolds cleaned periodically? How often?

III. If the manifold is cleaned, what is used to perform cleaning?

IV. Are manifold(s) equipped with a blower?

V. Is there sufficient air flow thro ugh the manifold at all times? Approximate air flow:

VI. How is the air flow through the manifold monitored?

VII. Is there a conditioning period fo r the manifold after cleaning? Length of time:

VIII. What is the residence time?

Sampling lines: What material is used for instrument sampling lines?

Are lines changed or cleaned once per year?

Do you utilize uninterruptable power supplies or backup power sources at your sites? What instruments or devices are protected?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 22 of 48



### i) SOPs

Question Yes No Comment Is the documentation of monitoring SOPs complete?

Are any new monitoring SOPs needed?

Are such procedures available to all field operations personnel?

Are SOPs that detail operations during episode monitoring prepared and available to field personnel?

Are SOPs based on the framework contained in Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating Procedures EPA QA/G-6?

Please complete the following table:

Pollutant Monitored Date of Last SOP Review Date of Last SOP Revision

SO 2

NO 2

CO

O 3

PM 10

PM 2.5 FRM mass

Pb

PM 2.5 speciation

PM 10-2.5 FRM mass

PM 10-2.5 speciation

Continuous PM 2.5 mass

Trace levels (CO)

Trace levels (SO 2 )

Trace levels (NO)

Trace levels (NO y ) Total reactive nitrogen

Surface Meteorology Wind speed and direction, te mperature, RH, precipitation

and solar radiation

Other parametersQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 23 of 48 

### ii) Instrument Acceptance

Has your agency obtained necessary waiver provisions to operate equipment which does not meet the effective reference and equivalency requirements? List all waivers.

Please list instruments in your inventory

Pollutant Number Make and Models Reference or Equivalent

number

SO 2 NO 2 CO

O 3 PM 10 PM 2.5 Pb Multi gas calibrator

PM 2.5 speciation

PM 10-2.5 speciation

PM 10-2.5 FRM mass

Continuous PM 2.5 mass Trace levels (CO)
Trace levels (SO 2 )
Trace levels (NO)
Trace levels (NO y ) Surface Meteorology

Others

Please comment briefly and prioritize your cu rrently identified instrument needs.

Question Yes No Comment Are criteria established for field QC equipment?

Are criteria established for field QC gas standards?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 24 of 48

Question Yes No Comment Are field calibration procedures included in the document?

SOPs? Location (site, lab etc.):

Are calibrations performed in keeping with the guidance in Vol. II of the QA Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems? If no, why not?

Are calibration procedures cons istent with the operational requirements of Appendices to 40 CFR 50 or to analyzer operation/instruction manuals? If no, why not?

Have changes been made to calibration methods based on manufacturer’s suggestions for a particular instrument?

Do standard materials used for ca librations meet the requirements of appendices to 40 CFR 50 (EPA reference methods) andAppendix A to 40 CFR 58 (traceability of materials to NISTSRMs or CRMs)? Comment on deviations

Are all flow-measurement devi ces checked and certified?

Additional comments:

Please list the authoritative standards us ed for each type of flow measurement, indicate the certification frequency of

standards to mainta in field material/device credibility.

Flow Device Primary Standard Frequency of Certification

Hi-Volume orifice

Streamline

TriCal

BIOS

Delta Cal

Gilibrators 

### iii) Calibration

Please indicate the frequency of multi point calibrations.

Pollutant Frequency Name of Calibration MethodQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 25 of 48

Where do field operations personnel obtain gaseous standards?

Standards are certified by:

The agency laboratory?

EPA/NERL standards laboratory?

A laboratory separate from this agency’s but part of the same reporting organization?

The vendor?

Other (describe).

How are the gas standards verified after receipt?

How are flow measurement devices certified?

Please provide copies of certifica tions of all standards currently in use from your master and/or satellite standard certification logbooks (i.e., chemical standa rds, ozone standards, flow standards, and zero air standards). What equipment is used to perform calibrations (e.g., dilution devices) and how is the performance of this equipment verified? Does the documentation include expiration date of

certification? Reference to primary standard used?

What traceability is used?

Please attach an example of r ecent documentation of traceability

Is calibration equipment maintained at each station?

How is the functional integrity of this equipment documented?

Who has responsibility for maintaining field calibration standards?

Please list the authoritative standards and frequency of each type of dilution, permeation and ozone calibrator and indicate th e certification frequency.

Calibrator Primary Standard Frequency of Certification

Permeation calibrator flow controller

Permeation calibrator temperature

Dilution calibrator air and gas flow

controllers Field/working standard photometer

Ozone generatorQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 26 of 48

Please identify station standard s for gaseous pollutants at representative air monitoring stations (attach additional sheets as appropriate):

Parameter Station(s) Identification of Standard(s) Recertification Date(s)

CO

NO 2

SO 2

O 3



### iv) Repair

Who is responsible for performing preventive maintenance?

Is special training provided them for performing preventive maintenance? Briefly comment on background or courses.

Is this training routinely reinforced? Yes No

If no, why not?

What is your preventive mainte nance schedule for each type of field instrumentation?

If preventive maintenance is MINO R, it is performed at (check one or more): field station , headquarters facilities

, equipment is sent to manufacturer

.

If preventive maintenance is MAJO R, it is performed at (check one or more): field station , headquarters facilities

, equipment is sent to manufacturer

.

Does the agency have service contracts or agreements in pl ace with instrument manufacturers? Indicate below or attach additional pages to show which instrumentation is covered?

Comment briefly on the adequacy and availability of the supply of spare parts, tools and manuals available to the field operato r to perform any necessary maintenance activities. Do you feel that this is adequate to prevent any significant data loss?

Is the agency currently experiencing an y recurring problem with equipment or ma nufacturer(s)? If so, please identify the equipment or manufacturer, and comment on steps taken to remedy the problem.

Have you lost any data due to repairs in the last 2 years?

More than 24 hours?

More than 48 hours?

More than a week?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 27 of 48

Explain any situations where instrument down time was due to lack of preventive maintenance of unavailability of parts.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 28 of 48



### v) RECORD KEEPING

Question Yes No Comment What type of station logbooks ar e maintained at each monitoring station? (maintenance logs, calib ration logs, personal logs, etc.)

What information is included in the station logbooks?

Who reviews and verifies the logbooks for adequacy of station performance?

How is control of logbook maintained?

Where is the completed logbook archived?

What other records are used?

Zero span record?

Gas usage log?

Maintenance log?

Log of precision checks?

Control charts?

A record of audits?

Please describe the use and storage of these documents.

Are calibration records or at least calibration constants available to field operators?

Please attach an example field calibration record sheet to this questionnaire.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 29 of 48



### vi) Site Information and monitor Information

PQAO:

AQS Site Name:

AQS Site Number:

Agency Site Name/No.: (if different than AQS Site Name/Number)

Site Address:

City & County:

Site Coordinates: (specify lat/long or UTM)

Site Elevation (m):

Criteria Pollutants Monitored:

Other Parameters:

Nearest Meteorological Site: (‘on site’ is met tower present at this site)

Photographs to and from each cardinal direction attached? (Yes or No)

Name(s) of Report Preparer(s):

Name(s) of Auditors:

Date:

Phone Number:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 30 of 48

Site Map Draw map of site and surrounding terrain and features, up to 100 meters.

Map notesQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 31 of 48

Monitor Information

Pollutants

Manufacturer

Model

Serial number

Scale of representation Micro, Middle, Neighborhood, Urban Objective (Population, Max concentration, Background, Transport) Height of probe above ground(m)

Distance from obstruction (m)

Type of obstruction (Wall, Tree, etc)

Distance from roadway (m)

Unrestricted airflow (Yes, No)

Designation (NCore, SLAMS, etc)

Siting Criteria Met (Yes, No)

Pollutants

Manufacturer

Model

Serial number

Scale of representation Micro, Middle, Neighborhood, Urban Averaging time 1-, 8-, 24-hour

Objective (Population, Max concentration, Background, Transport) Height of probe above ground(m)

Distance from obstruction (m)

Type of obstruction (Wall, Tree, etc)

Distance from roadway (m)

Unrestricted airflow (Yes, No)

Designation (NCore, SLAMS, etc)

Siting Criteria Met (Yes, No)QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 32 of 48

Insert additional copies of table as needed:

Area Information

Street Name Traffic Count (Vehicles/day)

Direction Predominant Land Use (Industry, Residential, Commercial or Agriculture)

North

East

South

West

Direction Obstructions Height (m) Distance (m)

North

East

South

West

Note: This table is for large obstructions that affect the entire site, such as larg e clusters of trees or entire buildings. Individual obstructions, such as walls, sing le trees, other monitors, etc, should be entered in the Monitor Information table.

Direction Topographic Features (hills, valleys, rivers, etc.) General Terrain (flat, rolling, rough)

North

East

South

West

Comments:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 33 of 48



## 3) Laboratory Operations

State/Local/Tribal Agency Audited:

City, State, and Zip Code:

Date of Technical System Audit:

Auditor / Agency:

Key Individuals

Laboratory Manager:

Laboratory Supervisor:

Quality Assurance Manager:

Laboratory Staff involved in the TSA:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 34 of 48



### a) 

## Routine Operations

What analytical methods are employed in support of your air monitoring network?

Analysis Name or Description of Method

PM10

PM2.5

Pb
Others (list by pollutant)

1. Please describe areas where there have been difficulties mee ting the regulatory requirements for any of the above analytical

methods.

In the table below, please identify the curr ent versions of written methods, supplement s, and guidelines that are used in your agency.

Analysis Documentation of Method

PM10

PM2.5

Pb

Others (list by pollutant)

Question Yes No Comment Were procedures for the methods listed above included in the agency’s QAAP or SOPs and were they reviewed by EPA? Also, are SOPs easily/readily accessible for use and reference?
Does you lab have sufficient instrumentation to conduct analyses?

Please describe needs for laboratory instrumentationQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 35 of 48



### b) 

## Laboratory Quality Control

Please identify laboratory standards used in support of the air monitoring program, including standards which may be kept in an analytical laboratory and standards which may be kept in a field support area or quality assurance laboratory that is

dedicated to the air monitori ng program (attach additional sheets if appropriate):

Parameter Location of

Standards Laboratory

Standard Recertification Date Primary Standard*

CO

NO2

SO2

O3

Weights

Temperature

Moisture

Barometric Pressure

Flow

Other Flow Standard

Lead

Other

*Standards to which the labora tory standards can be traced.

Question Yes No Comment Are all chemicals and solutions clearly marked with an

indication of shelf life?

Are chemicals removed and properly disposed of when shelf life expires?

Are only ACS grade chemicals used by the laboratory?

Comment on the traceability of ch emicals used in the preparatio n of calibration standards.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 36 of 48

Question Yes No Comment Does the laboratory purchase standard solutions such as those for use with lead or other metals analysis? Are all calibration procedures documented?

If answer “yes” to (f), please describe the following:

Title of the document:

Revision number:

Where the document is:

Are at least one duplicate, one blank, and one standard or spike included with a given analytical batch? Briefly describe the laboratory’s use of data derived from blank analyses.

Question Yes No Comment

Are criteria established to determine whether a blank data are acceptable?

How frequently and at what concentration ranges does the lab perform duplicate analysis? What constitutes an acceptable agreement? Please commen t in the space below.

Please describe how the lab use data obtained from spiked samp les, including the acceptance cr iteria (e.g., acceptable percent recovery).QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 37 of 48

Question Yes No Comment Does the laboratory routinely include samples of reference material within an analytical batch? If yes, indicate frequency, level, and material used.

Are mid-range standards includ ed in analytical batches?

Please describe the frequency, level and comp ound used in the space provided below.

Are criteria for real time quality control established that

are based on the results ob tained for the mid-range

standards discussed above? If yes, briefly discuss them below or indicate the document in which they can be found.

Are appropriate acceptance criteria for each type of analysis documented?



### c) 

## Laboratory Preventive Maintenance

Question Yes No Comment For laboratory equipment, who has the responsibility for performing preventive maintenance?

Is most maintenance performed in the lab?

Is a maintenance log maintained for each major laboratory instrument? Are service contracts in pl ace for major analytical

instruments?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 38 of 48



### d) 

## Laboratory Record Keeping

Question Yes No Comment Are all samples that are received by the laboratory logged

in? Discuss sample routing and special needs for analysis (or attach a copy of the latest SOP which covers this). Attach a flow ch art if possible.

Are log books kept for all analytical laboratory

instruments? Are there log books or othe r records that indicate the

checks made on materials and instruments such as weights, humidity indicators, balances, and thermometers? Identify type of record, acceptable/n on-acceptable.

Are log books maintained to track the preparation of filters

for the field?

Are they current?

Do they indicate proper use of conditioning?

Weightings?

Stamping and numbering?

Are log books kept which track filters returning from the field for analysis?

How are data records from the laboratory archived?

Where?

Who has the responsibility?

Title:

How long are records kept? Years

Does a chain-of-custody procedure exist for laboratory samples?

If yes, indicate date, title and revision number where it can be found.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 39 of 48



### e) 

## Laboratory Data Acquisition and Handling

Question Yes No Comment Identify those laboratory instruments which make use of computer interfaces directly to record data. Which ones use strip chart s? Integrators?

Are QC data readily available to the analyst during a given analytical run? What is the laboratory’s capability with regard to data recovery? In case of probl ems, can they recapture data or are they depe ndent on computer operations? Discuss briefly.

Has a user’s manual been prepared for the automated data acquisition instrumentation? Please provide below a data flow diagram which establishes, by a short summary flow chart: transcriptions, validations, and reporting format changes the da ta goes through before being released by the laboratory.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 40 of 48



### f) 

## Specific Pollutants: PM 10 

## , PM 2.5 

## and Lead

Question Yes No Comment

PM10 and PM2.5

Does the agency use filters supplied by EPA?

Do filters meet the specifications in 40 CFR 50?

Are filters visually inspected via strong light from a view box for pinholes and other imperfections? Where does the laboratory keep records of the serial numbers

of filters? Are unexposed filters equilibrated in cont rolled conditioning environment which meets or exceeds the requirements of 40 CFR

50?

Are the temperature and relative humidity of the conditioning

environment monitored?

Are the temperature and humidity monitors calibrated?

Are balances checked with Class S or Class M weights each day when they are used?

Is the balance check informat ion placed in QC log book?

To what sensitivity are filter weights recorded?

Are filter serial numbers and tare weights recorded in a

bound notebook? Are filters packaged for protec tion while transporting to and from the monitoring stations? How often are filter samples collected? (Indicate the averageelapsed time in hours between end of sampling and laboratory receipt.) In what medium are field measurements recorded (e.g., in a log book, on a filter folder, or on standard forms)?

Are exposed filters reconditioned for at least 24 hrs in the same conditioning environment as for unexposed filters?

Briefly describe how exposed filters are prepared for conditioning.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 41 of 48

Briefly describe how exposed filters are stored after being weighed.

Are blank filters reweighed? How often?

Are chemical analyses performed on filters?

LEAD Is analysis for lead being co nducted using atomic absorption spectrometry with ai r acetylene flame? If not, has the agency received an equivalency designation of their procedure?

Is either the hot acid or ultr asonic extraction procedure being followed precisely? Which?

Is Class A borosilicate glassware used throughout the analysis? Is all glassware cleaned with detergent, soaked and rinsed

three times with distilled or de-ionized water? If extracted samples are stored, are linear polyethylene

bottles used? Are all batches of glass fiber filters tested for background

lead content? At a rate of 20 to 30 random filters per batch of 500 or greater? Indicate rate.

Are ACS reagent grade HNO3 and HCl used in the analysis?

Is a calibration curve available having concentrations that cover the linear absorption range of the atomic absorption

instrumentation? Is the stability of the calibration curve checked by alternately re-measuring every 10th sample a concentration of < = 1ug Pb/ml; < = 10 ug Pb/ml?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 42 of 48



## 4) DATA AND DATA MANAGEMENT

State/Local/Tribal Agency Audited:

City, State, and Zip Code:

Date of Technical System Audit:

Auditor / Agency:

Key Individuals

Data Manager:

Data Supervisor:

Quality Assurance Manager:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 43 of 48



### a) 

## Data Handling

Question Yes No Comment Is there a procedure, description, or a chart which shows a complete data sequence from point of acquisition to point of submission of data

to EPA? Please provide below a data flow diagram indicating both the data flow within the reporting organization.

Are procedures for data handling (e.g., data reduction, review, etc.)

documented? In what media (e.g., diskette, data cartridge, or telemetry) an d formats do data arrive at th e data processing location? Pleas e list

below.

Category of Data (by Pollutant) Data Media and Formats

How often are data received at the processing location from the field sites and laboratory?

Is there documentation accompanying the data regarding any media changes, transcriptions, or flags which have been placed into the data before data are released to ag ency internal data processing? Describe the type of documentation.

How data are actually entered to the computer system (e.g., computerized transcription (copy from disk or data transfer device)

, manual entry, digitization of strip charts, or other)?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 44 of 48



### b) 

## Software Documentation

Question Yes No Comment Does your agency use any AQS Manual?

Does your agency use any Air Now Manual?

If yes, list the title of manual used including the, version number and date published.

Does the agency have information on the reporting of precision and accuracy data available (i.e. AMP 255)? What are the origins of the software used to prepare air monitoring data for releas e into the AQS and Air Now database? Please list the documentation for the software currently in use for data processing, including the names of the software packages, vendor o r author, revision numbers, and the revision dates of the software.

What is the recovery capability in the event of a significant co mputer problem (i.e., how much time and data would be lost)?

Has your agency tested the data processing software to ensure its performance of the intended function is consistent with the QA Handbook, Volume II, and Section 14.0? Does your agency document software tests?

If yes, provide the documentation.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 45 of 48



### c) 

## Data Validation and Correction

Question Yes No Comment Have your agency established and document the

validation criteria? If yes, indicate document where such criteria can be found (title, revision date).

Does documentation exist on the identification and applicability of flags (i.e., identification of suspect values) within the data as recorded with the data in the computer files? Does your agency document the data validation criteria including limits for values such as flow rates, calibration results, or range tests for ambient measurements?

If yes, please describe what action the data validation will take if he/she fined data with limits exceeded (e.g., flags, modif ies, or delete, etc.)

If yes, give examples to illustrate actions taken when limits were exceeded.

Please describe how changes made to data that were submitted to AQS and Air Now are documented.

Who has signature authority for approving corrections?

Name: Program Function:

What criteria are used to determine a data point is deleted? Discuss briefly.

What criteria are used to determine if data need to be reprocessed? Discuss.

Are corrected data resubmitted to the issuing group for cross-checking prior to release?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 46 of 48



### d) 

## Data Processing

Question Yes No Comment Does the agency generate data summary reports?

Please list at least three reports routinely generate d, including the information requested below.

Report Title Distribu tion Period Covered

Question Yes No Comment
How often are data submitted to AQS and Air Now? Briefly comment on difficulties the agency may have encountered in coding and submitting data following the guidance of the AQS guidelines? Does the agency routinely request a hard copy printout on submitted data from AQS? Are records kept for at least 3 years by the agency in an orderly, accessible form?

If yes, does this include raw data , calculation , QC data , And reports ?

If no, please comment.

Has your agency submitted data along with the appropriate calibration equations used to the processing

center? Are concentrations of pollutants (other than PM2.5) corrected to EPA standard temperature and pressure conditions (i.e., 298 K, 760 mm Hg) before input to AQS, and concentrations of PM2.5 reported to AQS under actual (volumetric) conditions? I) Are audits on data reduction procedure performed on a

routine basis?

If yes, at what frequency?

Are data precision and accuracy checked each time they are calculated, recorded, or transcribed to ensure that

incorrect values are not submitted to EPA?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 47 of 48



### e) 

## Internal Reporting

What internal reports are prepared and submitted as a result of the audits required under 40 CFR 58, Appendix A?

Report Title Frequency

What internal reports are prepared and su bmitted as a result of precision checks also required under 40 CFR 58, Appendix A?

Report Title Frequency

Question Yes No Comment Do either the audit or preci sion check reports indicated

include a discussion of corrective actions initiated based on audit or precision check results?

Who has the responsibility for the calculation and preparation of data summaries? To whom are such summaries delivered?

Name Title Type of Report RecipientQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix H

Revision No: 1.0

Date: 05/13 Page 48 of 48



### f) 

## External Reporting

For the current calendar year or portion thereof which ended at least 90 calendar days prior to the receipt of this questionnaire, please provide the following perce ntages for required data submitted on time.

Percent Submitted on Time* Period Covered: Monitoring Qtr. SO2 CO O3 NO2 PM10 PM2.5 Pb
1 (Jan 1 - March 31)

2 (Apr 1 - June 30)

3 (July 1 - Sept. 30)

4 (Oct.1 - Dec. 31)

*"On time" = within 90 calendar d ays after the end of the quarter in which the data were collected.

For the same period, what fraction of the stations (by pollutant) reported less than 75% of the data (adjusted for seasonal monitoring and site star t-ups and terminations)?

Percent of Stations <75% Data Recovery Period Covered: Monitoring Qtr. SO2 CO O3 NO2 PM10 PM2.5 Pb
1 (Jan 1 - March 31)

2 (Apr 1 - June 30)

3 (July 1 - Sept. 30)

4 (Oct.1 - Dec. 31)

Identify the individual within the agency with th e responsibility for reviewin g and releasing the data.

Name : Program Function:

Question Yes No Comment Does your agency report the Air Quality Index?

Has your agency submitted its annual data summary report as required in 40 CFR 58.15(b)? If yes, did your agency’s annual report include the following:

Annual precision and accuracy information (i.e. AMP 255) described in 40 CFR 58.15 (c)? Location, date, pollution source and duration of all episodes reaching the significant harm levels? Is Data Certification signed by a senior officer of your agency?QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 1 of 25



# Appendix I

Examples of Reports to Management

The following example of an annual quality assuran ce report consist of a numb er of sections that describe the quality objectives for selected sets of measurement data and how those objectives

have been met. Sections include:

 

### Executive Summary,

 

### Introduction, and

 

### Quality information for each ambient air pollutant monitoring program.

The report is titled "Acme Reporting Organiza tion, Annual Quality Assurance Report for 2000".QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 2 of 25



## ACME REPORTING ORGANIZATION ANNUAL QUALITY ASSURANCE REPORT FOR 2000

Prepared by

Quality Assurance Department Acme Reporting Organization

110 Generic Office Building
Townone XX, 00001

April 2001QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 3 of 25



### ACME REPORTING ORGANIZATION ANNUAL QUALITY ASSUR ANCE REPORT FOR 2000

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

 Data quality

 Quality assurance procedures

GASEOUS CRITERIA POLLUTANTS

 Program update

 Quality objectives for measurement data

 Data quality assessment

PARTICULATE CRITERIA POLLUTANTS

 Program update

 Quality objectives for measurement data

 Data quality assessment

TOTAL AND SPECIATED VOLA TILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

 Program update

 Quality objectives for measurement data

 Data quality assessment

AIR TOXIC COMPOUNDS

 Program update

 Quality objectives for measurement data

 Data quality assessmentQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 4 of 25



### ACME REPORTING ORGANIZATION ANNUAL QUALITY ASSUR ANCE REPORT FOR 2000

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

This summary describes the Acme Reporting Orga nization's (ARO's) success in meeting its quality objectives for ambient air pollution monitoring data. AR O's attainment of quantitative objectives, such as promptness, completeness, precision, and bias, are shown in Table 1, below. ARO met these objectives for all pollutants, with the exception of nitrogen dioxid e. The failure to meet completeness and timeliness goals for nitrogen dioxide was due to the breakdown of several older analyzers. Replacement parts were installed and the analyzers are now providing data that meet ARO's quality objectives.



### Table 1. Attainment of Quantitative Quality Objectives for Ambient Air Monitoring Data

Measurement Program met objectives for
Promptness Completeness Precision Bias

Air Toxics Yes Yes Yes Yes

Carbon Monoxide Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lead Yes Yes Yes Yes
Nitrogen Dioxide No No Yes Yes

Ozone Yes Yes Yes Yes

Sulfur Dioxide Yes Yes Yes Yes

PM 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes

PM 2.5 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) Yes Yes Yes Yes



### Other quality objectives (for example those concerning siting, recordkeeping, etc.) were assessed via laboratory and field system audits. The results of these audits indicate compliance with ARO's standard operating procedures except for the following:

 

### The Towntwo site was shadowed by a 20 story office building which was recently completed. This site was closed in July 2000.

 

### The Townfour site had problems with vandalism. A new, more secure, fence was installed in April and the sheriff's department increased patrols in the area to prevent reoccurrences.

 

### Newly acquired laboratory analytical instruments did not have maintenance logs. New logs were obtained and personnel were instructed on their use. A spot check, approximately one month later, indicated the new logs were in use.

A review of equipment inventories identified three ol der sulfur dioxide ambient air monitors that, based on our past experience, are likely to experience problems. Cost information and a schedule for replacement has been prepared and submitted to management for funding. Based on this schedule, the

new monitors will be installe d before the end of 2001.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 5 of 25



### INTRODUCTION

The Acme Reporting Organization (ARO) conducts ambien t air monitoring programs for the State Bureau of Environmental Quality and local air quality management districts. These programs involve:

 

### monitoring of criteria pollutants to determin e the National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) attainment status of state and local air quality. This monitoring is conducted as part of the State and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS) and National Air Monitoring Stations (NAMS) networks.

 

### monitoring compounds (volatile organic compounds and nitrogen oxides), referred to as ozone precursors, that can produce the criteria pollutant ozone. This monitoring is conducted as part of the Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS) network.

 

### monitoring toxic air pollutants.

The purpose of this report is to summarize the results of quality assurance activities performed by ARO to ensure that the data meets its quality objectives. This report is organized by ambient air pollutant category (e.g., gaseous criteria pollutants, air toxi cs). The following are discussed for each pollutant

category:

 program overview and update

 quality objectives for measurement data

 data quality assessment



### DATA QUALITY

Data quality is related to the need of users for data of sufficient quality for decision making. Each user specifies their needed data quality in the form of th eir data quality objectives (DQOs). Quality objectives for measurement data are designed to ensure that the end user's DQOs are met. Measurement quality objectives are concerned with both with quantitative objectives (such as representativeness, completeness, promptness, accuracy, precision and detection level) and qualitative objectives (such as site placement, operator training, and sample handling techniques).



### QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES

Quality assurance is a general term for the procedures u sed to ensure that a particular measurement meets the quality requirements for its intended use. In a ddition to performing tests to determine bias and precision, additional quality indicators (such as sensi tivity, representativeness, completeness, timeliness, documentation quality, and sample custody control) ar e also evaluated. Quality assurance procedures fall under two categories:

 

### quality control - procedures built into the daily sampling and analysis methodologies to ensure data quality, and

 

### quality assessment - which refers to periodic outside evaluations of data quality.

Some ambient air monitoring is performed by automa ted equipment located at field sites, while other measurements are made by taking samples from the field to the laboratory for analysis. For this reason, we will divide quality assurance procedures into two parts – field and la boratory quality assurance.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 6 of 25



### Field Quality Assurance

Quality control of automated analyzers and samplers consists of calibration and precision checks. The overall precision of sampling methods is measured using collocated samplers. Quality assurance is evaluated by periodic performance and system audits.

Calibration - Automated analyzers (except ozone) are calib rated by comparing the instrument's response when sampling a cylinder gas standard mixture to the cylinder's known concentrati on level. The analyzer is then adjusted to produce the co rrect response. Ozone analyzers are calibrated by on-site generation of ozone whose concentration is determined by a separat e analyzer which has its calibration traceable to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. The site's analy zer is then adjusted to produce the same measured concentration as the traceable analyzer. Manual sample rs are calibrated by comparing their volumetric

flow rate at one or more flow rates to the flow measur ed by a flow rate transfer standard. Calibrations are performed when an instrument is first installed a nd at semi-annual intervals thereafter. Calibrations are also performed after instrument repairs or when qua lity control charts indicate a drift in response to quality control check standards.

Precision - Precision is a measure of the variability of an instrument. The precision of automated analyzers is evaluated by comparing the sample's kno wn concentration against the instrument's response. The precision of manual samplers is determined by collocated sampling – the simultaneous operation of two identical samplers placed side by side. The differe nce in the results of the two samplers is used to estimate the precision of the entire measurement process (i.e., both field and laboratory precision).

Performance Audits - The bias of automated methods is ass essed through field performance audits. Performance audits are conducted by sampling a blind sample (i.e., a sample whose concentration is known, but not to the operator). Bias is evaluated by comparing the measured response to the known value. Typically, performance audits are performed annually using blind samples of several different

concentrations.

System Audits - System audits indicate how well a sampling site conforms to the standard operating procedures as well as how well the site is located with respect to its mission (e.g., urban or rural sampling, special purpose sampling site, etc.). System audits involve sending a trained observer (QA Auditor) to the site to review the site compliance with standard ope rating procedures. Some areas reviewed include: site location (possible obstruction, presence of nearby po llutant sources), site security, site characteristics (urban versus suburban or rural), s ite maintenance, physical facilities (maintenance, type and operational quality of equipment, buildings, etc.), recordkeep ing, sample handling, storage and transport.



### Laboratory Quality Assurance

Laboratory quality control includes calibration of analyti cal instrumentation, analysis of blank samples to check for contamination, and analysis of duplicate samples to evaluate precision. Quality assurance is accomplished through laboratory performance and system audits.

Calibration - Laboratory analytical instruments are calib rated by comparing the instrument's response when sampling standards of known concentration leve l. The difference between the measured and known concentrations is then used to adjust the instrument to produce the correct response.

Blank Analysis - A blank sample is one that has intentionally not been exposed to the pollutant of interest.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 7 of 25



### Analysis of blank samples reveals possible contamination in the laboratory or during field handling or transportation.

Duplicate Analysis - Duplicate analyses of the same sample ar e performed to monitor the precision of the analytical method.

Performance Audits - Regular performance audits are conduc ted by having the laboratory analyze samples whose physical or chemical properties have b een certified by an external laboratory or standards organization. The difference between the laboratory' s reported value and the certified values is used to evaluate the analytical method's accuracy.

System Audits - System audits indicate how well the laboratory conforms to its standard operating procedures. System audits involve sending a traine d observer (QA Auditor) to the laboratory to review compliance with standard operating conditions. Areas examined include: record keeping, sample custody, equipment maintenance, personnel training a nd qualifications, and a general review of facilities and equipment.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 8 of 25



### GASEOUS CRITERIA POLLUTANTS

The Acme Reporting Organization monitors the ambient concentrations of the gaseous criteria pollutants carbon monoxide (CO), nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 

### ), ozone (O 3 

### ), and sulfur dioxide (SO 2 

### ) to determine attainment of Federal (NAAQS) and State ambient air quality standards. Monitoring of these pollutants is conducted continuously by a netw ork of automated stations.



### PROGRAM UPDATE

At the beginning of 2000, the Acme Reporting Orga nization operated 38 ambient air monitoring stations that measured gaseous criteria pollutants. On March 1, 2000, a station was opened at Townone to monitor CO, NO 2 

### , O 3 

### , and SO 2 

### . The station at Towntwo, which monitored NO 2 

### , O 3 

### , and SO 2 

### , was closed in April

2000



### .

QUALITY OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENT DATA

The Quality Objectives for the Acme Reporting Organi zation's ambient air monitoring of gaseous criteria pollutants are shown in Table 2, below.



### Table 2. Quality Objectives for Gaseous Criteria

Pollutants

Data Quality Indicator Objective

Precision  10%

Bias  15%

Completeness 75%

Promptness 100%

DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Summary

Assessment of the data quality for ARO gaseous criteri a pollutants showed that all instruments met goals for accuracy, precision, completeness, and promptness. System audits showed siting problems at three sites, two of these were corrected promptly, while the th ird site had to be closed due to the construction of a nearby large office building.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 9 of 25



### Promptness and Completeness

At least 75 percent of scheduled monitoring data must be reported for purposes of determining attainment of NAAQS. All data must be submitted within 90 days after the end of the reporting quarter. Table 3 summarizes promptness and completeness for gaseous criteria pollutant data.



### Table 3. Data Quality Assessment for Promptness and Completeness

Pollutant Promptness Completeness

Carbon monoxide 100% 95%

Nitrogen dioxide 100% 97%

Ozone 100% 94%

Sulfur dioxide 100% 96%

Precision

At least once every two weeks, precision is determined by sampling a gas of known concentration. Table 4 summarizes the precision checks fo r gaseous criteria pollutants.



### Table 4. Data Quality Assessment for Precision

Pollutant Precision checks completed Percentage within

limits

Carbon monoxide (CO) 98% 98%

Nitrogen dioxide (NO 2 

### ) 100% 97%

Ozone (O 3 

### ) 97% 98%

Sulfur dioxide (SO 2 

### ) 100% 98%

Bias

The results of annual performance a udits conducted by ARO personnel are shown in Figure 1, below. The center line for each pollutant represen ts the average bias across all analyzers (i.e., with all analyzers weighted equally). The lower and upper probabilit y limits represent the boundaries within which 95 percent of the individual bias values are expected to be distributed.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 10 of 25



### Figure 2 shows the results of external performance audits performed with the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP), administered by the U.S. EPA.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 11 of 25



### System Audits

Systems audits were performed at approximately 25 percent of the sites during the calendar year 2000. These audits evaluated areas such as siting criteria, analyzer operation and maintenance, operator training, recordkeeping, and serve as a general review of s ite operations. No significant problems were observed, except for the following:

 

### The Towntwo site was shadowed by a 20 story office building which was recently completed. This site was closed in July 2000.

 

### The Townfour site had problems with repeat ed vandalism. A new, more secure, fence was installed in April and the sheriff's departme nt increased patrols in the area to prevent

reoccurrences.

 

### The Townsix site had vegetation which had grow n too close to the analyzer inlet probes. The vegetation was removed within one week after the problem was reported. Personnel from the County Parks and Recreation Depa rtment provided assistance removing the vegitation.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 12 of 25



### PARTICULATE CRITERIA POLLUTANTS

The Acme Reporting Organization monitors the ambien t concentrations of three particulate criteria pollutants:

 

### Lead;

 

### PM 10 

### (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 10 micrometers;

and

 

### PM 2.5 

### (particles with an aerodynamic diameter less than or equal to a nominal 2.5 micrometers)

This monitoring is used to determine attainment of Federal (NAAQS) and State ambient air quality standards. Monitoring of these pollutants is conduc ted by sampling for 24 hours every six days by a network of manually operated samplers.



### PROGRAM UPDATE

At the beginning of 2000, the Acme Reporting Orga nization operated 22 ambient air monitoring stations that measured particulate criteria pollutants. On Ma rch 1, 2000, a station w as opened at Townone to

monitor PM 10 

### , PM 2.5 

### , and lead. The station at Towntwo, which monitored PM 10 

### , PM 2.5 

### , and lead, was closed in April 2000.



### QUALITY OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENT DATA

The Quality Objectives for the Acme Reporting Orga nization's ambient air monitoring of particulate criteria pollutants are shown in Table 5, below.



### Table 5. Quality Objectives for Particulate Criteria

Pollutants

Data Quality Indicator Objective

Precision  7%

Bias  10%

Completeness 75%

Promptness 100%

DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Summary

Assessment of the data quality for ARO particulat e criteria pollutants showed that all samplers met goals for accuracy, precision, completeness, a nd promptness. System audits showed siting problems at three sites. Two of these were corr ected promptly, while the third site had to be

closed due to the construction of a large office building, nearby.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 13 of 25



### Promptness and Completeness

At least 75 percent of scheduled monitoring data must be reported for purposes of determining attainment of NAAQS. All data must be submitted within 90 days after the end of the reporting quarter. Table 6 summarizes promptness and completeness da ta for particulate criteria pollutants.



### Table 6. Data Quality Assessment for Promptness and Completeness

Pollutant Promptness Completeness

Lead 100% 93%

PM 10 

### 100% 95%

PM 2.5 

### 100% 92%

Precision

Precision is determined by operating collocated samp lers (i.e., two identical samplers operated in the identical manner). Due to the anticipated poor precision for very low levels of pollutants, only collocated

measurements above a minimum level (0.15  g/m 3 

### for lead, 20  g/m 3 

### for PM 10 

### , and 6  g/m 3 

### for PM 2.5 

### ) are used to evaluate precision. Table 7 summarizes th e results of collocated measurements made during the calendar year 2000.



### Table 7. Data Quality Assessment for Precision

Pollutant Collocated precision measurements completed Collocated

measurements within

limits

Lead 98% 98%

PM 10 

### 100% 97%

PM 2.5 

### 97% 98%QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 14 of 25



### Flow rate precision

A flow rate precision check is conducted at least every two weeks for PM 10 

### and PM 2.5 

### samplers. The flow

should be within  10% of the specified value. Results are shown in Table 8.



### Table 8. Flow Rate Precision Checks for Particulate Criteria Pollutants

Pollutant Precision Checks completed Precision Checks

within limits

Lead 98% 98%

PM 10 

### 100% 97%

PM 2.5 

### 97% 98%

Flow rate bias

Results of the annual flow rate audits conducted by ARO personnel ar e shown in Figure 3, below. The center line for each pollutant repr esents the average bias across all sampler (i.e., with all sampler weighted equally). The lower and upper probabilit y limits represent the boundaries within which 95 percent of the individual bias values are expected to be distributed.

Figure 4 shows the results of external flow rate audits for PM 10 

### and lead samplers performed with the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) which is administered by the U.S. EPA. Currently NPAP

audits of PM 2.5 

### samplers involve sampler collocation rather than flow rate checksQA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 15 of 25



### Measurement Bias

Measurement bias is evaluated for PM 2.5 

### analyzers by collocated sampling using an audit sampler. For internal audits, the collocated measurements pr ovide an estimate of bias resulting from sampler operations. For external NPAP audits, the collocated me asurements provide an es timate of bias resulting from both sampler and laboratory operations. Measurement bias for lead is evaluated by use of standard lead test samples. This provides an estimate of the bias resulting from laboratory operations. The results of the annual performance audits of PM 2.5 

### and lead conducted by ARO personnel are shown in Figure 5,

below.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 16 of 25



### Figure 6 shows the results of external performance audits for PM 10 

### and lead performed with the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) whic h is administered by the U.S. EPA.



### System Audits

Systems audits were performed at approximately one fourth of the sites and at the central analytical laboratory during calendar year 2000. These audits evaluated areas such as siting criteria, equipment operation and maintenance, operator training, recordk eeping, and served as a general review of site operations. No significant problems were observed, except for the following:

 

### The Towntwo site was shadowed by a 20 story office building which was recently completed. This site was closed in July 2000.

 

### The Townfour site had problems with repeated vandalism. A new, more secure, fence was installed in April and the sheriff's departme nt increased patrols in the area to prevent

reoccurrences.

No significant problems were found in the laboratory a udits, except for failure to keep maintenance logs on several newly acquired analytical instruments. New logs were obtained and personnel instructed on their use. A spot check, approximately one month later, indicated the logs were in use.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 17 of 25



### TOTAL AND SPECIATED VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (PAMS)

The Acme Reporting Organization monitors the ambien t concentrations of ozone precursors (volatile organic compounds [VOCs], carbonyls, and nitrogen oxid es that can produce the criteria pollutant ozone). This monitoring is conducted as part of the Phot ochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations (PAMS) network. Nitrogen dioxide (one of the nitrogen oxides measured in PAMS) is also a criteria pollutant and its measurement is described under the gaseous criteri a pollutant section, above. Total nitrogen oxides (NO

x 

### ) measurements are obtained continuously by a ne twork of automated stations. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs), excluding carbonyls, are measured by continuous analyzers (on-line gas chromatographs) at selected sites. The remaining s ites use automated samplers to collect VOC canister samplers which are then transported to the laborator y for analysis. Carbonyls ar e collected in adsorbent sampling tubes, which are transporte d to the laboratory for analysis.



### PROGRAM UPDATE

At the beginning of 2000, the Acme Reporting Orga nization operated 5 ambient air monitoring stations that measured ozone precursors. On March 1, 2000, a station was opened at Townone to monitor VOCs, carbonyls, and NO

x 

### .



### QUALITY OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENT DATA

The Quality Objectives for the Acme Reporting Or ganization's ambient air monitoring of ozone precursors are shown in Table 9, below.



### Table 9. Quality Objectiv es for Ozone Precursors

Data Quality Indicator Objective

Precision (NO

x 

### )  10%

Precision (VOC, Carbonyls)  25%

Bias (NO

x 

### )  15%

Bias (VOC, Carbonyls)  20%

Completeness 75%

Promptness 100%

DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Summary

Assessment of the data quality for ozone precursors showed that all instruments met goals for accuracy, precision, completeness, and promptness. System aud its showed siting problems at two sites, both of these were corrected promptly



### .QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 18 of 25



### Promptness and Completeness

At least 75 percent of scheduled monitoring data must be reported. All data must be submitted within six months after the end of the reporting quarter. Ta ble 10 summarizes promptness and completeness data for ozone precursors



### .

Table 10. Data Quality Assessment for Promptness and Completeness

Ozone precursor Promptness Completeness

Carbonyls 100% 80%

Nitrogen Oxides (NO

x 

### ) 100% 96%

Total VOCs (Total nonmethane hydrocarbons) 100% 87%

Speciated VOCs 100% 83%



### Precision

At least once every two weeks, precision for nitrogen oxides (NO

x 

### ) and automated VOC analysis were determined by sampling a gas of known concentrati on. Precision for manual VOC sampling and carbonyl sampling is obtained by analysis of duplicate sa mples. Duplicates are taken at a frequency of one duplicate for every 10 samples. Table 11 summari zes the precision check results for 2000.

Table 11. Data Quality Assessment for Precision

Ozone precursor Precision checks completed Precision checks

within limits

Carbonyls 91% 90%

Nitrogen Oxides (NO

x 

### ) 98% 97%

Total VOCs (Total nonmethane hydrocarbons) 90% 91%

Speciated VOCs 95% 80%



### Bias

The results of the annual performance a udits conducted by ARO personnel are shown in Figure 7, below. For NO

x 

### and the automated VOC analyzers, the center line represents the average bias across all sites (i.e., with all site s weighted equally). For the carbonyl and manual VOC analyses, the center line represents the av erage of all audit samples for the central analytical laboratory. The lowe r and upper probability limits represent the bounda ries within which 95 percent of the individual bias values are expected to be distributed. Carbonyl and Total VOC measurements represent the average of all audit species.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 19 of 25



### Figure 8 shows the results of the external performan ce audits performed with the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) which is administered by the U.S. EPA



### .

System Audits

Systems audits were performed at two sites du ring calendar year 2000. These audits evaluated areas such as siting criteria, analyzer and sampler operation a nd maintenance, operator training, recordkeeping, and serve as a gene ral review of site operations . In general both sites were performing well except for the following:QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 20 of 25

 

### The Townsix site had vegetation which had grown too close to the analyzer inlet probes. The vegetation was removed within one week, with assistance from the County Parks and Recreation Department.

A systems audit was also performed at the central analytical laboratory. Results were good with only minor items noted for improvements.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 21 of 25



### AIR TOXICS

The Acme Reporting Organization monitors the ambien t concentrations of air toxic compounds. Three different methods are used, depending on the class of air toxic compound. Volatile organic compounds (VOCs), excluding carbonyls, are measured by cont inuous analyzers (on-line gas chromatographs) at selected sites. The remaining sites use automated sa mplers to collect VOC cannister samplers which are then transported to the laboratory for analysis. Ca rbonyls are collected with adsorbent sampling tubes, which are transported to the laboratory for anal ysis. Inorganic compounds are collected on PM 2.5 

### filters (as part of particulate criteria pollutant m onitoring) and analyzed (after weighing for PM 2.5 

### mass) by inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP MS). This monitoring is conducted as part of the Air Toxics monitoring network.



### PROGRAM UPDATE

At the beginning of 2000, the Acme Reporting Organi zation operated five ambien t air monitoring stations that measured ambient air toxics. On March 1, 2000, a station was opened at Townone to monitor air

toxics.



### QUALITY OBJECTIVES FOR MEASUREMENT DATA

The Quality Objectives for the Acme Reporting Orga nization's ambient air monitoring of ambient air toxics are shown in Table 12, below.



### Table 12. Quality Objectives for Air Toxics

Data Quality Indicator Objective

Precision  25%

Bias  25%

Completeness 75%

Promptness 100%

DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT

Summary

Assessment of the data quality for ambient air toxics showed that all instruments met goals for accuracy, precision, completeness, and promptness. System aud its showed siting problems at two sites, both of these were corrected promptly.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 22 of 25



### Promptness and Completeness

At least 75 percent of scheduled monitoring data must be reported. All data must be submitted within six months after the end of the reporting quarter. Table 13 summarizes promptness and completeness for ambient air toxics monitoring data.



### Table 13. Data Quality Assessment for Promptness and Completeness

Pollutant Promptness Completeness

Carbonyls 100% 78%

Volatile organic compounds 100% 84%

Inorganic compounds 100% 87%

Precision

At least once every two weeks, precision for automated VOC analysis is determined by sampling a gas of known concentration. Precision for manual VOC sampli ng, carbonyl sampling, and inorganic sampling is obtained by analysis of duplicate samples. Duplicates are taken at a frequency of one duplicate for every 10 samples. Table 14 summarizes the precision check results for 2000.



### Table 14. Data Quality Assessment for Precision

Pollutant Precision checks completed Precision checks

within limits

Carbonyls 91% 90%

Volatile organic compounds 98% 97%

Inorganic compounds 90% 91%

Bias

The results of the annual performance audits conducted by ARO personnel are shown in Figure 9, below. For the automated VOC analyzers, the center line represen ts the average bias across all sites (i.e., with all sites weighted equally). For the carbonyl, manual VO C, and inorganic analyses, the center line represents the average of all audit samples for the central analytical laboratory. The lower and upper probability limits represent the boundaries within which 95 percent of the individual bias values are expected to be distributed. All measurements represent the average of all audit species.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date: 05/13 Page 23 of 25



### Figure 10 shows the results of th e external performance audits performed with the National Performance Audit Program (NPAP) which is administered by the U.S. EPA.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 0

Date:05/13 Page 24 of 25



### System Audits

Systems audits were performed at two sites du ring the calendar year 2000. These audits evaluated areas such as siting cr iteria, analyzer and sampler ope ration and maintenance, operator training, recordkeeping, and serve as a general review of site operati ons. No significant problems were found, except for the following:

 The Townsix site had vegetation which had grown too close to the analyzer inlet probes. The vegetation was removed within one week, with assistance from the County Parks and Recreation Department.

A systems audit was also performed at the central analytical laboratory. No significant problems

were found.

Example of Corrective Action Form

A corrective action request should be made whenev er anyone in the repor ting organization notes a problem that demands either immediate or l ong-term action to correct a safety defect, a operational problem, or a failure to comply with procedures. A typical corrective action request form, with example information entered, is shown below. A separate form should be used for each problem identified.

The corrective action report form is designed as a closed-loop system. First it identifies the originator, that person who reports and identifi es the problem, states the problem, and may suggest a solution. The form then directs the requ est to a specific person (or persons), i.e., the recipient, who would be best qualified to "fix" the problem. Finally, the form closes the loop by requiring that the recipient stat e how the problem was resolved and the effectiveness of the solution. The form is signed and a copy is returned to the originator and other copies are sent to the supervisor and the appli cable files for the record.QA Handbook Volume II, Appendix I

Revision No. 1

Date:12/08 Page 25 of 25



### ARO - Corrective Action Request

Part A - To be completed by requestor

To: John S. Visor Organization Responsible for Action ARO Ambient Air Monitoring Section

Urgency:

 Emergency (failure to take action immediatel y may result in injury or property damage)

 Immediate (4 hours)  Urgent (24 hours)  Routine (7 days)

 As resources allow  For Information only

From: William Operator phone: (000) 555 - 1000

fax: (000) 555 - 1001 e-mail: billo@localhost Copies to: (Always send a copy to the ARO Site Coordinator at 115 Generic Office Building, Townone XX, 00001)

Problem Identification Site(Location): Townsix site System: sample inlet Date problem identified: Aug. 1, 2000 Nature of problem: Glass sample inlet and dropout trap broken during removal

of weeds from site

Recommended Action: Replace broken parts

Signature: William Operator Date: Aug. 1, 2000

Part B - to be completed by responsible organization
Problem Resolution

Date corrective action taken: August 4, 2000 Summary of Corrective Action: Replacement parts were ordered and received. The new parts were installed within three da ys of the request. Data from the days with a cracked sample inlet will
be flagged as questionable.

Effectiveness of corrective action: Sample inlet restored to new condition.

Signature: John Visor Date: Aug. 4, 2000

Phone: (000) 555 - 2000 Fax: (000) 555 - 2001

e-mail: jsv@localhost
Send copies of the completed form to t he requestor and the ARO Site Coordinator at 11 5 Generic Office Building, Townone XX, 00001) ARO form CAR-1 , May 1, 1999United StatesEnvironmental ProtectionAgencyOffice of Air Quality Planning and StandardsAir Quality Assessment DivisionResearch Triangle Park, NCPublication No. EPA-454/B-13-003May, 2013